Ocimf - Sire 2.0 Webinar: Information About SIRE 2.0 SIRE 2.0 Question Library

5/27/2022
OCIMF – SIRE 2.0
WEBINAR
Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF – SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar
Contents
Sections
Information about SIRE 2.0
SIRE 2.0 Question Library
Conclusion and Discussion
1
5/27/2022
Section 1
OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0
OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar
History and Improvements
Launched in 1993, the OCIMF believes that it is
OCIMF SIRE has governed time to strength SIRE and
Section 1 over 180,000 inspection ensure it remains truly
reports effective
Section 2
Section 3
OCIMF has developed and
enhanced a risk‐based
vessel inspection program
that will supersede the
existing SIRE program
Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar
2
5/27/2022
History and Improvements
The SIRE 2.0 is a complete revision of the inspection process, that includes:
Creating a SIRE 2.0
Section 1 Question Library to allow Risk-ranking all Requiring the Company
Managing question
questions against to upload photos,
an Inspection Compiler to allocation so that all
OCIMF bowtie risk certificates and
construct a unique, ship‐ aspects of a vessel’s
Section 2 analysis to ensure additional info through
specific set of questions operation are
proper emphasis is the pre-inspection
for each inspection called investigated over a
placed on critical questionnaire (PIQ) to
the Compiled Vessel series of inspections
Section 3 barriers and activities facilitate the inspection
Inspection Questionnaire
Aligning the inspection program to TMSA

and leveraging aspects of TMSA to
define expectations within question
guidance
Areas of Focus
Section 1
Accuracy Capability Reliability Adaptability

Section 2
Facilitating an accurate Training and developing Strengthening vessel More rapid response to
description of how key inspectors inspections and human factors, Industry
Section 3
safety and operational reducing the number of changes, regulatory
risks are managed and repeat inspections framework updates and
verified onboard technology advances.
3
5/27/2022
The Pre‐inspection Element requires the Company to provide info by the following means
• Harmonised Vessel Particulars Questionnaire (HVPQ): This is a process for documenting and
communicating permanent and infrequently changing info relating to vessel, its construction, outfitting
and certification. Info is used to auto‐populate some aspects of the inspection report and to manage the
assignment of some questions.
Section 1 • Pre‐Inspection Questionnaire (PIQ): Additional questionnaire to gather dynamic info about vessel
operational history and additional static data, to permit the inspection compiler to assign appropriate
Section 2
questions to each inspection questionnaire. Some info gathered through the PIQ is inserted in the
Inspection Editor and the final report as info for an inspector and report recipient. The PIQ is not
intended to be given to program recipients as a standalone document.
Section 3
• Certificate Repository: Company uploads certificates applicable to inspection process from a defined list.
The certificates are made available to inspector through the inspection software prior to boarding.
• Photograph Repository: Company uploads a defined set of photos of the vessel. These will be used for
condition verification by the inspector during the inspection and inserted in the final report.
• Inspection Declaration: Company will make a declaration that all data, photos and certificates provided
are accurate, complete and in accordance with the instructions provided.
Uniform Vessel Inspection Procedure
Based on info gathered, the Inspection Compiler creates a unique ship‐specific inspection
questionnaire, the CVIQ. The CVIQ and the info provided through the PIQ is downloaded to
Inspection Editor application on the inspector’s tablet.
Section 1
The Inspection Element consists of the following phases:
Section 2 The pre‐boarding phase requires that the inspector:
• Reviews the CVIQ and familiarizes themselves with any supplementary info relating to
Section 3 assigned questions.
• Reviews and completes any specific tasks and questions assigned and tagged as pre‐board
in the Re‐organised Vessel Inspection Questionnaire (ROVIQ).
• Reviews the standard photos supplied by the Company and identifies any areas of concern
or for further investigation.
• Reviews the certification and documentation supplied by the Company.
4
5/27/2022
The Inspection Element consists of the following phases:
The physical inspection requires that the inspector uses the functions of Inspection Editor to:
Section 1
• Commence, pause, resume and complete the inspection process to ensure an accurate
record of inspection activity is maintained.
Section 2
• Record applicable responses to each question as the inspection progresses.
• Take and append photos to support observations, or as directed by question guidance.
Section 3
• Fully document any negative observations prior to closing meeting.
• Fully document any human observations that exceeded normal expectations prior to closing
meeting.
• Update any negative observations to reflect additional info provided during the closing
meeting before the Master acknowledges understanding of negative observations.
The Report Element requires that the inspector:

o Verifies the accuracy of all info entered into the Inspection Editor during the pre‐
Section 1 boarding and physical inspection phases.
o Adds supplementary comments to support positive or neutral observations
Section 2 recorded where considered necessary.
Section 3
5
5/27/2022
 The Inspection Data‐set consists of:

o The observations, including comments / negative comments, to all assigned questions.
o Any photos tagged to be included in the final report.
Section 1
o A data packet which includes:
• The geographic position of tablet at commencement & completion of the inspection.
Section 2
• The step count, against time, of the inspection tablet between the commencement and
completion of the physical inspection.
Section 3
• The date / time of each response to an assigned question before, during or after the
inspection.
• The date / time of adding or removing a negative observation to an assigned question
before, during or after the physical inspection.
o An electronic image of the Observation Declaration presented to, or reviewed with, the
Master during the closing meeting.
Inspections
Physical Inspection
The inspection is considered paused during:
Section 1 Commencement of the inspection is ‐ Meal breaks, Rest breaks
considered the point at which the inspector ‐ Interruptions where Master or accompanying
boards the vessel and presents himself to officer is no longer able to continue
Section 2
visitor control
‐ Inspector activities unrelated to SIRE 2.0
process
Section 3
The inspection is considered as being
The inspection is considered complete
resumed when the inspector, Master or
when the inspector departs the vessel and
accompanying officer can continue with
checks out at visitor point
normal inspection activities
6
5/27/2022
Inspections
Physical Inspection
Opening meeting
The inspector must introduce themselves and any accompanying observers/auditors to Master and others
attending the opening meeting. He must explain the role of an observer or auditor. He must present a valid
SIRE accreditation ID to Master. The Master may take a copy of the ID card for their records. He must explain
Section 1
the scope of the inspection and discuss:
• The order of inspection, recognizing that this may be varied to accommodate changes in circumstances.
Section 2
• The equipment that is likely to be tested and the permissions that will be required.
• Any specific PPE that must be worn by the inspector in accordance with onboard procedures.
Section 3 • The use of the inspection tablet and the applicable Ex certification.
• Any company & port or terminal restrictions affecting the taking of photos during the inspection.
• The safe entry requirements for spaces such as the pumproom, compressor room, IG room.
• The requirement that the inspector must be accompanied at each stage of inspection by an appropriate
officer who is familiar with the equipment & procedures used within an inspection area.
• The availability of a wireless or Bluetooth printer to print the Observation Declaration.
• The expectation that a closing meeting will be held to review any negative and positive observations.
Inspections
Physical Inspection
Closing meeting
The inspector should confirm whether the Master has any supplementary info to provide before finalization of
the Observation Declaration. He must make any amendments to negative observations before printing 2 copies
Section 1
of the Declaration using the vessel's wireless printer. He must review the Declaration with the Master and Senior
Officers and provide explanations for any negative observations. The inspector should** provide 1 copy of the
Section 2 Observation Declaration to Master and retain the 2nd copy for their records.
Section 3 ** Where a Submitting Company has provided the inspector with instructions not to leave a copy of Observation

Declaration on board or vessel does not have a wireless printer, the inspector must review the Declaration with the
Master in sufficient detail so that the Master can make notes for each observation recorded as follows:
• Negative observations:
The question number ‐ the type of observation (human. process. hardware or photo comparison).
The nature of concern(NOC)‐ the subject of concern (SOC) ‐ The essential details of the negative comment
• Human observations that exceeded normal expectations:
The question number ‐ The essential details of the consent
7
5/27/2022
Inspections
SIRE 2.0 / Compiled Vessel Inspection Questionnaire (CVIQ)
A questionnaire is created for each inspection ‐ each question is constructed with following
components:
Section 1 • The Top Level Question, which provides an overview of the purpose &scope of the question.
• The Abbreviated Question Text, which is used in ROVIQ and Chapter mode displays to provide a
Section 2 visual cue to help the inspector quickly interpret which questions are included in the CVIQ.
• The Guidance Section, which includes:
Section 3 - The Objective i.e., a statement identifying the overall purpose of the top level question.
- Best Practice Guidance provided by industry associations and government bodies.
- The most applicable TMSA reference.
- The most applicable ISM reference.
- Regulation governing the top level question.
- Inspection guidance, which summarizes expectations of a vessel’s SMS and carries forward
any previous SIRE guidance that is considered to have created a standard inspection
requirement.
Inspections
• Suggested Inspector Actions to verify that all aspects of top level question and the guidance section have
Section 1
been addressed. The inspector only needs to take actions to the extent that provides confidence that the
required responses can be completed.
Section 2
• Expected Evidence lists the evidence that should be made available to inspector during the inspection. The
Section 3 inspector may request further unlisted evidence to assure that the top level question has been addressed.
The list of expected evidence is not exhaustive. Evidence should be made available according to guidance
supporting a specific question or, where no guidance is provided, for the previous 6 months or since the last
SIRE inspection, whichever is more recent.
• Potential Grounds for a Negative Observation lists circumstances in which the inspector may consider
entering a negative observation. The list is not exhaustive but is representative of the most likely grounds for
a negative observation based on the question guidance.
8
5/27/2022
Inspections
Section 1 Inspections are compiled to avoid the inclusion of questions that will be not applicable or not seen
in their entirety. However, if a question, or an assigned response tool, is not applicable, the Not
Section 2 Answered function is available in the assigned response tools.
Section 3 Non‐exhaustive lists: The guidance provided to support a question will often include
representative lists to indicate what should be considered when requesting or evaluating
information or inspecting physical structure, machinery, or equipment.
Lists should always be considered as representative and not exhaustive. The inspector must use
their professional judgement when assessing an observed condition to decide whether the list
provided would naturally include the observed condition if the list was exhaustive.
Inspections
A Risk Based Approach
A bespoke, risk‐based vessel inspection questionnaire is generated using bow‐tie methodology.
Section 1
Risk is the “combination of the frequency and the severity of the consequence”; it links the
likehood of occurrence and the probability of severity of the consequences.
Section 2
Section 3
A “bow‐tie” is a diagram that visualizes the risk you are dealing with in just one picture.
The diagram is shaped like a bow‐tie, creating a clear differentiation between proactive and
reactive risk management.
The bow‐tie diagram gives an overview of multiple plausible scenarios, in a single picture. It
provides a simple, visual explanation of a risk that would be more difficult to explain otherwise.
9
5/27/2022
Inspections
Bow-Tie Diagram
Section 1
Section 2
Section 3
Inspections
Bow‐Tie Diagram
Hazard An operation, activity or material with potential to cause harm to people, property, the
environment or business. The Bow‐Tie starts with an identified Hazard.
Top Event The loss of control of the hazard. In a Bow‐Tie risk analysis, central event lying between a
Section 1 threat and a consequence corresponding to the moment when there is a loss of control or loss of
containment of the hazard.
Section 2 Threats A possible initiating event that can result in a loss of control or containment of a hazard (i.e.,
the Top event). These are depicted on the left side (the prevention side of Bow‐Tie diagram).
Section 3 Consequences The result from the Top event. There can be more than one consequence for every Top
event. These are depicted on the right side (the mitigation side of Bow‐Tie diagram).
Barriers A barrier that lies between a threat and Top event. On the left side of the diagram represents
prevention barriers, which stop threats from resulting in the Top event.
Prevention Recovery: A barrier lying between the top event and a consequence. A barrier located on
the right hand side of a Bow‐Tie diagram lying between the Top event and a consequence it might only
produce a consequence not necessarily terminate the sequence before the consequence occurs.
10
5/27/2022
Inspections
Bow‐Tie and Barriers
A Barrier could be:
Barriers are pivotal in preventing: a. Hardware: Technical measures
Section 1 a. A direct link from a Threat to Top Event (equipment or structures) Identifying the correct barriers and
testing their effectiveness is a highly
b. Should the identified event occur b. Process: Operational Measures effective method in monitoring the
preventing a direct link from “Top Event” (procedures) potential for a Top Event
Section 2
to the Consequence materialism (Harm) c. People: Personnel who design,
operate, maintain, monitor and manage
Section 3
Bow‐Ties and barriers offer the following advantages:
a. Visualization and communication
b. Risk‐based decision‐making
c. Barrier dependency visualization
d. Enables Risk Assurance
e. Informed decision‐making (change management) and
f. Risk‐based management
Inspections
Bow-Tie Diagram (example)
Section 1
Section 2
Section 3
11
5/27/2022
Human factors in vessel inspections:
• Inspection regime will assess human factors issues during an

Section 1 inspection.
• For each VIQ question with a human factor perspective, inspectors
Section 2
will be prompted to provide objective responses to any observations.
Section 3
• The assessment criteria will provide the opportunity to
positively recognize when important tasks are carried out effectively.
Inspections / Use of tablet
The inspector documents the inspection as it progresses using the tablet loaded with the
Inspection Editor application ‐ this can present the inspection and its progress in several
Section 1
user‐selected display modes:
Section 2
 Chapter Mode: This presents the questions allocated to inspection in chapter, section and
numerical sequence.
 ROVIQ Mode: This groups the questions allocated to CVIQ by physical location or activity and
Section 3
then presents the groups in a standard inspection order. The ordering of ROVIQ locations
follows the traditional inspection sequence but the inspector is free to vary the order in
which they perform the inspection as they see fit.
 Photo Selection Mode: This presents the standard set of operator‐supplied comparison
photos in the numerical order of the standard photo set.
12
5/27/2022
Inspections / Use of tablet
A counter is displayed to indicate the total number, and progress towards completion, of
the questions assigned to a chapter, section, or ROVIQ location depending on the display
in use. A ROVIQ location is removed from the visible list if it is not applicable to vessel, or
Section 1
no questions included in the CVIQ had been assigned to that location.
Section 2 A traffic light system is used to indicate the status of allocated questions in Chapter and
ROVIQ mode as follows:
Section 3  Red: No responses have been entered in the assigned response tools.
 Amber: At least 1 response has been entered into an assigned response tool
 Green: All response tools have had at least 1 response entered.
Observations are any information entered in the assigned response tools and are
considered to include positive, neutral and negative information.
Marine Assurance
QUESTIONS SIRE VIQ7 SIRE 2.0

A CVIQ is compiled according to HVPQ and
What questions are included in The template is fixed to vessel type PIQ. Questions are included according to
the inspection? and variants selected OCIMF risk rating into ‘core’ (related to
significant risk) and ‘rotational’ questions
Section 1 (not related to significant risk).
A simple Yes/No response, with Multiple categories of response for
How are the questions structured? supplementary options for N/A or Not Hardware, Process, Human Factors and
Section 2
Seen photo validation.
How does the inspector answer Binary: positive or negative A grated scale of responses with various
Section 3 the questions? grades of positive options.
What are the contents of a One or more negative observations
negative observation? Free text observation contents identifying a codified subject and nature of
concern supplement with free text.
What forms of media can be Not supported Photos can be taken to support question
added by the inspector? responses and negative observations.
What data is provided by the HVPQ, crew matrix, PSC reports and A pre‐inspection questionnaire and vessel
Company to support the incident data standard photography, plus HPVQ, crew
inspection? matrix, PSC reports and incident data.
13
5/27/2022
OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0
List of Sections
1. Vessel, Operator and Inspection Particulars
2. Certification and Documentation
3. Crew Management
Section 1
4. Navigation and Communications
5. Safety Management
Section 2
6. Pollution Prevention
Section 3 7. Maritime Security
8. Cargo and Ballast Systems
9. Mooring and Anchoring
10. Machinery Spaces
11. General Appearances and Condition – Photograph Comparison
12. Ice Operations
14
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Vessel, Operator and Inspection Particulars
1 Vessel, Operator and Inspection Particulars
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
1.1.1. Name of the vessel
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
• HVPQ (Name of ship)
Chapter 5 1.1.2. Vessel IMO number

Chapter 6
• HVPQ (LR/IMO number)
Chapter 7
1.1.3. Date the inspection was completed
Chapter 8
Chapter 9 • Inspection Record > Inspection Completed Date

Chapter 10 1.1.4. Was a full inspection of the vessel completed
Chapter 11
• Inspection Record > Inspection Completed
Chapter 12
15
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
1.1.5. Port of Inspection
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
• Inspection Record > Port of Inspection
Chapter 5 1.1.6. Flag

Chapter 6
• HVPQ (Flag)
Chapter 7
1.1.7. Deadweight
Chapter 8
Chapter 9 • HVPQ (Summer Deadweight)

Chapter 10 1.1.8. Date the vessel was delivered
Chapter 11
• HVPQ (Delivery date as recorded in Form A or Form B Q1.8.3 of the IOPPC)
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
1.1.9. Name of the OCIMF inspecting company
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
• SIRE 2.0 Inspection Booking
Chapter 5 1.1.10. Date and time the inspector boarded the vessel
Chapter 6
• Inspection Record > Inspection Commenced Date/Time
Chapter 7
1.1.11. Date and time the inspector departed the vessel
Chapter 8
Chapter 9 • Inspection Record > Inspection Completed Date/Time

Chapter 10 1.1.12. Time taken for the inspection
Chapter 11
• Inspection Record > Inspection Duration in Hours
Chapter 12
16
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
1.1.13. Name of the inspector
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
• SIRE 2.0 Inspection Booking
Chapter 5 1.1.14. Date the HVPQ was last updated

Chapter 6
• HVPQ (Date last published)
Chapter 7
1.1.15. Vessel’s operation at the time of the inspection
Chapter 8
Chapter 9 • Inspection Record > Operation

Chapter 10 1.1.16. Products being handled
Chapter 11
• Inspection Record > Product
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
1.1.17. Vessel type
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
• Pre-Inspection Questionnaire > Type of Vessel
Chapter 5 1.1.18. Hull Type

Chapter 6
• HVPQ (Type of Hull)
Chapter 7
1.1.19. Name of the vessel’s operator
Chapter 8
Chapter 9 • SIRE 2.0 Inspection Booking

Chapter 10 1.1.20. Date the current operator assumed responsibility for the vessel
Chapter 11
• HVPQ (Date current operator assumed technical control of the ship)
Chapter 12
17
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 1.1.21. Date of the last PSC inspection

Chapter 3 • PIQ (Date of last PSC inspection)
Chapter 4 1.1.22. Name of the Classification society
Chapter 5 • HVPQ (Class Society)
Chapter 6 1.1.23. Date of departure from the last dry dock
Chapter 7 • HVPQ (Date of last dry dock)
Chapter 8 1.1.24. With the vessel’s designation as recorded on IOPP certificate
Chapter 9 • HVPQ (What is the type of ship as described in Form A or Form B Q1.11 of the IOPPC?)
Chapter 10 1.1.25. Name of the vessel’s P&I club
Chapter 11 • HVPQ (Name of P & I Club)
Chapter 12
Chapter 2
Certification and Documentation
18
5/27/2022
2.1 Certification
Chapter 1
2.1.1. Were the Master and Senior officers familiar with Company procedure for maintaining
Chapter 2 the vessel’s statutory certification up to date?
Chapter 3 Were all certificates and documents onboard up to date?
Was the vessel free of Conditions of Class or significant memoranda?
Chapter 4
Chapter 5 Inspection Guidance

Chapter 6
• The Company must have a procedure for the vessel to monitor the validity of all certificates required,
Chapter 7 specifically identifying those required to be carried in accordance with the “List of Certificates and
Documents Required to be Carried On Board Ships, 2017”.
Chapter 8
• Where the vessel carried electronic certificates, these must be controlled through a process
Chapter 9 described in the SMS.
Chapter 10
• The Company must have provided data relating to vessel’s certification and survey status through the
Chapter 11 HVPQ and PIQ in addition to uploading a recent Class status report to the document repository.
Where the Class offers Class Survey Status Reports (CSSR), then this version must be provided.
Chapter 12
• The Company must declare in PIQ the date of, and reason for, the last visit by a Class surveyor.
2.1 Certification
Chapter 1
2.1.1. Were the Master and Senior officers familiar with Company procedure for maintaining
Chapter 2
the vessel’s statutory certification up to date?
Chapter 3 Were all certificates and documents onboard up to date?
Chapter 4 Was the vessel free of Conditions of Class or significant memoranda?
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
Prior to boarding:
Chapter 6
 Review the CSSR and identify CoC or significant memoranda - copy the details into the
Chapter 7 observation tool.
 Verify that the dates & data declared within HVPQ were accurate as compared to CSSR.
Chapter 8
During the inspection:
Chapter 9
 Review the SMS procedure for managing the statutory certification & supporting documents.
Chapter 10  Verify that any defect identified through a CoC, memoranda or issue of a short-term certificate
had been entered in the defect reporting system for follow up and later closeout.
Chapter 11
 Verify that the onboard system for tracking of statutory and class certificates was being
Chapter 12 maintained up to date by random review of 5 certificates.
 Verify that the outcome from any recent Class surveys had been registered in the CSSR.
19
5/27/2022
2.2 Management Oversight
Chapter 1
2.2.1. Had the vessel been attended by a S/T at approximately 6-monthly intervals?
Chapter 2
Were reports available to demonstrate that a systematic vessel inspection had been completed
Chapter 3 during each attendance declared through the PIQ?
Chapter 5 The Company must have a program which requires a vessel to be inspected at least twice a
year by a combination of Marine and Technical S/T visits.
Chapter 6
Chapter 7  Inspections at 6-month intervals (+/-1 month) - intervals between inspections < 7 months.
Chapter 8  Interval between successive inspections by a Marine or a Technical S/T < 14 months.
Chapter 9  The inspection report should record the findings in a defined format, in addition to providing
an overview of onboard management.
Chapter 10
 The defects identified must be transferred to defect reporting system for follow up & closure.
Chapter 11
 Any procedural weaknesses must be followed up through the non-conformity process.
Chapter 12
 A copy of the full inspection report for each S/T visit must be maintained on board.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 4 Remote inspections
Chapter 5 Where a Company had a remote inspection program, the inspector shall accept these provided:
Chapter 6  There is a SMS procedure for conducting remote vessel inspections which defines:
Chapter 7 o The circumstances in which a remote inspection may be a substitute of physical

inspection
Chapter 8
o The condition verification processes for all areas of the ship under inspection.
Chapter 9 o The required content of the final inspection report.
Chapter 10  Completed inspection reports are available for each remote S/T inspection.
The Company must have declared the attendance dates for all qualifying inspections by Marine and
Chapter 11
Technical S/Ts during the previous 18 months through the PIQ.
Chapter 12
Additional visits by senior management, Electrical S/Ts or those by Marine and Technical S/Ts to deal
with a specific issue which did not result in a full inspection report are not considered.
20
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5 Review the vessel inspection reports of Marine and Technical S/Ts and verify that:
Chapter 6
Chapter 7  Reports are available for each inspection completed during the previous 18 months.
Chapter 8
 Each report recorded the condition of all operational and accessible areas of the
vessel and its equipment.
Chapter 9
 Where areas for improvement or defects were identified, the defect or non-
Chapter 10 conformity reporting system was utilized to track corrective actions through to
Chapter 11
closure.
Chapter 12
 Any remote inspections had been performed as required by the SMS procedure.
Chapter 1
2.2.2. Were recent ISM internal audit reports available, had corrective action been taken on
Chapter 2
board to close-out any NCR? Had this corrective action been verified by shore management?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
Chapter 5 The Company must have a procedure for scheduling and performing internal ISM
audits at intervals not exceeding 12 months which should include:
Chapter 6
Chapter 7  Standard formats and/or checklists for the performance of audits.

Chapter 8  A system for recording and tracking any non-conformities to closure.
Chapter 9
This system (paper based or electronic) should:
Chapter 10  Be available to all those on board responsible for the areas audited.
Chapter 11  Include a time limit for corrective action.
 Inform the Company when corrective action has been completed.
Chapter 12
 Record the Company’s verification of corrective action and final close-out.
21
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
2.2.2. Were recent ISM internal audit reports available, had corrective action been taken on
Chapter 2
board to close-out any NCR? Had this corrective action been verified by shore management?
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Review, the SMS procedure for scheduling and performing internal ISM
Chapter 5
audits, including audit formats and/or checklists.
Chapter 6
 Review the latest 2 internal Company ISM audit reports.
Chapter 7
 Review the system for recording and tracking non-conformities to closure.
Chapter 8
 Interview the Master or a senior officer to confirm familiarity with the system for
Chapter 9 recording and tracking ISM audit non-conformities to closure.
Chapter 10  In case vessel had recently been taken over by the Company and had not yet
Chapter 11 undertaken an internal audit, interview the Master or a Senior Officer to
confirm their familiarity with preparations necessary for the 1st internal audit.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
2.2.3. Was the Master fully conversant with the SMS and had Master’s Reviews of the SMS
Chapter 2 taken place in accordance with the ISM Code and SMS?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 Master must be familiar with the SMS and proficient in accessing the info it contains. He
Chapter 5 is not be expected to have detailed knowledge of every procedure in SMS.
Chapter 6 The SMS procedure for the periodic review of SMS by the Master, includes:
 The format / agenda for the review.
Chapter 7
 The frequency of the review (at least annual).
Chapter 8  A specified time frame for Company responses to the review.
Chapter 9 The review does not need to be done all at once, provided the complete SMS is
reviewed within 12 months.
Chapter 10
The review may include input from shipboard management team & Safety Committee.
Chapter 11
The review should identify deficiencies in SMS and suitable corrective action.
Chapter 12
It should contain suggestions for improvement in the effectiveness of SMS and not be a
tick box.
22
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
2.2.3. Was the Master fully conversant with the SMS and had Master’s Reviews of the SMS
Chapter 2 taken place in accordance with the ISM Code and SMS?
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5 Inspector Actions

Chapter 6  Interview the Master to verify overall knowledge of & proficiency in using, the SMS.
Chapter 7  Review the last 2 Master’s Reviews of the SMS.
Chapter 8
 Review the Company responses to the last 2 Master’s Reviews.
Chapter 9
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
2.3 Structural Assessment
Chapter 1
2.3.1. Were the Master and C/E familiar with the SMS procedure to maintain the Enhanced
Chapter 2 Survey File in accordance with Class rules: Was the vessel free of any visible or documentary
Chapter 3 evidence of concerns with the structural condition of hull or cargo and ballast tank coatings?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
The Company must have a procedure to ensure that the Enhanced Survey File is up to date as
Chapter 5
required by the Class.
Chapter 6 The survey report records, which may be in electronic format, should be onboard for the lifetime of
Chapter 7
ship from at least 1 year prior to 1st special survey onwards and include Reports of structural
surveys - Condition evaluation reports - Thickness measurement reports.
Chapter 8
Supporting documents should also include:
Chapter 9  Survey program - Main structural plans for cargo holds and ballast tanks - Previous repair history.
Chapter 10  Inspections by ship’s personnel with reference to Structural deterioration in general - Leakages in
BHDs and piping - Condition of coating or corrosion prevention system, if any.
Chapter 11
 Any other info that would help identify critical structure areas and/or suspect areas requiring
Chapter 12 inspection.
 The Coating Technical File (All oil tankers built after 1 July 1998).
23
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
2.3.1. Were the Master and C/E familiar with the SMS procedure to maintain the Enhanced
Chapter 2
Survey File in accordance with Class rules: Was the vessel free of any visible or documentary
Chapter 3 evidence of concerns with the structural condition of hull or cargo and ballast tank coatings?
Chapter 5  Review the Enhanced Survey File - verify that all sections had been maintained up to date
with the detail required by the vessel’s Class.
Chapter 6
 Review the previous repair history - identify any structural repairs completed during the
Chapter 7 preceding 12 months for comparison with the vessel’s defect reporting system.
Chapter 8  Review the Condition Evaluation Report - note any spaces where the coating condition of
cargo or ballast tanks was reported as fair or poor, substantially corroded tanks/areas or
Chapter 9
areas with deep pitting recorded in the extract of thickness measurements.
Chapter 10  Review the Coating technical file - note any spaces where coating repairs had been
recorded.
Chapter 11
 During the inspection note any concerns with hull structural integrity such as cracking,
Chapter 12 denting, distortion, significant* corrosion or thinning of structural members. (Significant* in
this context is wastage which has visibly reduced the profile of a structural member.)
Chapter 1
2.3.2. Were the Master and C/E familiar with the company procedure to maintain the Class
Chapter 2
Survey File, and was the vessel free of any visible or documentary evidence of concerns with
Chapter 3 the structural condition of the hull or hold space and ballast tank coatings?
Chapter 5
The Company must have a procedure to ensure the vessel’s Survey File is maintained complete and up to date.
The file must include: Class status reports - Survey reports - Repair history - Coating technical file, where
Chapter 6 required to be carried.
Inspector Actions
Chapter 7
 Review the Survey File and verify it is complete and up to date.
Chapter 8
 Review the previous repair history and identify any structural repairs completed during the preceding 12
Chapter 9
months for comparison with the vessel’s defect reporting system.
Chapter 10  Review the Coating Technical File, and note any spaces where coating repairs have been recorded.
Chapter 11  During the inspection note any concerns with hull structural integrity such as cracking, denting, distortion,
Chapter 12 significant* corrosion or thinning of structural members. (*‘Significant’ is wastage which has visibly reduced the
profile of a structural member.)
24
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
2.3.3. Were the Master and senior officers familiar with the company cargo, ballast & void
Chapter 2
space inspection and reporting procedure and, were records available to demonstrate that all
Chapter 3 inspections had been accomplished within the required time frame with reports completed in
accordance with company instructions?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
The Company must have procedures for cargo, ballast and void space inspection which:
Chapter 6  Define the frequency of inspections required for each type of space which includes, but not limited to Cargo /
Chapter 7 Ballast tanks / Hold spaces / Void spaces, pipe trunks and cofferdams.
 Define the actions to be taken when an inspection cannot be completed within the required timeframe.
Chapter 8
 Provide guidance on assessing and reporting of tank coating condition.
Chapter 9  Require that the condition of each space is reported in a standard format with details of:
Chapter 10 o Structural deterioration and failure, the extent of any corrosion, pitting, wastage and any deterioration of
the coating.
Chapter 11 o Any leakages in bulkheads or pipework - The condition of cargo handling and monitoring equipment.
Chapter 12 o The extent of sediment build-up.
 Require that defects relating to structure, coating or fittings are entered into the defect reporting
system for follow up.
Chapter 1
2.3.3. Were the Master and senior officers familiar with the company cargo, ballast & void
Chapter 2
space inspection and reporting procedure and, were records available to demonstrate that all
Chapter 3 inspections had been accomplished within the required time frame with reports completed in
accordance with company instructions?
Chapter 4
Chapter 6
Cargo tanks on oil & chemical tankers must be inspected by crew at intervals of 2.5 years
+/- 6 months. These inspections should align with the renewal and intermediate survey
Chapter 7 regimes.
Chapter 8
• Hold spaces on gas carriers must be inspected annually.
Chapter 9
• Ballast tanks, void spaces, pipe trunks and cofferdams must be inspected annually.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11 The Company must declare the required inspection frequency and date ranges for the
previous cycle of inspections for cargo, ballast and void spaces through the PIQ.
Chapter 12
25
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
2.3.4. Were the Master and deck officers familiar with the company procedures for detecting
Chapter 2
leakage of liquids between cargo, bunker, ballast, void and cofferdam spaces which included
Chapter 3 inspecting the surface of ballast water prior to discharge, and were records available to show
that the necessary checks had been performed?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
Chapter 6 The Company must have procedures for:

 Inspecting the surface of ballast water in tanks adjacent to cargo or bunker tanks, or where oil
Chapter 7
pipes, including hydraulic lines, pass through the tank, prior to discharge overboard.
Chapter 8  Sounding empty tanks and spaces periodically to detect the migration of liquids from adjacent
or remote spaces through either structural failure or pipeline leakages.
Chapter 9
 Monitoring the level in full, or partially full, tanks periodically to detect the migration of liquids
Chapter 10 between adjacent or interconnected spaces.
 Testing ballast lines where they pass through cargo or fuel tanks & record the results.
Chapter 11
 Actions to take when ballast water is contaminated.
Chapter 12  Actions when there is evidence of migration of liquid between cargo, ballast, bunker, void or
cofferdam spaces.
Chapter 1
2.3.4. Were the Master and deck officers familiar with the company procedures for detecting
Chapter 2
leakage of liquids between cargo, bunker, ballast, void and cofferdam spaces which included
Chapter 3 inspecting the surface of ballast water prior to discharge, and were records available to show
that the necessary checks had been performed?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
 Review the procedures for checking for leakage of cargo, bunker oil, hydraulic oil and ballast into
Chapter 6 empty spaces and, for inspecting the surface of segregated ballast water prior to discharge.
Chapter 7
 Review the sounding records for empty spaces and verify that soundings had been taken in
accordance with company procedure.
Chapter 8  Review the records for ballast water discharge and verify that the surface of ballast in each tank
Chapter 9 adjacent to a cargo or bunker tank or, with cargo, bunker or hydraulic lines passing through it, had
been inspected for contamination prior to discharge.
Chapter 10
 Review records of ballast line tests where they pass through cargo or fuel tanks, if applicable.
Chapter 11  Inspect the ballast tank sighting arrangements - verify that each tank adjoining a cargo or bunker
tank, or with cargo, bunker or hydraulic lines passing through it, could be readily inspected without
Chapter 12
the need to remove numerous bolts to remove the inspection hatch or, to make an enclosed space
entry.
26
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
2.3.5. Had the vessel been enrolled in a Class Society Condition Assessment Program (CAP)?
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 • Enrolment in a CAP is voluntary.
• A CAP rating has no validity date.
Chapter 5
• Each charterer defines the time validity of a CAP certificate.
Chapter 6
CAP differs depending on the Class Society, but common modules are:
Chapter 7
 Hull structure.
Chapter 8  Propulsion and auxiliary systems.
 Cargo equipment and systems.
Chapter 9
 Cargo containment systems (for LPG and LNG Carriers).
Chapter 10  Machinery and cargo systems combined.
 Bridge, navigation and radio equipment.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
2.3.5. Had the vessel been enrolled in a Class Society Condition Assessment Program (CAP)?
Chapter 2
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 3
This question is only for vessels that have passed their 15 anniversary from the initial delivery date
Chapter 4 and, where Company had declared that vessel had been awarded a CAP rating in at least 1 module.
Chapter 5
Where a vessel had been subject to CAP, the Company must declare the following through the PIQ:
Chapter 6  The date range of the survey upon which the CAP certificate is based.
 The CAP rating achieved for each module.
Chapter 7
The Company must upload the CAP certificate to the document store.
Chapter 8
Inspector Actions
Chapter 9
Pre-Inspection: Review the CAP certificate uploaded and verify that the info contained matched the
Chapter 10 date & rating for each module as declared by the Company.
Chapter 11
On-board: Where the Company had not uploaded the CAP certificate, review the CAP certificate
Chapter 12 onboard and verify that the info contained within the PIQ was accurate.
27
5/27/2022
2.4 Defect Management
Chapter 1 2.4.1. Were the Senior Officers familiar with the SMS procedure for reporting defects to
Chapter 2 structure, machinery and equipment to shore management through the Company defect
reporting system? Evidence to demonstrate that all defects had been reported accordingly?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company must have a defect reporting system, which may be incorporated in the PMS, to record all
Chapter 5 defects as defined in the defect reporting procedure and define:
• What constitutes a defect that must be reported.
Chapter 6
• The process for entering defects – the timeline for entering a defect into the defect reporting system
Chapter 7 and transmitting the report to Company.
Chapter 8 • The process for Company to acknowledge a defect and assign a timeline for corrective action to be
taken.
Chapter 9
• The process for establishing mitigating actions where the defect adversely affects the safe operation of
Chapter 10 vessel.
Chapter 11
• The requirement to submit an incident report where a defect resulted in, or was the cause of, an
incident as defined in the SMS.
Chapter 12
The vessel must have a printed list of all open defect reports at the time of the inspection. The list must
identify any defects that have resulted in a notification to Class and/or Flag.
Chapter 1
2.4.1. Were the Senior Officers familiar with the SMS procedure for reporting defects to
Chapter 2
structure, machinery and equipment to shore management through the Company defect
Chapter 3 reporting system? Evidence to demonstrate that all defects had been reported accordingly?
Chapter 5
Chapter 6  Review the procedure for the management & operation of defect report system.
 Review the entries in the defect reporting system and verify that they had been entered
Chapter 7
in accordance with company expectations, communicated to shore management within
Chapter 8 the time frame specified and had been acknowledged.
Chapter 9  Note any defect that was not subject to a defect report for inclusion as an observation.
Chapter 10  Review a sample defect report and confirm that a timeline for corrective action had
been assigned and any mitigating actions had been conducted as directed by the
Chapter 11
Company.
Chapter 12
28
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
2.4.2. Where defects existed to structure, machinery or equipment, had the Company notified Class, Flag
Chapter 2 and/or the authorities in the port of arrival, as appropriate to circumstances, and had short term
Chapter 3 certificates, waivers, exemptions and/or permissions to proceed the voyage been issued where necessary?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company must have a procedure for evaluating defects to determine whether,
Chapter 5
when & how the Class, Flag and/or other external stakeholders must be informed.
Chapter 6 The procedure should define:
Chapter 7  Which defects should be reported to Class, Flag and/or other stakeholders.
Chapter 8  When defects are required to be reported and by whom.
Chapter 9
 Where short term certificates and/or flag waivers have been issued, the external
stakeholders that may need to be notified and by whom.
Chapter 10
 The records to demonstrate that the appropriate notifications had been made.
Chapter 11 The vessel must have a printed list of all open defect reports at the time of inspection for
Chapter 12 the inspector’s use. The list must identify any defects that have resulted in a notification to
Class and/or Flag.
Chapter 1
2.4.2. Where defects existed to structure, machinery or equipment, had the Company notified Class, Flag
Chapter 2 and/or the authorities in the port of arrival, as appropriate to circumstances, and had short term
Chapter 3 certificates, waivers, exemptions and/or permissions to proceed the voyage been issued where necessary?
Chapter 5  Review the Class Status report - identify any CoC, memoranda or short-term certificates
that may indicate that there was a defect in vessel’s structure, machinery or equipment.
Chapter 6
 Review the defect reporting system - identify any defects that would be reportable to Class
Chapter 7 or Flag - verify that they were either reported in the Class status report or communications
Chapter 8
were available to demonstrate that Class and/or Flag had been advised and that no further
action was required.
Chapter 9
 Where the vessel had a short-term certificate or Flag waiver verify that the vessel had
Chapter 10 notified external stakeholders of the deficiency, where required to do so, through the pre-
arrival processes applicable to the port of arrival or transit of controlled navigational areas.
Chapter 11
 Where the Class or Flag had required that specific mitigating measures were taken as a
Chapter 12 condition of the issuing a short-term certificate or flag waiver, verify that vessel had complied
with the required measures.
29
5/27/2022
2.5 Management of Change
Chapter 1
2.5.1. Had the Management of Change procedure been effectively implemented for changes affecting
Chapter 2 structure, machinery & equipment governed by Class rules or statutory survey?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 3
The Management of Change (MOC) procedure must require that changes to vessel structure,
Chapter 4 machinery and equipment follow a defined process and define:
Chapter 5  What changes are subject to MOC process - What changes can be excluded.
Chapter 6  The process of documenting a request for change, the format of the request and the means
of communicating the request to shore management.
Chapter 7
 The approval process before a change can be carried out.
Chapter 8  The notification process for communicating approved changes to stakeholders.
Chapter 9  The supplementary documentation required to support a change request.
Chapter 10
 The process to identify & document drawings, manuals, procedures, checklists, etc. which will be
affected by a change along with confirmation that updates to such documents have been
Chapter 11 undertaken on completion of the change.
Chapter 12  How all changes subject to MOC will be indexed onboard through a database, register of changes or
traditional filing system.
Chapter 1
2.5.1. Had the Management of Change procedure been effectively implemented for changes
Chapter 2
affecting structure, machinery & equipment governed by Class rules or statutory survey?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
• The Company must have declared any changes to structure, machinery or equipment
Chapter 5
conducted within the previous 12 months through the PIQ.
Chapter 6 • Changes of existing machinery / equipment for new ones with similar dimensions and
Chapter 7 characteristics, which do not entail changes in vessel’s systems performance or
operations or modifications of existing structures, may not be subject to MOC process.
Chapter 8
Chapter 9 The scope of this question is limited to vessel structure, machinery and equipment
Chapter 10
regulated under any aspect of the applicable Class rules or statutory survey of a vessel.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
30
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
2.5.1. Had the Management of Change procedure been effectively implemented for changes
Chapter 2
affecting structure, machinery & equipment governed by Class rules or statutory survey?
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
 Review the MOC procedure.
 Review the PIQ and identify whether the Company had declared that any applicable
Chapter 6
changes have been carried out onboard within the previous 12 months.
Chapter 7
 Review the vessel’s MOC register or database index.
Chapter 8  Where changes falling within the scope of the MOC procedure and this question had
Chapter 9 taken place, review the provided MoC request, RA and associated documentation.
Chapter 10  During the inspection & review of documentation for other questions note any
apparent recent changes which may be within scope of this question but had not
Chapter 11
been declared.
Chapter 12
2.6 Statutory Management Plans
Chapter 1
2.6.1. Were the Master, Deck officers and Engineer officers familiar with the Ballast Water
Chapter 2 Management Plan (BWMP) and were records available to demonstrate that ballast handling had
Chapter 3 been conducted in accordance with the plan?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
The vessel must have an approved BWMP and an Int. Ballast Water Management Cert.
Chapter 6
The Certificate will identify the principal ballast water management method to be used.
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
The Company must have procedures which define:
 When, where and how ballast is permitted to be loaded, discharged and exchanged
Chapter 9
and the processes that the vessel is required to follow.
Chapter 10  How ballast operations are to be recorded and by whom.
Chapter 11
 The actions the vessel must take if cannot comply with the approved BWMP.
 The actions the vessel must take if the ballast treatment plant is defective.
Chapter 12
31
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
2.6.1. Were the Master, Deck officers and Engineer officers familiar with the BWMP and were
Chapter 2 records available to demonstrate that ballast handling had been conducted in accordance with
Chapter 3 the plan?
Chapter 5  Review the ballast water record book (electronic or integrated into another record
book or system) - verify that recent ballast operations were conducted &
Chapter 6
documented in accordance with the BWMP & Ballast Water Management Certificate.
Chapter 7  Where ballast exchange had been undertaken, either as the principal ballast water
Chapter 8 management method or in addition to use of a ballast water treatment plant, verify
that the exchange was planned and conducted to minimize longitudinal and torsional
Chapter 9
stresses and other considerations identified in the IMO Guidelines for Ballast Water
Chapter 10 Exchange.
 Where ballast water treatment or exchange had not been completed in accordance
Chapter 11
with the BWMP due to damage or defect to Ballast treatment plant, review any
Chapter 12 communications with Flag and Port Authorities and verify that any conditions placed
on the vessel in respect of ballast management had been complied with and
documented.
Chapter 1
2.6.2. Were the Master and Officers familiar with the VOC Management Plan? Had the
Chapter 2 procedures for minimising VOC emissions in the Plan been implemented and documented as
Chapter 3 required?
There must be a ship specific VOC Management Plan to be implemented when carrying crude oil,
Chapter 5
with:
Chapter 6
 Procedures for minimising VOC emissions during loading, carriage, discharge, including COW.
Chapter 7  The identity of the person responsible for implementing the Plan.
Chapter 8  The records required to demonstrate compliance with the Plan.
 A target operating pressure for the cargo tanks during loading and carriage of crude oil cargoes.
Chapter 9
 Training programs for crew involved in cargo operations.
Chapter 10 The cargo & ballast transfer plan and COW plan must include the requirements of VOC
Management Plan.
Chapter 11
The target operating pressure for cargo tanks must be indicated in the CCR.
Chapter 12
This question is only for oil tankers where the Company had declared that the vessel was
provided with a VOC Management Plan through the PIQ.
32
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
2.6.2. Were the Master and Officers familiar with the VOC Management Plan? Had the
Chapter 2 procedures for minimising VOC emissions in the Plan been implemented and documented as
Chapter 3 required?
Chapter 5
 Review the records of cargo operations and tank pressures at different stages of the voyage
Chapter 6 required by the VOC Management Plan.
Chapter 7  Review the records required by the VOC Management Plan - verify that they were being maintained
for all stages of voyage and cargo handling operations.
Chapter 8
 Review the cargo plan - verify that it considered any requirements of VOC management plan.
Chapter 9  Review the VOC Management Plan training records.
Chapter 10  Interview the person identified as responsible for implementing the Plan to verify familiarity with the
contents and record keeping requirements.
Chapter 11
 Interview the accompanying Officer to verify awareness of the VOC Management Plan and any
Chapter 12 actions required to be completed during the ongoing cargo operation to comply with the Plan.
Chapter 1
2.6.3. Were the Master and Senior Officers familiar with the contents and requirements of
Chapter 2 the SEEMP and had these been fully implemented?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company must have a ship-specific SEEMP (may form part of SMS). Part I must contain
Chapter 5 ship-specific measures to improve ship's energy efficiency, and details for their implementation,
Chapter 6
e.g. improved voyage planning - Weather routeing - Just in time arrival - Speed optimization -
Optimum trim - Optimum use of rudder & heading control systems (autopilots) - Hull
Chapter 7 maintenance.
Chapter 8 Part II should set out the method of collecting, aggregating and reporting the ship’s annual fuel
consumptions to Flag, including the:
Chapter 9
 List of the engines and other fuel consumers and the fuel types used.
Chapter 10
 Method to measure fuel consumption - distance travelled - hours underway.
Chapter 11  Processes to be used to report the data to the flag administration.
Chapter 12 The vessel must have a Statement of Compliance – FO Consumption Reporting, which will
confirm that the requirements of SEEMP Part II had been met during the previous year.
33
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
2.6.3. Were the Master and Senior Officers familiar with the contents and requirements of
Chapter 2 the SEEMP and had these been fully implemented?
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
Chapter 5  Review the evidence that the package of measures in SEEMP Part I to
Chapter 6 improve energy efficiency had been implemented and/or monitored.
Chapter 7  Review, where applicable, records of the collection, aggregation, and
Chapter 8
reporting of ship data with regard to annual fuel oil consumptions.
Chapter 9
 Interview the Master and/or C/E to verify familiarity with the contents
Chapter 10
and requirements of the SEEMP.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
2.7 Safety Management System
Chapter 1
2.7.1. Was the relevant content of the SMS easily accessible to all personnel onboard in a
Chapter 2 working language(s) understood by them?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
Chapter 5 The content of SMS manuals:

 May be provided in electronic format or in hard copy.
Chapter 6
 Must be available to all personnel on board, in whatever form.
Chapter 7  Must be in a working language(s) understood by all the crew.
Chapter 8
 Should be in a ‘user friendly’ format and easily accessible.
 Should be relevant to the ship.
Chapter 9
Chapter 10 If the manuals are only available in electronic format, all personnel must have ready
access to a work-station and adequate training in accessing the SMS in that manner.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
34
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 4
The SMS navigation procedures must be available on the Bridge. If provided there in
Chapter 5
electronic format only, a back-up independent means of power supply to the work-station
Chapter 6 must be provided.
Chapter 7
Procedures must be in place:
Chapter 8  For control of all documentation, including the SMS. All copies on board must be up to
Chapter 9 date, and obsolete documentation should be removed from all locations.
 To ensure that changes to SMS are promptly brought to attention of appropriate
Chapter 10
onboard personnel and understood.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
Chapter 5  Review the SMS manuals, whether in electronic format or in hard copy.
Chapter 6  Review evidence that changes to SMS are promptly brought to attention of
appropriate onboard personnel & understood (which may be documentary or
Chapter 7
electronic).
Chapter 8
 Verify there is easy access to the Navigation procedures on the bridge.
Chapter 9  During the inspection, note versions of procedures and checklists etc. in use for
Chapter 10 consistency.
Chapter 11
 Interview a rating to verify that they have easy access to relevant content of
SMS manuals and are familiar with the means of accessing the SMS.
Chapter 12
35
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
2.7.2. Did the SMS identify clear levels of authority and lines of communication between Master,
Chapter 2 Officers, ratings and the company, and were all onboard personnel familiar with these
Chapter 3 arrangements as they related to their position?
Chapter 5
• The SMS should identify clear levels of authority and lines of communication
Chapter 6
between Master, Officers, ratings and the Company.
Chapter 7 • Schematics or flowcharts are acceptable.
Chapter 8 • All Officers & ratings must be aware of the identity, contact details and role of
DPA.
Chapter 9
• Senior officers must also be familiar with key members of Company’s
Chapter 10 organization (e.g. person(s) responsible for navigational standards and
Chapter 11 Technical S/T).
Chapter 12
2.8. General Information
Chapter 1
2.8.1. Was the OCIMF HVPQ available through the OCIMF SIRE Program database completed
Chapter 2 accurately to reflect the structure, outfitting, management and certification of the vessel?
Chapter 4
• The Company must have updated the HVPQ. The HVPQ will not be released to inspector through
the inspection editor unless the Company had declared through the inspection booking process
Chapter 5 that the info within the HVPQ was updated, complete and accurate.
Chapter 6 • The CVIQ used during the inspection will be compiled in part from data contained in the HVPQ.
Chapter 7
• The inspection editor software will receive the info necessary to complete the inspection when
Chapter 8 the inspector synchronises the tablet software with the OCIMF database prior to the inspection.
Chapter 9 • The inspector must review the HVPQ and other supporting documentation prior to boarding the
vessel.
Chapter 10
• All certificates and documents available within the OCIMF certificate repository will be
Chapter 11
uploaded to the inspection editor software.
Chapter 12
36
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
2.8.1. Was the OCIMF HVPQ available through the OCIMF SIRE Program database completed accurately to
Chapter 2 reflect the structure, outfitting, management and certification of the vessel?
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
Prior to boarding the vessel:
Chapter 5  Review the HVPQ downloaded to inspection editor, and with reference to documents and
Chapter 6 certificates made available through the inspection editor:
o Verify, as far as possible, the accuracy of (1) General information, (2) Certificates, (3) Crew, (4)
Chapter 7
Navigation, (7) Structural condition, (12) Propulsion.
Chapter 8 o Conduct a general review of the HVPQ - make a note of any info which appears inconsistent &
Chapter 9 any info which will assist in better understanding the background of the questions assigned.
Chapter 10
While onboard:
Chapter 11
 Clarify any inconsistencies identified within the HVPQ with the Master or an appropriate officer.
Chapter 12  Inform the Master of any verified errors or omissions within the HVPQ.
 Document any verified errors or omissions within the HVPQ.
Chapter 1
2.8.2. Were records of the most recent PSC inspection available, and where deficiencies had
Chapter 2
been recorded had these been corrected and closed out in accordance with the SMS procedure
Chapter 3 for defects or non-conformities?
Chapter 5 The Company must provide the details of last 3 PSC Inspections through the PIQ as
follows:
Chapter 6
 Date of inspection - Port of inspection - PSC MOU Authority.
Chapter 7
 Number of deficiencies recorded.
Chapter 8
 Was the vessel detained.
Chapter 9  Was the inspection data entered in the OCIMF PSC Database.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
37
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 5 The inspector will be able to sign into their OCIMF inspection account and review any
Chapter 6 info provided by the Company in the OCIMF PSC Database.
Chapter 7 Where Company had not uploaded the details of PSC inspections, or the vessel had
changed management or name since the last SIRE 2.0 inspection, data collection and
Chapter 8
verification will be based on the information provided through the PIQ.
Chapter 9
The Company must have a procedure for managing PSC inspections which included:
Chapter 10
 The conduct and supervision of a PSC inspection.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
 The process to correct and close out deficiencies recorded.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 5 • Review the procedure for managing PSC inspections.
Chapter 6 • Where the Company had uploaded the details of PSC Inspections to OCIMF PSC Inspection
Repository:
Chapter 7
Prior to boarding:
Chapter 8 o Review the PSC inspection report - verify that data transferred to inspection editor are correct.
Chapter 9 o Review the PSC inspection report and any supporting documents.
o Review the evidence for correction and close out of any deficiencies recorded during the last
Chapter 10
PSC inspection.
Chapter 11 o Check vessel’s IMO number against the regional PSC MOU databases to confirm that the PSC
Chapter 12 report uploaded to inspection editor was the most recent.
When onboard verify that the PSC report uploaded is the same as the most recent report available
onboard.
38
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
Where vessel had changed management or name since the previous SIRE 2.0 inspection:
Chapter 6
Chapter 7 Prior to boarding: Check the vessel’s IMO number against the regional PSC MOU
Chapter 8
databases and identify the most recent PSC inspection recorded against the vessel.
Chapter 9
When onboard: Review the most recent PSC inspection report available onboard, but if
Chapter 10
none had taken place since the change of management or name, record the data for last
Chapter 11 recorded PSC Inspection against the IMO number. Add a comment in the Process
Chapter 12 response tool to record that the inspection was conducted under a different name or
operator.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
Where the Company was not utilising the OCIMF PSC Inspection Repository:
Chapter 6
Chapter 7 Prior to boarding: Check vessel’s IMO number against the regional PSC MOU databases
Chapter 8
to identify the most recent PSC inspection.
Chapter 9
While onboard:
Chapter 10
o Review the PSC inspection reports available onboard.
Chapter 11
o Review the evidence for correction and close out of any deficiencies recorded during
Chapter 12 the last PSC inspection.
39
5/27/2022
Chapter 3
Crew Management
3. Crew Management
3.1. Crew Qualification
Chapter 1
3.1.1. Were the Officers and ratings suitably qualified to serve onboard and did the Officer
Chapter 2
matrix posted on OCIMF website accurately reflect the qualifications, experience and English
Chapter 3 language capabilities of the Officers at the time of the inspection?
The Company must upload the updated crew matrix to OCIMF website. The matrix must be updated
Chapter 5
if there are any crew changes before the inspection. The Company must have procedures to ensure
Chapter 6 that:
Chapter 7
 Each crew member is in possession of all statutory and company mandatory certification
required for their role onboard.
Chapter 8
 Certification for each individual is presented in a standard order with an index indicating which
Chapter 9 certificates are mandatory for the role onboard.
 A consolidated record of sea service is available for each Officer.
Chapter 10
“Person with immediate responsibility” includes all watchkeeping officers in charge of cargo
Chapter 11 operations whether the vessel is at sea or in port. This includes the 2/O, 3/O, 4/O and Gas/Cargo
Chapter 12 Engineer. It may also include the pumpman and other ratings if engaged in cargo operations.
These crew members must have advanced training for oil, chemical or liquified gas tanker cargo
operations as applicable.
40
5/27/2022
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 5  Review the officer matrix uploaded to OCIMF website - verify it is accurate by randomly
Chapter 6
selecting 1 senior and junior officer from each of the deck and engine departments (to
include electricians, cargo engineers and other specialist E/R officers) - cross check
Chapter 7
their certificates of competency, endorsements and sea service records (for time in rank
Chapter 8 only).
Chapter 9 o All senior officers, junior deck officers and cargo/gas engineers must hold a
certificate in advanced training for oil, chemical or liquified gas tanker operations
Chapter 10 as applicable.
Chapter 11 o All junior engineer officers must hold a certificate in basic training for oil, chemical or
liquified gas tanker operations as applicable.
Chapter 12
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 5  Where ratings, including the pumpman, are assigned duties with direct supervision of
cargo operations verify that they hold a certificate in advanced training for oil, chemical
Chapter 6
or liquified gas tanker operations as applicable.
Chapter 7  Select 1 deck rating assigned duties related to cargo or cargo equipment and verify that
Chapter 8 they hold a certificate of basic training for oil, chemical or liquified gas tanker operations
as applicable.
Chapter 9
 During the inspection and while interviewing the Master, C/E and other Officers check
Chapter 10 the standard of English comprehension and spoken English. Where there are
Chapter 11 concerns, note the degree of English recorded against the individual’s rank in the
published Officer matrix.
Chapter 12
41
5/27/2022
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
3.1.2. Were procedures and instructions within the SMS and signs posted around the vessel
Chapter 2 available in the working language of vessel or a language(s) understood by crew and, were the
Chapter 3 Master, Officers and ratings able to communicate verbally in the working language?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
• The designated working language must be recorded in the ship’s logbook. The Company must
Chapter 5 declare the designated common working language and the language(s) of SMS in the PIQ.
Chapter 6 • The officers must communicate with the Inspector in English.
 While in the presence of inspector, the officers must communicate in English. An exception can
Chapter 7 be made when the level of English is declared as poor through the OCIMF crew matrix for 1 or
Chapter 8
more of the officers concerned, in which case, they must use the designated working language.
 The officers and ratings should communicate with each other in the designated working
Chapter 9
language and/or English while working with the Inspector.
Chapter 10  Where the inspector can conduct the inspection in the designated working language of the
vessel, this is acceptable, providing sufficient English communication between officers is
Chapter 11
observed to verify the level of English declared in the OCIMF crew matrix for vessels that must
Chapter 12 use it for communication when navigating or interacting with a terminal.
Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. –
Note: SOLAS Ch V Reg 14.4 clarifies when spoken English OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar
shall be used for navigational related communication
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
3.1.2. Were procedures and instructions within the SMS and signs posted around the vessel
Chapter 2 available in the working language of vessel or a language(s) understood by crew and, were the
Chapter 3 Master, Officers and ratings able to communicate verbally in the working language?
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Observe communications between officers & between officers & ratings and verify that:
Chapter 5
o They were able to verbally communicate in the working language. The accompanying officer
Chapter 6 was able to translate a question, and the subsequent reply, directed at a rating, into English
consistent with the standard of English declared within the OCIMF crew matrix.
Chapter 7
o The signs & safety instructions were posted in the designated working language.
Chapter 8 o Where ratings were not able to read the working language, the safety signs/instructions
were additionally posted in a language that they could read and understand.
Chapter 9
 Observe the SMS; where it had been developed in a language other than the designated working
Chapter 10 language, verify that:
Chapter 11
o Sections of SMS containing safety instructions required to be understood by all crew had been
translated into the designated working language and, any other languages necessary.
Chapter 12 o Checklists and safe working procedures were translated into the designated working language.
42
5/27/2022
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
3.1.3. Did the complement of Officers and ratings at the time of inspection meet or exceed the
Chapter 2
requirements of the Minimum Safe Manning and the declared company standard manning for
Chapter 3 routine operations, and had Senior Officers been relieved to ensure continuity of operational
knowledge?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
The Company must have policies & procedures for the safe manning of vessel with:
Chapter 6  The approved manning levels for routine operations.
Chapter 7  The approved manning levels for defined specialist operations and high workload situations.
Chapter 8  The minimum interval between the relief of the senior officers from the same department.
The full manning policies/procedures may not be available onboard, but the data provided through the
Chapter 9
PIQ must reflect the content.
Chapter 10 The Company must provide manning details through the PIQ as follows:
Chapter 11 Manning required by the Minimum Safe Manning Document: Number of deck officers, including
Master - watchkeeping E/R officers including C/E when in UMS & when in manned mode - deck &
Chapter 12
engine ratings - general purpose ratings - catering ratings.
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
requirements of the Minimum Safe Manning and the declared company standard manning for
Chapter 3 routine operations, and had Senior Officers been relieved to ensure continuity of operational
knowledge?
Chapter 4

The Company must provide manning details through the PIQ as follows:
Chapter 6
Chapter 7  Company enhanced manning provision, over and above the company standard
manning level, for continuous/extended/repeated STS operations, if any: Number of
Chapter 8
additional deck / engine officers - deck ratings.
Chapter 9  Company enhanced manning provision, over & above the company standard
Chapter 10 manning level, for continuous/extended/repeated inter-harbour operations and/or
short voyages <24 hours, if any: Number of additional deck / engine officers - deck
Chapter 11
ratings.
Chapter 12
43
5/27/2022
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 requirements of the Minimum Safe Manning and the declared company standard manning for
Chapter 3
routine operations, and had Senior Officers been relieved to ensure continuity of operational
knowledge?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 The Company must provide manning details through the PIQ as follows:
Chapter 6
 Company enhanced manning provision, over & above the company standard manning level, for
operations requiring additional security measures, if any: Number of additional deck / engine
Chapter 7 officers - deck ratings.
 Company enhanced manning provision, over & above the company standard manning level, for
Chapter 8
other specialist operations (free text to describe), if any: Number of additional deck / engine
Chapter 9 officers - deck ratings - engine ratings.
 The minimum interval required between the relief of senior officers from same department.
Chapter 10
Inspector Actions
Chapter 11
 Review the information provided by the Company through the PIQ and compare against:
Chapter 12
o The minimum safe manning document - A copy of the arrival crew list provided by the Master.
o The current OCIMF crew matrix available on the OCIMF SIRE database.
3. Crew Management
3.2. Crew Evaluation
Chapter 1
3.2.1. Was a report available which confirmed that a static Navigational assessment by a
Chapter 2
suitably qualified & experienced company representative had been completed as declared
Chapter 3 through the PIQ?
Chapter 5 This question will only be generated when:
 The Company had indicated that an appropriate static navigational assessment had been
Chapter 6 conducted on board within the previous 12 months and,
Chapter 7  A dynamic navigational audit had not been completed by the company staff within the
previous 12 months.
Chapter 8 The inclusion of this question in the CVIQ does not imply an expectation by OCIMF that a
Chapter 9 navigational verification assessment by an appropriate shore-staff will be carried out.
Chapter 10
The assessment report will include brief details of assessor’s qualifications & seafaring
Chapter 11 experience.
The inspector is not required to make a qualitative assessment of the report or the qualification
Chapter 12
and/or experience of company representative undertaking the assessment beyond the specific
guidance contained herein.
44
5/27/2022
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
3.2.1. Was a report available which confirmed that a static Navigational assessment by a
Chapter 2
suitably qualified & experienced company representative had been completed as declared
Chapter 5
Review the static navigation assessment and verify that:
 The assessment conducted on the date declared by the company in the PIQ.
Chapter 6
 The report was in a similar format/content with the OCIMF “A Guide to Best Practice
Chapter 7 for Navigational Assessments and Audits”.
Chapter 8  Brief details of assessor’s qualifications and experience were included within the report.
Chapter 9  The report contained info relating to best practice guidance points from TMSA KPI 5.2.2
Chapter 10  Where the report identified areas for improvement there was evidence that follow up
had been undertaken within a specified timeframe by the company and/or vessel.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
3.2.2. Was a report available which confirmed that a dynamic Navigational assessment by a
Chapter 2
suitably qualified & experienced company representative had been completed while on
Chapter 3 passage as declared through the PIQ?
Chapter 5
Review the report and verify that:
 The assessment conducted during the period declared by the Company in the PIQ.
Chapter 6  The assessment covered all sections of a voyage as declared through the PIQ.
Chapter 7  Brief details of assessor’s qualification & experience were included within the report.
 The report was in a similar format, and covered the items suggested by the OCIMF “A
Chapter 8
Guide to Best Practice for Navigational Assessments and Audits”.
Chapter 9  The report contained info relating to the majority of best practice guidance points from
TMSA KPI 5.3.3.
Chapter 10
 Where the report identified areas for improvement there was evidence that follow up
Chapter 11 had been undertaken within a specified timeframe by the company and/or vessel.
Chapter 12
45
5/27/2022
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
This question will only be generated when the Company had indicated, through the PIQ, that an
Chapter 5 appropriate dynamic navigational assessment had been conducted within the previous 2 years.
Chapter 6
The inclusion of this question in the CVIQ does not imply an expectation by OCIMF that a
Chapter 7
dynamic navigational assessment will be carried out on any vessel at any particular time.
Chapter 8
It is not expected that sensitive personal data relating to assessment of individual performance is
Chapter 9
contained within the report. Such assessment, although expected, should remain confidential.
Chapter 10
The assessment report will include brief details of assessor’s qualifications & seafaring
Chapter 11
experience. The inspector is not required to make a qualitative assessment of the report or of the
Chapter 12 qualification and/or experience of the company representative undertaking the assessment
beyond the specific guidance contained herein.
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 5
 The assessment was conducted during the period declared by the Company through
Chapter 6 the PIQ.
 Brief details of the assessor’s qualification & experience included within the report.
Chapter 8
 The report was in a similar format, and covered the review items suggested by the
Chapter 9 OCIMF “A Guide to Best Practice for Navigational Assessments and Audits”.
 The report contained info relating to the majority of best practice guidance points from
Chapter 10
TMSA KPI 5.3.3.
Chapter 11  Where the report identified areas for improvement there was evidence that follow up had
Chapter 12
been undertaken within a specified timeframe by the company and/or vessel.
46
5/27/2022
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
3.2.3. Was a report available which confirmed that a dynamic navigational assessment by a
Chapter 2
suitably qualified specialist contractor had been completed while on passage as declared
This question will only be generated when the Company had indicated, through the PIQ, that an
Chapter 5
appropriate dynamic navigational assessment by a suitably qualified specialist contractor had been
Chapter 6 conducted within the previous 12 months.
Chapter 7
The inclusion of this question in the CVIQ does not imply an expectation by OCIMF that a dynamic
Chapter 8 navigational assessment by a specialist will be carried out on any vessel at any particular time.
Chapter 9
It is not expected that sensitive personal data relating to assessment of individual performance is
Chapter 10 contained within the report. Such assessment, although expected, should remain confidential.
Chapter 11
The assessment report must include brief details of assessor’s qualifications & seafaring experience.
Chapter 12 The inspector is not expected or required to make a qualitative assessment of the report or the
qualification and/or experience of the contractor beyond the specific guidance contained herein.
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
3.2.3. Was a report available which confirmed that a dynamic navigational assessment by a
Chapter 2
suitably qualified specialist contractor had been completed while on passage as declared
Chapter 5
Chapter 6  The assessment was conducted during the period declared by the Company through the PIQ.
 Brief details of the assessor’s qualification and experience were included within the report.
Chapter 8
 The report was in a similar format, and covered the review items suggested by OCIMF “A Guide
Chapter 9 to Best Practice for Navigational Assessments and Audits”.
Chapter 10  The report contained info relating to the majority of the best practice guidance points from TMSA
KPI 5.3.3.
Chapter 11
 Where the report identified areas for improvement there was evidence that follow up had been
Chapter 12 undertaken within a specified timeframe by the company and/or vessel as appropriate.
47
5/27/2022
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
3.2.4. Was a report available which confirmed that an unannounced remote navigational
Chapter 2
assessment, which included review of VDR & ECDIS data by an independent contractor or
Chapter 3 specialist company representative, had been completed as declared through the PIQ?
This question will only be generated when the Company had indicated, through the PIQ, that a
Chapter 5
remote navigational assessment had been undertaken within the previous 12 months.
Chapter 6
The inclusion of this question in CVIQ does not imply an expectation by OCIMF or its members
Chapter 7
that a remote navigation assessment will be carried out on any vessel at any particular time.
Chapter 8
It is not expected that sensitive personal data relating to the assessment of individual performance
Chapter 9
is contained within the report. Such assessment, although expected, should remain confidential.
Chapter 10
The assessment report must include brief details of the assessor’s qualifications & seafaring
Chapter 11 experience. The inspector is not required to make a qualitative assessment of the report or the
Chapter 12 qualification and/or experience of the independent contractor or specialist company representative
beyond the specific guidance contained herein.
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
3.2.4. Was a report available which confirmed that an unannounced remote navigational
Chapter 2
assessment, which included review of VDR & ECDIS data by an independent contractor or
Chapter 3 specialist company representative, had been completed as declared through the PIQ?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
Review the remote navigational assessment report and verify that:
Chapter 6
 The assessment included the phases of a voyage as declared in the PIQ.
Chapter 7
 The assessment was unannounced and included download & review of VDR & ECDIS data.
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
 The report was substantially in alignment with the format and info, as suggested by OCIMF “A
Chapter 10 Guide to Best Practice for Navigational Assessments and Audits”.
Chapter 11  Where the report identified areas for improvement there was evidence that follow up had been
undertaken by the company and/or vessel.
Chapter 12
48
5/27/2022
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
3.2.5. Was a report available which confirmed that a comprehensive cargo audit by a suitably qualified and
Chapter 2 experienced company representative had been completed as declared through the PIQ?
Chapter 4 The guidance in OCIMF “A Guide to Best Practice for Navigational Assessments and Audits” is
Chapter 5
adapted to reflect the requirements for a comprehensive cargo audit.
Chapter 6 The purpose of cargo audit is to identify poor practices, to continuously improve cargo operational
standards to ensure safe / efficient cargo transfer, bunker transfer and tank cleaning, and to assure
Chapter 7
that high standards of cargo and bunker operations and deck watchkeeping are being maintained.
Chapter 8
The purpose of closely observing the interaction and effectiveness of the CCR and deck teams and
Chapter 9 their interactions with the terminal staff during all stages of cargo operations is to evaluate:
Chapter 10  Key behaviours of members of CCR and deck teams during cargo, bunkering and tank cleaning.
 Skills of the CCR and deck teams.
Chapter 11
 Interactions between the CCR and deck teams and the terminal staff.
Chapter 12
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
3.2.5. Was a report available which confirmed that a comprehensive cargo audit by a suitably
Chapter 2
qualified and experienced company representative had been completed as declared through
Chapter 3 the PIQ?
Chapter 5
• Cargo audits should be conducted by a company representative who was, or had been, an experienced
senior deck officer (preferably a Master Mariner with command experience), who was fully up to date with
Chapter 6 company cargo operational practices, ISGOTT and industry best practices.
Chapter 7 • This question will only be generated when Company had indicated, through the PIQ, that an appropriate
cargo audit had been conducted on board within the previous 12 months.
Chapter 8 • The inclusion of this question in the CVIQ does not imply an expectation by OCIMF that a cargo audit will
Chapter 9
be carried out on any vessel at any particular time.
• It is not expected that sensitive personal data relating to assessment of individual performance is contained
Chapter 10 within the report. Such assessment, although expected, should remain confidential.
Chapter 11 • The audit report must include brief details of the assessor’s qualifications and seafaring experience.
• The inspector is not required to make a qualitative assessment of the cargo audit report or the qualification
Chapter 12
and/or experience of company representative beyond the specific guidance contained herein.
49
5/27/2022
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
3.2.5. Was a report available which confirmed that a comprehensive cargo audit by a suitably
Chapter 2
qualified and experienced company representative had been completed as declared through
Chapter 3 the PIQ?
Chapter 5
The inspector should sight the cargo audit report and verify that:
Chapter 6
 The cargo audit was conducted during the period declared through the PIQ.
Chapter 7
 The cargo audit covered the cargo, ballast & bunkering operations as declared in the PIQ.
Chapter 8
 Brief details of assessor’s qualification and experience were included within the report.
Chapter 9
 The report contained info relating to the majority of best practice points from TMSA KPI 6.4.2.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
undertaken within a specified timeframe by the company and/or vessel.
Chapter 12
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
3.2.6. Was a report available onboard which confirmed that a comprehensive engineering audit by a
Chapter 2 suitable qualified and experienced company representative had been completed as declared in the PIQ?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 The OCIMF “A Guide to Best Practice for Navigational Assessments and Audits” is adapted to reflect the
requirements for an engineering audit.
Chapter 5
The purpose of the audit is to identify poor practices, to continuously improve engineering operational
Chapter 6 standards to ensure safe and efficient machinery operation and to assure companies that high standards of
machinery space management and watchkeeping are being maintained.
Chapter 7
The purpose of observing the interaction and effectiveness of the machinery space management team, the
Chapter 8 watchkeeping team and their interactions with the navigational and cargo operational teams is to evaluate:
Chapter 9  Key behaviours of members of the machinery space management & watchkeeping teams during
manoeuvring, cargo and maintenance operations.
Chapter 10
 Skills of the machinery space management & watchkeeping teams.
Chapter 11  Interactions between the machinery space management & watchkeeping teams and the navigational
and cargo operational teams.
Chapter 12
50
5/27/2022
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
Chapter 4 • Engineering audits should be conducted by a company representative who was, or had been, an
experienced senior engineer officer (preferably a qualified C/E with time in rank of C/E), who was fully up to
Chapter 5 date with company machinery operational & maintenance practices, ISGOTT and industry best practices.
Chapter 6 • This question will only be generated when the Company had indicated through the PIQ that an engineering
audit had been conducted within the previous 12 months.
Chapter 7
• The inclusion of this question in the CVIQ does not imply an expectation by OCIMF that an engineering audit
Chapter 8
will be carried out on any vessel at any particular time.
Chapter 9
Chapter 11 • The audit report must include brief details of the assessor’s qualifications & seafaring experience.
Chapter 12 • The inspector is not required to make a qualitative assessment of the report or the qualification and/or
experience of the company representative undertaking the audit beyond the specific guidance contained
herein.
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Chapter 5 The inspector should sight the engineering audit report and verify that:
Chapter 6
 The engineering audit was conducted during the period declared through the PIQ.
Chapter 7
 The audit covered the cargo, ballast and bunkering operations as declared through the PIQ.
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
 The report contained info relating to the majority of best practice points from TMSA KPI 4.4.5.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
undertaken within a specified timeframe by the company and/or vessel.
Chapter 12
51
5/27/2022
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
3.2.7. Was a report available onboard which confirmed that a comprehensive mooring and anchoring audit
Chapter 2 by a suitably qualified and experienced company representative had been completed as declared through
Chapter 3 the PIQ?

The OCIMF “A Guide to Best Practice for Navigational Assessments and Audits” is adapted to reflect
Chapter 5
the requirements for a mooring and anchoring audit.
Chapter 6 The purpose of the audit is to identify poor practices, to continuously improve mooring and anchoring
Chapter 7
operational standards, to ensure safe and efficient mooring & anchoring operations and, to assure
companies that high standards of mooring & anchoring oversight and management are being
Chapter 8 maintained.
Chapter 9 The purpose of observing the interaction and effectiveness of the mooring & anchoring teams, the
bridge team and their interactions with the terminal mooring teams is to evaluate:
Chapter 10
 Key behaviours of members of the mooring & anchoring teams during mooring & anchoring ops.
Chapter 11  Skills of the mooring & anchoring teams.
Chapter 12  Interactions between the mooring & anchoring teams, the bridge team and terminal mooring teams.
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
Chapter 3 the PIQ?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
• Mooring & anchoring audits should be conducted by a company representative who is, or had been, an
Chapter 5 experienced senior deck officer (preferably a Master Mariner with command experience), who is fully up to
date with company mooring and anchoring practices, OCIMF MEG, OCIMF Anchoring Systems and
Chapter 6 Procedures, and industry best practices.
Chapter 7 • This question will only be generated when Company had indicated, through PIQ, that a mooring & anchoring
audit had been conducted within the previous 12 months.
Chapter 8 • The inclusion of this question in the CVIQ does not imply an expectation by OCIMF that a mooring and
Chapter 9
anchoring audit will be carried out on any vessel at any particular time.
Chapter 11 • The audit report must include brief details of the assessor’s qualifications & seafaring experience. The
inspector is not required to make a qualitative assessment of the report or the qualification and/or experience
Chapter 12 of company representative undertaking the audit beyond the specific guidance contained herein.
52
5/27/2022
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
Chapter 3 the PIQ?

Chapter 5 The inspector should sight the mooring and anchoring audit report and verify that:
Chapter 6
 The audit was conducted during the period declared through the PIQ.
Chapter 7  The audit covered the mooring and anchoring operations as declared through the PIQ.
Chapter 8  Brief details of the assessor’s qualification and experience were included within the report.
 The report contained info relating to the majority of best practice points from TMSA KPI 6A.4.3.
Chapter 9
Chapter 10 undertaken within a specified timeframe by the company and/or vessel.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
3.2.8. Had the vessel operator implemented a Behavioural Competency Assessment Program
Chapter 2
onboard and was there evidence that assessments were being conducted for navigation,
Chapter 3 cargo, mooring and engineering operations by approved assessors?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 The Company must develop a Competency Assessment Program in alignment with OCIMF
Chapter 6 “Behavioural Competency Assessment & Verification” with assessments being conducted by
approved assessors against defined standards. Assessments must be carried out in following areas:
Chapter 7
 Navigation
Chapter 8
 Mooring operations.
Chapter 9
 Cargo operations.
Chapter 10
 Engineering operations.
Chapter 11
The question will only be generated when the Company had declared that a BCA&V program was in
Chapter 12 operation onboard through the PIQ.
53
5/27/2022
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
3.2.8. Had the vessel operator implemented a Behavioural Competency Assessment Program
Chapter 2
onboard and was there evidence that assessments were being conducted for navigation,
Chapter 3 cargo, mooring and engineering operations by approved assessors?
Chapter 5
Review the BCA&V program and verify that:
Chapter 6  The program covered as a minimum navigation, cargo, mooring and engineering operations.
Chapter 7  The Company had defined who was considered qualified to be an approved assessor.
 The Company had defined the training requirement for an approved assessor.
Chapter 8
 If vessel staff onboard at the time of the inspection were considered as approved assessors,
Chapter 9 then they had evidence of the required training for an approved assessor.
Chapter 10  There was evidence that the staff onboard at the time of the inspection were actively involved in
the competency assessment program with historical records of their competency assessments
Chapter 11
available for their company service since the inception of the program.
Chapter 12
3. Crew Management
3.3. Crew Training
Chapter 1
3.3.1. Had the Master and all Navigation officers attended a shore-based BTM training
Chapter 2
course within the previous 5 years?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 This question will only be generated when the Company has indicated that the Master and all navigation
Chapter 5 officers had attended a BTM training course within the previous 5 years. The course must have included
navigational exercises in a simulator, with simulator time at least equivalent to IMO Model Course 1.22.
Chapter 6 The Company should verify the following if relying on the STCW qualifications of their seafarers:
Chapter 7  That the Flag issuing the qualification required the bridge resource training element to be retaken or
refreshed at each revalidation of the Officer’s Certificate of Competency.
Chapter 8
 That the required BRM training element included training within a simulator which met, as a minimum,
Chapter 9 IMO Model Course 1.22 of at least 19 hours simulator time.
The terms BTM and BRM are interchangeable.
Chapter 10
The training course must have included exercises in a simulator as per IMO Model Course 1.22.
Chapter 11
Inspector Actions
Chapter 12 Review the BTM training certificates for the Master and navigation officers and verify that the training was
completed within the previous 5 years by each officer and stated as per IMO model course 1.22.
54
5/27/2022
3. Crew Management
3.3. Crew Training
Chapter 1
3.3.2. Had the Master received formal Ship handling training prior to promotion or when being
Chapter 2 assigned to a new type of ship having significantly different handling characteristics to ships in which they
Chapter 3 had recently served?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have a procedure to identify the necessary mandatory and non-mandatory training
Chapter 5 required to be completed by each individual before being assigned to a vessel and/or prior to promotion.
Chapter 6 For the Master this should define:

 The Ship Handling training required prior to promotion to Master.
Chapter 7
 The Ship Handling training required prior to being reassigned to a vessel with handling
Chapter 8 characteristics significantly different from those of the vessels in which they have recently served.
Chapter 9  Where the required training included a shore ship handling training course, the max. period for which a
course may be considered valid prior assignment to a vessel type before the training would need to be
Chapter 10 refreshed or repeated.
Chapter 11
Training may consist of supervision onboard vessels which is documented through a competency
Chapter 12 development process or may be delivered at an approved shore training centre.
3. Crew Management
3.3. Crew Training
Chapter 1
3.3.2. Had the Master received formal Ship handling training prior to promotion or when being
Chapter 2 assigned to a new type of ship having significantly different handling characteristics to ships in which they
Chapter 3 had recently served?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
Where training is delivered during a parallel voyage prior to taking over command on a vessel with
Chapter 5 significant different handling characteristics, the Company should have defined the activities that must have
been completed by the incoming Master and assessed by the incumbent Master or a suitably qualified S/T
Chapter 6 prior taking command.
Chapter 7
The Company should have evaluated the handling characteristics of its vessel types and identified the
Chapter 8 circumstances in which additional ship handling training will be required when a Master is reassigned to a
vessel type having significantly different handling characteristics to those they had recently served.
Chapter 9
Chapter 10
When evaluating the handling characteristics of vessels, consider the number / types of propellers / drives,
number / types of rudders & number / types of thrusters fitted to each vessel and not only the size.
Chapter 11
Service as Master on a vessel with a specific set of handling characteristics within the previous 5 years will
Chapter 12 be considered as sufficient and appropriate experience when transferring from one vessel type to another.
55
5/27/2022
3. Crew Management
3.3. Crew Training
Chapter 1
3.3.2. Had the Master received formal Ship handling training prior to promotion or when
Chapter 2
being assigned to a new type of ship having significantly different handling characteristics to
Chapter 3 ships in which they had recently served?
Chapter 5 • Compare the sea service record of Master through the tabulated record of sea
Chapter 6 service prepared by the Company with their discharge book and verify the time
served as Master corresponded to value provided in Officer Matrix uploaded to
Chapter 7
OCIMF website.
Chapter 8
• Where the Master had served < 36 months sea service in rank, request evidence
Chapter 9 that ship handling training had been provided prior to promotion to Master.
Chapter 10 • This may consist of either:
Chapter 11
o A formal in-house training program meeting the objectives of STCW B-V/a.
o Attendance at a shore training course meeting the objectives of STCW B-V/a.
Chapter 12
3. Crew Management
3.3. Crew Training
Chapter 1
3.3.2. Had the Master received formal Ship handling training prior to promotion or when
Chapter 2
being assigned to a new type of ship having significantly different handling characteristics to
Chapter 3 ships in which they had recently served?
Chapter 5 Where the Master had transferred between vessel types having significantly different handling
characteristics within the previous 12 months of sea service, request evidence that additional
Chapter 6
ship handling training had been provided to Master prior to taking command. This may consist
Chapter 7 of either:
 A formal in-house training program designed to meet the objectives of STCW B-V/a.
Chapter 8
 Attendance at a shore training course designed to meet the objectives of STCW B-V/a.
Chapter 9
Chapter 10 When considering what constitutes significantly different handling characteristics, be guided by
the company training matrix and groupings of vessel types having similar handling
Chapter 11
characteristics.
Chapter 12
It is not expected that the inspector will comment on the evaluation of ship handling
characteristics made by the Company.
56
5/27/2022
3. Crew Management
3.3. Crew Training
Chapter 1
3.3.3. Had the Master, Deck officers and Cargo/gas engineer where carried, attended a shore
Chapter 2
simulator course covering routine & emergency cargo operations within the previous 5 years?
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 This question will only be generated when the Company had declared through the PIQ that the
Chapter 6
Master, all deck officers and cargo/gas engineers had attended a shore cargo operations simulator
course applicable to vessel type within the previous 5 years.
Chapter 7
Chapter 8 The shore cargo simulator courses should have been developed as per the appropriate IMO
model course for the vessel type.
Chapter 9
Chapter 10 The inclusion of this question does not imply an expectation by OCIMF or its members that any or
all of the Master, deck officers and cargo/gas engineers onboard will be required to have attended a
Chapter 11 shore cargo simulator course.
Chapter 12
3. Crew Management
3.3. Crew Training
Chapter 1
3.3.3. Had the Master, Deck officers and Cargo/gas engineer where carried, attended a shore
Chapter 2
simulator course covering routine & emergency cargo operations within the previous 5 years?
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
Review the shore cargo system simulator training course certificates for Master, deck officers,
Chapter 6
and cargo/gas engineer where carried, and verify that:
Chapter 7  The training had been completed within the previous 5 years for the Master, each deck officer
Chapter 8
and cargo/gas engineer. The training may be a refresher training course where a full course
had been undertaken previously.
Chapter 9
 The training course was conducted in a simulator representing the type of vessel being
Chapter 10 inspected i.e. oil, chemical, LPG or LNG.
 The training certificates indicated that the course content was at least equivalent to appropriate
Chapter 11
IMO model course for the vessel type.
Chapter 12
57
5/27/2022
3. Crew Management
3.3. Crew Training
Chapter 1
3.3.4. Had the C/E and all Engineer officers attended a shore ERM simulator course
Chapter 2
covering routine and emergency machinery operations within the previous 5 years?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 • This question will only be generated when the Company has indicated that the C/E and all E/R
officers had attended a shore ERM simulator course within the previous 5 years. The course
Chapter 5
should cover routine & emergency machinery operations for the type of main propulsion onboard.
Chapter 6 • The course should cover the IMO model course 2.07 for the main propulsion type fitted onboard.
• The inclusion of this question in CVIQ does not imply an expectation by OCIMF or its members
Chapter 7
that any or all E/R officers will be required to have attended a shore ERM simulator course.
Chapter 8
Inspector Actions
Chapter 9
Review the shore ERM simulator training certificates for C/E and all engineers and verify that:
Chapter 10  Training had been completed within the previous 5 years for C/E and each engineer officer.
Chapter 11  Training may be a refresher training course where a full course had been undertaken
previously.
Chapter 12
 The course was conducted in a simulator representing the main propulsion type of the vessel.
3. Crew Management
3.3. Crew Training
Chapter 1
3.3.5. Did all key personnel involved in Dynamically Positioned (DP) operations have
Chapter 2
appropriate training in accordance with IMO and International Marine Contractors Association
Chapter 3 (IMCA) guidelines and local regulations applicable to the area of operations?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should use an industry-recognized body to issue DP Operator certification to those staff who
Chapter 5 had completed the necessary training and obtained and maintained the requisite DP experience.
Chapter 6 The Company should have a training matrix for all onboard roles required to have any form of DP training
according to IMO/IMCA guidance or local regulations applicable to area in which the vessel conducts DP
Chapter 7
operations. The training matrix should include, as appropriate to the vessel:
Chapter 8
 DP operator training course.
Chapter 9
 DP refresher training either utilising an approved onboard program or through shore training courses.
Chapter 10
 Integrated DP/power management control system training course.
Chapter 11  High voltage training course.
Chapter 12  The relevant DP control system maintenance training course.
 The relevant position reference system training courses.
58
5/27/2022
3. Crew Management
3.3. Crew Training
Chapter 1
3.3.5. Did all key personnel involved in Dynamically Positioned (DP) operations have
Chapter 2
appropriate training in accordance with IMO and International Marine Contractors Association
Chapter 3 (IMCA) guidelines and local regulations applicable to the area of operations?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
 Review the vessel’s completed DP training matrix for all staff onboard and verify that each
Chapter 6 person had completed the required training for their role onboard within the time frame specified
by the company training matrix.
Chapter 7
 Review the DP logbook and DP Operator certificate for a selected DP operator - verify that the
Chapter 8 logbook had been maintained up to date with DP experience since gaining the DP operator
Chapter 9 Cert.
 Where the Company required periodic refresher DP training, either by utilising the vessel’s own
Chapter 10
DP equipment while not conducting actual DP operations or by attendance at a shore course,
Chapter 11 verify that the refresher training had been completed within the required time frame.
Chapter 12
 Review the High Voltage, DP/Power Management or DP control system training certificate for
one individual and verify that the certificate was valid, and any refresher or top-up training
required to maintain validity had been completed within the required time frame.
3. Crew Management
3.3. Crew Training
Chapter 1
3.3.6. Had the Master, Officers and ratings received the required training and familiarisation
Chapter 2
before being assigned duties related to handling LNG or other low-flashpoint fuel?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 This question will only be generated when the Company has indicated through the PIQ that the
vessel is outfitted in accordance with the IGF Code to use LNG as fuel.
Chapter 5
Chapter 6 The Company should have a procedure to identify which officers and ratings are required to hold a
certificate for Basic and Advanced training for service on ships subject to IGF Code. This info may
Chapter 7
be provided within a company mandatory training matrix.
Chapter 8
The IGF Code applies to ships using low-flashpoint fuels with building contract is placed on or after 1
Chapter 9
January 2017, the keels of which are laid or which are at a similar stage of construction on or after
Chapter 10 01/07/2017 (in the absence of a building contract), or the delivery of which is on or after 1/1/2021.
Chapter 11
Crew members responsible for designated safety duties associated with care, use or emergency
Chapter 12 response to fuel onboard ships subject to IGF Code must have a certificate in Basic Training (IMO
Model Course 7.13).
59
5/27/2022
3. Crew Management
3.3. Crew Training
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 Masters, engineer officers and all personnel with immediate responsibility for care and use of fuels
and fuel systems on ships subject to IGF Code, are to hold a certificate in Advanced Training (IMO
Chapter 5
Model Course 7.14).
Chapter 6
A person/personnel with “immediate responsibility” is defined as “a person being in a decision-making
Chapter 7
capacity with respect to handling of fuel addressed by the IGF Code or other fuel-related operations.”
Chapter 8
There is no requirement for the certificates to be endorsed by the flag or any other authority and they
Chapter 9 may be issued by training providers.
Chapter 10
For existing vessels using LNG or other low-flashpoint fuel that are not subject to IGF Code,
Chapter 11 training and certification requirements will be as required by the flag state.
Chapter 12
In all cases, personnel involved in handling LNG or other low-flashpoint fuels should have received
ship-specific familiarisation with the systems fitted.
3. Crew Management
3.3. Crew Training
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
Chapter 5  Review the procedure which defined the requirement for Basic and Advanced Training for
service on ships subject to IGF Code, which may be in the form of a training matrix.
Chapter 6
 Review:
Chapter 7
o A Basic Training Certificate for one engine room rating.
Chapter 8 o Two Advanced Training Certificates sampled from Master, C/E and engineer officers.
Chapter 9 o Ship-specific familiarisation records for the LNG or low-flashpoint fuel system.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
60
5/27/2022
3. Crew Management
3.4. Crew Compliance
Chapter 1
3.4.1. Was there an effective system to record and monitor the hours of rest for all personnel
Chapter 2
onboard in compliance with STCW, MLC or the regulatory requirements applicable to vessel?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 • The Company should have a procedure to define how hours of rest were to be managed &
Chapter 5 recorded based on STCW, MLC, or the regulatory requirements applicable to the vessel.
Chapter 6
• The Company should have a system that permits the recording of rest hours and
consequential calculation of conformance in any 24-hour and 7-day periods for each
Chapter 7 individual onboard taking into account any exceptions permitted. The system should identify
Chapter 8 any non-conformance.
• Individuals should record notes against their daily records to identify the duties they
Chapter 9
performed outside their normal working hours.
Chapter 10
• Hours of rest non-conformance reports should be provided to Company at least monthly.
Chapter 11 Shore management must acknowledge any significant levels of non-conformance.
Chapter 12 • "Significant" is considered to be 3 or more days containing non-conformance for any
individual(s) in any 30-day period.
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Review the SMS procedure which defined how hours of rest were to be managed & recorded.
Chapter 5  Review the hours of rest records - verify that it was in alignment with IMO/ILO format.
Chapter 6  Review hours of rest records - compare them against log books and other records for a recently completed
operation - verify that records realistically reflected the activities conducted by vessel & individual seafarers.
Chapter 7
 Review the hours of rest record summary report to shore management - verify that Company had
Chapter 8 acknowledge receipt and responded with an action plan for significant non-conformities.
Suggested activities to review include:
Chapter 9
 Bunkering operations, including anchoring and the berthing of the bunker barge.
Chapter 10  Loading / discharging operations, including inbound/outbound passages and mooring operations.
Chapter 11  Transit of straits or inland waterways with considerable standby requirements such as Singapore/Malacca
Straits, Turkish Straits, English Channel / Dover Straits or similar.
Chapter 12  Post drydock departure and preparations to return to commercial service - Navigation during extended periods
of restricted visibility - Extensive tank cleaning or enclosed space operations.
61
5/27/2022
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
Consider compliance with company procedures relating to:
Chapter 5
 Bridge team composition.
Chapter 6  Engine room status and, when required to be manned, E/R team composition.
Chapter 7  Supervision and management of cargo and bunker operations.
Chapter 8  Supervision and management of mooring and anchoring operations.
 The conduct of drills.
Chapter 9
Chapter 10
The suggested activities and considerations are not exhaustive, and the inspector should exercise
Chapter 11 professional experience when conducting cross checks against records while limiting the document
review to a single operation or period not exceeding 3 days.
Chapter 12
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
3.4.2. Were the Master, officers and crew familiar with company policy & procedures for D&A
Chapter 2
abuse prevention and had unannounced D&A testing taken place onboard in accordance with
Chapter 3 the policy?
Chapter 5 The Company should develop a policy and procedures to prevent D&A abuse which should define:
Chapter 6  Whether alcohol may be consumed on board, and if so:

Chapter 7 o The types of alcohol beverages and strength & maximum container size that may be served.
Chapter 8 o The max. permitted issue to an individual during any 24 hour period in standard alcohol units
(1 unit = 10ml alcohol).
Chapter 9
o The person responsible for issuing alcohol to vessel staff and visitors.
Chapter 10 o The means of recording the issue of alcohol to each staff member and visitor.
Chapter 11 o The places onboard where the consumption of alcohol is permitted.
Chapter 12 o The process to avoid stockpiling of issued alcohol.
o The period of abstinence before any scheduled duty.
62
5/27/2022
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5  Where alcohol may be consumed while on shore leave:

Chapter 6 o The expected period of abstinence before returning to the vessel.
o The period of abstinence before any scheduled duty.
Chapter 7
 The training necessary to use the onboard alcohol testing device.
Chapter 8
 The frequency of calibration or testing of the alcohol testing device.
Chapter 9  The frequency of unannounced alcohol testing initiated by the company.
Chapter 10  The persons who are responsible for conducting and witnessing alcohol tests, including testing
of Master.
Chapter 11
 The means of recording the results of an alcohol test.
Chapter 12
 Time frame within which unannounced testing must be completed after initial notification from the
company.
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
Chapter 5 The Company must have a policy & procedures to prevent D&A abuse which define:
Chapter 6
 The circumstances, other than unannounced testing, when an individual or group of
individuals will be tested for alcohol and samples collected for drug screening where
Chapter 7 onboard sample collection equipment is provided.
Chapter 8  The frequency of unannounced drug screening by an independent agency or, the
controlled collection of samples onboard for analysis by an independent agency.
Chapter 9
 Where controlled collection of samples for drug screening is required as part of the
Chapter 10 procedure, the minimum stock of sample collection kits that must be maintained on
board.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12 The D&A Policy should be displayed at appropriate locations onboard.
63
5/27/2022
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 5 Review the policy & procedures to prevent the D&A abuse - verify that prior to commencement of inspection:
• The supply of alcohol had been managed and documented in accordance with company expectations.
Chapter 6  The onboard alcohol testing device had been calibrated and/or tested in accordance with the company
procedure and maker’s instructions.
Chapter 7
 Evidence that persons required to use the onboard alcohol testing device had received training in its use.
Chapter 8  Records to demonstrate that unannounced alcohol testing had been completed in accordance with
Chapter 9
the company procedure and included;
o The initial instruction from the company,
Chapter 10 o The documented breath test values for each individual tested,
Chapter 11 o The message to the company confirming that the tests had been completed.
 Records to demonstrate that frequency of unannounced alcohol test was as per the SMS procedure.
Chapter 12
 Unannounced drug screening tests had been conducted in accordance with frequency defined by
company procedure by either onboard collection of samples for later analysis or by an independent
agency.
3. Crew Management
3.5. Crew Familiarisation
Chapter 1
3.5.1. Had the company developed an effective familiarisation program that covered the
Chapter 2
personal safety & professional responsibilities of all onboard personnel, including visitors &
Chapter 3 contractors, and were records to demonstrate that familiarisation completed as required?
Chapter 5 The Company should have procedures to define what familiarisation is required to be undertaken by each role
onboard, including visitors and contractors, and timeframe for completion.
Chapter 6
The procedures should define, and checklists for each person should record, the following:
Chapter 7
 The specific familiarisation tasks for crew, visitor or contractor to ensure they are familiar with general
Chapter 8 safety, emergency responsibilities and role specific duties.
 Which visitors and/or contractors are required to undertake familiarisation and any exceptions permitted.
Chapter 9
 The ship specific equipment that must be included in the familiarisation.
Chapter 10  The time frame by which each familiarisation task must be completed.
Chapter 11  The rank of person required to deliver the familiarisation and, where different, the rank of person required
to verify the effectiveness of the familiarisation delivered.
Chapter 12
Where crewmembers are on short contracts to same vessel, the familiarisation will define any exceptions
permitted for returning staff. In such cases, initial familiarisation records must support any abridged familiarisation
process.
64
5/27/2022
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
3.5.2. Were the Master, Officers and ratings familiar with ship’s LSA and FFE and, had ongoing
Chapter 2 onboard training and instruction taken place to maintain familiarity?
The Company should have procedures to ensure that:
Chapter 4
 Updated fire training manuals, fire safety operational booklets and lifesaving training manuals
Chapter 5 are provided in each crew messroom and recreation room, or each crew cabin.
Chapter 6  All LSA, including survival craft equipment, and FFA, including fixed firefighting installations,
is identified and included in the onboard training and instruction program.
Chapter 7
 Crew are familiarised with LSA & FFA by onboard training & instruction within 2 weeks of
Chapter 8 joining.
Chapter 9  All crew received further training / instruction in the use of each LSA & FFA every 2 months.
 Where a vessel is outfitted with davit-launched liferafts, training required every 4 months.
Chapter 10
 Where onboard training and instruction is carried out during routine fire & abandon drills, the
Chapter 11 LSA & FFA items covered are recorded in the drill record.
Chapter 12  A process is in place to track & record the training and instruction provided to crew for each
item of LSA & FFA provided onboard.
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
3.5.3. Had the Master and Navigation officers been familiarised with the ECDIS installed on board and
Chapter 2 were records of this familiarisation available?
ECDIS Training required by STCW: The STCW has requirements for training on ECDIS. In cases where it has
Chapter 4
not been completed, a limitation shall be included on the Certificate of Competency and endorsements.
Chapter 5 ECDIS Familiarisation
The Company must have procedures to ensure the Master and all watch officers are competent in the use of
Chapter 6
ECDIS installed on board prior to taking charge of a watch, which should include the:
Chapter 7  Time scale for familiarisation / Method(s) of familiarisation / Location of familiarisation, on board or ashore.
Chapter 8  Identity of the appropriately trained crew or training personnel authorised to deliver the familiarisation.
 Means of demonstrating competency upon completion of the familiarisation and before taking a watch.
Chapter 9
 Records to be maintained.
Chapter 10 The checklist to “ECDIS - Industry Recommendations for ECDIS Familiarisation" (NI) or an equivalent document
produced by the Company or maker may be utilised to demonstrate familiarisation.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12 Formal structured familiarisation is required and simply observing a more experienced officer is not acceptable.
The Company should have identified the principal method of delivering ECDIS familiarisation for the type of
ECDIS through the PIQ.
65
5/27/2022
3. Crew Management
Chapter 1
3.5.3. Had the Master and Navigation officers been familiarised with the ECDIS installed on board and
Chapter 2 were records of this familiarisation available?
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
• Review the company procedures that ensured the Master and all watchkeeping officers are
competent in the use of the type of ECDIS installed prior to taking a watch.
Chapter 7
• Review the onboard ECDIS familiarisation checklists for Master and deck officers.
Chapter 8
• Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with the onboard ECDIS by selecting at
Chapter 9 least 2 items from the onboard familiarisation checklist and requesting that they demonstrate
Chapter 10
the required actions/knowledge.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 4
Navigation and Communications
66
5/27/2022
4.1. Navigation Equipment
Chapter 1
4.1.1. Were the Master and Navigation officers familiar with the SMS procedures for the set up and
Chapter 2 operation of ECDIS units fitted to vessel and were records to demonstrate that the ECDIS had been
Chapter 3
operated in accordance with SMS procedures at all stages of a voyage?
Chapter 5 Where a vessel is fitted with an ECDIS, the Company should have procedures which include
appropriate checklists, to ensure that the unit(s) are operated and managed in accordance with the
Chapter 6 manufacturer’s instructions and industry best practice. The procedures should address:
Chapter 7  Display management.
Chapter 8  Alarm management.
 Creating and uploading passage plans.
Chapter 9
 Changing passage plans.
Chapter 10
 Recalling previous voyages.
Chapter 11  Route checking.
Chapter 12  Plotting manual fixes (visual bearing and radar range).
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The procedures should address:
Chapter 5
 Creating parallel index lines.
Chapter 6  Setting safety depths and safety contours as appropriate to draught of the vessel.
Chapter 7  Setting of safety frame/safety cone.
 AIS and or radar overlay, if fitted.
Chapter 8
 Limitations of operating in RCDS mode.
Chapter 9
 SCAMIN and how it is displayed.
Chapter 10  CATZOCs and how the information should be used in operation.
Chapter 11  Contingency action in case of single or multiple ECDIS failure.
 Updating software in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
Chapter 12
The Company should indicate whether ECDIS is the primary means of navigation through the PIQ. The
information provided will be inserted in the inspection editor and the final report.
67
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Chapter 5  Review the company procedures for ECDIS operation and management.
Chapter 6  Review the procedures to verify that the required safety settings meet industry standards.
 Review the setup of an ECDIS unit with the accompanying officer and verify that settings,
Chapter 7
alarms and displays were in accordance with the provided checklists and quick reference
Chapter 8 guides.
Chapter 9  Review the alarm history, if available, and identify whether alarms were being generated that
should have been addressed through proper set up and passage planning.
Chapter 10
 Where the vessel is fitted with additional ECDIS, verify that all units have been set up in an
Chapter 11 identical manner.
Chapter 12  Review navigational records and confirm that there was a process in place to verify the ECDIS
settings and record the outcome periodically throughout the voyage.
Chapter 1
4.1.2. Were the Master and Navigation officers familiar with the SMS procedures for managing and
Chapter 2 operating the radar/ARPA units fitted to vessel? Were records to demonstrate that the units had been
Chapter 3
operated & tested in accordance with the SMS procedures?
Chapter 5 SOLAS Chapter V Regulation 19 requires the following:

Chapter 6
(2.3.2) all ships of 300 gt and upwards, a 9 GHz radar.
Chapter 7 (2.5.5) all ships of 500 gt and upwards, an automatic tracking aid
Chapter 8 (2.7.1) all ships of 3,000 gt and upwards, a 3 GHz radar or, where considered appropriate by the Administration, a
second 9GHz radar.
Chapter 9
(2.7.2) all ships of 3,000 gt and upwards, a second automatic tracking aid
Chapter 10
(2.8.1) all ships of 10,000 gt and upwards, an ARPA or other means, to automatically plot the range and
Chapter 11 bearing of at least 20 other targets, connected to a device to indicate speed and distance through the water, to
determine collision risk and simulate trial manoeuvre.
Chapter 12
68
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 The Company should have procedures for the management and operation of the radar and ARPA fitted to vessel.
The procedures should define:
Chapter 6
When the radar/ARPA units are required to be in operation.
Chapter 7  When and how periodic performance checks are to be carried out and recorded.
Chapter 8  The required settings of ARPA audible and visual alarms and warnings for Closest Point of Approach
(CPA) and Bow Crossing Range (BCR) where fitted.
Chapter 9
 The required ARPA speed and heading input for collision avoidance purposes.
Chapter 10  The process for parallel indexing set-up & use – particularly for complex passages with multiple sets of
indexes.
Chapter 11
 The use of the ARPA trial manoeuvre function.
Chapter 12  The danger of displaying AIS data (vectors) on ARPA units for collision avoidance purposes.
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 The Company should have procedures for the management and operation of the radar and ARPA units fitted to
the vessel. The procedures should define:
Chapter 6
When the radar/ARPA units are required to be in operation.
Chapter 7  The effect of blind sectors and clutter suppression on the radar performance.
Chapter 8  Restrictions in the use of radar during cargo operations.
 The planned interval for changing the magnetron in 3 GHz and 9 GHz radars.
Chapter 9
The inspector should be aware of terminal/operational restrictions controlling the operation of the radar units
Chapter 10 during the inspection.
Chapter 11
The operator/vessel staff should establish what functionality can be demonstrated while the radar units are on
standby, particularly as it relates to the pre-programming of parallel indexing.
Chapter 12
69
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Review the procedures for managing and operating the radar/ARPA units fitted to the vessel.
Chapter 5  Where possible, review the ARPA alarm settings for CPA ,and BCR where fitted, and verify that they were
set in accordance with company procedures with the audible and visual alarms functioning.
Chapter 6
 Review the process for programming individual, and sets of parallel index lines into the radar and compare
Chapter 7 with the inbound passage plan to verify that the parallel indexing was used as indicated by the passage plan.
Chapter 8  Review onboard records and verify that the radars/ARPAs were in operation in accordance with company
procedures and performance checks were conducted as required with satisfactory results.
Chapter 9  Review the heading, speed and positional inputs to each radar and/or ARPA and verify that the information
Chapter 10
was consistent with the master equipment.
 Review the radar maintenance records and verify that the magnetrons for each radar had been changed in
Chapter 11 accordance with the required schedule.
Chapter 12  Verify that the accompanying navigation officer was aware of the difference in performance between X-band
(9 GHz) and S-band (3 GHz) radars, particularly the impact of environmental conditions on the performance
of each type.
Chapter 1
4.1.3. Were the Master and Navigation officers familiar with the SMS procedures for operating and
Chapter 2 testing the steering control systems fitted? Were records to demonstrate that operation and testing had
Chapter 3
been carried out in accordance with the procedures?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have procedures for the onboard management of the steering gear and control systems, which
Chapter 5 provided guidance on the following:
 The steering modes available for use which may include;
Chapter 6
o automatic steering.
Chapter 7 o track steering.
o hand steering.
Chapter 8
o remote conning position steering.
Chapter 9 o non-follow up steering.
 Changing between the steering modes available.
Chapter 10
 Limitations of and any restrictions imposed on any mode of steering. (speed, rudder limit, location etc.)
Chapter 11  The testing of steering control systems and power units prior to departure, prior to arrival and periodically during the
voyage.
Chapter 12
 Changing from one steering control system to another in the event of an alarm or failure.
 Actions required on the bridge to engage/permit remote emergency steering.
70
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
4.1.3. Were the Master and Navigation officers familiar with the SMS procedures for
Chapter 2
operating and testing the steering control systems fitted? Were records to demonstrate that
Chapter 3 operation and testing had been carried out in accordance with the procedures?
Chapter 5
Chapter 6  Sight, and where required review, the company procedure for managing, testing and operating
the steering control systems provided.
Chapter 7
 Review the records for the testing of steering control systems provided and verify that all steering
Chapter 8 modes had been tested from each location, as appropriate, as per the company procedure.
Chapter 9  Confirm that the procedure for changing over steering control systems and operating the em.
steering system were available and posted on the bridge, including the block diagram
Chapter 10
required.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
4.1.4. Were the Master and Navigation officers familiar with the SMS procedures for using
Chapter 2
the AIS? Were records to confirm that periodic checks & tests had been carried out in
Chapter 3 accordance with the procedures?
Chapter 5 The Company must have procedures for the effective onboard management of navigation
equipment, including AIS.
Chapter 6
The Company must have procedures for the operation and testing of AIS which include
Chapter 7 guidance on:
Chapter 8  AIS configuration.
Chapter 9  Static and dynamic data input.
 Periodic checks and performance tests.
Chapter 10
 The use of AIS data during collision avoidance.
Chapter 11
 Limitations for operating the unit during cargo operations.
Chapter 12  Switching the unit on and off.
71
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
4.1.5. Were the Master and Navigation officers familiar with the SMS procedure for the use
Chapter 2
of the BNWAS? Were records to demonstrate that it had been operated & tested in accordance
Chapter 3 with the procedure?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
The Company must have procedures to define:
Chapter 6
 When the BNWAS is required to be in operation.
Chapter 7  Who will activate the BNWAS and the process for doing so.
Chapter 8  How the system will be protected from unauthorised deactivation.
Chapter 9
 What to do if a BNWAS stage 2 or 3 alarm is activated.
 The periodic tests and checks required to verify correct functioning of the BNWAS.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
It is an OCIMF expectation that the BNWAS shall be activated at anchor in addition to while the
Chapter 12 vessel is at sea.
Chapter 1
4.1.5. Were the Master and Navigation officers familiar with the SMS procedure for the use
Chapter 2
of the BNWAS? Were records to demonstrate that it had been operated & tested in accordance
Chapter 3 with the procedure?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
 Sight, and where necessary review, the company procedure for operating and testing the
Chapter 7 BNWAS fitted to the vessel.
Chapter 8  Review vessel records and verify that the BNWAS had been operated and tested in
accordance with company procedure.
Chapter 9
 Request that the process for activating and deactivating the BNWAS is described or
Chapter 10 demonstrated.
Chapter 11  Verify that any tests required to confirm proper functioning of the BNWAS were understood
by the accompanying officer.
Chapter 12
72
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
4.1.6. Were the Master and navigation officers familiar with the company procedures
Chapter 2
governing the management and operation of the Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS)
Chapter 3 receivers fitted onboard and was the fitted equipment configured, used and checked in
accordance with the procedure?
Chapter 4
Chapter 6
The Company must have procedures for the effective onboard management of navigation
Chapter 7 equipment, including Global Navigation Satellite System receivers. The procedure must define:
Chapter 8  The configuration of the equipment.
Chapter 9  The periodic checks and performance tests to be conducted.
 Where more than one receiver is fitted, the process to switch the output from one receiver to
Chapter 10
another.
Chapter 11  The periodic checks to verify that all equipment is receiving an accurate positional input.
Chapter 12  The actions to take in the event of a single GNSS receiver failure.
 The actions to take in the event of multiple GNSS receiver failures.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
governing the management and operation of the Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS)
Chapter 3 receivers fitted onboard and was the fitted equipment configured, used and checked in
accordance with the procedure?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
 Review the procedure for GNSS receiver operation and management
Chapter 6
 Review the configuration of the GNSS receivers and verify that the settings were in
Chapter 7 accordance with the company procedures.
Chapter 8  Verify that the antenna offset data was available and had been correctly entered in the GNSS
receiver configuration.
Chapter 9
 Verify that the GNSS receiver(s) had been set to WGS84 datum.
Chapter 10
 Review onboard records to confirm that periodic checks and tests required to be carried out to
Chapter 11 the GNSS receivers had been completed as required.
Chapter 12
 Verify that the GNSS position feed to two or more navigational systems was correct.
 Verify that onboard instructions were posted for any GNSS receiver output inter-switch
arrangements.
73
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
4.1.7. Were the Master and navigation officers familiar with the company procedures for
Chapter 2
operating and managing the echo sounder and were records maintained to demonstrate that
Chapter 3 the equipment fitted to the vessel had been tested and operated in accordance with the
company expectations?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
The Company should have procedures for the effective onboard management of the echo sounder, or other
Chapter 6 electronic means to measure the depth of water, and the associated means to record depth history. The
procedure should define:
Chapter 7
 When the echo sounder is required to be in operation.
Chapter 8  Where forward and aft transducers were fitted to vessel, considerations for the set up & display of
information.
Chapter 9
 When the echo sounder recording device was required to be operational and any time/position marking
Chapter 10 necessary.
Chapter 11  Where a separate printer was provided, the times the printer is required to be recording.
 The criteria for the setting of the depth alarm – where fitted.
Chapter 12
 The requirements for periodic checks to confirm the proper functioning and accuracy of the echo sounder
when compared to water of a known depth.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
operating and managing the echo sounder and were records maintained to demonstrate that
Chapter 3 the equipment fitted to the vessel had been tested and operated in accordance with the
company expectations?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
Chapter 6  Sight, and where necessary review, the procedures for managing and operating the echo
Chapter 7
sounder and its associated recording device(s).
 Review a recent passage and verify that the echo sounder and its recording device were in
Chapter 8 use in accordance with company procedures.
 Review the depth alarm setting and verify that it was in accordance with company procedures for
Chapter 9
the time of the inspection or while manoeuvring to the berth.
Chapter 10  Review onboard records and confirm that the accuracy of the echo sounder had been confirmed
by periodic comparison in accordance with company procedures.
Chapter 11  Request that the accompanying navigation officer demonstrate that the echo sounder is
Chapter 12 showing the expected depth indication under the keel at the time of the inspection.
74
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
4.1.8. Were the Master and navigation officers familiar with the company procedures for the
Chapter 2
operation and testing of the speed and distance measuring devices fitted to the vessel and
Chapter 3 were records available to demonstrate that periodic tests had been completed as required by
the procedures?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
The Company should have procedures, taking into account manufacturer’s
Chapter 7 instructions, which defined:
Chapter 8  The periodic checks to verify the functionality of the speed and distance measuring
Chapter 9
devices fitted to the vessel.
 The periodic checks to verify that the speed output to remote displays and navigational
Chapter 10
equipment, such as ARPA, AIS and ECDIS, is accurate.
Chapter 11
 The speed input(s) required to be used for navigational equipment such as ARPA, AIS
Chapter 12 and ECDIS.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
operation and testing of the speed and distance measuring devices fitted to the vessel and
Chapter 3 were records available to demonstrate that periodic tests had been completed as required by
the procedures?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
 Review the procedures for the operation and testing of speed and distance measuring devices.
Chapter 6
 Verify that the speed outputs from the speed and distance measuring devices were being correctly displayed
Chapter 7 at each remote display.
 Verify that the water speed displayed by the ARPA & ECDIS units was consistent with the output from the
Chapter 8 water speed log.
Chapter 9  Where a dual axis doppler log was fitted, verify that the ground speed displayed by the ECDIS units was
consistent with output from the dual axis log.
Chapter 10  Verify that function and performance checks required by the company procedures had been completed as
required.
Chapter 11
 Verify that operational verification checks for the speed input to ARPA, AIS and ECDIS had been completed
Chapter 12 as required by the company procedures.
75
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
use and testing of the navigation lights and shapes, and was there evidence that the navigation
Chapter 3 lights had been tested to confirm full functionality and correct visibility?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have procedures to define the periodic checks and tests required to be carried out
Chapter 5 on the navigation lights, the navigation light controller & navigational shapes. The checks must include:
 Primary and secondary navigation lights are fully operational.
Chapter 6
 Primary and secondary power supplies to the navigational light controller are operational.
Chapter 7  Power supply failure alarm is operational.
Chapter 8
 Where LED lamps are fitted, they are within their usable lifespan for luminous intensity. This may be
achieved by integrated luminous intensity or usage monitoring systems with alarms or by manual
Chapter 9 recording of usage.
Chapter 10
 Adequate spare lamps are onboard meeting the navigation light manufacturer’s specification for
luminosity, or wattage, and focal plane.
Chapter 11  Required navigational shapes are onboard and in good condition (3 balls, 1 cylinder & 1 diamond)
Chapter 12  Portable navigation lights, where required to be carried, are in good working order and fitted with
the necessary lanyards to permit hoisting.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
use and testing of the navigation lights and shapes, and was there evidence that the navigation
Chapter 3 lights had been tested to confirm full functionality and correct visibility?
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Review the company procedures which defined the checks and tests that were required to be carried out on
Chapter 5
the navigation lights, navigation light controller and navigational shapes.
Chapter 6  Review the pre-departure, pre-arrival and daily navigational checklists and verify that navigation light checks
and tests had been completed as required by the company procedures.
Chapter 7
 Request that the navigation officer demonstrates the functionality of navigation light controller and lights.
Chapter 8  Review the inventory of spare navigation light lamps and verify that they conform to the manufacturer’s
specification and luminosity for each navigation light fitted to the vessel.
Chapter 9
 Review the method of ensuring LED lamps, if fitted, are within their usable lifespan for luminous intensity.
Chapter 10  Where possible, and safe to do so from the deck of the vessel, sight individual navigational lights and verify
Chapter 11
that the screens, lamps and lenses were in apparent good condition.
 Sight the navigational shapes and verify that they were in good condition.
Chapter 12
 Sight the portable navigation lights, where carried, and verify that they were in good condition and
functioning.
76
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
4.1.10. Were the Master and navigation officers familiar with the company procedure for
Chapter 2
managing Marine Safety Information broadcasts by NAVTEX and SafetyNET and were warnings
Chapter 3 affecting the vessel’s route plotted on the voyage charts?
The Company should have a procedure to require that the Marine Safety Information received through the
Chapter 5
NAVTEX and SafetyNet systems is promptly reviewed and, where appropriate, applied to the voyage charts
Chapter 6 and passage planning documentation.
Chapter 7 The procedure should define the process for:

 Setting up the NAVTEX and SafetyNET EGC receivers to receive Marine Safety Information broadcasts
Chapter 8
applicable to the vessel’s location and route.
Chapter 9  Reviewing incoming messages & transferring pertinent info to passage charts & documentation.
 Where information is transferred directly from NAVTEX to an ECDIS unit the process for identifying warnings
Chapter 10
that will affect the vessel’s route.
Chapter 11  Filing, retaining and disposing of Marine Safety Information broadcasts.
 Removing Marine Safety Information from electronic & paper charts once the warning has expired or
Chapter 12 cancelled.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
managing Marine Safety Information broadcasts by NAVTEX and SafetyNET and were warnings
Chapter 3 affecting the vessel’s route plotted on the voyage charts?
Chapter 5  Review the company procedure for managing Marine Safety Information received through
NAVTEX and SafetyNET.
Chapter 6
 Inspect the NAVTEX receiver and verify that it was correctly set to receive navigational
Chapter 7 warnings from relevant coast radio stations.
Chapter 8  Review the messages received through the NAVTEX and verify they were reviewed upon
receipt and, where applicable to vessel’s route, applied to the paper and / or electronic charts.
Chapter 9
 Inspect the SafetyNET EGC receiver and verify that it was set up to receive Marine Safety
Chapter 10 Information broadcasts for the correct NAVAREA and Coastal Warning Area.
Chapter 11  Verify that all current NAVAREA and Coastal Warning Area warnings were available
onboard and, where applicable to the vessel’s route, applied to the paper and/or electronic
Chapter 12
charts.
77
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
preserving data from the VDR/S-VDR and were records available to demonstrate that tests of
Chapter 3 the equipment had been completed as required?
The Company should have procedures which ensure that:
Chapter 5 • The VDR / S-VDR is subject to an annual performance test by an approved testing or servicing facility.
Chapter 6 • The VDR / S-VDR is tested as per maker's instruction after any upgrade, maintenance or repair of the
VDR / S-VDR itself.
Chapter 7
• The VDR / S-VDR is tested as per maker's instruction after any upgrade, maintenance or repair of
Chapter 8 navigational or communications equipment providing data feeds.
Chapter 9 • Instructions are posted near to VDR / S-VDR controls for preserving data to prevent it being overwritten.
• The circumstances in which VDR / S-VDR data is to be preserved to capture any data that may be of
Chapter 10
value to incident investigation irrespective of whether the incident related to navigational situations.
Chapter 11 The Company should have declared the period that the long-term storage within the VDR or S-VDR retains
data before being overwritten through the PIQ. This information will be inserted in the final report.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
preserving data from the VDR/S-VDR and were records available to demonstrate that tests of
Chapter 3 the equipment had been completed as required?
Chapter 5
 Review the company procedure which governed the setup, use and testing of the VDR / S-VDR
Chapter 6 system fitted onboard the vessel.
Chapter 7  Verify that instructions for saving and preserving data were posted near the VDR / S-VDR controls.
Chapter 8  Verify that the annual performance testing of VDR / S-VDR had been completed in accordance
with company procedure.
Chapter 9
 Verify that the VDR / S-VDR had been tested as per maker's instruction after any upgrade,
Chapter 10 maintenance or repair of the VDR / S-VDR itself.
Chapter 11
 Verify that the VDR / S-VDR had been tested as per maker's instruction after any upgrade,
maintenance or repair of navigational or communications equipment providing data feeds.
Chapter 12
 Verify that the data retention period for the long-term storage stated in the PIQ was correct.
78
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
relating to the magnetic and gyro compasses carried onboard, and were records available to
Chapter 3 demonstrate their accuracy and reliability?
Chapter 5
 Standard magnetic, gyro and GNSS compasses carried onboard are properly maintained and serviced.
Chapter 6  Heading info for each compass is frequently checked through terrestrial, celestial and/or comparative
observation.
Chapter 7
 Frequent checks are made for heading accuracy output to all navigational equipment.
Chapter 8  A record of error for each compass is maintained
Chapter 9  An up to date deviation card is available on the bridge for the standard magnetic compass.
 The standard magnetic compass is adjusted when;
Chapter 10
o the deviation consistently exceeds a defined value,
Chapter 11 o becomes unreliable,
Chapter 12
o suffers damage,
o records of compass error have not been maintained over the preceding 2 years.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
relating to the magnetic and gyro compasses carried onboard, and were records available to
Chapter 3 demonstrate their accuracy and reliability?
Chapter 5  Review the company procedures for standard, gyro and GNSS compass management
as applicable.
Chapter 6
 Inspect the various compasses and repeaters and verify that the heading output is
Chapter 7
consistent, and illumination is functional.
Chapter 8  Review the deviation card and compass error records and verify that the company
Chapter 9 expectation for compass adjustment had been complied with.
Chapter 10  Review the service records for the gyro compass(s) and verify that servicing had
been carried out in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
79
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
operation and testing of the VHF/DSC transceivers fitted to the vessel, and were records
Chapter 3 available to demonstrate that periodic tests and checks had been completed in accordance
with company expectations?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
The Company should have procedures which define how the VHF/DSC equipment fitted to vessel will be
Chapter 6 used, operated and tested. These procedures may include:
 The VHF frequencies and/or channels that must be monitored on a continuous basis while the vessel is at
Chapter 7
sea and/or at anchor.
Chapter 8  The periodic checks and tests to be carried out to verify that the VHF/DSC equipment is fully functional.
 The record-keeping requirements for the routine and emergency use of the VHF/DSC equipment.
Chapter 9
 The company expectations regarding radio etiquette when using the VHF/DSC equipment.
Chapter 10  The use of VHF and compliance with the COLREG.
Chapter 11  The need to identify any VHF units not connected to the VDR and any restrictions on their use for critical
communications.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
operation and testing of the VHF/DSC transceivers fitted to the vessel, and were records
Chapter 3 available to demonstrate that periodic tests and checks had been completed in accordance
with company expectations?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
Chapter 6  Review the company procedures for the use and operation of the VHF/DSC equipment fitted to the vessel.
 Review the records for the testing of the VHF/DSC equipment and verify that the equipment was tested and
Chapter 7
found functional in accordance with company expectations.
Chapter 8  Review the GMDSS Radio Log Book or other operational records for the previous voyage and verify that the
appropriate VHF channels were being monitored and records were being maintained of all significant
Chapter 9
communications as defined by the company procedure.
Chapter 10  Review the data inputs to the VHF/DSC equipment and verify that the static data was correctly programmed,
and the dynamic data was being correctly received from external feeds.
Chapter 11
 Interview the accompanying navigation officer to verify their understanding of the company procedure and
Chapter 12 Master’s standing orders relating to the use of VHF radio in collision avoidance situations.
80
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
testing and using the daylight signalling lamp?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
Chapter 5 The Company should have navigational procedures which define:

Chapter 6  The company expectations for preventing the risk of collision and the means at the
disposal of the navigation officer to attract the attention of another vessel in
Chapter 7
accordance with the COLREG.
Chapter 8
 The checks and tests required to be undertaken to ensure all navigation equipment
Chapter 9 is available for immediate use including the daylight signalling lamp and its battery.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
testing and using the daylight signalling lamp?
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
 Review the procedure which defined the company expectations when attracting the
attention of another vessel in a collision avoidance situation.
Chapter 6
 Review that bridge equipment testing records and verify that the daylight signalling
Chapter 7 lamp had been periodically tested in accordance with company expectations.
Chapter 8  Test the daylight signalling lamp on both battery and mains power and verify that the unit
Chapter 9 is fully functional.
 Check the availability of spare bulbs and verify that at least three spare bulbs are
Chapter 10
available that comply with the manufacturer’s specifications.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
81
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
use and testing of the sound signaling equipment fitted to the vessel and were records
Chapter 3 available to confirm that periodic tests had been completed and the equipment used in
accordance with company expectations?
Chapter 4
Chapter 6 The Company should have procedures to define:

Chapter 7  The expected use of the vessel’s sound signalling equipment to comply with the COLREGs in
or near an area of restricted visibility, during collision avoidance and while manoeuvring.
Chapter 8
 The Bridge Log Book entries or checklists that will be used to confirm that sound signalling
Chapter 9 equipment was used in compliance with the COLREGs and company expectations during
restricted visibility.
Chapter 10
 The periodic tests required to be conducted to verify the effectiveness of the sound signalling
Chapter 11 equipment, including automation, provided to the vessel.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
use and testing of the sound signalling equipment fitted to the vessel and were records
Chapter 3 available to confirm that periodic tests had been completed and the equipment used in
accordance with company expectations?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
Chapter 6  Review the company procedures which defined the expected use and testing of the sound signalling
equipment fitted to the vessel.
Chapter 7
 Review the bridge equipment testing records and verify that periodic tests had been completed to confirm
Chapter 8 the functionality of whistles, bells & gongs and, their automation, to conform to requirements of COLREGs.
Chapter 9  Review the Bridge Log Book and/or checklists for restricted visibility (BPG checklist B13 or equivalent) to
identify any recent period of restricted visibility whilst the vessel was underway or at anchor and verify that
Chapter 10 sound signals were recorded as being sounded as required by the COLREGs.
Chapter 11
The inspector will only be required to look back through records for the previous month to confirm that sound
Chapter 12 signals had been made during restricted visibility.
82
5/27/2022
4.2. Navigational Procedures
Chapter 1
4.2.1. Were the Master and navigating officers familiar with the company passage planning
Chapter 2
procedures and had all voyages been appraised, planned, executed and monitored in
Chapter 3 accordance with company procedures, industry best practice and both local and international
rules?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 The Company should have procedures to ensure that onboard staff appraise, plan, execute and monitor all passages
from berth to berth in accordance with international/local rules & industry best practice. The procedures must define:
Chapter 6 • The format of passage plan and the min. information that must be included which should include, but not be limited to:
Chapter 7
o Parallel indexing (not from floating objects unless they have first been checked for position).
o Chart changes.
Chapter 8 o Methods and frequency of position fixing and/or position verification.
o Prominent navigation and radar marks.
Chapter 9
o No-go areas.
Chapter 10 o Landfall targets and lights.
o Clearing lines and bearings.
Chapter 11
o Transits, heading marks and leading lines.
Chapter 12 o Significant tides or current.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
rules?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 • The format of the passage plan and the min. info that must be included which should include, but not be limited to:
o Safe speed and necessary speed alterations.
Chapter 6 o Changes in machinery space status, i.e. manned/unmanned.
Chapter 7 o Changes in machinery status, i.e. standby for manoeuvring.

o Changes in bridge watch composition.
Chapter 8 o Changes to fuel and/or scrubber use.
o Changes in security arrangements.
Chapter 9
o Minimum UKC.
Chapter 10 o Positions where the echo sounder must be activated.
o Crossing and high-density traffic areas.
Chapter 11
o Safe distance off navigational hazards or marks.
Chapter 12 o Anchor clearance.
o Contingency plans.
83
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
rules?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 • The format of passage plan & the minimum info that must be included which should include, but not be limited to:
o Abort positions - VTS and reporting points, etc. - Air draught when passing under bridges/power lines/cable cars
Chapter 6
etc. - Alternative or contingency routing that may be required at short notice.
Chapter 7  Specific guidance provided by local routing publications where applicable to the vessel and its route. The process to
verify that all navigational and environmental considerations have been included in the final passage plan.
Chapter 8  The review and approval process for a passage plan including utilising the ECDIS route checking function.
Chapter 9  The record keeping requirements as they relate to the progress of the passage and navigational events.
 The actions to take to update the passage plan when circumstances change requiring the vessel to deviate from the
Chapter 10 originally agreed plan.
 The requirement for preparing the passage plan on both paper charts and ECDIS where vessel has a single ECDIS
Chapter 11 unit or has nominated paper charts as the primary means of navigation. The requirement for a passage plan briefing
including the Master, all navigation officers and a representative from the engineering department.
Chapter 12
A vessel should be expected to deviate from the planned passage to the extent necessary to safely comply with the
collision regulations. Due consideration must be given to such when appraising the passage and developing the plan to
ensure that there is adequate sea room, and the watch conditions are appropriate.
Chapter 1
4.2.1. Were the Master and navigating officers familiar with the company passage planning procedures and
Chapter 2 had all voyages been appraised, planned, executed and monitored in accordance with company
Chapter 3
procedures, industry best practice and both local and international rules?

 Review the passage planning procedure.
Chapter 5  Review the company record keeping procedures as they relate to navigational activities.
Chapter 6  Review a recent passage plan and verify that it was in the format defined by the company passage planning procedure and
contained, as a minimum, the information identified by the company procedure.
Chapter 7  Review the same passage plan on the paper and/or electronic charts and verify that the information required to be displayed
in accordance with the company passage planning procedure had been included.
Chapter 8  Review the records for the same passage and verify that the records maintained contained the information required to be
recorded in accordance with the company passage planning procedure.
Chapter 9  Verify that where two ECDIS units are fitted, both units had been loaded with the passage plan.
Chapter 10  Verify that route checking and scanning had been carried out utilising the ECDIS route checking function or in the case of
paper charts, manually, prior to commencing a voyage and at any time changes had been made to the approved plan.
Chapter 11  Verify that a passage plan briefing had been attended by the Master, all navigation officers and a member of the engineering
department prior to commencing a voyage or, prior to each significant portion of a voyage.
Chapter 12
When reviewing the frequency of manually applied position fixing on an ECDIS equipped vessel, be guided by the frequency
defined by the vessel operator within their navigation procedures.
84
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
4.2.2. Were the Master and navigation officers familiar with the company under keel
Chapter 2
clearance (UKC) policy and procedure, and were records available to demonstrate that the
Chapter 3 required calculations had been completed at the appropriate points during each voyage and
the vessel had remained in compliance with the UKC policy?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
Chapter 6 The Company should have an UKC policy and procedure which defined:
Chapter 7
 The minimum dynamic UKC required to be maintained;
Chapter 8
o During open sea passage.
Chapter 9 o During coastal / restricted waters passage.
Chapter 10 o Within port limits.
o While alongside.
Chapter 11
o While at SBM/CBM berths.
Chapter 12 o At anchor.
Chapter 1
4.2.2. Were the Master and navigation officers familiar with the company UKC policy and
Chapter 2
procedure, and were records available to demonstrate that the required calculations had been
Chapter 3 completed at the appropriate points during each voyage and the vessel had remained in
compliance with the UKC policy?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
The Company should have an UKC policy and procedure which defined:
Chapter 6
 The factors to be considered when calculating and evaluating UKC, which should include;
Chapter 7
o The predicted height of the tide.
Chapter 8 o Changes in the predicted tidal height, which may be caused by wind speed and direction and/or high or
low barometric pressure.
Chapter 9 o Nature and stability of the bottom e.g. sand waves, siltation etc.
Chapter 10 o Accuracy of hydrographic data (references to reliability are often included on charts or in the form of
CATZOC on ENCs).
Chapter 11 o Change of water density and the corresponding increase in draught.
Chapter 12 o The vessel's size and handling characteristics and the increase in draught due to heel.
o Wave response allowance, which is the vertical displacement of the hull due to heave, roll and pitch
motions.
85
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 6
 The factors to be considered when calculating and evaluating UKC, which should include;
Chapter 7 o The reliability of draught observations and calculations, including estimates of hogging and sagging.
Chapter 8
o Reduced depths over pipelines and other obstructions.
o The predicted increase in draught due to squat (Squat information relevant to the vessel for both loaded
Chapter 9 and ballast passages should be readily available on the bridge).
 When UKC calculations are to be completed.
Chapter 10
 The method of calculating and documenting the calculations performed.
Chapter 11  Where the results of the UKC calculations must be communicated, e.g., Master/pilot information exchange.
Chapter 12  Where the results of the UKC calculations shall be used, i.e. ECDIS depth or echo sounder alarm settings.
 The need to update UKC calculations to reflect the new predicted time of passing over critical hydrographic
features where a passage is delayed.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 4

Chapter 7  The actions to be taken when the required UKC could not be maintained at all stages of a planned
voyage.
Chapter 8
 The required action where an external party requires an UKC in excess of the company
Chapter 9 requirement.
Chapter 10
The Company should have declared the required min. required UKC applicable to vessel within
Chapter 11 the PIQ. This info will be inserted in inspection editor and the final report.
Chapter 12
86
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 4

Chapter 6
 Review the UKC policy and procedure and verify that the values uploaded to the pre-inspection
Chapter 7
questionnaire were accurate.
Chapter 8  Review the UKC calculations for a recent voyage and verify that all factors required to be
Chapter 9
considered by the company procedure had been included in the calculation and evaluation and
that the resulting UKC complied with company expectations.
Chapter 10  Review the voyage records, including echo sounder printer or electronic records, for the same
Chapter 11 voyage and verify that the calculations were completed for the time that the vessel passed over
the critical hydrographic features.
Chapter 12
 Review a recent Master/Pilot information exchange checklist and verify that the UKC information
had been recorded in accordance with company expectations.
Chapter 1
4.2.3. Had the Master prepared Master's Standing Orders, supplemented by Daily Orders,
Chapter 2
which emphasised and reinforced the company expectations with regards to navigational
Chapter 3 requirements including restricted visibility, CPA/BCR and minimum passing distance from
navigational dangers and navigational aids and, if so, had all navigation officers signed to
Chapter 4
acknowledge their understanding of the same?
Chapter 6
The Company should have a procedure which required the Master to issue Master’s Standing Orders, giving
Chapter 7 guidance on the mandatory and desirable content. The Master’s Standing Orders should be prepared and signed
by the Master upon appointment to the vessel and signed for understanding by each navigation officer when they
Chapter 8 join the vessel and before undertaking their first navigation duties.
Chapter 9
The orders, as written, should reference company navigational procedures and identify any circumstances
Chapter 10 where the Master wishes his instructions to be stricter than the company requirement documented within the
SMS. The content should include, but not be limited to:
Chapter 11  Defining restricted visibility and the actions to be taken by the officer of the watch upon encountering it.
 Defining the minimum Closest Point of Approach (CPA) and Bow Crossing Range (BCR) acceptable during
Chapter 12
normal* navigational watches and the actions to be taken if these cannot be maintained.
87
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 4
Chapter 6  The minimum passing distance to navigational dangers and/or navigational aids during normal*
navigational watches and the actions to be taken if these cannot be maintained.
Chapter 7
 Defining how the alarms and layers for use with ECDIS/ECS are required to be set, checked
Chapter 8 and in what circumstances they may be changed.
 The hazards and limitations of reliance on AIS and VHF in collision avoidance situations.
Chapter 9
 Calling the Master.
Chapter 10
 The process of the Master taking over the con of the vessel.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
*Normal navigational watches are when the Master or his deputy, as defined by the company, are
not required to be on the bridge as part of the official bridge team composition.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 4
Chapter 5

Chapter 7
• The SMS procedures should require supplementary orders to be issued by the Master each day in
Chapter 8
a Bridge Order Book to cover periods when the Master may be resting or otherwise engaged.
Chapter 9 • The daily orders should also be used to give additional instruction relevant to the operation of the
vessel in the short term and prior to the next time the Master expects to be present or to provide
Chapter 10
further instructions.
Chapter 11 • These orders should be signed by each OOW when taking over a watch, to confirm that they have
Chapter 12 read, understood and will comply with the orders.
88
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Inspector Actions
Chapter 6  Review the procedure which defined the requirement for Master to prepare Master's Standing Orders and
Daily Orders.
Chapter 7
 Review the Master’s Standing Orders and verify that:
Chapter 8 o They included the content defined by the company procedure.
Chapter 9 o They defined what constituted restricted visibility.
o They defined the minimum CPA and BCR permitted during normal* navigational watches.
Chapter 10 o They defined the minimum passing distance from navigational dangers and / or navigational hazards
during normal* navigational watches.
Chapter 11
o They defined how the alarms and layers for use with ECDIS/ECS are required to be set and checked,
Chapter 12 and in what circumstances they can be changed.
o They contained guidance on the hazards and limitations of reliance on AIS and VHF in collision
avoidance situations.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Inspector Actions
Chapter 6  Review the Master’s Standing Orders and verify that:
o They defined the circumstances in which the Master must be called.
Chapter 7
o They defined the process by which the Master would take over the con on the vessel.
Chapter 8 o They had been signed and dated by the existing Master upon being assigned to the vessel, or at later
revision.
Chapter 9
o They had been signed by each navigation officer on joining the vessel and before taking any
Chapter 10 navigational duties.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
89
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Inspector Actions
Chapter 6
 Review the Bridge Order Book and verify that:
Chapter 7 o Entries had been made by the Master at least daily.
Chapter 8 o Information was entered which was consistent with the operation and voyage of the vessel such as
preparations for approaching critical areas due to piracy concerns, fishing vessel activity, increased traffic
Chapter 9 density or expected deteriorations in weather conditions.
Chapter 10 o Each entry had been dated, timed and signed by the Master.
o The entries had been signed for understanding by each navigation officer prior to taking their watch.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
4.2.4. Were the Master and navigation officers familiar with the company electronic chart management
Chapter 2 procedures and were onboard ENCs and RNCs managed, corrected and used appropriately?
The Company should have procedures to manage the procurement and updating of Electronic Navigation Charts
Chapter 4 (ENCs) and Raster Navigation Charts (RNCs) to ensure compliance with the SOLAS carriage of nautical publications
requirements. The procedure should define:
Chapter 5
Chapter 6  Which electronic charts must be available on board the vessel at all times.
 The process to determine which electronic charts must be available on board for a voyage.
Chapter 7  How to obtain or update chart permits to ensure the electronic charts required to be carried by the company or
for use during a voyage are available onboard and remain valid throughout a proposed voyage.
Chapter 8  How to track which charts have current permits.
 How to obtain electronic chart corrections and apply them to available charts.
Chapter 9  How to track or view the electronic chart update history to verify that each ENC is fully corrected.
 How to manage passage planning and monitoring where full ENC coverage is not available.
Chapter 10
 How to manage Temporary and Preliminary (T&P) notices applicable to ENCs or RNCs.
Chapter 11
The procedures may refer to instructions provided by a third-party supplier but the procedures must define all
Chapter 12 necessary steps and record-keeping requirements to ensure that the management of electronic charts is complete.
90
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
4.2.4. Were the Master and navigation officers familiar with the company electronic chart management
Chapter 2 procedures and were onboard ENCs and RNCs managed, corrected and used appropriately?
Chapter 4  Confirm the primary means of navigation as declared in the PIQ was correctly stated.
 Review the procedure for managing, ordering and updating ENCs and RNCs.
Chapter 5
 Review the onboard electronic chart management system for ENC and RNC and verify that the charts
Chapter 6 required for the previous voyage were available and permitted for use on each ECDIS.
 Verify that where RNCs had been used;
Chapter 7
o The ECDIS had been used in RCDS mode.
Chapter 8 o That ENCs were not available for the area.
o That fully corrected paper charts were also available and in use.
Chapter 9
 Review the chart update records and verify that each ENC and RNC in use for navigation had been
Chapter 10 maintained up to date to the most recently published Notices to Mariners, including T&P corrections.
 Review an individual ENC or RNC from the previous voyage which was identified as being affected by a
Chapter 11 T&P correction and verify that the correction was shown in the appropriate location.
Chapter 12  Request the accompanying Officer to demonstrate how T&P notices were applied:
o Manually - By use of an overlay - Incorporated as part of the update of ENC database. (CAES and CEES
S93 charts).
Chapter 1
4.2.5. Were the Master and navigation officers familiar with the company paper chart
Chapter 2
management procedures and were onboard paper charts managed, corrected and used
Chapter 3 appropriately?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
Where a vessel carries paper charts to comply with the carriage of charts and nautical publications regulations,
Chapter 5 to mitigate gaps in ENC coverage, or for any other reason where paper charts will be used for navigational
purposes, the Company should have procedures to ensure that the paper charts are the latest edition and fully
Chapter 6 corrected before use. The procedure should define the process for:
Chapter 7
 Correctly identifying the paper charts required for an intended voyage.
Chapter 8  Ensuring paper charts required for an intended voyage are corrected prior to commencing passage
planning.
Chapter 9
 Tracking the correction status of paper charts not in use.
Chapter 10  Managing Temporary and Preliminary (T&P) notices.
 Procuring new editions and additional paper charts.
Chapter 11
 The actions to be taken when directed to a port where appropriate paper charts are not onboard.
Chapter 12  Obtaining weekly and cumulative Notices to Mariners.
 Replacing damaged or worn paper charts.
91
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
4.2.5. Were the Master and navigation officers familiar with the company paper chart
Chapter 2
management procedures and were onboard paper charts managed, corrected and used
Chapter 3 appropriately?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
Chapter 6  Review the procedures for paper chart management.

Chapter 7  Review the paper chart portfolio records and verify that all paper charts onboard were listed with
their edition date.
Chapter 8
 Review a recent passage plan and verify that paper charts used for the voyage were fully
Chapter 9 corrected by spot sampling at least two charts.
Chapter 10  Verify that applicable T&P corrections and NAVTEX and NAVAREA warnings had been applied to
the paper charts used and that a system existed to remove them once they were cancelled.
Chapter 11
 Verify that all paper charts, including the largest scale charts applicable to the passage
Chapter 12 reviewed, were available onboard and had been used for navigation.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
testing the navigational equipment, main propulsion, steering gear and thrusters prior to use
Chapter 3 and prior to critical phases of a passage or operation and, did checklists or logbook entries
confirm the required tests had been completed as required?
Chapter 4
Chapter 6 The Company should have procedures which require navigational and manoeuvring equipment to
Chapter 7 be functionally tested at defined points prior to, and during, a passage or operation.
Chapter 8 The procedures should define the extent of the testing required to be carried out based on
Chapter 9 regulation, local rules, risk assessment and the vessel’s operation at the time of the required test.
Chapter 10 The Company should have developed checklists, adapted to reflect the equipment and systems
Chapter 11 fitted to the vessel, to ensure that comprehensive tests are carried out systematically.
Chapter 12 Where a Company had developed its procedures based on an administrative waiver of repetitive
steering tests, documented evidence of such a waiver should be available onboard.
92
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
4.2.6. Were the Master and navigation officers familiar with the company procedures for testing the
Chapter 2 navigational equipment, main propulsion, steering gear and thrusters prior to use and prior to critical
Chapter 3
phases of a passage or operation and, did checklists or logbook entries confirm the required tests had
been completed as required?
Chapter 5  Review the procedures which defined the requirement for testing navigational and manoeuvring equipment.
 Verify that the vessel operator had provided vessel specific checklists to address the following:
Chapter 6 o Steering Gear Test Routines (modelled on BPG B1 and supporting notes).
Chapter 7 o Preparations for Sea (modelled on BPG B6 and supporting notes).
o Preparations for Arrival (modelled on BPG B7 and supporting notes).
Chapter 8  Review completed checklists for the testing of navigational equipment and manoeuvring machinery to verify that
testing during a recent passage or, sequence of operations, had been performed as per the company procedures.
Chapter 9
 Verify that where a vessel was operating under an administrative waiver to conduct steering gear tests on a weekly
Chapter 10 basis, rather that prior to each departure, that the waiver was available onboard.
 Verify that any defects, detected in either navigational equipment or manoeuvring machinery during the required
Chapter 11 testing processes, had been followed up through the onboard defect reporting system.
 Review an individual checklist with the accompanying navigation officer to verify that they were familiar with
Chapter 12
individual checks or tests that were required to be carried out.
Chapter 1
4.2.7. Were the Master and navigation officers familiar with the company procedure for the
Chapter 2
carriage and management of nautical publications and was evidence available to demonstrate
Chapter 3 that publications had been managed in accordance with the procedure?
Chapter 5
The Company should have procedures that identified which mandatory and discretionary nautical
Chapter 6 publications were required to be carried on board and the process for updating them to the latest
Chapter 7 information or edition available.
Chapter 8 Where regulations allow for the carriage of mandatory publications in electronic format the
Chapter 9 procedure should indicate how backup provisions were to be provided onboard.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
93
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
4.2.7. Were the Master and navigation officers familiar with the company procedure for the
Chapter 2
carriage and management of nautical publications and was evidence available to demonstrate
Chapter 3 that publications had been managed in accordance with the procedure?
Chapter 5
 Review the procedure for managing, ordering and updating nautical publications.
Chapter 6  Verify that the procedure had defined which nautical publications were required to be carried,
Chapter 7
whether in hard or electronic form, and identified both mandatory and discretionary titles.
 Review the onboard nautical publication management system and verify that latest editions of
Chapter 8 nautical publications were available on board and that they had been maintained up to date.
 Verify that nautical publications carried in the electronic format required to comply with SOLAS
Chapter 9
Regulation 27 were acceptable to the flag and that the required back up provision were in place.
Chapter 10 (as indicated on the Safety Equipment Certificate Form E).
 Verify that nautical publications required to be carried in hard copy, such as the International
Chapter 11
Code of Signals and the IAMSAR Manual, were onboard.
Chapter 12
4.3. Bridge and Machinery Space Team Management
Chapter 1
4.3.1. Were the Master and navigation officers familiar with the company procedures defining the
Chapter 2 minimum bridge team composition and engine room operating mode and were records available to
Chapter 3
demonstrate that recent voyages had been planned and executed in accordance with company
expectations?
Chapter 5 The Company should have procedures which consider the areas within which a ship will operate and define:
 The minimum required bridge team composition considering the proximity of the vessel to navigational
Chapter 6
hazards, traffic density, weather conditions, and state of visibility.
Chapter 7  The minimum required bridge team composition for activities such as sitting at anchor, drifting, “at sea” STS
operations, DP cargo operations or underway stores / personnel transfer operations.
Chapter 8
 The role of each bridge team member for each defined bridge team composition.
Chapter 9  The circumstances in which the helm will be manned.
Chapter 10  The circumstances in which the officer of the watch may be the sole lookout.
 The substitution of the Master during prolonged periods of enhanced bridge team composition.
Chapter 11
 The operational status of the machinery space considering the proximity of the vessel to navigational
Chapter 12 hazards, traffic density, weather conditions and state of visibility.
94
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
expectations?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
The Company should have procedures which consider the areas within which a ship will operate and define:
Chapter 6  The passage planning requirement to identify the anticipated change in bridge team composition and
machinery space status and, when manned, the requirement to be on standby for manoeuvring.
Chapter 7
 The requirement to record when the bridge team composition changes from one defined level to another.
Chapter 8  The requirement to record when the machinery space status changes from unattended to attended and
when the machinery space is on standby for manoeuvring.
Chapter 9
Chapter 10 When determining the bridge team composition, careful consideration should be given to non-navigational
Chapter 11
activities to ensure that the bridge team is never degraded by duties such as escorting the pilot to the
embarkation station or the completion of administrative tasks.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
expectations?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
 Review the company procedures which define the bridge and machinery space team compositions.
Chapter 6  Review a recent passage plan and verify that the anticipated changes in bridge team composition and
machinery space operating status had been identified and documented in alignment with the company
Chapter 7
procedure.
Chapter 8  Review the records for the same voyage and verify;
o That the bridge team composition and machinery space operating mode had been maintained in
Chapter 9 accordance with the passage plan.
Chapter 10 o That the helm had been operated in manual mode in accordance with company procedures.
o That the bridge team composition had been adapted to address changes in visibility or other
Chapter 11 environmental conditions.
Chapter 12 o The actual bridge team composition at any stage of the voyage was appropriate to the proximity of the
vessel to navigational hazards, traffic density weather conditions, and state of visibility.
95
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
4.3.2. Were the engineer officers familiar with the company procedures defining machinery space
Chapter 2 operating mode and, where required to be attended, the machinery space team composition during the
Chapter 3
various stages of a voyage, and were records available to confirm the machinery space had been operated
accordingly?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 The vessel operator should have developed procedures which defined:
 The circumstances in which the machinery space may be operated in the unattended mode.
Chapter 6  Where the machinery space is required to be attended, the required machinery space team composition
considering proximity to navigational hazards, traffic density and the state of visibility.
Chapter 7
 The minimum engine room manning requirements for activities such as drifting, “at sea” STS operations,
Chapter 8 Dynamically Positioned (DP) cargo operations or underway stores / personnel transfer operations.
 When the machinery space is required to be attended for navigational safety, the role of each machinery
Chapter 9
space team member.
Chapter 10  The substitution of the Chief Engineer during prolonged periods of enhanced machinery space team
composition.
Chapter 11  The record keeping requirements for the change of machinery space status and/or machinery space team
composition.
Chapter 12
 The communication of the required machinery space status and/or manning level to the engineer officers at
the passage planning stage and daily.
Chapter 1
4.3.2. Were the engineer officers familiar with the company procedures defining machinery space
Chapter 2 operating mode and, where required to be attended, the machinery space team composition during the
Chapter 3
various stages of a voyage, and were records available to confirm the machinery space had been operated
accordingly?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5  Sight, and where necessary review, the company procedure which defined the required machinery space
Chapter 6
operating mode for the various stages of a voyage.
 Sight, and where necessary review, the company procedure which defined the machinery space team
Chapter 7 composition considering the proximity to navigational hazards, the traffic density and the state of visibility
and other operations such as drifting, “at sea” STS operations, Dynamically Positioned (DP) cargo
Chapter 8
operations or underway stores / personnel transfer operations.
Chapter 9  Review the Engine Room Log Book for a recent voyage, including periods at anchor, to verify that the
machinery space was attended, when required, with the appropriate team composition in accordance with
Chapter 10
the company procedure.
Chapter 11  Review the Engine Room Daily Order Book to verify that the anticipated times of changing the status of the
machinery space from unattended to attended had been communicated to the engine room staff.
Chapter 12
96
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
4.3.3. Were the Master and navigation officers familiar with the company procedures for integrating a
Chapter 2 pilot (or similar role*) into the bridge team and were records available to demonstrate that the process had
Chapter 3
been followed?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The vessel operator should have developed a procedure to ensure the pilot (or similar role*) is integrated into
Chapter 5 the bridge team and that specific information is documented and discussed prior to any transfer of conn or
responsibility takes place. The information should include but not be limited to:
Chapter 6
 The vessel particulars and manoeuvring characteristics.
Chapter 7  The planned passage.
 The review of the ECDIS and the status of safety depth alarms and layers in use.
Chapter 8
 The use of any navigational aids provided by the pilot.
Chapter 9  Mooring and/or anchoring requirements.
 Towage and/or tug assistance.
Chapter 10
 Under keel clearance.
Chapter 11  Relevant defects and/or constraints.
Chapter 12 The Master/Pilot exchange should be documented, discussed and agreed before any transfer of conn or
responsibility takes place. The Master/Pilot exchange should be repeated whenever there is a change of pilot.
Chapter 1
4.3.3. Were the Master and navigation officers familiar with the company procedures for integrating a
Chapter 2 pilot (or similar role*) into the bridge team and were records available to demonstrate that the process had
Chapter 3
been followed?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
Chapter 5 The vessel should utilise checklists which have been adapted to the specific needs of the company and vessel
type, and which were aligned with:
Chapter 6
ICS Bridge Procedures Guide – Annex 3 - Checklists
Chapter 7
Chapter 8  A1 Master/Pilot Information Exchange

 A2 Pilot Card
Chapter 9
The vessel should record the time of completion of the Master/Pilot information exchange, and where different,
Chapter 10
the time of the transfer of the conn between the Master and Pilot. The time of the transfer of the conn between
Chapter 11 Pilots and, as applicable, between the Pilot and Master on an outbound passage should also be recorded.
Chapter 12 *Similar role: Mooring Master, Lightering Master, Marine Advisor, Deep Sea Pilot, etc.
97
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
integrating a pilot (or similar role*) into the bridge team and were records available to
Chapter 3 demonstrate that the process had been followed?
Chapter 5  Sight, and where necessary review, the company procedure for integrating a pilot* into the
bridge team.
Chapter 6
 Review the Master/Pilot information exchange and pilot checklists from two recent operations
Chapter 7 and verify that the information required to be included had been fully and accurately entered
and the pilot* had acknowledged the handover of information, or where the pilot had refused
Chapter 8
to sign, the time of the completion of the handover had been recorded.
Chapter 9  Review Bridge Log Books, bell books or other records and verify that the time of the
Chapter 10 transfer of the conn between the Master and Pilot, between pilots and between the pilot
and the Master had been recorded.
Chapter 11
 Interview the accompanying navigation officer to verify that they understood the source,
Chapter 12 intent and meaning of the information required to be entered on the Master/Pilot information
and/or pilot card checklists.
Chapter 1
4.3.4. Were the Master and navigation officers familiar with the company procedures to
Chapter 2
prevent disruption and distraction on the bridge, and were these procedures being complied
Chapter 3 with?
Chapter 5
The vessel operator should have developed procedures to prevent disruption and distraction on the
Chapter 6 bridge including guidance on:
Chapter 7
 Bridge access by personnel with no operational bridge responsibilities.
Chapter 8
 The use of mobile phones and other personal electronic devices.
Chapter 9
 Internal and external communications.
Chapter 10  Non-essential activity.
Chapter 11
 Internet and email access on the bridge.
 The effective management of the bridge space where it was combined with the cargo and/or
Chapter 12 machinery control and monitoring functions.
98
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
4.3.4. Were the Master and navigation officers familiar with the company procedures to
Chapter 2
prevent disruption and distraction on the bridge, and were these procedures being complied
Chapter 3 with?
Chapter 5
Chapter 6  Sight, and where necessary review, the company procedures to prevent disruption and
distraction on the bridge.
Chapter 7
 During the inspection of the bridge note any evidence of non-compliance with the company
Chapter 8
procedures.
Chapter 9  Interview the accompanying officer to verify their familiarity with the company procedures to
prevent disruption and distraction on the bridge.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
4.4. Communications Equipment and Procedures
Chapter 1
4.4.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with the operation of the Emergency Position
Chapter 2
Indicating Radio Beacon (EPIRB) and was the EPIRB in good order with records available to
Chapter 3 demonstrate that had it been inspected, tested and maintained as required?
Chapter 5
The vessel operator should have developed a procedure to ensure that EPIRBs were periodically
Chapter 6 inspected, tested and maintained, and ready for immediate use in an emergency.
Chapter 7
Most EPIRB's have a self-test facility which is usually a spring-loaded switch. When activated a light
Chapter 8 will indicate that the test circuits are operating correctly and sometimes this will also activate the
strobe light. It is recommended that the self-test switch be held for no more than 2 flashes of the
Chapter 9
strobe light, or no longer than 1 minute after the first self- test mode burst transmission. When the
Chapter 10 self-test is activated on a 406 MHz EPIRB, the EPIRB is allowed to radiate a single burst which is
specially coded so that it is ignored by the COSPAS-SARSAT system. The EPIRB must never be
Chapter 11
tested by actual operation.
Chapter 12
However, self-tests will use some of the beacon’s limited battery power and should only be
performed in accordance with the beacon manufacturer’s guidance.
99
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
4.4.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with the operation of the Emergency Position
Chapter 2
Indicating Radio Beacon (EPIRB) and was the EPIRB in good order with records available to
Chapter 3 demonstrate that had it been inspected, tested and maintained as required?
Chapter 5  Sight, and where necessary review, the company procedure to ensure that EPIRBs were
Chapter 6
periodically inspected, tested and maintained, and ready for immediate use in an emergency.
 Review records of periodic inspections, tests and maintenance of the EPIRB.
Chapter 7
 Inspect the EPIRB and associated fittings.
Chapter 8  Interview the accompanying officer to verify their familiarity with:
Chapter 9 o How to conduct the self-test for the EPIRB.
o The manufacturer's instructions on the frequency of conducting the self-test function to
Chapter 10
preserve battery life.
Chapter 11 o The procedure to follow should the EPIRB be activated in non-emergency circumstances.
Chapter 12 o Manual operation of the EPIRB.
Chapter 1
4.4.2. Were the Master and officers familiar with the operation of the Search and Rescue
Chapter 2
Transmitters (SARTs), and were the SARTs in good order with records available to demonstrate
Chapter 3 that had they had been inspected and tested as required?
Chapter 5
The vessel operator should have developed a procedure to ensure that SARTs were periodically
Chapter 6 inspected, tested and ready for immediate use in an emergency.
Chapter 7
All ships must be provided with at least one search and rescue transmitter (SART). Ships over 500
Chapter 8 gross tonnage must carry two SARTs. A SART may operate either in the 9 GHz band or on
Chapter 9 frequencies dedicated for AIS.
Chapter 10 SART self-tests will use some of the beacon’s limited battery power and should only be performed in
Chapter 11
accordance with the transponder manufacturer’s guidance.
Chapter 12
100
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
4.4.2. Were the Master and officers familiar with the operation of the Search and Rescue
Chapter 2
Transmitters (SARTs), and were the SARTs in good order with records available to demonstrate
Chapter 3 that had they had been inspected and tested as required?
Chapter 5
Chapter 6  Sight, and where necessary review, the company procedure to ensure that SARTs were
periodically inspected, tested and ready for immediate use in an emergency.
Chapter 7
 Review records of periodic inspections and tests of the SART(s).
Chapter 8  Inspect the SART(s).
Chapter 9  Interview the accompanying officer and verify their familiarity with:
o The purpose and operation of the SARTs carried onboard.
Chapter 10
o How to conduct the self-test function for each type of SART carried.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
4.4.3. Were the Master and officers familiar with the location, purpose and operation of the
Chapter 2
survival craft portable two-way VHF radios and were they in good order with records available
Chapter 3 to demonstrate that had they been inspected and tested as required?
Chapter 5
The vessel operator should have developed a procedure to ensure that survival craft portable two-
Chapter 6 way VHF radios were periodically inspected and tested and ready for immediate use in an
Chapter 7 emergency. Procedures should also provide guidance on the use of the radios for non-emergency
communications.
Chapter 8
Chapter 9 The survival craft portable two-way VHF radios may be used for routine on-board communications
when capable of operating on appropriate frequencies. There is no requirement for them to be Ex-
Chapter 10 rated or of an intrinsically safe type,
Chapter 11
but if the units are being used for shipboard operations, then there must be effective measures in
Chapter 12
place to prevent them being used in the gas hazardous area.
101
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
survival craft portable two-way VHF radios and were they in good order with records available
Chapter 3 to demonstrate that had they been inspected and tested as required?
Chapter 5
Chapter 6  Sight, and where necessary review, the company procedure to ensure that survival craft
portable two-way VHF radios were periodically inspected and tested and ready for immediate
Chapter 7 use in an emergency.
Chapter 8  Review records of periodic inspections and tests of the survival craft portable two-way VHF radios.
 Inspect the survival craft portable two-way VHF radios and replaceable primary batteries, if
Chapter 9
provided, and verify that:
Chapter 10 o Brief operating instructions were clearly indicated on the exterior of the equipment.
Chapter 11 o The expiry date of the primary battery was clearly indicated.
Chapter 12
 Interview the accompanying officer to verify their familiarity with the purpose, operation,
inspection and testing of the survival craft portable two-way VHF radios.
Chapter 1
4.4.4. Were the Master and navigation officers familiar with the procedures for sending and
Chapter 2
receiving distress, urgency and safety messages and were suitable instructions posted by the
Chapter 3 GMDSS equipment?
Chapter 5
The operator should have developed procedures for emergency communications which gave
Chapter 6 guidance on, and designated responsibility for distress communications in an emergency
Chapter 7 situation using the vessel’s GMDSS equipment.
Chapter 8 Instructions for the preparation and transmission of distress and urgency messages using the
Chapter 9 GMDSS equipment should be clearly displayed by the equipment.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
102
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
4.4.4. Were the Master and navigation officers familiar with the procedures for sending and
Chapter 2
receiving distress, urgency and safety messages and were suitable instructions posted by the
Chapter 3 GMDSS equipment?
Chapter 5
 Sight, and where necessary review, the company procedures for emergency communications
Chapter 6
using the GMDSS equipment.
Chapter 7  Review the entries in the GMDSS Radio Log Book and verify that distress, urgency and
Chapter 8
safety messages received had been recorded in accordance with company procedures.
 Interview the accompanying officer to assess their familiarity with the procedures for sending
Chapter 9 and receiving distress, urgency and safety messages using the GMDSS equipment.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
4.4.5. Were the Master and navigation officers familiar with the operation, testing and
Chapter 2
maintenance of the GMDSS VHF, MF and HF radio and satellite communications equipment and
Chapter 3 were records available to demonstrate the equipment was in good order?
Chapter 5 The operator should have developed procedures for the operation, testing, maintenance and log keeping of the
GMDSS VHF, MF and HF radio and satellite communications equipment. These should include the method
Chapter 6
chosen to ensure availability of GMDSS equipment at sea.
Chapter 7
Details of equipment fitted can be found in the Record of Approved GMDSS Radio Installation.
Chapter 8 SOLAS defines three methods to ensure availability of GMDSS equipment at sea.
 At sea electronic maintenance, requiring the carriage of a qualified radio/electronic officer and adequate
Chapter 9 spares and manuals.
Chapter 10
 Duplication of certain equipment
 Shore based maintenance
Chapter 11
Ships engaged on voyages in sea areas A1 and A2 are required to use at least one of the three maintenance
Chapter 12 methods outlined above, or a combination as may be approved by their administration. Ships engaged on
voyages in sea areas A3 and A4 are required to use at least two of the methods outlined above.
103
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 4 In most cases, A3 ships carry duplicate equipment and use shore-based maintenance, A1 and A2 ships use
shore- based maintenance only. The choice of using shore-based maintenance does not infer there should
Chapter 5 necessarily be a contract and/or agreement, but that maintenance should be carried out annually by a shore-
based 'expert' organization.
Chapter 6
GMDSS equipment is required to be powered from three sources of supply:
Chapter 7 The ship's normal supply.

Chapter 8 The ship's emergency generator (if fitted)


 A dedicated radio battery supply.

Chapter 9 The batteries must be charged by an automatic charger that is powered by the main and emergency generators.
Chapter 10 The batteries are required to have the capacity to power the equipment for 1 hour on ships with an emergency
generator, and 6 hours on ships not fitted with an emergency generator.
Chapter 11
The capacity of the battery or batteries should be checked, using an appropriate method, annually. One method
Chapter 12 of checking the capacity of an accumulator battery is to fully discharge and recharge the battery, using normal
operating current and period (e.g. 10 hours), when the ship is not at sea. (i.e. will not require the GMDSS
equipment for watchkeeping purposes until the batteries are fully charged after the test)
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 5
 Sight, and where necessary review, the company procedures for the operation, testing, maintenance and log
Chapter 6 keeping of the GMDSS VHF, MF and HF radio and satellite communications equipment.
 Inspect the:
Chapter 7
o GMDSS VHF, MF and HF radio and satellite communications equipment, including aerials and
Chapter 8 antennae.
o GMDSS battery locker.
Chapter 9
o Emergency lighting for the radio station and verify that it is functioning.
Chapter 10  Review:
o The GMDSS Radio Log Book.
Chapter 11
o A copy of the record of equipment for the cargo ship safety radio certificate Form R or Form C.
Chapter 12 o Any separate test and maintenance records for the GMDSS reserve batteries.
o Any shore-based maintenance agreement for the GMDSS equipment.
104
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 5
 Interview the accompanying officer to verify their familiarity with:
Chapter 6
o Routine operation of the GMDSS VHF, MF and HF radio and satellite communications
Chapter 7 equipment.
Chapter 8 o Daily, weekly and monthly radio equipment tests.
o GMDSS radio log keeping.
Chapter 9
o The chosen arrangement to ensure availability of GMDSS equipment at sea.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
4.4.6. Were the Master, officers and crew aware of the potential danger of using radio or
Chapter 2
mobile telephone equipment during cargo and ballast handling operations and was there a
Chapter 3 sufficient number of intrinsically safe portable radios for use in operational areas?
Chapter 5 The Company should have procedures for the safe use of radio and telephone equipment during cargo and ballast
handling operations, ensuring:
Chapter 6  While the vessel is at a terminal:
Chapter 7 o No MF/HF radio transmissions are made - Main transmitting antennae are earthed or isolated
o Fixed VHF and UHF equipment is switched to low power (one watt or less).
Chapter 8
o Portable VHF or UHF radios have a power output of one watt or less.
Chapter 9 o Any damaged portable VHF or UHF radios are withdrawn from service and marked as such.
o Sufficient intrinsically safe VHF or UHF portable radios to coordinate cargo, ballast & bunker
Chapter 10 operations.
Chapter 11 In addition, procedures should ensure:
 Details of restrictions on the use of mobile telephones are prominently displayed at the gangway.
Chapter 12
 Non-intrinsically safe mobile phones, including any provided by the terminal for ship/shore communications,
are not used outside of the accommodation block.
 If the use of intrinsically safe mobile phones is allowed outside of the accommodation block, they are clearly
identified, and proper certification is provided. Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar
105
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Review the company procedures for the safe use of radio and telephone equipment during cargo and
Chapter 5 ballast handling operations.
 During the course of the inspection, confirm:
Chapter 6
o Sufficient VHF or UHF portable radios in good working order were available to properly coordinate
Chapter 7 cargo, ballast and bunker handling operations.
o Non-intrinsically safe mobile phones were not in use outside the accommodation block.
Chapter 8
o Main transmitting antennae were earthed or isolated during cargo and ballast handling operations and
Chapter 9 that no transmissions were being made for test or other purposes.
o Fixed VHF and UHF equipment was switched to low power (one watt or less) during cargo and ballast
Chapter 10 handling operations, and that portable VHF or UHF radios in use had a power output of one watt or less.
Chapter 11 o Details of restrictions on the use of mobile telephones were prominently displayed at the gangway.
 If MF/HF radio or radar equipment was under repair/service, confirm this had been discussed at the pre-
Chapter 12 transfer conference and a safe system of work agreed.
 If the use of intrinsically safe mobile phones was allowed outside the accommodation block, verify any
equipment observed in use was clearly marked as intrinsically safe and/or properly certificated.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Review the procedures for safe use of radio & telephone equipment during cargo & ballast operations.
Chapter 5  During the inspection, confirm:
Chapter 6 o Sufficient VHF or UHF portable radios in good working order were available to properly coordinate
cargo, ballast and bunker handling operations.
Chapter 7 o Non-intrinsically safe mobile phones were not in use outside the accommodation block.
o Main transmitting antennae were earthed or isolated during cargo and ballast handling operations and
Chapter 8
that no transmissions were being made for test or other purposes.
Chapter 9 o Fixed VHF and UHF equipment was switched to low power (one watt or less) during cargo and ballast
handling operations, and that portable VHF or UHF radios in use had a power output of one watt or less.
Chapter 10
o Details of restrictions on the use of mobile telephones were prominently displayed at the gangway.
Chapter 11  If MF/HF radio or radar equipment was under repair/service, confirm this had been discussed at the pre-
transfer conference and a safe system of work agreed.
Chapter 12  If the use of intrinsically safe mobile phones was allowed outside the accommodation block, verify any
equipment observed in use was clearly marked as intrinsically safe and/or properly certificated.
106
5/27/2022
Chapter 5
Safety Management
5.1. Emergency Response Plans and Drills
Chapter 1 5.1.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with the onboard emergency response plans,
Chapter 2 and were records available to demonstrate that all mandatory and company defined emergency
drills had been completed and documented as required by company procedures?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have:
Chapter 5  Identified all credible emergency scenarios for each vessel type under its management.
 Developed contingency plans for each emergency scenario applicable to ship type.
Chapter 6
 Identified the frequency that each contingency plan is required to be subject to drill as required under
Chapter 7 the ISM, SOLAS, MARPOL, IGC, IGF or ISPS.
Chapter 8
 Developed a procedure to instruct the vessel when to conduct drills, how to record the details, and what
to do if a drill could not be completed within the required time frame.
Chapter 9  Developed a procedure to record the details of drills completed which included, but not limited to:
Chapter 10
o The contingency plan(s) used - the drill scenario - any safety considerations for conducting the drill - a
summary of the drill activities - equipment used or demonstrated - any lessons learnt - any training
Chapter 11 requirements identified - any areas for improvement to contingency plan identified (and communicated
to Company).
Chapter 12
o Any supplementary info that must be attached to drill record, such as, RA, permits etc.
 Developed a system to track completed drills to ensure all applicable drills had been completed as
required.
107
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.1.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with the onboard emergency response plans,
Chapter 2
and were records available to demonstrate that all mandatory and company defined emergency
Chapter 3 drills had been completed and documented as required by company procedures?
Chapter 5
• Review the Company procedure which defined:
Chapter 6 o The requirement to conduct drills and record the outcome of a drill.
Chapter 7 o The requirement to track the completion of drills to ensure that mandatory and
Chapter 8
company required drills were completed within the required time frame.
Chapter 9
o The actions to take if a drill could not be completed within the required
timeframe.
Chapter 10
 Review the records of drills and verify that each required drill had been completed
Chapter 11 within the timeframe defined by the drill schedule.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
5.1.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with the onboard emergency response plans, and were
Chapter 2 records available to demonstrate that all mandatory and company defined emergency drills had been
completed and documented as required by company procedures?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 Onboard contingency plans & records of drills depend on vessel type & include but not limited to:
Chapter 5  Abandon ship - Man overboard - Fire and explosion (SOLAS Reg III/19)
 Failure of steering gear (SOLAS Reg V/26) - - Rescue from enclosed spaces (SOLAS Reg III/19) -
Chapter 6 Recovery of persons from the water (SOLAS Reg III/17-1)
Chapter 7  Terrorism or piracy (ISPS Reg A/13.4) - Oil or NLS spills (MARPOL Annex I/5 Reg 37 & Annex II/7 Reg 17)
- Release of LNG as fuel from an oil/chemical tanker (IGF Reg 17) - Containment system failure (IGC
Chapter 8 18.7.1)
Chapter 9  Hull failure / Excessive list / Main engine failure / Failure of electrical power / Other critical machinery
failures / Collision / Grounding / Flooding / Hazardous cargo reaction / Hazardous vapour release /
Chapter 10 Hazardous cargo gas release / Heavy weather damage / Treatment of serious injury / Helicopter
operations for medical evacuation / Emergency towing (ISM 8.1) - Emergency assistance to another
Chapter 11
vessel.
Chapter 12 An emergency situation may involve following a number of these contingencies simultaneously. To avoid
confusion, the company must developed a system of emergency plans to include all identified scenarios which
integrate ship & shore response. This system may be based upon an existing SOPEP or SMPEP.
108
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.1.2. Were the Master and officers familiar with the shipboard emergency plans for the principal fire
Chapter 2 scenarios for the vessel type, and had drills taken place to test the effectiveness of the plans in accordance
Chapter 3
with the company procedures?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have a shipboard emergency response plan for each of the principal
Chapter 5
fire scenarios which are appropriate to vessel type, which should include, but not limited to:
Chapter 6  Fire on the deck - in a cargo tank - in the main machinery space.
Chapter 7  Fire in cargo pump room or compressor room - in accommodation - in a store-room - in
the galley.
Chapter 8
The plans should identify the steps that crew must take immediately to bring the situation
Chapter 9 under control and, then to address the dangers to personnel, environment and property.
Chapter 10 The Company should have a procedure to:
Chapter 11  Require the vessel to conduct each type of applicable drill at a defined frequency.
Chapter 12  Record the details of drills in a defined format.
 Define the action to take if a drill cannot be completed within the required timeframe.
Chapter 1
5.1.2. Were the Master and officers familiar with the shipboard emergency plans for the principal fire
Chapter 2 scenarios for the vessel type, and had drills taken place to test the effectiveness of the plans in accordance
Chapter 3
with the company procedures?
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
 Review the records of completed fire drills and verify that:
o The required drills had been completed within the timeframe defined by the drill
Chapter 6
schedule.
Chapter 7 o The details of drill had been recorded in the format required by the company
Chapter 8 procedure.
Chapter 9
o The date / time of latest drill was consistent with vessel’s activities as recorded within
the Bridge Log Book.
Chapter 10
o Each of the emergency plans for fire scenarios applicable to vessel type had been
Chapter 11 exercised within the previous 6 months.
Chapter 12
109
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.1.3. Were the Master and officers familiar with the vessel’s SOPEP or SMPEP, and had
Chapter 2
drills taken place to test the effectiveness of the onboard emergency response actions
Chapter 3 required by the Plan and company procedures?
• The SOPEP or SMPEP may form the basis of an integrated system of contingency planning for all
Chapter 5
emergencies.
Chapter 6 • Master and officers must be familiar with the contents & be aware of their duties within the Plan.
• The Plan should be kept up to date, including the list of National Operational Contact Points.
Chapter 7 • The official format of the IMO circular is electronic and providing the file is readily accessible in an
identified location need not be printed.
Chapter 8
Chapter 9 The Company should require that a list of specific contact details should be prepared for each port visit and
be displayed on the bridge and in CCR. The list should at least contain contact details for the DPA or
Chapter 10 Company emergency contact details - Port authorities - P&I Club - Agent - National pollution reporting
Chapter 11 centre and any additional contact details required by the USCG VRP when trading in US waters.
The Company will have a procedure to require vessel to conduct each type of applicable spill drill at a
Chapter 12 defined frequency. Drills are recorded in a defined format. Also actions if a drill cannot be completed within
the required timeframe are defined.
Chapter 1
5.1.3. Were the Master and officers familiar with the vessel’s SOPEP or SMPEP, and had
Chapter 2
drills taken place to test the effectiveness of the onboard emergency response actions
Chapter 3 required by the Plan and company procedures?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
 Review the SOPEP or SMPEP.
Chapter 6  Sight the shipboard emergency response plans for operational cargo and bunker spills.
Chapter 7  Sight the list of specific contact details posted on the bridge or CCR.
Chapter 8  Review the records of completed spill response drills and verify that:
o The latest drill had been completed within the timeframe defined by the drill schedule.
Chapter 9
o The details of drill had been recorded in the defined format.
Chapter 10
o The date / time of latest drill was consistent with vessel’s activities as recorded in the
Chapter 11 Bridge Log Book.
Chapter 12  Interview an officer during the inspection and verify that they were familiar with their
expected duties.
110
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.1.4. Were the Master and officers familiar with the shipboard emergency plan for enclosed
Chapter 2
space rescue, and had drills taken place to test the effectiveness of the shipboard emergency
Chapter 3 response plan in accordance with company procedures?
Chapter 5 The Company should have a emergency response plan to identify the actions that vessel staff must
take to conduct a rescue from an enclosed space.
Chapter 6
Chapter 7 The Company should have a procedure to:

Chapter 8  Require the vessel to conduct each type of drill applicable to vessel at a defined frequency.
 Record the details of drills in a defined format.
Chapter 9
 Define the action to take if a drill cannot be completed within the required timeframe.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
5.1.4. Were the Master and officers familiar with the shipboard emergency plan for enclosed space
Chapter 2 rescue, and had drills taken place to test the effectiveness of the shipboard emergency response plan in
accordance with company procedures?
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Review the shipboard emergency response plan for enclosed space rescue.
Chapter 5  Review the records of completed enclosed space rescue drills and verify that:
Chapter 6 o The latest drill had been completed within the timeframe defined by the drill schedule.

Chapter 7
o Where the drill had been conducted utilising a defined enclosed space, the permit for the
Chapter 8 space had been attached to drill records.
o The date/time of latest drill was consistent with vessel’s activities as recorded in Bridge
Chapter 9
Logbook.
Chapter 10
 During the inspection:
Chapter 11 o Sight the enclosed space rescue hoisting arrangement(s) for cargo, ballast, bunker, void and
Chapter 12
cofferdam spaces.
o Interview an officer or rating to verify familiarity with rigging & operation of the hoisting
arrangement(s).
111
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.1.5. Were the Master and Ship Security Officer (SSO) familiar with the vessel’s Ship
Chapter 2
Security Plan (SSP), and had drills taken place to test the effectiveness of the measures and
Chapter 3 procedures specified by the Ship Security Plan?
The Company should have a procedure that:
Chapter 5
 Required the vessel to conduct drills or exercises at defined intervals to test the effectiveness of security related
Chapter 6 contingency plans identified within the SSP.
 Required the vessel to record the details of security drills or exercises in a defined format.
Chapter 7  Defined the action to take if a drill or exercise cannot be completed within the required timeframe.
 Sight the schedule of security drills or exercises required to be conducted in accordance with the SSP and
Chapter 9 identified within the drill schedule.
Chapter 10  Do not request to sight either the SSP or the security contingency plans.
 Review the records of completed security drills or exercises and verify that:
Chapter 11 o The latest drill or exercise had been completed within the timeframe defined by the drill schedule.
Chapter 12 o All drill or exercise scenarios required to be undertaken by SSP had been completed within the time frame
defined by the company. Also the details of drill or exercise had been recorded in the defined format.
o The date / time of latest drill was consistent with vessel’s activities as recorded in the Bridge Log Book.
Chapter 1
5.1.6. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the procedure for launching the
Chapter 2
lifeboat(s), and had abandon ship drills taken place in accordance with company procedures
Chapter 3 and the requirements of SOLAS and the Flag Administration?
Chapter 5
 Review the emergency procedure for abandoning ship.
Chapter 6  Review the ship specific procedure for launching a lifeboat as part of a drill.
Chapter 7  Review the records of completed abandon ship drills and verify that:
Chapter 8
o The lifeboat(s) has been exercised and launched (simulated or actual) in accordance with SOLAS
Chapter 9 regulation for the type of lifeboat fitted.
o The details of the drill had been recorded in the defined format.
Chapter 10 o The date / time of latest drill was consistent with vessel’s activities as recorded in the Bridge Log Book.
Chapter 11  Interview one rating and verify familiarity with the ship specific procedure for launching of the lifeboat during
an abandon ship drill.
Chapter 12
112
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.1.7. Were the Master and officers familiar with the shipboard emergency plan for a cargo
Chapter 2
vapour or liquid release, Including potential fire, and had drills taken place to test the
Chapter 3 effectiveness of the shipboard emergency response plan in accordance with company
procedures?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
The Company should have shipboard emergency response plans applicable to types of vessel under
Chapter 6 management which may include, but will not necessarily be limited to:
 Cargo containment leakage.
Chapter 7
 Cargo connection rupture, pipeline fracture or cargo spillage.
Chapter 8  Lifting of a cargo system relief valve.
Chapter 9  Fire following leakage of cargo.
Chapter 10 The plans will identify the steps that crew must take immediately to bring the situation under control,
Chapter 11 and then to address the dangers to personnel, the environment and property.
Chapter 12 Where specialist equipment, such as barrier punching devices, are required to be used in the
mitigation or recovery from a loss of containment, the emergency plans should include the
precautions for their use.
Chapter 1
5.1.7. Were the Master and officers familiar with the shipboard emergency plan for a cargo
Chapter 2
vapour or liquid release, Including potential fire, and had drills taken place to test the
Chapter 3 effectiveness of the shipboard emergency response plan in accordance with company
procedures?
Chapter 4
Chapter 6
 Review the shipboard emergency plans for cargo vapour or liquid release, including potential
Chapter 7
fire.
Chapter 8  Review the records of completed cargo vapour or liquid release drills and verify that:
Chapter 9 o The required drills had been completed within the timeframe defined by the drill schedule.
Chapter 10 o The details of drill had been recorded in the defined format.
o The date / time of latest drill was consistent with vessel’s activities as recorded in the Bridge
Chapter 11
Log Book.
Chapter 12
113
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.1.8. Were the Master and officers familiar with the shipboard emergency plan for collision,
Chapter 2
and had drills taken place to test the effectiveness of the shipboard emergency response plan
Chapter 3 in accordance with company procedures?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 The Company should have a shipboard emergency response plan for a vessel in a collision situation
Chapter 6 to identify the steps that vessel staff must take immediately to bring the situation under control and,
then to address the dangers to personnel, environment and property.
Chapter 7
Chapter 9
 Review the shipboard emergency response plan for a collision situation.
 Review the records of completed collision emergency response drills and verify that:
Chapter 10
Chapter 12 o The date / time of latest drill was consistent with vessel’s activities as recorded in the Bridge
Log Book.
Chapter 1
5.1.9. Were the Master and officers familiar with the shipboard emergency plan for
Chapter 2
grounding, and had drills taken place to test the effectiveness of the shipboard emergency
Chapter 5
The Company should have a shipboard emergency response plan for a vessel in a grounding
situation to identify the steps that vessel staff must take immediately to bring the situation under
Chapter 6 control and to address the dangers to personnel, environment and property.
Chapter 7
Inspector Actions
Chapter 8
 Review the shipboard emergency response plan for a grounding situation.
Chapter 9
 Review the records of completed grounding emergency response drills and verify that:
Chapter 10
Chapter 12 o The date / time of latest drill was consistent with vessel’s activities as recorded in the Bridge
Log Book.
114
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.1.10. Were the Master and officers familiar with the shipboard emergency plan for loss of
Chapter 2
propulsion, and had drills taken place to test the effectiveness of the shipboard emergency
The Company should have a shipboard emergency plan for a loss of propulsion which identifies the steps
Chapter 5
that vessel staff must take immediately to bring the situation under control and, then to address the dangers
Chapter 6 to personnel, the environment and property.
Inspector Actions
Chapter 7
 Review the shipboard emergency response plan for a loss of propulsion.
Chapter 8  Review the records of completed loss of propulsion emergency response drills and verify that:
Chapter 10
o The date/time of latest drill was consistent with vessel’s activities as recorded in Bridge Log Book.
Chapter 11
 Interview one navigation officer and verify that they were familiar with a method for estimating the
Chapter 12 predicted drift of a disabled tanker, taking into account the wind, current and ship’s head.
 Interview one E/R officer - verify they were familiar with the loss of propulsion emergency plan.
Chapter 1
5.1.11. Were the Master and officers familiar with the shipboard emergency plan for failure of
Chapter 2 electrical power, and had drills taken place to test the effectiveness of the shipboard
Chapter 3 emergency response plan in accordance with company procedures?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have an emergency plan for a failure of electrical power which identifies the steps that vessel
Chapter 5 staff must take immediately to bring the situation under control and then to address the dangers to personnel,
environment and property. The plan may reference a procedure for feeding back power from the em. switchboard to
Chapter 6
main switchboard and a procedure for recovering after a black out.
Chapter 8  Review the shipboard emergency response plan for a failure of electrical power.
 Review the records of completed failure of electrical power emergency response drills and verify that:
Chapter 9
Chapter 10 o The details of the drill had been recorded in the defined format.
o The date / time of latest drill was consistent with vessel’s activities as recorded in the Bridge Log Book.
Chapter 11
 Interview one navigation officer and verify that they were familiar with a method for estimating the predicted drift of a
Chapter 12 disabled tanker taking into account the wind, current and ship’s head.
 Interview one engineer officer and verify that they were familiar with the failure of electrical power emergency
plan including shipboard procedures for recovering after a blackout.
115
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.1.12. Were the Master and officers familiar with the shipboard emergency plan for steering
Chapter 2
gear failure, and had drills taken place to test the effectiveness of the shipboard emergency
Chapter 3 response plan in accordance with company procedures.
The Company should have a shipboard emergency response plan for steering gear failure which identifies the steps
Chapter 5 that vessel staff must take immediately to bring the situation under control, and to address the dangers to personnel,
environment and property. The plan must consider failure of st. control systems from the bridge - a single st. system
Chapter 6
failure (electrical or hydraulic) - a complete failure of all st. systems and/or rudder(s).
• Review the shipboard emergency response plan for steering gear failure.
Chapter 8
 Review the records of completed drills for the failure of the steering gear and verify that:
Chapter 10 o The drill included the testing of the emergency steering systems by direct control.
Chapter 11 o The date / time of latest drill was consistent with vessel’s activities as recorded in the Bridge Log Book.
 Interview one navigation officer and verify familiarity with a method for estimating the drift of a disabled tanker
Chapter 12 taking into account the wind, current and ship’s head.
 If safe to do so, request that an accompanying officer demonstrate the operation of the em. steering system and
describes the use of the communication system and alternative power supplies.
Chapter 1
5.1.13. Were the Master and officers familiar with the emergency plan for emergency towing,
Chapter 2 including the Emergency Towing Booklet (ETB), and had drills taken place to test the
effectiveness of the emergency response plan in accordance with company procedures?
Chapter 3

The Company should have ship-specific emergency towing procedures within an ETB, which must:
Chapter 5
 Require the vessel to conduct each type of drill applicable to the vessel at a defined frequency.
Chapter 6  Record the details of emergency response drills in a defined format.
Chapter 7  Define the action to take if a drill cannot be completed within the required timeframe.
Inspector Actions
Chapter 8
 Review the Emergency Towing Booklet (ETB). Review the records of completed drills and verify that:
Chapter 9
Chapter 11 o The date/time of latest drill was consistent with vessel’s activities as recorded in Bridge Log
Book.
Chapter 12
 Interview one navigation and one engineer officer to verify that they were familiar with the location
of ETB and the deployment process for the em. towing arrangements.
116
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.1.14. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the shipboard emergency response
Chapter 2 plan for man overboard, including the launching and recovering the rescue boat, and had drills
taken place to test the effectiveness of the shipboard emergency response plan in accordance
Chapter 3
with company procedures?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 The Company should have a shipboard emergency response plan to identify the actions that vessel
staff should take in a man overboard situation. The procedures must identify the actions that vessel staff
Chapter 6
should take to launch and recover the rescue boat and to conduct a rescue boat launching drill.
 Review the shipboard emergency response plan for man overboard.
Chapter 8  Review the ship specific procedure for launching and recovering the rescue boat as part of a drill.
Chapter 9
 Review the records of completed man overboard and rescue boat launching drills and verify that:
o The latest drill(s) had been completed within the timeframe defined by the drill schedule.
Chapter 10 o The details of drill(s) had been recorded in the defined format - the date/time of latest drill(s) were
consistent with vessel’s activities as recorded in the Bridge Log Book.
Chapter 11
 Interview 1 nav. officer - verify familiarity with procedure for launching & recovery of the rescue boat.
Chapter 12
 Interview 1 rating - verify familiarity with their role as identified in Muster list during a man overboard.
If vessel had exercised the man overboard and rescue boat launching elements of man overboard drill
separately, consider the records of both elements.
Chapter 1
5.1.15. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the shipboard emergency response
Chapter 2 plan for recovery of persons from the water, and had drills taken place to test the effectiveness
Chapter 3 of the shipboard emergency response plan in accordance with company procedures?

The Company should have a shipboard emergency plan to identify the actions that vessel staff must
Chapter 5 take to recover persons from water in a safe manner.
Chapter 6
Inspector Actions
Chapter 7
 Review the shipboard emergency response plan for recovery of persons from the water
Chapter 8  Review the records of completed recovery from the water drills and verify that:
o The date/time of latest drill was consistent with vessel’s activities as recorded in Bridge Log
Chapter 11
Book.
Chapter 12  Interview one rating and verify that they were familiar with the recovery of persons from the
water plan and their expected role in such an emergency response.
117
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.1.16. Were the Master and officers familiar with the shipboard emergency plans for flooding, and had
Chapter 2 drills taken place to test the effectiveness of the shipboard emergency response plans in accordance with
company procedures?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have a shipboard emergency plan for each of the principal flooding scenarios which are
Chapter 5 appropriate to the vessel type, which will include where applicable, but will not necessarily be limited to:
Chapter 6  Machinery space flooding - Pumproom flooding - Forecastle space flooding - Hull breach.
The plans will identify the steps that vessel staff must take immediately to bring the situation under control, and
Chapter 7 then in the short and medium-term, to address the dangers to personnel, the environment and property.
• Review the emergency response plans for the principal flooding scenarios which were appropriate to vessel
Chapter 9 type.
Chapter 10 • Review the records of completed flooding emergency response drills and verify that:
Chapter 11
Chapter 12 o The date/time of latest drill was consistent with the vessel’s activities as recorded in the Bridge Log Book.
o Each of the emergency plans for flooding scenarios had been exercised within the previous 12 months.
Chapter 1
5.1.17. Were the Master and officers familiar with the shipboard emergency plans regarding LNG bunker
Chapter 2 operations, and had drills taken place to test the effectiveness of the shipboard emergency response plans
in accordance with company procedures?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 The Company should have a fuel handling manual for LNG bunkers that includes emergency procedures to
identify the actions that vessel staff must take to address the dangers to personnel, environment and property in
Chapter 5
case of an incident. The emergency procedures may be incorporated into an integrated system of shipboard
Chapter 6 emergency plans and identify any actions that require the crew to respond in a counter intuitive manner such as
identifying hose and pipe coupling connections that open and close in opposite directions from normal couplings in
Chapter 7 common use.
LNG bunker operations related exercises may be incorporated into other required drills such as fire drills.
Chapter 8
Inspector Actions
Chapter 9 • Review the emergency procedures contained in the fuel handling manual for LNG bunkers.
• Review the records of completed LNG bunker related drills and verify that:
Chapter 10
Chapter 11 o All drill or exercise scenarios required to be undertaken by company procedures or the fuel
handling manual had been completed within the time frame defined by the company.
o The date/time of latest drill was consistent with vessel’s activities as recorded in Bridge Log Book.
118
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.1.18. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures setting out the
Chapter 2 actions to be taken in the event of a cargo leak into a double hull tank, and was all required
Chapter 3
equipment available and in satisfactory condition?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have procedures with actions to be taken in case of a cargo leak into a double hull tank.
Chapter 5 These procedures should address the various options for maintaining a safe atmosphere in the tank, including:
Chapter 6  Identifying the cargoes involved and the risks associated with them.
 Continuous ventilation.
Chapter 7
 Filling or partially filling with ballast.
Chapter 8
 Securing with P/V valves.
Chapter 9  Securing with vent valves fitted with flames screens.
Chapter 10
 A combination of these.
Procedures should describe the process for each tank, the equipment to be used and its configuration, and
Chapter 11 guidance on how to safely transfer the cargo from the ballast space. Equipment required may include:
Chapter 12  Emergency ballast/cargo system connection spool piece - Emergency ballast/IGS connection spool piece.
 Flexible IG hoses - P/V valves - Flame screens - Portable standpipes - Portable fans.
Chapter 1
5.1.18. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures setting out the
Chapter 2
actions to be taken in the event of a cargo leak into a double hull tank, and was all required
Chapter 3 equipment available and in satisfactory condition?
Chapter 5
Chapter 6  Review the procedures setting out the actions to be taken in the event of a cargo leak into a
double hull tank.
Chapter 7
 During the tour of the deck, inspect the equipment required by these procedures to verify its
Chapter 8 availability, suitable stowage and satisfactory condition.
Chapter 9  Interview the accompanying officer to verify their familiarity with the company procedures
setting out the actions to be taken in the event of a cargo leak into a double hull tank, and the
Chapter 10
location of the required equipment.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
119
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.1.19. Were the Master and officers familiar with the emergency arrangements to pump out
Chapter 2
the spaces forward of the collision bulkhead in the event of flooding and were these
Chapter 3 arrangements prominently marked and in good order?
This question is only applicable to OBO and Ore/Oil vessel types.
Chapter 5
Chapter 6 The Company should have vessel-specific procedures to pump out the spaces forward of the
collision BHD in the event of flooding, including guidance on:
Chapter 7
 The use of pumps/eductors connected to the systems, their direct suctions and overboard valves.
Chapter 8  The marking of system valves & controls to ensure correct operation & avoid accidental opening.
Chapter 9
Chapter 10 The vessel-specific instructions for pumping out the spaces forward of the collision BHD in an
emergency may be included as part of the vessel emergency plan for forecastle space flooding.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
The remote controls for the system should not be accessed via an underdeck passage, a pipe trunk
or other similar means of access.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 the spaces forward of the collision bulkhead in the event of flooding and were these
Chapter 3 arrangements prominently marked and in good order?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5  Review the procedures to pump out the spaces forward of the collision BHD in the event
Chapter 6 of flooding.
Chapter 7  Inspect the arrangements to pump out the spaces forward of the collision BHD including:
Chapter 8
o Bilge wells, suctions etc. in the forecastle spaces.
o Remote controls at the bridge, ECR or enclosed space accessible from the bridge or
Chapter 9
ECR without traversing exposed freeboard or superstructure decks.
Chapter 10
 Interview the accompanying Officer to verify understanding of how the forward spaces
Chapter 11 would be pumped out in an emergency utilising the system provided. This should
include the sequence of opening and closing valves and starting the appropriate pump.
Chapter 12
120
5/27/2022
5.2. Fixed Fire Protection Systems
Chapter 1
5.2.1. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the starting procedure for the
Chapter 2
emergency fire pump, and were records available to demonstrate that the emergency fire pump
Chapter 3 and its location had been maintained and tested in accordance with company procedures?
Chapter 5 The Company should have procedures for the starting and testing of the emergency fire pump and to
ensure access to the emergency fire pump space remains possible in all circumstances.
Chapter 6
Chapter 7 Ship-specific starting instructions for the em. fire pump should be prominently displayed adjacent to
equipment. These instructions are not for the use of the qualified engineering personnel, but for
Chapter 8
others who might be required to start the em. fire pump in an emergency.
Chapter 9
If necessary, the em. fire pump fuel tank should be charged with fuel designed for use in sub-zero
Chapter 10 temperatures.
Chapter 11
The position and identification of the closing devices for the em. fire pump fuel supply must be clearly
Chapter 12 marked.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 5  Review the procedures for the operation and testing of the em. fire pump.
Chapter 6
 Review the ship-specific starting instructions posted adjacent to em. fire pump.
 Where the em. fire pump location is accessed through the machinery space verify that:
Chapter 7
o The airlock doors between the machinery space and the space containing the em. fire
Chapter 8 pump were closed with no indication that the doors had been held in the open position.
Chapter 9 o The second means of access from deck was not locked or secured to prevent access
from the outside.
Chapter 10
 Verify that the inlet and outlet valves to em. fire pump were marked and open.
Chapter 11
 Provided it is safe to do so, witness the starting of em. fire pump and verify that pump
Chapter 12 reaches & maintains the required pressure while discharging through the anchor washes or
other outlet.
121
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 5  Where the em. fire pump was driven by a diesel engine:
Chapter 6 o Sight the level in the em. fire pump fuel tank.
o Where the vessel was operating in sub-zero temperatures verify that the fuel in the tank was
Chapter 7
designed for use in sub-zero temperatures.
Chapter 8 o Witness a test of the quick closing valve for the emergency fire pump engine where permitted.
Chapter 9  Review maintenance records to verify that testing of the emergency fire pump and quick closing
valve had taken place in accordance with the maintenance plan.
Chapter 10
 Where it was not possible to start the em. fire pump, interview an officer or rating to verify their
Chapter 11 familiarity with the manual starting of the emergency fire pump and its diesel engine.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
5.2.2. Were the Master, officers and crew familiar with the location, purpose, testing and
Chapter 2
operation of the vessel’s fire dampers, the means of closing the main inlets and outlets of all
Chapter 3 ventilation systems and the means of stopping the power ventilation systems from outside the
space served?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
The Company should have procedures which:
Chapter 6  Defined the frequency of inspections, tests & maintenance of fire dampers, skylights, closing
devices and remote fan stops.
Chapter 7
 Required the vessel to identify each closing device for ventilation inlet or outlet and determine
Chapter 8 whether it should be open or closed while conducting cargo operations.
Chapter 9  Required each closing device for ventilation inlet or outlet to be marked with its required position
of either open or closed while in port and conducting cargo operations.
Chapter 10
When determining whether a closing device for ventilation inlet or outlets should be closed in port
Chapter 11 consider:
 The potential build-up of flammable or explosive gas within a space.
Chapter 12
 The potential build-up of heat from items such as laundry driers.
122
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.2.2. Were the Master, officers and crew familiar with the location, purpose, testing and operation of
Chapter 2 the vessel’s fire dampers, the means of closing the main inlets and outlets of all ventilation systems and
Chapter 3
the means of stopping the power ventilation systems from outside the space served?
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Review the vessel specific list of closing devices for ventilation inlets or outlets and their required status while
Chapter 5 conducting cargo operations.
 Inspect a representative sample of ventilation closing devices and verify that they were in order, operating
Chapter 6 freely and clearly marked with:
Chapter 7 o The spaces they served.
o Their open/shut positions.
Chapter 8
o Any required warning notices e.g. battery lockers.
Chapter 9 o Their required position when conducting cargo operations.
 Sight the remote stops for accommodation and machinery space fans and verify that the items served by each
Chapter 10 remote stop were clearly identified.
Chapter 11  Review the records of inspections, tests and maintenance carried out in the maintenance plan, confirm fan
stops have been tested as required by the company procedure.
Chapter 12  Interview one officer and one rating to verify their familiarity, subject to their normal operational and emergency
duties, with the location, purpose and operation of fire dampers, skylights, closing devices & remote fan stops.
Chapter 1
5.2.3. Were the Master and officers familiar with the location, purpose and operation of the vessel’s
Chapter 2 fixed fire detection and fire alarm system, and was the equipment in good working order, regularly
Chapter 3
inspected, tested and maintained?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have a procedure for the operation and maintenance of the fixed fire detection
Chapter 5
and fire alarm system which defined:
Chapter 6 • The frequency of testing individual detectors.
Chapter 7 • The method of testing different types of detectors.
Chapter 8
• The frequency of testing any output signals to other fire safety systems.
• The frequency of testing the audible and visual alarms on the bridge or in the continuously
Chapter 9
manned central control station.
Chapter 10 • The actions to ensure safety is not diminished if a zone is isolated. The main machinery spaces
Chapter 11
should not be operated in the unattended status with any zone or detector in the space isolated.
• Any areas not covered by the fire detection system that required regular fire patrols.
Chapter 12
123
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
 Review the procedure which defined the operation, testing and maintenance requirements for
the fixed fire detection and fire alarm system.
Chapter 6  Inspect the central control station for the fixed fire detection and fire alarm system and verify that:
Chapter 7 o The system was fully operational.
o The system was not indicating any faults.
Chapter 8
o Where the spaces containing the fire alarm main or repeater control panels were not
Chapter 9 continuously manned there was no delay in sounding a fire alarm.
Chapter 10 o Clear information was displayed on or adjacent to each indicating unit about the spaces
covered and the location of the sections.
Chapter 11
o All zones and detectors were active unless a documented work process was taking place
Chapter 12 which required the temporary isolation of a zone or sensor.
Chapter 1
Chapter 3

Review inspection and testing data available at the central control station and verify that:
Chapter 5
o Detector testing had been completed at the defined frequency.
Chapter 6 o Fire safety system tests had been completed at the required frequency.
Chapter 7 o The emergency power supply had been verified as functional.
Chapter 8
 Verify that the correct testing devices were available to test the types of fire detectors provided.
 If necessary, review the records of inspections, tests, calibration and maintenance carried out.
Chapter 9
 Where the fire detection and alarm system was noted to be defective, verify that the machinery
Chapter 10 space had not been operated in the unattended status.
 Interview the responsible Officer to verify their familiarity with:
Chapter 11
o The purpose, operation and testing of the fixed fire detection and fire alarm system.
Chapter 12 o Any delay in sounding the fire alarm programmed into the alarm system.
124
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 fixed carbon dioxide fire extinguishing system, and was the equipment in good working order and available
Chapter 3
for immediate use, with the release procedure and operating instructions displayed at the control stations?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
Chapter 5 If the CO2 bottle room is locked, a key to door must be in a break-glass type enclosure
Chapter 6 conspicuously located adjacent to door.
Chapter 7
Instructions for safe entry into the CO2 room must be posted at each entrance and include:
Chapter 8 • Starting the ventilation fan.
Chapter 9
• Waiting for a set period before entering.
• The use of a personal gas monitor.
Chapter 10
• Making notification of entry and exit
Chapter 11
The Company maintenance plan will include the fixed CO2 fire extinguishing system.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 fixed carbon dioxide fire extinguishing system, and was the equipment in good working order and available
Chapter 3
for immediate use, with the release procedure and operating instructions displayed at the control stations?
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
Chapter 5  Review the CO2 space safe entry instructions.

 Inspect the space(s) containing the machinery space fixed firefighting system CO2 bottles.
Chapter 6
 Inspect the control station(s) for releasing the machinery space CO2 fixed firefighting system and review the
Chapter 7 operating instructions.
Chapter 8
 Review the inspection and servicing data available in the space.
 If necessary, review the records of inspections, tests & maintenance carried out.
Chapter 9  Interview the accompanying officer to verify their familiarity with the purpose and operation of the system.
Chapter 10
Note: On CO2 systems there are ‘pins’ in the activation assembly, and traditionally, these pins had to be
Chapter 11
removed for the system to be ready for immediate use. On some modern systems, these ‘pins’ have to be left ‘in’
Chapter 12 for the system to be ready for immediate use. When inspecting the CO2 systems, the inspector should
determine from the accompanying officer whether the pins should be ‘in’ or ‘out’ for the system to be ready for
immediate use. If in any doubt reference should be made to the manufacturer's operating instructions.
125
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 machinery space fixed high-expansion foam fire extinguishing system, and was the equipment in good
Chapter 3
working order, available for immediate use, and with operating instructions clearly displayed at the control
stations?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 If the fixed high-expansion foam fire extinguishing system also provides protection to cargo pump room, the foam
concentrate must be suitable for extinguishing fires involving the cargoes carried.
Chapter 6
The Company should have procedures to require personnel re-entering the protected space after a system
Chapter 7 discharge to wear breathing apparatus.
Chapter 8 The Company should have a maintenance plan for the fire protection systems & fire-fighting systems/appliances
which will include the fixed high-expansion foam fire extinguishing system. The plan should include the actions to
Chapter 9 be taken monthly, quarterly, annually (including testing foam concentrates) and 5-yearly to ensure the system is
kept in order and available for immediate use.
Chapter 10
The first test of foam concentrates should be performed not more than 3 years after the date of manufacture,
Chapter 11 and after that, every year. In addition, for protein-based alcohol-resistant foam concentrates a stability test
should be performed prior to delivery to the ship and annually thereafter.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 machinery space fixed high-expansion foam fire extinguishing system, and was the equipment in good
Chapter 3
working order, available for immediate use, and with operating instructions clearly displayed at the control
stations?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
 Inspect the space(s) containing the machinery space fixed high-expansion foam fire extinguishing system
Chapter 6 foam concentrate tanks(s), pump(s) and the system controls and verify that:
o The system operating instructions were posted near the control station.
Chapter 7
o The system valves were identified, and the system instructions indicated their required status in the
Chapter 8 standby and operational conditions.
o A copy of the foam concentrate annual test certificate indicated that it was fit for continued use.
Chapter 9 o Where the system also protected a cargo pump room, the foam contained in the tank was certified as
compatible with the cargo being carried.
Chapter 10
o The foam tank was filled to the required level
Chapter 11  Review inspection & servicing data available in the space. Review records of inspections, tests and
maintenance carried out, including the annual foam concentrate test results & the 5-yearly test of foam
Chapter 12 proportioners or other foam mixing devices.
 Interview the accompanying Officer to verify their familiarity with the purpose and operation of the system.
126
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 machinery space fixed pressure water-spraying fire extinguishing system, and was the equipment in good
Chapter 3
working order and available for immediate use, with operating instructions clearly displayed at the control
stations?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 The Company maintenance plan should include the fixed pressure water-spray or water-mist extinguishing system
and the actions to be taken weekly, monthly, annually, 5-yearly and 10-yearly (including a hydrostatic test and
Chapter 6 internal examination for gas & water pressure cylinders), to ensure the system is kept in order & ready for use.
Inspector Actions
Chapter 7
 Inspect the space(s) containing the fixed pressure water-spray equipment & system controls and verify that:
Chapter 8 o The system operating instructions were posted near the control station.
Chapter 9 o The system valves were clearly identified, and the system instructions indicated their required status
in the standby and operational conditions.
Chapter 10 o The system was maintained at the correct pressure - Inlet and outlet valves were correctly set.
 Review inspection and servicing data available in the space. Review the records of inspections, tests and
Chapter 11
maintenance carried out, including quarterly system water quality assessments.
Chapter 12  Interview the accompanying officer to verify their familiarity with the purpose and operation of the fixed
pressure water-spraying fire extinguishing system or the equivalent water mist fire extinguishing system.
Chapter 1
5.2.7. Were the Master and officers familiar with the location, purpose and operation of the vessel’s fire
Chapter 2 pumps, fire main, fire main isolating valves and fire hydrants, and was the system and its components in
good working order and available for immediate use?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 The Company should have procedures for the operation, inspection, testing and maintenance of fire pumps, fire mains,
isolating valves and hydrants which defined:
Chapter 5  The frequency of inspection, testing and maintenance of the system and its components.
 The actions to be taken to ensure the ready availability of the systems in sub-zero temperatures.
Chapter 6
Inspector Actions
Chapter 7  Provided it is safe to do so, witness the remote starting of a fire pump from bridge or fire control station - verify that
the pump reaches & maintains the required pressure while discharging through the anchor washes or other outlet.
Chapter 8  Inspect the deck fire main, particularly on underside, for indications of corrosion and patching or accelerated
wear caused by rope abrasion.
Chapter 9
 Inspect the fire pumps and verify that the suction and delivery valves were open.
Chapter 10  Inspect the fire main in the machinery space for external indications of corrosion and for patching.
 Request an accompanying crew member to check the fire hydrants & fire main isolating valves.
Chapter 11
 Interview the accompanying officer to verify their familiarity with the fire main system with reference to:
Chapter 12 o Starting the fire pumps, purpose and location of the fire main isolating valves.
o The purpose and location of the drain point for the deck fire main.
 Review the records of inspections, tests and maintenance carried out.
127
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.2.8. Were the Master, officers and galley staff familiar with the location, purpose and operation of the
Chapter 2 fixed and portable fire extinguishing systems provided in the galley, were the systems in good working
Chapter 3
order and available for immediate use, and were galley ranges, exhaust vents, filter cowls free of grease or
combustible material?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
Fire extinguishing systems for deep-fat cooking equipment may use different fire-extinguishing mediums
Chapter 6 including wet chemical, AFFF foam and water mist. The maintenance plan must contain the weekly, monthly,
annual etc. checks required for the system as set out in the maker’s instructions and IMO MSC.1/Circ.1432.
Chapter 7
Chapter 8 The Company should have a procedure for maintaining fire safety in the galley which defined:
 The frequency of inspections, tests and maintenance of fixed and portable fire extinguishing systems, fire
Chapter 9 dampers and fan stop switches fitted in the galley.
 The frequency of inspection and cleaning of galley ranges, within flue pipes and in the filter cowls of galley
Chapter 10
vents.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
Chapter 3 combustible material?
Chapter 5  Inspect the vessel’s galley and verify that:
o Galley ranges were free of fat or other flammable material - Grease traps had been recently cleaned.
Chapter 6
o Filter cowls of galley vents were free of accumulated fat or oil.
Chapter 7 o Fire dampers were properly marked and free to operate.
Chapter 8
o Fan stop activation points in, or near, the galley were clearly marked.
o The deep fat fryer fixed fire extinguishing systems had been serviced in accordance with the PMS.
Chapter 9 o The deep fat fryer fixed fire extinguishing nozzles were free of grease build up and were fitted with their
protective blow out caps if required by system design.
Chapter 10
o Portable extinguishers and fire blankets were properly stowed and free from obstructions.
Chapter 11 o Fire doors and serving hatch shutters were free to close automatically, if so designed, otherwise were
closed except for when in use.
Chapter 12
o No evidence that deep fat frying was taking place in open pans or fryers not fitted with a fixed fire
extinguishing system.
o Fire detectors were not inhibited or disabled.
128
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
combustible material?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5  Review the records of inspections, tests and maintenance carried out.
Chapter 6  Interview a member of the galley staff to verify familiarity with the purpose & operation of:
o The fixed fire extinguishing system,
Chapter 7
o The portable fire extinguishing appliances, or,
Chapter 8 o The ventilation system stopping and isolation process.
Chapter 9
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
5.2.9. Were the Master and officers familiar with the location, purpose and operation of the water-spray
Chapter 2 system for cooling, fire prevention and crew protection on deck, and was the equipment in good working
Chapter 3
order, regularly inspected, tested and maintained?

Chapter 5 The maintenance plan must include the water-spray system for cooling, fire prevention
Chapter 6 and crew protection on deck. Maintenance tasks may include:
Chapter 7
 Periodic removal of installed orifice plates & piping end caps & flushing any debris from
the system.
Chapter 8
 Cleaning the in-line filters.
Chapter 9
 Flushing the system with fresh water.
Chapter 10  Drying the system to prevent internal corrosion.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
129
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.2.9. Were the Master and officers familiar with the location, purpose and operation of the water-spray
Chapter 2 system for cooling, fire prevention and crew protection on deck, and was the equipment in good working
Chapter 3
order, regularly inspected, tested and maintained?
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Inspect the space(s) containing the remote controls for water-spray system for cooling, fire prevention and crew
Chapter 5 protection on deck.
 Review the operating instructions for the system posted in the space(s) - verify that system valves & controls are
Chapter 6
properly marked and set.
Chapter 7  Review inspection and servicing data available in the space(s).
 Inspect the system piping, particularly on the underside, for external indications of corrosion and for patching.
Chapter 8
 Examine a random sample of nozzles for evidence of clogging by debris.
Chapter 9  Request an accompanying crew member to randomly check the isolating valves & stop valves.
 If necessary, review the records of inspections, tests and maintenance carried out.
Chapter 10  Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with the purpose & operation of water spray system i.e.:
Chapter 11 o Starting the pumps.
o The purpose and location of the isolating valves and stop valves.
Chapter 12
o The purpose and location of the drain point for the deck piping.
Chapter 1
5.2.10. Were the Master and officers familiar with the location, purpose and operation of the fixed fire
Chapter 2 extinguishing system installed within enclosed spaces containing cargo handling equipment, and was the
Chapter 3
equipment in good working order and available for immediate use, with the release procedure and
operating instructions displayed at the control stations?
Chapter 5
The fire extinguishing medium may be CO2 or an alternative ‘clean agent’.
Chapter 6 The Company should have procedures for the operation, inspection and maintenance of the fixed
Chapter 7 fire extinguishing system installed within enclosed spaces containing cargo handling equipment
that included:
Chapter 8
 A description of the system, its components, and its functions.
Chapter 9
 Instructions for the operation of the fixed fire extinguishing system.
Chapter 10
 A maintenance plan.
Chapter 11
The above may form part of the cargo system operation manual and the ship’s maintenance plan.
Chapter 12
If the control station or release cabinet door is locked, a key to door shall be in a break-glass type
enclosure conspicuously located adjacent to door.
130
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Chapter 5 Instructions for safe entry into the bottle space should be posted at each entrance and include:
Chapter 6  Starting the ventilation fan.
Chapter 7  Waiting for a set period before entering.
Chapter 8  The use of a personal gas monitor.
Chapter 9  Notifying the OOW of entry into, and exit from, the space
Chapter 10 The entrances to the enclosed space containing cargo handling equipment e.g., compressor room or motor
room, should be marked with a notice indicating the space is protected by a fixed fire extinguishing system.
Chapter 11
Where a CO2 system is installed, a notice must be exhibited at the controls stating that due to electrostatic
Chapter 12 ignition hazard, the system is to be used only for fire extinguishing and not for inerting purposes.
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
 Review the procedures for the operation, inspection and maintenance of the FFE system installed within enclosed
Chapter 6 spaces containing cargo handling equipment.
 Review the bottle space safe entry instructions.
Chapter 7  Inspect the space(s) containing the machinery space fixed firefighting system bottles - inspect the control station(s) for
releasing the machinery space fixed firefighting system and review the operating instructions.
Chapter 8
 Review the inspection and servicing data available in the space.
Chapter 9  Review records of inspections, tests and maintenance carried out.
 Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with purpose & operation of the system & maintenance plan.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
131
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.2.11. Were the Master and officers familiar with the location, purpose and operation of the vessel’s fixed
Chapter 2 dry chemical powder fire extinguishing system, and was the equipment in good working order and readily
available for immediate use, with operating instructions clearly displayed at the control stations.
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
Test, inspection and servicing requirements set out in MSC.1/Circ.1432 include:
Chapter 5  Monthly - checking pressure gauges are in the correct range.
Chapter 6  Annually - agitating the dry chemical charge.
 Two-yearly - testing a sample of dry chemical powder for moisture content.
Chapter 7
 Ten-yearly - hydrostatic or non-destructive testing of dry chemical powder containment vessels.
Chapter 9  Inspect the components & operational controls of cargo area fixed dry chemical powder fire-extinguishing system.
 Review the operation instructions for the system posted near the operational controls - verify that system valves &
Chapter 10
controls are correctly marked - Review the inspection & servicing data available at the control stations.
Chapter 11  Review the records of inspections, tests and maintenance carried out, including the annual agitation of the dry
powder by nitrogen - the 2-yearly testing of a sample of dry chemical powder for moisture content.
Chapter 12
 Interview the accompanying officer to verify their familiarity with the purpose and operation of the cargo area fixed dry
chemical powder extinguishing system.
Chapter 1
5.2.12. Were the Master and officers familiar with the location, purpose and operation of the fixed fire-
Chapter 2 extinguishing system in the vessel’s paint locker and any other flammable liquid locker, and was the
Chapter 3
system in good working order and available for immediate use?

Chapter 5
The Company should have a procedure to manage the storage of paint and flammable liquids which
Chapter 6 defined:
Chapter 7
• The locations in which paints & other flammable liquids should be stored under normal
circumstances.
Chapter 8 • The locations where bulk paint or flammable liquids may be stored when the designated lockers
are of insufficient capacity in circumstances such as onboard maintenance programs utilizing
Chapter 9
riding teams.
Chapter 10 • The requirement that paints and flammable liquids must be stored in closed containers.
Chapter 11
Note: SOLAS requirements do not apply to cargo sample lockers positioned within the cargo area.
Chapter 12
132
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.2.12. Were the Master and officers familiar with the location, purpose and operation of the fixed fire-
Chapter 2 extinguishing system in the vessel’s paint locker and any other flammable liquid locker, and was the
Chapter 3
system in good working order and available for immediate use?
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Inspect the paint locker, and any other flammable liquid locker, including the fixed fire-extinguishing system,
Chapter 5 where fitted, and verify that:
o The instructions for releasing the fixed fire extinguishing system were posted outside the space.
Chapter 6
o Ventilation fan controls and closing devices were clearly marked.
Chapter 7 o Where no FFE system provided that the inlet for the portable extinguisher was marked.
Chapter 8 o Where a fixed carbon dioxide system was provided, a sign warning against using carbon dioxide to inert
the space due to static ignition hazard was posted outside the space.
Chapter 9 o Where a seawater fixed extinguishing system was fitted, spray nozzles were free from salt build up.
Chapter 10 o Where a seawater fixed extinguishing system was fitted, the content of the store was not stacked above
the height of the spray nozzles.
Chapter 11  Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with purpose & operation of the FFE system.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
5.2.13. Were the Master and officers familiar with the location, purpose and operation of the machinery
Chapter 2 space fixed water-based or equivalent local application fire-fighting system, and was the equipment in
Chapter 3
good working order and readily available for immediate use, with operating instructions clearly displayed at
the control stations?
Where the vessel is fitted with a fixed water-based or equivalent local application fire-fighting system, the company
Chapter 5 should have a procedure to define when the system was required to be set to the automatic release mode, where this
was an option, and should include whenever the machinery space is operated in the unattended mode.
Chapter 6
Inspector Actions
Chapter 7 • Review the company procedure which described the use of the automatic release mode of the fixed water-based
local application fire-fighting system, where this function was provided.
Chapter 8 • Inspect the components of the fixed water-based local application fire-fighting system and verify that:
Chapter 9 o The system operating instructions were posted at the control stations.
o The water supply valves were open to the system.
Chapter 10 o The dedicated tank serving the system had a low-level alarm or marked with the min. required level.
Chapter 11 o All manual branch supply valves were open & marked or colour coded to identify the location they protected.
o The control panel was powered and set for automatic and/or remote operation.
Chapter 12 o The local release stations near to the protected equipment were marked as to their purpose.
o The remote monitoring/control panels in the wheelhouse and other locations were powered on with all smoke,
flame and heat detectors active.
133
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.2.13. Were the Master and officers familiar with the location, purpose and operation of the machinery
Chapter 2 space fixed water-based or equivalent local application fire-fighting system, and was the equipment in
Chapter 3
good working order and readily available for immediate use, with operating instructions clearly displayed at
the control stations?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5 Review, the company procedure which described the use of the automatic release mode of the fixed water-based
local application fire-fighting system, where this function was provided.
Chapter 6
Inspect the components of the fixed water-based local application fire-fighting system and verify that:
Chapter 7
 Review inspection and servicing data available at the main pump unit.
Chapter 9  Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with the purpose, operation and required release mode
of the fixed water-based local application fire-fighting system whilst the machinery space was operated in the
Chapter 10
attended and unattended state.
Chapter 11 Where the vessel was fitted with a machinery space fixed local application fire-fighting system which was not
water-based, address the inspector actions and subsequent sections on equivalency.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
5.2.14. Were the Master and officers familiar with the purpose of the cargo, ballast and stripping pump
Chapter 2 temperature sensing devices, and was there evidence that alarm activation points had been correctly set and
tested in accordance with company procedures and manufacturer's instructions?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 This question is only applicable to vessels with pumprooms. The Company should have a procedure for the operation
and maintenance of the cargo, ballast and stripping pump temperature sensing devices which defined:
Chapter 5
 The requirement to periodically record the temperature provided by each cargo, ballast and stripping pump sensor
Chapter 6 while the pumps were in operation.
 The actions to be taken in the event of the activation of a cargo, ballast or stripping pump high-temperature alarm.
Chapter 7
 The frequency of the cargo, ballast and stripping pump temperature sensing device accuracy checks.
Chapter 8  The alarm activation value for the temperature sensing devices fitted to the bulkhead shaft glands, bearings and
pump casings for cargo, ballast and stripping pumps.
Chapter 9  The circumstances under which the cargo pump bearing, and pump casing temperature sensing device alarm
activation points may be altered and by whom.
Chapter 10
 The frequency of each alarm activation point verification check.
Chapter 11  The frequency of testing the audible & visual alarms required in the CCR or the pump control station
 The actions to take in the event that a cargo, ballast or stripping pump temperature sensing device, or the overall
Chapter 12 temperature sensor monitoring and alarm system, fails.
134
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Review the procedures which defined the requirements for the operation and maintenance of the cargo,
Chapter 5 ballast and stripping pump temperature sensing devices.
Chapter 6  Inspect the cargo, ballast and stripping pump temperature sensor monitoring system panel and verify that:
o The temperature monitoring system was fully operational.
Chapter 7
o The system was not displaying any faults or obviously erroneous readings.
Chapter 8 o The temperature indicated by sensors from different pumps in a similar service were indicating a similar
reading.
Chapter 9
o The alarm activation settings were displayed for each sensor point.
Chapter 10
 Review the records of cargo, ballast and stripping pump temperature sensing device readings and verify that
Chapter 11 the records had been maintained for pumps in operation.
 If safe and practical to do, request that the alarm activation set point for one temperature sensing device is
Chapter 12 demonstrated to be correctly set.
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Review the inspection & testing data for cargo, ballast and stripping pump temperature sensor
Chapter 5 monitoring system and verify that:
o The required sensor checks & tests had been completed at the frequency defined by the company.
Chapter 6
o The alarm activation set points had been confirmed.
Chapter 7
 If necessary, review the records of inspections, tests, calibration and maintenance carried out.
Chapter 8 Where the cargo, ballast and stripping pump temperature sensing sensor device control panel was fitted in
the machinery space with no display in the CCR, verify that:
Chapter 9
 The officer in charge of cargo operations could identify the temperature sensing device alarm indicator in the
Chapter 10 CCR.
 There was a process to record and assess the readings provided by the temperature sensing devices
Chapter 11
fitted to pumps in operation.
Chapter 12
135
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 3

Chapter 5
When in the cargo pumproom:
Chapter 6  Inspect one cargo, ballast or stripping pump and verify that the temperature sensing devices
were connected at the appropriate locations.
Chapter 7
 Verify that no temporary cooling devices were rigged on any cargo, ballast or stripping pump.
Chapter 8  Verify that there was no leakage of cargo, either in the form of a spray or liquid, from the cargo
Chapter 9 or stripping pump mechanical seals.
 Interview the accompanying officer to verify their familiarity with the actions required in the event
Chapter 10
of a high temperature alarm activation.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
5.2.15. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the purpose and operation of the vessel’s deck foam
Chapter 2 system, including portable applicators, and was the system in good working order and available for immediate
use, with operating instructions displayed at the control station?
Chapter 3

The maintenance plan must include the fixed deck foam system and include the actions to be taken monthly,
Chapter 5 quarterly, annually (including testing foam concentrates) and 5-yearly. The first test of foam concentrates must be
performed not more than 3 years after the date of manufacture, and then every year. In addition, for protein-
Chapter 6
based alcohol-resistant (FPAR) foam concentrates a stability test must be performed prior to delivery to ship
Chapter 7 and annually thereafter.
Inspector Actions
Chapter 8
 Inspect the space(s) containing the deck foam system foam concentrate tanks(s), pump(s) and system
Chapter 9 controls and verify that:
Chapter 10 o The system operating instructions were posted near the control station.
o The system valves were clearly identified, and the system instructions indicated their required status
Chapter 11 in the standby and operational conditions.
o A copy of the foam concentrate annual test certificate indicated that it was fit for continued use.
Chapter 12
o The foam contained in the tank was certified as compatible with the cargo being carried.
o The foam tank was filled to the required level.
136
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.2.15. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the purpose and operation of the vessel’s deck foam
Chapter 2 system, including portable applicators, and was the system in good working order and available for immediate
use, with operating instructions displayed at the control station?
Chapter 3
Chapter 5  Review inspection and servicing data available in the space.

 Review the records of inspections, tests and maintenance carried out, including:
Chapter 6
o The annual foam concentrate test results.
Chapter 7 o The 5-yearly test of foam proportioners or other foam mixing devices.
Chapter 8  Inspect the deck main and/or foam main, monitors, applicators and isolating valves.
 Where safe to do so, operate a sample of isolating valves and monitors to verify that they are free to move.
Chapter 9
 Where the foam concentrate was not effective, or incompatible, with the cargo being carried, establish what
Chapter 10 additional arrangements had been provided and that they had been verified to satisfaction of the Flag.
 Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with the purpose & operation of the deck foam system
Chapter 11
with reference to:
Chapter 12 o Extinguishing spill fires - Precluding ignition of spilt oil, not yet ignited - Combating fires in ruptured tanks.
 Interview a rating - verify familiarity with the operation and use of foam applicators and foam monitors.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 the vessel’s fire doors?
Chapter 3

• The Company should have a procedure which defined the frequency of inspections, tests and
Chapter 5
maintenance for fire doors.
Chapter 6 • All fire doors are important; E/R fire doors should receive attention, particularly the fire doors
between the E/R and Steering Gear Compartment, which are often found tied open.
Chapter 7
• The inspector should be aware that local operation of a fire door may be affected if air-
Chapter 8 conditioning is still operating during a test.
Chapter 9
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
137
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 the vessel’s fire doors?
 Inspect a sample of fire doors throughout the accommodation, machinery and storage spaces and verify that:
Chapter 4
o They were free of obstructions.
Chapter 5 o No non-approved hold-open methods such as tiebacks, hooks, wedges or other arrangements were used
to hold the door open where it was required to be self-closing.
Chapter 6
o Self-closing arrangements closed and latched the door without the need for human intervention.
Chapter 7 o The door and frame were free of corrosion or wastage.
o There were no inappropriate cable penetrations through the door, its frame or surrounding bulkheads.
Chapter 8
o There were no inappropriate alterations or modifications - no gaps between the fire door and frame.
Chapter 9 o There was no damage to the lock mechanism, strike plate or hinges preventing the door closing properly.
o There was no damage to the door packing or frame - no punctures in the outer skin of the door.
Chapter 10
 Where a fire door had been replaced verify that the replacement door was of at least the same fire rating as
Chapter 11 shown on the fire control plan.
Chapter 12
 Review the Fire Control Plan to verify the required specification of a fire door.
 Interview one officer and one rating to verify familiarity with the location, purpose and operation of the fire doors.
5.3. Portable fire fighting appliances
Chapter 1
5.3.1. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the location and use of the vessel’s
Chapter 2
firefighter’s outfits including the self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA), and was the
Chapter 3 equipment maintained in good condition and ready for immediate use in accordance with
company procedures?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
The Company should have a procedure for the use & maintenance of firefighter’s outfits and SCBA which
Chapter 6
defined:
Chapter 7  The frequency and method of inspection and testing of the equipment.
 Use of the compressor for recharging cylinders, where fitted.
Chapter 8
 The provision of 2-way portable radiotelephone apparatus for each fire party for firefighter's
Chapter 9 communication.
Chapter 10 Firefighting training advocates that breathing apparatus should be used by personnel in pairs.
Chapter 11
Annual inspections should be carried out to ensure that the air quality of breathing apparatus air recharging
Chapter 12 systems is satisfactory.
138
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 firefighter’s outfits including the self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA), and was the equipment
Chapter 3
maintained in good condition and ready for immediate use in accordance with company procedures?
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Check the firefighter’s outfit storage areas - verify that firefighter’s outfit(s) were prepared for use.
Chapter 5
 Check the inventory and condition of a selected firefighter’s outfit.
Chapter 6  Check the associated SCBA and verify that it had been serviced & inspected in accordance with the
maintenance plan - the bottle was fully charged - the correct number of fully charged spare bottles were
Chapter 7 available - the harness and facemasks had been extended for ease of donning.
Chapter 8  Interview the accompanying Officer to verify familiarity with use & maintenance of SCBA and compressor
with reference to:
Chapter 9 o Full cylinder endurance.
Chapter 10
o Correct cylinder filling pressure.
o Cylinder changing and recharging.
Chapter 11 o Hygiene requirements.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 firefighter’s outfits including the self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA), and was the equipment
Chapter 3
maintained in good condition and ready for immediate use in accordance with company procedures?
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 If the vessel was provided with a breathing air compressor verify that:
Chapter 5 o A usage log was being maintained.
Chapter 6
o It had been serviced and inspected in accordance with the maintenance plan.
o A process was in place to test the air quality at a defined interval.
Chapter 7 o Where bottles of different pressures were to be filled, detailed instructions for preventing of
Chapter 8
overfilling of bottles were available and understood.
Chapter 9  Request that an officer or rating demonstrates the donning of SCBA - the test for equipment air leaks - the
testing of mask seal with the face - the testing of the low air alarm.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11 Note: This question is not focused on the additional SCBAs required by the IGC and Chemical Codes.
Chapter 12
139
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.3.2. Were the Master, officers and crew familiar with the location, purpose and operation of the
Chapter 2 vessel’s fire hoses, nozzles and international shore connection, and was the equipment in good working
Chapter 3
order and available for immediate use?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have a procedure for the inspection, testing and maintenance of fire hoses, nozzles and
Chapter 5 international shore connections which defined the frequency of inspection & testing - Frequency of pressure
testing of fire hoses - Replacement criteria for damaged or worn hoses.
Chapter 6
Inspector Actions
Chapter 7  Inspect a random sample of the fire hoses, nozzles and fire hydrants from accommodation, machinery
spaces and main deck areas - verify that the washers, connecting spanners, connecting mechanisms and
Chapter 8
nozzle jet/spray controls were present and/or fully functional.
Chapter 9  Inspect the international shore connection(s) and verify the required nuts, bolts and gasket were available
and, in addition, 2 correctly sized spanners.
 Review the fire control plan to verify the required location of fire hoses and nozzles.
Chapter 11  Interview a deck or engine rating to verify familiarity with the purpose and operation of the fire hoses, nozzles
and international shore connections.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
5.3.3. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the location, purpose and operation of the
Chapter 2 vessel’s portable fire extinguishers, and were the extinguishers in good order and readily available for
immediate use with operating instructions clearly marked?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 Portable fire extinguishers must be located as marked on the Fire Control Plan as per MSC.1/Circ.1275 and
marked with:
Chapter 5  Types of fire and rating for which the extinguisher is suitable - Type & quantity of extinguishing medium.
Chapter 6  Instructions for use and recharge - Year of manufacture.
Extinguishers should be fully charged and ready for use. There should be evidence of regular inspection and servicing
Chapter 7 and sufficient spare charges (or spare extinguishers) available. Records of inspection, testing & servicing must be in
the Maintenance Plan, as per IMO MSC.1/Circ.1432.
Chapter 8
Inspector Actions
Chapter 9  Inspect a representative sample of each type of portable extinguisher and verify that each extinguisher was:
o Marked with the information required under A.951(23) 8.1.
Chapter 10
o Marked with the date of the last annual service – and the date of the last check by vessel staff.
Chapter 11 o In the correct position as indicated by the fire control plan.
 Review the records of inspections, tests and maintenance carried out - Review inventory of spare extinguishers
Chapter 12
and spare charges - verify that there are sufficient for the number and type of portable fire extinguishers required.
 Interview one officer or rating to verify familiarity with purpose & operation of portable fire extinguisher.
140
5/27/2022
Chapter 1 5.3.4. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the location and purpose of the EEBDs carried
on board, and were these devices in good order, suitably located and ready for immediate use?
Chapter 2
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 3 Non-rechargeable EEBDs:
Chapter 4  Have a shelf life, usually 15 years, after which they should be replaced.
 Maintenance requirements, manufacturer's trademark and serial number, shelf life (expiry date) with accompanying
Chapter 5 manufacture date and name of approving authority must be printed on each EEBD.
 The cylinders do not require hydrostatic testing.
Chapter 6
Rechargeable EEBDs:
Chapter 7  For EEBDs that can be recharged on board using the SCBA compressor, the cylinders must be hydrostatically tested as for
breathing apparatus i.e. 5-yearly hydrostatic testing of all steel SCBA cylinders.
Chapter 8
 Aluminium and composite cylinders should be tested to satisfaction of the Administration.
Chapter 9 The Company should have procedures for the use & maintenance of EEBDs that defined the number & location - Training & escape drill
requirements - Inspection & maintenance requirements.
Chapter 11  Review the procedures for the use and maintenance of EEBDs
 Review the inspection & maintenance records for the EEBDs in the maintenance plan.
Chapter 12
 Inspect sample EEBDs in machinery spaces, pumproom and accommodation spaces.
 Interview 2 ratings to verify familiarity with the location and purpose of EEBDs
Chapter 1
5.3.5. Were the Master, officers and engine ratings familiar with the purpose and operation
Chapter 2
of the vessel’s wheeled (mobile) fire extinguishers, and was the equipment in good order and
Chapter 3 available for immediate use with operating instructions clearly marked?
Wheeled (mobile) fire extinguishers should be located in the machinery spaces as marked on the Fire Control
Chapter 5 Plan and in accordance with the requirements of SOLAS. They should be clearly marked with:
Chapter 6  Types of fire and rating for which the extinguisher is suitable - Type and quantity of extinguishing medium
 Instructions for use and recharge - Year of manufacture.
Chapter 7
Chapter 8 Extinguishers should be fully charged and readily available for use. There should be evidence of regular
inspection, servicing and testing and sufficient spare charges available.
Chapter 9
Chapter 10 Records of inspection and testing should be in the Maintenance Plan as required by IMO MSC. /Circ 1432.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
141
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.3.5. Were the Master, officers and engine ratings familiar with the purpose and operation
Chapter 2
of the vessel’s wheeled (mobile) fire extinguishers, and was the equipment in good order and
Chapter 3 available for immediate use with operating instructions clearly marked?
Chapter 5  Inspect the wheeled fire extinguishers in the machinery spaces and verify each extinguisher was:
o Marked with the required information.
Chapter 6
o Marked with the date of the last annual service.
Chapter 7 o Marked with the date of the last check by vessel staff.
Chapter 8 o In the correct position as indicated by the fire control plan.
Chapter 9
 Review the inventory of spare charges and verify that there were sufficient on board for the
Chapter 10 wheeled fire extinguishers.
Chapter 11  Interview one engineer officer or rating to verify familiarity with their purpose and operation.
Chapter 12
5.4. Life saving appliances
Chapter 1
5.4.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with the operation of the davit-launched
Chapter 2
lifeboats, release mechanisms and launching appliances, and were they in good order with
Chapter 3 records available to demonstrate that they had been inspected and tested as required?
The Company should have a procedure to ensure the lifeboats, release mechanisms and launching appliances
Chapter 5 were periodically inspected and tested and ready for use in an emergency.
Inspector Actions
Chapter 6
 Review the procedure to ensure the lifeboats, release mechanisms and launching appliances were
Chapter 7 periodically inspected and tested and ready for immediate use in an emergency.
 Review records of periodic inspections & tests of lifeboats, release mechanisms & launching appliances.
Chapter 8
 Inspect the lifeboats, release mechanisms and launching appliances. Inspect the lifting hooks and their
Chapter 9 associated structure where they connect to lifeboat keel and verify that the structure was free from corrosion.
 Request that the accompanying officer to start a lifeboat engine and demonstrate the propeller moving
Chapter 10
in the ahead and astern direction.
Chapter 11  Select several items from the monthly inspection check list required by SOLAS III/ 36 and verify that the
accompanying officer was familiar with how the checks or tests were performed.
Chapter 12
 Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with the operation, inspection and testing of the
lifeboats, release mechanisms and launching appliances.
142
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.4.2. Were the Master and officers familiar with the operation of the free-fall lifeboat, its release
Chapter 2 systems and its launching appliance, and was the equipment in satisfactory condition with records
Chapter 3
available to demonstrate that it had been inspected and tested in accordance with company procedures?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 The Company should have procedures to ensure the free-fall lifeboat, its release systems, launching appliance and
recovery equipment were periodically inspected and tested and ready for immediate use in an emergency.
Chapter 5

 Review the procedures to ensure the free-fall lifeboat, its release systems, launching appliance and recovery
Chapter 7 equipment were periodically inspected and tested and ready for immediate use in an emergency.
Chapter 8
 Review records of periodic inspections & tests of free-fall lifeboat, its release systems, launching appliance and
recovery equipment.
Chapter 9  Inspect the free-fall lifeboat, its equipment & release systems, launching & recovery systems and stowage
arrangements considering the regulatory requirements and with reference to a copy of the vessel's monthly
Chapter 10 inspection checklist.
 Request that the accompanying officer starts the lifeboat engine and demonstrate the propeller moving in the
Chapter 11 ahead and astern direction.
Chapter 12  Select several items from the monthly inspection check list required by SOLAS III/36 and verify that the
accompanying officer was familiar with how the checks or tests were performed.
 Interview the accompanying officer to verify their familiarity with operation, inspection and testing.
Chapter 1
5.4.3. Were the Master and officers familiar with the operation of the dedicated rescue boat
Chapter 2
and launching appliance, and were they in good order with records available to demonstrate
Chapter 3 that they had been inspected and tested as required?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have a procedure to ensure the rescue boat and launching appliance were
Chapter 5 periodically inspected and tested and ready for immediate use in an emergency.
Chapter 6
Inspector Actions
Chapter 7 Review the procedure to ensure the rescue boat and launching appliance were periodically inspected and
Chapter 8
tested and ready for immediate use in an emergency.
 Review records of periodic inspections and tests of the rescue boat and launching appliance.
Chapter 9  Inspect the rescue boat and launching appliance.
 If safe to do so, request that the accompanying officer:
Chapter 10
o Starts the rescue boat engine and engages the drive.
Chapter 11 o Demonstrates that that the launching appliance can be slewed manually and/or by reserve power.
Chapter 12  Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with the operation, inspection and testing of the
rescue boat and its launching appliance.
143
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.4.4. Were the Master and Officers familiar with the location, purpose and operation of the
Chapter 2
rocket parachute flares and line throwing appliances and were they in good order, with records
Chapter 3 available to demonstrate that had they had been inspected as required?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 The Company should have a procedure to ensure that rocket parachute flares & line throwing appliances
Chapter 6
were periodically inspected and ready for use. The lines and rockets of line throwing appliances should not
be stowed apart. Self-contained line throwing units are often disassembled for transporting to vessel.
Chapter 7 Check to ensure that the equipment has been reassembled and rockets correctly positioned ready for use.
Inspector Actions
Chapter 8
 Review the procedure to ensure that rocket parachute flares and line throwing appliances were
Chapter 9
periodically inspected and ready for immediate use in an emergency.
Chapter 10  Review records of periodic inspections of the rocket parachute flares and line throwing appliances.
Chapter 11  Inspect the rocket parachute flares and line throwing appliances and their stowage location.
Chapter 12
 Interview the accompanying officer to verify their familiarity with the purpose, operation and
inspection of the rocket parachute flares and line throwing appliances.
Chapter 1
5.4.5. Were the Master and officers familiar with the operation of the liferafts, hydrostatic
Chapter 2
releases and liferaft launching appliances, where provided, and were they in good order with
Chapter 3 records available to demonstrate that they had been serviced, inspected and tested as
required?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 The Company should have a procedure to ensure that liferafts, hydrostatic releases and, liferaft
Chapter 6 launching appliances were periodically inspected & tested & ready for use.

Chapter 8  Review the procedure to ensure that liferafts, and launching appliances if fitted, were
periodically inspected and tested and ready for use.
Chapter 9  Review the records of periodic servicing by an authorised service station for the liferafts,
Chapter 10
hydrostatic releases and, launching appliances, where provided.
 Review the records of onboard inspections of liferafts, hydrostatic releases and, launching
Chapter 11 appliances, where provided.
 Inspect the liferafts, hydrostatic releases and, liferaft launching appliances, and verify that they
Chapter 12
were stowed and ready for immediate release in accordance with the applicable regulations.
 Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with operation, inspection and testing.
144
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.4.6. Were the lifebuoys, and associated lights, smoke floats and lifelines, in good order,
Chapter 2
clearly marked and correctly distributed around the ship?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 • The Company should have a procedure to ensure that lifebuoys, and associated lights, smoke floats
Chapter 5 and lifelines, were in order, clearly marked and correctly distributed around the ship.
• Lifebuoy self-igniting lights do not need to be intrinsically safe if located outside of the gas hazardous
Chapter 6 area. However, there must be strict controls in place to avoid those non-intrinsically safe lights being
misplaced into the gas hazardous zone. This may include highlighting or marking of those non-
Chapter 7
intrinsically safe lights or other appropriate means.
Chapter 8
Inspector Actions
Chapter 9
 Review the procedure to ensure that lifebuoys, and associated lights, smoke floats and lifelines, were
Chapter 10 in good order, clearly marked and correctly distributed around the ship.
 Inspect a selection of the ship’s lifebuoys, and associated lights, smoke floats and lifelines.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12 Any matters relating to lifebuoy and light provided for safe access will be addressed by the appropriate
questions except where the lifebuoy light was found to be unsafe for use in a gas hazardous zone.
Chapter 1
5.4.7. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the immersion suits, and were the
Chapter 2 immersion suits in good order, readily accessible and their location(s) clearly indicated?
The Company should have procedures to ensure that immersion suits were in order, readily accessible and
Chapter 4 their location(s) clearly indicated with guidance on:
Chapter 5  The number, type, sizes, location(s) and stowage of immersion suit on board.
 Monthly inspections.
Chapter 6
 Periodic air-pressure testing both before and after an immersion suit reaches ten years in service.
Chapter 7
Some Administrations may accept immersion suits as vacuum-packed units, provided, for instance, that:
Chapter 8
 Manufacturer’s instructions for monthly inspections are followed.
Chapter 9  Sufficient non vacuum-packed units are available for training.
Chapter 10
 Units with open or damaged packaging are treated as if they were non-vacuum-packed units.
 Air pressure testing should be to manufacturer’s instructions or, if these are not available, at intervals not
Chapter 11 exceeding three years, or more frequently for suits over 10 years of age.
Chapter 12
145
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.4.7. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the immersion suits, and were the
Chapter 2
immersion suits in good order, readily accessible and their location(s) clearly indicated?
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5  Review the procedures to ensure that immersion suits are in order, readily accessible and
their location(s) clearly indicated.
Chapter 6
 Inspect the ship’s immersion suits at one stowage location.
Chapter 7  Sight the immersion suits at any other location(s).
Chapter 8  Review the records of monthly inspections and periodic air-pressure tests of the immersion suits.
Chapter 9  Interview an officer or rating to verify their familiarity with donning an immersion suit.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
5.4.8. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the lifejackets and personal
Chapter 2
flotation devices (PFDs) provided on board, and was the equipment in good condition, and
Chapter 3 properly maintained?
The Company should have procedures to ensure that the lifejackets required by SOLAS were in order,
Chapter 5 readily accessible and their location(s) indicated. Procedures should also provide guidance for the use of
Chapter 6 “working lifejackets” (also known as workvests, continuous use lifejackets or PFDs), including the servicing
of inflatable lifejackets.
Chapter 8  Review the procedures to ensure that the lifejackets required by SOLAS were in order, readily
accessible and their location(s) indicated.
Chapter 9
 Review the company procedures providing guidance on the use of “working lifejackets”, including
Chapter 10 the servicing of inflatable lifejackets, if carried.
 Inspect the lifejackets at one stowage location - Sight the lifejackets at any other location(s).
Chapter 11
 Inspect a sample of “working lifejackets”.
Chapter 12  Review the records of monthly inspections of all lifejackets & annual servicing of inflatable lifejackets.
 Interview a rating to verify familiarity with company procedures for the use of “working lifejackets”.
146
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.4.9. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for the periodic
Chapter 2
testing and maintenance of the emergency lighting system, was there evidence of periodic
Chapter 3 testing, and was the system in proper operating condition?
The Company should have procedures for inspection & testing of the emergency lighting system including:
Chapter 5 • Instructions for inspection and testing - the frequency and recording of inspection and testing.
 Review the procedures.
Chapter 7
 Check records to verify that inspection & testing had taken place in accordance with the procedures.
Chapter 8
 Request a demonstration of the emergency lighting - note any defects to emergency lights
Chapter 9  Inspect a representative sample of the emergency lights and verify that they are working.
Chapter 10  In at least one location, verify that arrangements for lighting the area of water into which survival craft
would be launched were in satisfactory condition.
Chapter 11
 Interview the Officer responsible for electrical systems to verify familiarity with procedures.
Chapter 12
5.5. Permits to work
Chapter 1
5.5.1. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the company enclosed space entry
Chapter 2
procedures, and was evidence available to demonstrate that all enclosed space entries had
Chapter 3 been made in strict compliance with the procedures?
The Company should have procedures for enclosed space entry which:
Chapter 5
 Defined the term enclosed space entry.
Chapter 6  Identified spaces onboard vessels which were defined as enclosed spaces.
 Identified enclosed spaces onboard managed vessels which did not require the issue of an enclosed space
Chapter 7
entry permit but were subject to controlled entry procedures.
Chapter 8  Identified the persons onboard who may assume the roles of Competent Person, Responsible Person and
Attendant.
Chapter 9
 Identified the OEL standard that had been adopted by the company.
Chapter 10  Provided the following OEL values for each gas likely to be encountered: the Time Weighted Average (TWA) -
the Short-Term Exposure Limit (STEL) - the Ceiling Value.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
147
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 procedures, and was evidence available to demonstrate that all enclosed space entries had been made in
Chapter 3
strict compliance with the procedures?

 Defined the process that must be followed when an enclosed space entry must be made, including:
Chapter 5 o Identifying potential hazards through a RA completed by a Competent Person.
o Identifying the toxic, flammable, explosive or asphyxiant gasses that may be present in an enclosed
Chapter 6
space and the tests required to detect their presence.
Chapter 7 o Identifying any additional precautions required prior to entering ballast tanks as a result of the use of
the Ballast Water Management System.
Chapter 8 o Ventilating the space before and during entry.
o Segregating the space by blanking off or isolating all connecting pipelines or valves and electrical
Chapter 9 power/equipment.
Chapter 10
o Cleaning the space in accordance with documented criteria based on previous content of the space.
o Testing the atmosphere of space before and during entry for gasses that may be present due to the
Chapter 11 previous content or machinery operating within the space.
o Securing the space for entry and providing proper illumination.
Chapter 12
o Instructing an attendant to remain at the entrance to the space while it is occupied.
o Positioning rescue and resuscitation equipment at the entrance to the space.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
procedures, and was evidence available to demonstrate that all enclosed space entries had
Chapter 3 been made in strict compliance with the procedures?
o Properly clothing and equipping personnel for entry and subsequent tasks.
Chapter 5 o Issuing and authorising a permit.
 Identified the circumstances in which more than 1 tank or space could be included on same enclosed space entry permit.
Chapter 6
 Prohibited the use of Compressed Air Breathing Apparatus (CABA), Emergency Life Support Apparatus (ELSA) or EEBD
Chapter 7 as an alternative to properly cleaning and gas freeing a space for safe entry.
 Identified the precautions during entry:
Chapter 8 o The atmosphere should be retested frequently while the space is occupied.
o Persons entering enclosed spaces should be provided with calibrated and tested multi-gas detectors that monitor
Chapter 9
the levels of oxygen, carbon monoxide and other gases as appropriate.
Chapter 10  Review the company enclosed space entry procedures.
 Review the categorisation of enclosed spaces onboard which identified spaces that required the issue of a permit - Did not
Chapter 11 require the issue of a permit but where entry was controlled through an alternative documented process.
 Identify through review of PMS or recent cargo operations where enclosed space entry would have taken place; review a
Chapter 12
permit for at least 2 of following enclosed spaces: Cargo spaces - Double bottom - Fuel / Ballast tank - Cargo pumproom -
Cargo compressor room – Cofferdam - Chain locker - Void space - Duct keel - Interbarrier space - Engine crankcase or
scavenge air receiver - Sewage tank – Boiler - Nitrogen generator/IG plant room - Ballast water treatment plant room.
148
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 procedures, and was evidence available to demonstrate that all enclosed space entries had been made in
strict compliance with the procedures?
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4  Review the selected enclosed space entry permits and verify that:
o A detailed RA had been developed and/or reviewed prior to each enclosed space entry - The permit validity was
Chapter 5
indicated and did not exceed 12 hours.
Chapter 6 o Each space had been cleaned as required, in accordance with company procedure. Consider cross referencing with
the oil record book or the garbage log to establish how any wash water or residues were disposed of.
Chapter 7 o The pre-entry atmosphere checks for oxygen content and flammable, toxic, explosive and/or asphyxiant vapours or
gasses were appropriate for the space and its previous content or usage.
Chapter 8 o The permits or supplementary documentation identified the connecting pipelines, valves and/or electrical
power/equipment that had been blanked or isolated
Chapter 9
o The balance of permits had been completed as required. Permits had been signed by Master or nominated responsible
Chapter 10 person as per procedure - the attendant - person(s) entering the space - responsible person supervising entry.
o The permits had not been approved by the same individual who was making the enclosed space entry.
Chapter 11  Where procedures did not require the issue of a permit for entry into cargo pumproom, cargo compressor room, nitrogen
generator room, IG plant room or ballast water treatment plant room, verify that the checks required by the procedure for
Chapter 12 entry into such spaces were being adhered to with records of gas measurements and entry and exit times for each entry.
 Interview 1 rating to verify familiarity with their role in enclosed space entry, when and how they were briefed and, the
process for signing a permit as either an attendant or as a person entering the space.
Chapter 1
5.5.2.Were the Master, officers and, where directly involved, ratings familiar with the company hot work procedure,
Chapter 2 and was evidence available to demonstrate that hot work had been conducted in accordance with the procedure?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have procedures for managing hot work which should include:
Chapter 5  The definition of hot work - The control of hot work.
Chapter 6  Work planning, RA and the issue of hot work permits.
 Hot work inside a designated space.
Chapter 7
 Hot work outside a designated space.
Chapter 8 o Hot Work in a gas safe area - Hot work inside the machinery space - Hot work over the side.
Chapter 9  Hot work in dangerous or hazardous areas.
o Hot work in cargo tanks - in ballast tanks - in pumproom - within cargo tank deck area.
Chapter 10
o Hot work in the vicinity of bunker tanks - Hot work on pipelines.
Chapter 11  Levels of approval required for authorising hot work.
Chapter 12
149
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.5.2. Were the Master, officers and, where directly involved, ratings familiar with the
Chapter 2
company hot work procedure, and was evidence available to demonstrate that hot work had
Chapter 3 been conducted in accordance with the procedure?
Chapter 5  Review the hot work procedures.

 If hot work had taken place within any hazardous area during previous 6 months, select 2 permits, and verify that:
Chapter 6
o A hot work plan had been developed showing separate responsibilities for work supervision and safety.
Chapter 7 o A RA had been prepared for the hot work - A work planning meeting had been completed.
o Shore approval obtained - A permit had been issued, completed and approved on board in accordance with the
Chapter 8 hot work plan and the terms of the shore approval.
 If hot work had not taken place in any hazardous areas during the previous 6 months, select not more than 2
Chapter 9
permits for hot work outside the designated space, but within other parts of the non-hazardous area, and verify that:
Chapter 10 o A hot work plan had been developed showing separate responsibilities for work supervision and safety.
o A risk assessment had been prepared for the proposed hot work.
Chapter 11
o A work planning meeting had been completed.
Chapter 12 o A hot work permit had been issued, completed and approved on board in accordance with the hot work plan
and the company hot work procedure.
Chapter 1
5.5.2. Were the Master, officers and, where directly involved, ratings familiar with the
Chapter 2
company hot work procedure, and was evidence available to demonstrate that hot work had
Chapter 3 been conducted in accordance with the procedure?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5  While in the designated space, typically, but not necessarily, the machinery space workshop, review the
Chapter 6
onboard instructions for undertaking hot work in the space and verify they included instructions regarding:
o When hot work may be conducted in the designated space.
Chapter 7 o When hot work is prohibited in the designated space.
Chapter 8 o Who is permitted to conduct hot work in the designated space.
o The requirement to complete or review a risk assessment during a work planning meeting.
Chapter 9
o The requirement to work in the designated space with a shield or curtain erected.
Chapter 10 o The requirement to gain authorisation from Master or Responsible Officer before hot work may begin.
o Considerations around preventing unintended activation of the ship’s fire alarm system.
Chapter 11
 Verify that no recent undocumented hot work had taken place outside the designated space without permit.
Chapter 12  Interview 1 E/R rating to verify their understanding of the hot work instructions for the designated space.
150
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.5.3. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the company procedure for working at height,
Chapter 2 and was there evidence that risk control measures such as permits to work or documented risk
Chapter 3
assessments were consistently used whenever work was undertaken at height?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have safe working procedures which included the controls required to be in place whenever work
Chapter 5 at or above a defined height is planned or undertaken. The procedures should include:
 The definition of working at height - The height at or above which working at height control measures must be
Chapter 6 implemented.
Chapter 7  The method of documenting the risk control measures that need to be put in place before work can be authorised,
either through a permit to work, RA or other work management process.
Chapter 8  Any exclusions from requirement for documenting the control measures when working at height in either a permit or
RA.
Chapter 9
 The PPE such as lifelines, harnesses, fall arresters, etc. that must be used when working at height.
Chapter 10  The specialist equipment, such as bosun’s chairs, stages, portable scaffolding, safety nets, etc. that must be used.
 The requirement to check PPE & specialist working at height equipment periodically and record the inventory and
Chapter 11 condition of equipment - The requirement to check PPE & specialist working at height equipment before use.
 The level of supervision that must be maintained for the duration of work at height.
Chapter 12
 The level of authority required to approve permits or risk assessments for working at height.
 Any additional permits that may be considered or applicable when working at height.
Chapter 1
5.5.3. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the company procedure for
Chapter 2
working at height, and was there evidence that risk control measures such as permits to work
Chapter 3 or documented risk assessments were consistently used whenever work was undertaken at
height?
Chapter 4

 Review the safe work procedure for working at height.
Chapter 6
 Review several recent work at height permits or RAs and verify that:
Chapter 7 o The work described in the permits and/or RA reflected the circumstances found onboard.
o The permits and/or risk assessments were approved in accordance with the company procedure.
Chapter 8
 Review the work at height PPE and specialist equipment inventory and periodic inspection checklist and
Chapter 9 verify that checks had been completed in accordance with the company work at height procedure.
 Inspect a selection of specialist working at height PPE and equipment provided onboard and verify that the
Chapter 10
condition reflected that as reported in the most recent periodic check.
Chapter 11  Interview a deck or engine rating to verify their understanding of the company safe working procedure for
working at height and their involvement with either the permit or RA review process.
Chapter 12
151
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.5.4. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the company procedures for
Chapter 2
working over the side, and was there evidence that risk control measures such as standard
Chapter 3 work procedures, permits to work or documented risk assessments were consistently used
whenever work was undertaken over the side?
Chapter 4

The Company should have safe working procedures which included the controls required to be in place
Chapter 6 whenever work over the side is planned or undertaken. The procedures should include:
Chapter 7  The definition of working over the side.
 The prohibition of working over the side while vessel is underway except in defined circumstances such as:
Chapter 8
o Rigging, adjusting or recovering a combination ladder before or after boarding or disembarking a pilot
Chapter 9 where this requires a seafarer to work outside the side rail.
Chapter 10 o Rigging, adjusting or recovering an accommodation ladder as part of port arrival or departure
operations where this requires a seafarer to work outside the side rail.
Chapter 11
o Launching or recovering a lifeboat or rescue boat as part of an exercise or emergency response.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
 Any exclusions from the requirement to document the control measures on each occasion when work takes
Chapter 6 place over the side by utilising a standard procedure developed through risk assessment, such as:
o Rigging, adjusting or recovering a combination ladder.
Chapter 7
o Rigging, adjusting or recovering an accommodation ladder.
Chapter 8 o Rigging, adjusting or recovering a gangway while in port
Chapter 9  The method of documenting the risk control measures that need to be put in place before work can be
authorised, either through a permit to work, RA or other work management process.
Chapter 10  The PPE such as lifejackets, lifelines, harnesses, fall arresters, etc. that must be used.
Chapter 11  The specialist equipment, such as bosun’s chairs, stages, safety nets, etc. that must be used when working
over the side.
Chapter 12
152
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
 The requirement to check PPE and specialist working at height and over the side equipment periodically
Chapter 6 and record the inventory and condition of the equipment.
 The requirement to check PPE and specialist working at height & over the side equipment before each use.
Chapter 7
 The level of supervision that must be maintained on deck at work location for the duration of work over the
Chapter 8 side.
 The level of supervision that must be maintained on the bridge for the duration of the work if the work over
Chapter 9 the side takes place while the vessel is underway.
Chapter 10  The status of the main propulsion machinery and maximum permitted speed of vessel when work over the
side takes place while vessel is underway and making way for tasks such as rigging a combination ladder.
Chapter 11  The level of authority required to approve working over the side.
Chapter 12  Any additional permits that may be considered or applicable when working over the side.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5  Review the safe work procedures for working over the side.
Chapter 6  Review any standard work procedures for working over the side while the vessel was underway such as for rigging
a combination or accommodation ladder.
Chapter 7
 Review several recent work over the side permits or RAs and verify that:
Chapter 8 o The work described in the permits and/or RAs reflected the circumstances found onboard.
o The permits and/or RAs were approved in accordance with the company procedure.
Chapter 9  Review the working at height and over the side PPE and specialist equipment inventory and periodic inspection
checklist. Verify that checks had been completed in accordance with the company procedure.
Chapter 10
 Inspect a selection of specialist working at height and over the side PPE and equipment provided onboard and
verify that the condition reflected that as reported in the most recent periodic check.
Chapter 11
 Interview a deck rating to verify understanding of the company procedure with specific reference to their
Chapter 12 involvement with either the permit or RA review process and rigging a combination or an accommodation ladder
while the ship was underway and the required level of supervision on deck and from the bridge.
153
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.5.5. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for working on
Chapter 2
electrical equipment and systems, and was there evidence that risk control measures such as
Chapter 3 permits to work and/or documented risk assessments were consistently used whenever work
was undertaken on electrical equipment and systems?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
The Company should have safe working procedures which included the controls required to be in place
Chapter 6 whenever work on electrical equipment or systems is planned or undertaken. The procedure should include:
 The definition of working on electrical equipment or systems.
Chapter 7
 The definitions of general electrical work and high-voltage electrical work.
Chapter 8  The method of documenting the risk control measures that need to be put in place before work on electrical
equipment/systems can be authorised, either through a permit, RA or other work management process.
Chapter 9
 The additional risk control measures that must be in place and documented when:
Chapter 10 o Conducting work on high-voltage equipment or systems.
o Conducting work on or near live electrical equipment or systems.
Chapter 11
o Conducting work on live electrical test benches.
Chapter 12 o Conducting work on electrical equipment in hazardous areas
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
 The PPE such as insulating mats, insulating gloves, eye protection, footwear and clothing without metal
Chapter 6 fittings, etc. that must be used when working on electrical equipment or systems.
 The dangers of wearing jewellery while working on or near electrical equipment or systems.
Chapter 7
 The specialist equipment that must be used when working on electrical equipment or systems.
Chapter 8  The requirement to post a notice of instructions on treatment of electric shock in spaces containing
electric equipment and switchgear.
Chapter 9
 The requirement to check PPE and specialist electrical work equipment before each use.
Chapter 10  The level of supervision or direct oversight that must maintained for the duration of work.
 The level of authority required to approve work on electrical equipment or systems.
Chapter 11
 Any additional permits that may be considered or applicable when working on electrical equipment/
Chapter 12 system.
154
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
Chapter 6  Review the safe work procedures for working on electrical equipment or systems.
 Where necessary, review the PMS or daily work planning meeting records to identify when work on
Chapter 7 electrical equipment or systems may have taken place.
 Review at least two recent permits and/or RAs for work on electrical equipment or systems and verify that:
Chapter 8 o The work described in the permits and/or RAs reflected the circumstances found onboard.
o The permits and/or risk assessments were approved in accordance with the company procedure.
Chapter 9
 During the inspection, confirm that a notice of instructions on the treatment of electric shock was posted in
Chapter 10 spaces containing electric equipment and switchgear.
 Interview the Electrician or, if no electrician is onboard, an appropriate E/R officer to verify understanding of:
Chapter 11 o The company procedure for working on electrical equipment or systems.
Chapter 12 o The electrical work permit and/or RA development, review and approval processes.
o The additional control measures required when working on High-voltage systems and equipment - Live
electrical equipment/test benches - Electrical equipment or systems in hazardous areas.
Chapter 1
5.5.6. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for the control of
Chapter 2
hazardous energy, and was evidence available, through documented risk assessment or
Chapter 3 permits, that hazardous energy sources were routinely identified and isolated before working
on, or in, machinery, systems or spaces where hazardous energy could be present?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
The Company should have procedures which:
Chapter 6  Described potential sources of hazardous energy, and the methods of controlling them, when planning and
conducting work on, or in, machinery, systems or spaces where an uncontrolled release of energy could
Chapter 7 cause harm to personnel or the environment.
Chapter 8  Provided instructions on:
o When the process of carrying out identification of hazardous energy sources must be conducted,
Chapter 9 i.e.
Chapter 10  During the daily work planning meeting.
 As part of a standard work procedure for a defined job.
Chapter 11
 As part of the work instructions contained within the PMS.
Chapter 12  Through the RA process for a new or unplanned job.
155
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
o How hazardous energy sources are to be identified, such as;
Chapter 6  Through technical drawing review.
 Through onsite survey using hazard identification tools.
Chapter 7
 A combination of both.
Chapter 8 o How hazardous energy sources are secured against uncontrolled release, such as through lock-
Chapter 9
out/tag-out (LO/TO) or another documented work procedure.
o How the hazardous energy source isolation points are required to be documented, such as:
Chapter 10  The use of a dedicated LO/TO permit.
Chapter 11  As a subsection of another permit used to control work.
 A job specific RA.
Chapter 12
 A Safety Critical Task Assessment.
 Another documented work process.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 4

o How to achieve and verify a zero energy state before work starts on, or in, any machinery, system or space with
Chapter 6 hazardous energy source(s).
o How to complete the independent verification of isolation points
Chapter 7
o The authorisation for work on, or in, machinery, systems or spaces with hazardous energy source(s).
Chapter 8 o The process to temporarily reinstate energy sources for testing purposes.
o How to reinstate energy sources upon completion of the planned work.
Chapter 9 o The requirement to test machinery or systems after removal of isolation to ensure full functionality.
 Defined the type and quantity of specialist LO/TO equipment that must be available onboard.
Chapter 10
 Required that an inventory of specialist LO/TO equipment must be maintained.
Chapter 11  Defined who is authorised to undertake the LO/TO or other documented isolation process - undertake the independent
verification of isolation points - approve the permit, RA or other work process for isolation of hazardous energy sources.
Chapter 12  Defined the training required for all personnel involved in the isolation of hazardous energy process.
 Prohibited work on equipment or systems where a zero energy state could not be achieved except where specialist
procedures had been developed for working on energised systems.
156
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
Chapter 6  Review the company control of hazardous energy procedures.

Chapter 7  Review at least 2 recent permits, RAs or other work process documents which were used to identify and
control hazardous energy sources before work on, or in, machinery, systems or spaces.
Chapter 8  If necessary, review the PMS to confirm that tasks that would require the identification and control of
hazardous energy sources in accordance with the company procedure had an accompanying permit, RA
Chapter 9
or other work process document available.
Chapter 10  Interview one deck or engineer officer to verify their understanding of:
o The control of hazardous energy procedures and the use of permits, RA or other documented work
Chapter 11
processes to identify and document sources of hazardous energy before starting work.
Chapter 12 o The process to verify a zero-energy state of a source of hazardous energy.
5.6. Fixed and portable gas detecting systems
Chapter 1
5.6.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with the purpose, operation, testing, maintenance and
Chapter 2 calibration of the vessel’s portable and personal gas measurement instruments, and was the equipment on
Chapter 3
board sufficient, in good working order, regularly tested and periodically calibrated?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have procedures for the operation, testing, maintenance and calibration of the vessel’s portable
Chapter 5 and personal gas measurement instruments which defined:
 The type and number of portable and personal gas measurement instruments to be carried on board.
Chapter 6  The toxic gases or vapours for which tubes, chips or other consumables should be available.
 The purpose(s) and function(s) of each instrument, including the sensor technology utilised and whether the
Chapter 7
instrument can be used:
Chapter 8 o in an inert atmosphere.
o at above atmospheric pressure.
Chapter 9  The circumstances under which each instrument sensor may be poisoned.
 The description and quantity of spare parts and test gases to be carried on board.
Chapter 10
 The method and frequency of testing and calibrating the gas measurement instruments, including a requirement
Chapter 11 that all oxygen and hydrocarbon analysers are checked for correct operation before each use.
 The records of equipment, testing and calibration to be maintained.
Chapter 12  The circumstances under which personal gas measurement instruments must be worn, e.g. enclosed space, cargo
tank, pump room entry or when handling cargo or bunkers with high H2S concentrations.
The procedures may refer to the manufacturer’s manuals for detailed guidance on individual instruments.
157
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Review the:
Chapter 5 o Procedures for operation, testing, maintenance and calibration of portable and personal gas measurement
instruments.
Chapter 6 o Instruction manuals for the portable and personal gas measurement instruments.
Chapter 7  Inspect the:
o Portable and personal gas measurement instruments.
Chapter 8 o Associated spare parts and test gases.
Chapter 9 o The tubes, chips or other consumables available on board for measuring toxic gases.
o Hoses or cables used to sample tank atmospheres and verify that they were of sufficient length to reach the
Chapter 10 bottom of the deepest tank.
 Review the:
Chapter 11
o Inventory of portable and personal gas measurement instruments, spare parts, test gases and tubes, chips
Chapter 12 or other consumables for measuring toxic gases.
o Test and calibration records for the portable and personal gas measurement instruments.
o Records of the date when each disposable personal gas monitor was first commissioned.
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
Chapter 5  Interview the accompanying Officer to assess their familiarity with the:
Chapter 6 o Purpose and operation of portable and personal gas measurement instruments.
o Testing, maintenance and calibration of portable and personal gas measurement instruments, including
Chapter 7
the correct use of test gases.
Chapter 8 o Records required to be kept for the portable and personal gas measurement instruments.
Chapter 9  Request that the accompanying officer demonstrates the pre-operational accuracy test, in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions, for a selected portable or personal gas measurement instrument.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11 Where the vessel was provided with portable gas measuring equipment and consumables from different
manufacturers the vessel staff must be able to demonstrate that the items are mutually compatible
Chapter 12 through manufacturer’s instructions. (Particularly when considering gas testing tubes and hand pumps)
158
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.6.2. Were the Master and deck officers familiar with the company procedures for testing the
Chapter 2 atmosphere in double-hull and double bottom spaces for flammable gas, and were records available to
Chapter 3
confirm that appropriate measurements had been taken using the equipment fitted to, or provided on, the
vessel?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
The Company should have procedures which described:
Chapter 6
 The method and frequency of detecting and monitoring flammable gas concentrations in double hull, double
Chapter 7 bottom and void spaces applicable to vessel type and considering the equipment fitted or provided.
 The requirement to record the measurement results obtained from monitoring the double hull, double
Chapter 8
bottom and void spaces required to be protected, with portable instruments.
Chapter 9  The requirement to record the periods during which a fixed hydrocarbon gas detection system was
monitoring the double hull, double bottom and void spaces required to be protected.
Chapter 10  The action to be taken when hydrocarbon/flammable gas is detected in double-hull, double-bottom or void
Chapter 11 spaces.
 The action to take if the fixed hydrocarbon gas detection system is defective.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
5.6.2. Were the Master and deck officers familiar with the company procedures for testing the
Chapter 2 atmosphere in double-hull and double bottom spaces for flammable gas, and were records available to
Chapter 3
confirm that appropriate measurements had been taken using the equipment fitted to, or provided on, the
vessel?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5  Review the procedures for detecting and monitoring flammable gas concentrations in double-hull, double-
bottom and void spaces.
Chapter 6
 Review the records of flammable gas measurements in double-hull and double-bottom spaces and verify
Chapter 7 that tests had been completed in accordance with company procedures.
 Where a vessel is required to be fitted with a fixed hydrocarbon gas detecting system in accordance with the
Chapter 8
FSS Code, verify that sensors were isolated consistent with the ballast level in the individual tanks.
Chapter 9  Where a vessel was fitted with a fixed flammable gas detecting system outside the requirement of FSS
Code, verify that manual gas measurements were made in accordance with company procedures whenever
Chapter 10 a sensor was isolated due to ballast water content within a tank.
Chapter 11  Review the operation of fixed flammable gas detecting system, where fitted, and confirm that system was
fully operational with flammable gas alarm settings as per the FSS Code (<30% of the lower flammable limit).
Chapter 12  Review the fixed gas detecting system sensor calibration record and verify that calibration had been
completed in accordance with company procedures.
159
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
vessel’s fixed gas detection systems required by the IGC Code, and was the equipment in good
Chapter 3 working order, regularly maintained and calibrated?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
Chapter 6 Depending upon the cargoes to be carried, vessels operating under the IGC Code must be fitted
with fixed systems for:
Chapter 7
 Flammable vapour detection
Chapter 8  Toxic vapour detection
Chapter 9  Oxygen deficiency detection (for asphyxiant cargoes including nitrogen and carbon dioxide)
Chapter 10
However, toxic vapour detection can be provided by portable instruments, except when carrying
Chapter 11 cargoes requiring a type 1G ship, including SO2, methyl bromide, ethylene oxide and chlorine.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 fixed gas detection systems required by the IGC Code, and was the equipment in good working order,
Chapter 3
regularly maintained and calibrated?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have procedures for the operation and maintenance of fixed gas detecting systems required
Chapter 5 under the IGC Code which defined:
 The required frequency of fixed gas detector sensor calibration as per the manufacturer's instructions.
Chapter 6  The required frequency of verification of the alarm and automated shut down activation point (where fitted) settings
for each sensor location.
Chapter 7
 The required frequency of testing the audible and visual alarms on the bridge, in the relevant control station and at
Chapter 8 the gas detector read out station.
 The required frequency of testing the automated gas safety system shut down arrangements, where fitted.
Chapter 9
 The identification of portable gas detecting equipment supplied to meet the requirements of the IGC code.
Chapter 10  Where the vessel was utilizing portable gas detecting equipment to meet the requirements of the IGC code, the
routine gas monitoring that was required to be undertaken and included:
Chapter 11 o Locations subject to routine monitoring for toxic gases.
o The required frequency of routine monitoring for toxic gases.
Chapter 12
o The method of recording the gas measurements obtained.
 The action to take in the circumstances that the fixed gas detection system was defective in any respect.
160
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 3

 Review the procedures for operation and maintenance of the fixed gas detecting systems required under the
Chapter 5
IGC code.
Chapter 6  Inspect the central control station for the fixed gas detection systems and verify that:
o The fixed gas detecting systems were monitoring all sensors provided.
Chapter 7
o There were no fault alarms showing for either the systems or individual sensors.
Chapter 8 o The value shown by each sensor was normal based on the location & atmosphere being sampled.
o The alarm set points for each sensor had been adjusted to requirements of the IGC code and
Chapter 9
company procedure.
Chapter 10 o Where a sensor was sampling from an inert atmosphere, the alarm set points had been adjusted to
activate when the vapour concentration by volume reached the equivalent of 30% LFL in air.
Chapter 11
o Where the vessel could carry different grades of cargo, the individual alarm sensor set points had been
Chapter 12 adjusted to reflect the cargo being carried at the time.
Chapter 1
Chapter 3

 Review the calibration data available at the central control station and verify:
Chapter 5 o The individual sensors had been calibrated as per the maker's instructions and company procedure.
Chapter 6
o The alarm set points had been confirmed as correct.
o The automatic shutdown set points, where applicable, had been confirmed as correct.
Chapter 7  Sight the list of portable gas detecting equipment provided to comply with IGC code - verify the equipment was
available.
Chapter 8  Review the inventory of calibration gases and equipment and verify that sufficient materials were onboard to
conduct sensor calibrations in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Chapter 9
 Where the vessel was utilising portable gas detecting equipment to comply with the monitoring of toxic gases, verify
Chapter 10 that routine gas measurements had been taken and recorded in accordance with the company procedure.
 Review the records of inspections, tests and maintenance carried out contained in the maintenance plan.
Chapter 11  Interview the accompanying or responsible officer to verify familiarity with purpose & operation of fixed gas
detecting system.
Chapter 12
Maintenance & calibration of portable gas detecting equipment required under the IGC code is dealt with in a
separate question.
161
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 fixed gas detection system required by the IGF Code, and was the equipment in good working order,
Chapter 3
regularly maintained and calibrated in accordance with company procedures and manufacturer’s
instructions?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
The Company should have procedures for the operation and maintenance of the fixed gas detecting
Chapter 6 system required under the IGF Code which defined:
Chapter 7  The frequency of gas sensor calibration.
 The frequency of verification of the alarm and shut down activation point for each sensor.
Chapter 8
 The frequency of testing the audible and visual alarms on the bridge or in the continuously
Chapter 9 manned central control station.
Chapter 10  The frequency of testing the automated gas safety system shut down arrangements.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 fixed gas detection system required by the IGF Code, and was the equipment in good working order,
Chapter 3
regularly maintained and calibrated in accordance with company procedures and manufacturer’s
instructions?
Chapter 5  Review the procedure which defined the operation and maintenance requirements for the fixed gas detecting
system required by the IGF Code.
Chapter 6  Inspect the central control station for the gas detection system and verify that:
Chapter 7 o The gas detecting system was fully operational - The system was not indicating any faults.
o The alarm activation set point for a selected sensor was in accordance with the IGF code requirements.
Chapter 8  Review the inspection and calibration data available at the central control station and verify that:
Chapter 9 o Sensor calibration had been completed at the defined frequency.
o Safety system shut down tests had been completed at the required frequency.
Chapter 10  Inspect the calibration gas used to calibrate/test the gas detector sensors and verify that it met the
specifications as defined by the manufacturer.
Chapter 11
 Review the records of inspections, tests, calibration & maintenance carried out.
Chapter 12  Interview the accompanying Officer to verify familiarity with purpose, operation & calibration of the fixed gas
detecting system.
162
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.6.5. Were the Master and officers familiar with the operation and maintenance of the cargo pump
Chapter 2 room fixed gas detection system, and was the equipment fully operational with sensors calibrated and
Chapter 3
alarm activation points set in accordance with company procedures and manufacturer's instructions?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have procedures for the operation & maintenance of the cargo pump room gas detection
Chapter 5 system which defined:
 The actions to be taken in the event of the activation of a pump room flammable or toxic gas alarm.
Chapter 6
 The actions to be taken in the event of a low oxygen alarm.
Chapter 7  The frequency of the pump room hydrocarbon gas detection sensor calibration.
Chapter 8
 The process to verify that the hydrocarbon alarm point setting values were correct when changing cargo
type.
Chapter 9  The frequency of testing the audible and visual alarms required on the bridge, in the cargo control room
and/or in the pump room as appropriate.
Chapter 10
 The calibration interval and alarm activation values where the gas detection system was additionally fitted
Chapter 11 with oxygen and/or toxic gas detectors.
 The actions to take in the event that the pump room gas detection system fails.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
5.6.5. Were the Master and officers familiar with the operation and maintenance of the cargo
Chapter 2
pump room fixed gas detection system, and was the equipment fully operational with sensors
Chapter 3 calibrated and alarm activation points set in accordance with company procedures and
manufacturer's instructions?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
 Review the procedure for operation & maintenance of cargo pump room fixed gas detection
Chapter 6
system.
Chapter 7  Inspect the central control station for the pump room fixed gas detection system and verify that:
Chapter 8 o The gas detection system was fully operational without indicating any faults.
Chapter 9 o The alarm activation setting for a selected hydrocarbon sensor was in accordance with the
SOLAS requirement of not greater than 10% LFL.
Chapter 10
o The alarm activation setting for selected oxygen and toxic gas sensors, where fitted,
Chapter 11 were in accordance with the company procedure.
Chapter 12
163
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.6.5. Were the Master and officers familiar with the operation and maintenance of the cargo
Chapter 2
pump room fixed gas detection system, and was the equipment fully operational with sensors
Chapter 3 calibrated and alarm activation points set in accordance with company procedures and
manufacturer's instructions?
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Inspector Actions
 Review the inspection & calibration data for the gas detection system available in the CCR and verify that:
Chapter 6 o Each gas detection sensor had been calibrated at the frequency defined by the company.
Chapter 7 o The hydrocarbon gas alarm activation set point for each sensor had been verified as being
appropriate to the cargo being carried.
Chapter 8
o The audible and visual alarms in the pump room, the cargo control room and on the bridge had
Chapter 9 been tested at the frequency defined by the company.

o Calibration of each sensor had been carried out with an appropriate span gas in accordance with
Chapter 10 the manufacturer’s instructions.
Chapter 11  Review the records of inspections, tests, calibration and maintenance carried out.
 Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with purpose, operation and calibration.
Chapter 12 For this question the sensors fitted in the exhaust ducts should not be considered, as any gas going into the
ducts is heavily diluted and provides a false sense of security if the gas alarm for the duct is set to a level
similar to that for the pump room sensors.
Chapter 1
5.6.6. Were the Master and officers familiar with the operation and maintenance of the
Chapter 2
oxygen sensors and associated alarms fitted in the space, or spaces, containing the inert gas
Chapter 3 system, and was the equipment fully operational with sensors calibrated and alarm activation
points set in accordance with company procedures and manufacturer's instructions?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
The Company should have procedures for the operation and maintenance of the oxygen sensors and
Chapter 6 associated alarms fitted in the space, or spaces, containing the IGS which described:
 The frequency of testing the audible and visual alarms.
Chapter 7
 The calibration interval and alarm activation values for the oxygen sensors.
Chapter 8  The actions to take in the event that the oxygen sensors and/or associated alarms fitted in the space, or
spaces, containing the IGS fail.
Chapter 9
 The actions to be taken in the event of a low oxygen alarm.
Chapter 10
This question will be allocated to all oil and chemical tankers:
Chapter 11  Fitted with an IGS and constructed on or after 1 January 2016, or
 Where the vessel was constructed before 1/1/2016, but the oxygen sensors referred to in FSS code had
Chapter 12
been fitted.
164
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 4

Chapter 6 In the case that the vessel was constructed before 2016 but was fitted with the oxygen sensors,
the vessel operator should have declared this as follows:
Chapter 7
 Oil Tankers: HVPQ question 9.15.5
Chapter 8  Oil/chemical tankers: HVPQ question 9.15.5
Chapter 9  Chemical tankers: through the pre-inspection questionnaire.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 4

 Review the procedures that described the calibration, testing and maintenance of the oxygen sensors and
Chapter 6
associated alarms fitted in the space, or spaces, containing the IGS.
Chapter 7  Inspect the control panel for oxygen sensors and alarms fitted in space(s) containing the IGS-verify that:
Chapter 8
o The oxygen sensors & alarms were operational - the system was not indicating any faults.
o The alarm activation setting for oxygen sensors was as per the company procedure.
Chapter 9  Review the inspection and calibration data for the oxygen sensors and verify that:
o Each oxygen sensor had been calibrated at the frequency defined by the company.
Chapter 10
o The calibration of each sensor had been carried out with an appropriate span gas in accordance with
Chapter 11 the manufacturer’s instructions.
o The audible and visual alarms had been tested at the frequency defined by the company.
Chapter 12
 Review the records of inspections, tests, calibration and maintenance carried out.
 Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with the purpose, operation and calibration of oxygen
sensors and associated alarms fitted in the space(s) containing the IGS.
165
5/27/2022
5.7. Safety Management
Chapter 1
5.7.1.Had all onboard incidents been reported and investigated in accordance with company procedures, and was
Chapter 2 an incident investigation report or a summarised lessons learned bulletin available for each incident at or above a
defined threshold?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 The Company should have procedures to ensure that all incidents are reported and investigated by
personnel at an appropriate level of management, which may include the Flag, to establish the root
Chapter 5
causes. The procedures should define what is considered to be an incident and include:
Chapter 6  A pollution incident that resulted in release to environment of any substance covered by MARPOL Annex I, II,
IV, V and VI in excess of that permitted by the applicable regulations.
Chapter 7  An uncontrolled release of LNG/LPG vapour.
Chapter 8  A grounding incident where the vessel had been hard aground - Touched bottom or been suspected of
touching bottom.
Chapter 9  A collision/allision with another vessel, irrespective of whether damage had been caused to either vessel.
 An allision with a fixed or floating structure or navigation mark, irrespective of whether damage had been
Chapter 10
caused to vessel or the fixed or floating structure or navigation mark.
Chapter 11  An allision with a terminal during a berthing manoeuvre resulted in damage to vessel or terminal structure.
 A breach of the hull plating which did not result in flooding.
Chapter 12
 Total loss of main propulsion/blackout while navigating in open waters. Blackout while at a berth or at anchor.
 Partial loss of main propulsion while navigating in open waters.
Chapter 1
5.7.1.Had all onboard incidents been reported and investigated in accordance with company procedures, and was
Chapter 2 an incident investigation report or a summarised lessons learned bulletin available for each incident at or above a
defined threshold?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4  Total loss of main propulsion/blackout while navigating in territorial waters or within 12 miles of land.
 Partial loss of main propulsion while navigating in territorial waters or within 12 miles of land.
Chapter 5
 Total loss, even momentarily, of steering capability at any time while the vessel was underway.
Chapter 6  Contained hydrocarbon/chemical spill > 1.0m3 anywhere onboard (deck, pumproom, machinery spaces,
mooring deck, etc.).
Chapter 7
 Loss of one or both anchors.
Chapter 8  Damage to a windlass restricting the ability to recover an anchor without repairs.
 Mooring tail/line (ship supplied) failure while moored at a conventional/CBM berth or while conducting STS.
Chapter 9
 Break out/away from a berth resulting in vessel being out of normal operating envelope for the Marine
Chapter 10 Loading Arms (MLA) or hoses.
 Cargo hose crane wire failure while connecting or disconnecting hoses at a terminal.
Chapter 11  Accommodation ladder hoisting wire failure.
Chapter 12  Notification of an investigation into an alleged violation of int. regulations such as MARPOL / COLREGS.
 Structural or pipeline system failure causing migration of liquid within or between cargo, ballast or bunker
spaces.
166
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.7.1. Had all onboard incidents been reported and investigated in accordance with company
Chapter 2 procedures, and was an incident investigation report or a summarised lessons learned bulletin available for
Chapter 3
each incident at or above a defined threshold?

 Contamination of ballast water by hydraulic oil.
Chapter 5
 Flooding of any space directly from the sea.
Chapter 6  Fire or Explosion anywhere onboard.
 A work related lost time injury.
Chapter 7
 A work related fatality.
Chapter 8
Definitions for the purpose of this question:
Chapter 9  Total loss of main propulsion: The main propulsion unit(s) shut down without warning, even momentarily.
Chapter 10  Partial loss of main propulsion: The vessel needed to slow down or stop for repairs or reset equipment to
regain full manoeuvrability and/or propulsive power.
Chapter 11  Total blackout: The main generating plant stopped providing electrical power to main switchboard, even
momentarily.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
5.7.1. Had all onboard incidents been reported and investigated in accordance with company
Chapter 2 procedures, and was an incident investigation report or a summarised lessons learned bulletin available for
Chapter 3
each incident at or above a defined threshold?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company must provide brief details of any of the above incidents occurred during 18 months prior to
Chapter 5 inspection through:
The HVPQ:
Chapter 6
 1.8.4 Has ship been involved in a pollution incident during the past 12 months?
Chapter 7  1.8.5 Has ship been involved in a grounding incident during the past 12 months?
 1.8.6 Has ship been involved in a collision during the past 12 months?
Chapter 8
Chapter 9 The PIQ will prompt data entry for each incident type listed in the guidance notes as follows:
 Has an incident of this type occurred during the previous 18 months. Yes/No/multiple
Chapter 10
 If multiple, how many events. If yes or multiple, what was the date of the incident(s)
Chapter 11  Has the incident investigation been completed. Yes/No
 Has the incident investigation report been uploaded to SIRE incident database? Yes/no.
Chapter 12
 Where an incident investigation is ongoing provide the date when the report is expected to be completed.
The data provided through HVPQ and PIQ will be inserted in the inspection editor & final inspection report.
167
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.7.1. Had all onboard incidents been reported and investigated in accordance with
Chapter 2
company procedures, and was an incident investigation report or a summarised lessons
Chapter 3 learned bulletin available for each incident at or above a defined threshold?
Chapter 4

Chapter 6
 Review the incidents reported through the HVPQ and the PIQ and verify that either an incident
Chapter 7 investigation report or a lesson learned bulletin was available onboard for each reported
Chapter 8 incident where the Company had declared that the incident investigation had been completed.
Chapter 9  Review the onboard system for recording and tracking incident and near-misses and verify that
the incident data provided by the Company through the HVPQ and PIQ included all incident
Chapter 10 information requested.
Chapter 11  The inspector is not required to comment on the quality of the incident investigation report or
Chapter 12 lessons learned bulletins.
Chapter 1
5.7.2. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the company incident and near-
Chapter 2
miss reporting procedure and was evidence available to demonstrate that incidents and near-
Chapter 3 misses had been investigated and closed out in accordance with the company procedure?
Chapter 5 The Company must have a procedure which required that incidents and near-misses were promptly reported by all
ranks, investigated at an appropriate level & that corrective action was taken where required which should describe the:
Chapter 6
 Definitions of reportable incidents and near-misses.
Chapter 7  Process of reporting and documenting incidents and near-misses onboard.
 Required time frame for reporting incidents and near-misses to shore management.
Chapter 8
 Level of management, onboard or ashore, responsible for conducting investigations based on defined criteria.
Chapter 9  Investigation process to be followed for each defined level of near-miss or incident.
 Process to identify and implement corrective and preventative actions.
Chapter 10
 System for tracking incidents and near miss reports to closure, which may be paper-based or electronic.
Chapter 11  Process to communicate the outcome of an incident or near-miss investigation to the vessel’s complement.
The Company must have declared the number of near-miss reports submitted by the vessel during the 12 months
Chapter 12
preceding the inspection through the PIQ. This data will be inserted in the inspection editor and reproduced in the final
report.
168
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.7.2. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the company incident and near- miss reporting
Chapter 2 procedure and was evidence available to demonstrate that incidents and near-misses had been
Chapter 3
investigated and closed out in accordance with the company procedure?

 Review the procedure - Review the system for recording & tracking incident and near-miss reports; select
Chapter 5
2 reports and verify that:
Chapter 6 o The details of each incident or near-miss had been recorded in the format required by the company.
o Each incident or near-miss report had been communicated to shore management within the time frame
Chapter 7
defined by the company procedure.
Chapter 8 o Each incident or near-miss report had been acknowledged by shore management.
o Each incident or near-miss had been investigated at the required management level using the
Chapter 9 appropriate incident investigation process.
o Where corrective and/or preventative actions had been identified, there was evidence that these had
Chapter 10
been implemented.
Chapter 11 o Each report had been closed out and the tracking system updated.
o The outcome of each incident or near-miss investigation had been shared with vessel’s
Chapter 12 complement.
 Interview a rating to verify their understanding of the onboard process to report a near-miss.
Chapter 1
5.7.3. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the company procedure for holding and
Chapter 2 documenting shipboard safety meetings and was evidence available that safety concerns raised at the
Chapter 3
meetings were acknowledged and addressed by shore management?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 The Company should have procedures for shipboard safety meetings which required the following:
Chapter 5  To hold a shipboard safety meeting at a defined frequency - after a serious incident onboard or in the fleet -
during shore management representative visits onboard, where practical based on shipboard operations and
Chapter 6 hours of rest.
 To define who should attend.
Chapter 7
 To provide a means for those personnel not able to attend a meeting to report concerns to the safety
Chapter 8 committee through the safety representatives.
 To follow a defined agenda for discussion items.
Chapter 9
 To record the minutes of each safety meeting in a defined format.
Chapter 10  To submit the minutes of each safety meeting for shore management review.
 That shore management acknowledge safety meeting minutes and address any matters requiring
Chapter 11 management assistance or intervention.
Chapter 12 Safety Committee Meetings are intended to permit discussion among the officers and ratings about safety
and pollution prevention matters and should not be used for instruction or training.
169
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.7.3. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the company procedure for holding and
Chapter 2 documenting shipboard safety meetings and was evidence available that safety concerns raised at the
Chapter 3
meetings were acknowledged and addressed by shore management?

 Review the procedures which defined the requirements for shipboard safety meetings.
Chapter 5
 Review the safety meeting minutes held within the previous 6 months; select 1 and verify that:
Chapter 6 o A routine safety meeting had been held at approximately monthly intervals.
o An extraordinary safety meeting had been held during a shore management visit, where practical, or
Chapter 7
within a week of a serious incident onboard.
Chapter 8 o The minutes were in accordance with the company format and included details of who attended.
o The meeting was not held on the bridge while at sea or at anchor nor in the CCR during cargo or tank
Chapter 9 cleaning operations.
o The minutes had been submitted for shore management review.
Chapter 10
 Review the response from shore management for the selected safety meeting and verify that it addressed
Chapter 11 any matters requiring their assistance or intervention.
 Interview one rating to understand whether they attended the most recent safety meeting and, if not, how
Chapter 12
they would communicate issues of concern around safety and pollution prevention to Safety Committee.
Chapter 1
5.7.4. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the company work planning procedures and
Chapter 2 were records available to demonstrate that onboard work planning meetings had been conducted and
Chapter 3
documented in accordance with the procedures?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have a procedure to ensure that:
Chapter 5  Work planning meetings are conducted at defined intervals, whenever possible, daily.
Chapter 6  Meetings are attended, as far as is possible, by those undertaking and those planning the work.
 Meetings follow a defined agenda.
Chapter 7
 The outcome of a meeting is documented in a standard format to include, but not necessarily limited
Chapter 8 to, the guidance points provided by ISGOTT 4.7.5 and TMSA KPI 9A.1.4.
 Meeting records are made available to those that could not attend the meeting before they start work.
Chapter 9
 Where unplanned tasks arise during the period covered by a work planning meeting, the work
Chapter 10 planning meeting record is reviewed and updated.
Chapter 11
 The agreed work planning record and any amendment is approved at a defined onboard management
level.
Chapter 12 In anticipation of periods of high workload, meetings may be held to cover several days’ activities.
170
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.7.4. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the company work planning procedures and
Chapter 2 were records available to demonstrate that onboard work planning meetings had been conducted and
Chapter 3
documented in accordance with the procedures?
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Review the procedure which defined the requirements for work planning meetings.
Chapter 5  Review several work planning meeting records from the previous month and verify that:
Chapter 6 o Work planning meetings had been held at the frequency defined by the company procedure.
o The outcome of work planning meetings was documented in the defined format.
Chapter 7 o The work planning meeting records had been approved in accordance with the procedure
Chapter 8 o The scope of the planned work reflected the activities of the vessel for the dates reviewed.
o The detail of each task identified was enough to understand:
Chapter 9  What the job entailed - Whether permits, RAs or detailed work plans were required.
 What PPE was required to be used.
Chapter 10
 Whether shore management approval was required - Who was responsible for supervising the work.
Chapter 11 o Select a task that required either a permit, a RA or a detailed work plan & verify relevant document.
 Interview a rating to verify their understanding of the work planning meeting process and where they would find
Chapter 12
details of the work planned for the current period.
 Verify that the daily work planning record was available in the location described by the rating.
Chapter 1
5.7.5. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the purpose and implementation of
Chapter 2
the company Stop Work Authority (SWA) and procedure?
Chapter 4 The Company should have developed a SWA policy and procedure which encourages all company
staff and contractors to stop any work that is believed to present a danger, which should define:
Chapter 5
 What SWA means within the company safety culture.
Chapter 6  How the instruction to Stop Work should be delivered to avoid misunderstanding.
Chapter 7
 The expected actions of the person or persons receiving the Stop Work instruction.
 The commitment by Company at all levels of management, ashore & onboard, to support the
Chapter 8 SWA.
Chapter 9  The commitment by Company that the use of SWA will never result in disciplinary action or
discrimination even if it later turns out that the perceived danger was not present.
Chapter 10
 The means by which the SWA will be communicated across the workforce during work
Chapter 11 planning to ensure full understanding and acceptance in all circumstances.
Chapter 12
The Company policy/procedure may use different terminology to SWA but must have the same
purpose.
171
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.7.5. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the purpose and implementation of
Chapter 2
the company Stop Work Authority policy and procedure?
Chapter 3

Chapter 5
Chapter 6  Review the Stop Work Authority policy and procedure.

 Randomly question 3-5 crewmembers about the SWA procedure to verify understanding.
Chapter 7
 Under no circumstances deliberately commit any act to test whether a crew-member is
Chapter 8 aware of the company expectations or will invoke their SWA.
Chapter 9
 If SWA is used during the inspection by a crewmember, immediately stop work and follow the
instructions of the onboard staff relating to the use of Stop Work.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
5.7.6. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the company procedures for risk
Chapter 2
assessment, as appropriate to their duties, and was there evidence of the development and
Chapter 3 review of risk assessments in accordance with the procedures?
Chapter 5 The Company should have procedures/form for RA that describe:
 In what circumstances a new RA is required to be developed, prior to commencement of work, which must
Chapter 6 include for any new, non-routine or unplanned task, not covered by existing procedures.
Chapter 7  In what circumstances an available RA is required to be reviewed, prior to commencement of work, which
should specify tasks including:
Chapter 8 o Hot work outside the designated space - Enclosed space entry - Working aloft -
o Working over the side - Launching of a lifeboat or rescue boat.
Chapter 9
o Working on energised electrical circuits - Working on equipment which has the potential to move.
Chapter 10 o Working on any system which has the potential to release stored energy.
 The process for developing a RA - recording the results of a RA.

Chapter 11
 Who is responsible for completing a RA - Who should be involved in the development of a RA - Who is
Chapter 12 responsible for approving a RA - Who is required to review a RA before work starts on a task.
172
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.7.6. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the company procedures for risk assessment,
Chapter 2 as appropriate to their duties, and was there evidence of the development and review of risk assessments
Chapter 3
in accordance with the procedures?
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Review the procedure for developing and/or reviewing a RA.
Chapter 5
 Review 2 sample RAs relating to new, non-routine, unplanned or specified tasks onboard during the
Chapter 6 previous 3 months and verify that they:
o Contained details that were pertinent and relevant to the task that was being risk assessed.
Chapter 7
o Referred to equipment and circumstances relevant to the ship and its equipment.
Chapter 8 o Had been completed in the format defined by the company procedures.
Chapter 9 o Identified appropriate preventative and mitigative measures that must be implemented before
commencement of a task.
Chapter 10 o Had been approved at the appropriate management level as defined by the company procedures.
Chapter 11  Interview an appropriate senior officer(s) and verify familiarity with the RA procedure and the work
described in the selected RAs.
Chapter 12
 Interview a rating to verify that they had been involved in the review of a RA prior to commencing
work on a new, unplanned or defined task.
Chapter 1
5.7.7. Were Safety Data Sheets (SDS) available on board for all cargo, bunkers, chemicals, paints and
Chapter 2 other products being handled, and were crew members familiar with their use?
The Company should have procedures to ensure that up to date Safety Data Sheets (SDS) are readily
Chapter 4
available for all hazardous or toxic substances carried on board and to give guidance on the handling and
Chapter 5 stowage of these substances, including PPE requirements. These substances include, where carried:
 All oil, chemical and/or gas cargoes - All grades of bunkers - Hydraulic oils - Lub oils.
Chapter 6
 Paints, protective coatings and thinners - All chemicals used or stored onboard.
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
Appropriate PPE, first aid and eye wash equipment should be available at each location where chemicals,
paints, protective coatings and any other hazardous or toxic materials are stored.
Chapter 9 All containers and packages should be kept closed, and properly stowed. The storage location should be
suitable, clean and tidy. Incompatible substances should not be stowed together.
Chapter 10
Crew members who handle these materials must be aware of the purpose of SDS and familiar with it. The SDS
Chapter 11 may be printed on the container. If not, then the SDS data must be posted or readily available to the user.
MSDS data sheets for Annex I cargoes and FO are recommended to comply with the format in MSC 286 (86).
Chapter 12
MSDS for other products such as chemicals for use on board, paint thinners etc. should be fit for purpose and
should be in a format broadly based on the format laid out in MSC 286(86).
173
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.7.7. Were Safety Data Sheets (SDS) available on board for all cargo, bunkers, chemicals, paints and
Chapter 2 other products being handled, and were crew members familiar with their use?
Chapter 4  Review the procedures to ensure that up to date SDS are readily available for all hazardous or toxic
substances onboard and to give guidance on their handling and stowage, including PPE.
Chapter 5
 Sight the SDS(s) for the oil, chemical or gas cargo(es) on board at the time of the inspection.
Chapter 6  During the inspection, inspect those locations where other toxic or hazardous substances are stored
and verify that:
Chapter 7
o Appropriate PPE is available at all storage locations.
Chapter 8 o SDSs are available locally for all toxic or hazardous substances.
Chapter 9 o SDSs contain the required information.
o The stowage of containers and packages is satisfactory.
Chapter 10
o Containers and packages are correctly labelled to identify their content.
Chapter 11 o Storage locations are suitable, clean and tidy.
Chapter 12
 Interview an accompanying officer at any relevant location to verify familiarity with the purpose and
content of SDSs relevant to products stored in, or handled from, the chosen location.
Chapter 1
5.7.8. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the company Simultaneous Operations
Chapter 2 (SIMOPS) procedure and was there evidence that SIMOPS were considered during work planning and the
Chapter 3
required controls implemented for the duration of such operations?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have a procedure which:
Chapter 5  Defined the term Simultaneous Operations (SIMOPS).
 Provided guidance on identifying the circumstances when SIMOPS should be considered as taking place.
Chapter 6
 May include tools for identifying and managing SIMOPS, such as a decision matrix or a matrix of permitted
Chapter 7 operations.
 Provided instructions on how considerations regarding SIMOPS must be developed & documented such as:
Chapter 8
o Work planning meetings and their associated records.
Chapter 9 o The development and approval of a RA.
Chapter 10
o A SIMOPS plan/interface document developed to address activities falling under the definition of
SIMOPS.
Chapter 11  Provide instruction on how the considerations regarding SIMOPS should be communicated to those
involved in the impacted operations, such as Toolbox talks - RA review - the SIMOPS plan/interface
Chapter 12
document review and approval process.
174
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.7.8. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the company Simultaneous Operations
Chapter 2 (SIMOPS) procedure and was there evidence that SIMOPS were considered during work planning and the
required controls implemented for the duration of such operations?
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Review the procedure which provided guidance and instruction on Simultaneous Operations.
Chapter 5  Review the SIMOPS guidance tools, where provided:
Chapter 6 o The decision matrix.
o The matrix of permitted operations.
Chapter 7
 Review recent examples where the vessel staff had identified potential SIMOPS and
Chapter 8 documented the appropriate controls in documents such as:
Chapter 9 o Work planning meeting records – RAs - SIMOPS plan/interface documents.
 Interview the accompanying officer to verify understanding of the SIMOPS procedure and its
Chapter 10
implementation and documentation during shipboard activities.
Chapter 11  Interview a deck or engine rating to understand how they are informed of SIMOPS and what the
expectations are of them in terms of remaining focused on the task to which they have been
Chapter 12
assigned while SIMOPS are ongoing.
5.8. Area Safety Inspections
Chapter 1
5.8.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedure for safety inspections of the main deck areas, and
Chapter 2 had inspections been effective in identifying hazards to health, safety and the environment?

The Company should have a procedure which requires that safety inspections of all the accessible areas of
Chapter 4 the ship, including the main deck areas, are conducted at appropriate intervals by the designated Safety
Chapter 5
Officer. A checklist should have been developed to facilitate these inspections.
Chapter 6 • Weathertight doors to deck houses should be in order and capable of being properly secured.
• Flammable liquids should not be stored in deck houses which were not specifically designed and classified.
Chapter 7 • Care should be taken over the storage of lube oil and other oils in drums on deck. They should be well
secured with suitable rope or wire lashings on pallets rather than directly on the deck, and where possible
Chapter 8
within a containment area. The top of the drum should be covered to prevent potential water standing and
Chapter 9 subsequent ingress and contamination.
• The main deck areas should be free of leakage from cargo, cargo heating, inert gas or hydraulic systems.
Chapter 10 • All deck lights should be operational. The level of deck lighting should be adequate to allow:
o Sufficient visibility to permit safe access to all areas of the deck.
Chapter 11
o The safe use of mooring equipment.
Chapter 12 o The monitoring of the deck area for spills and leakages.
o The monitoring of all deck areas and the adjacent surrounding areas to prevent unauthorised access.
175
5/27/2022
Chapter 1

 Review the procedure which requires that safety inspections of main deck are conducted at appropriate
Chapter 4
intervals by the Safety Officer to identify hazards & potential hazards to health, safety and the environment
Chapter 5  Review the records of safety inspections of the main deck areas, including associated checklists.
 Request that the deck lighting is tested, even if in daylight, to ensure the system is fully operational.
Chapter 6
 Inspect the main deck areas and verify that:
Chapter 7 o Non-skid coatings or gratings are provided in working areas and on walkways.
Chapter 8 o Working areas and/or walkways are clearly marked.
o Trip hazards are clearly marked or highlighted with contrasting paint.
Chapter 9 o Light fittings in gas-hazardous areas do not have:
Chapter 10  Cracks in metal casings or covers - Cracked or broken glass.
 Failure of cement around glass in flame-proof or explosion-proof enclosures.
Chapter 11
 Flame-proof enclosures that were not tight or had missing bolts.
Chapter 12  Gaskets present between mating metal surfaces.
 Paint covering safety features such as relief holes, passages etc.
Chapter 1

o Deck wiring and conduit runs were in a satisfactory condition.
Chapter 4
o There is no leakage from a cargo, cargo heating, inert gas or hydraulic system on deck.
Chapter 5 o All deck lights are operational.
o Deck lighting is adequate to allow:
Chapter 6
 Sufficient visibility to permit safe access to all areas of the deck.
Chapter 7  The safe use of mooring equipment.
 The monitoring of the deck area for spills and leakages.
Chapter 8
 Monitoring of all deck areas and adjacent surrounding areas to prevent unauthorised access.
Chapter 9 o Roller fairleads and other items of rotating deck equipment are well maintained and free to rotate.
Chapter 10 o Fairleads being used with synthetic lines are not grooved or roughened.
o Mooring and towing fittings are clearly marked with their SWL in tonnes (t) by weld bead outline.
Chapter 11 o Weathertight doors to deck houses etc. are in order and capable of being properly secured.
Chapter 12 o Flammable liquids are not stored in a deck house which was not specifically designed & classified.
o If present, lube oil, other oil drums or spare parts/stores are safely stowed and secured on deck.
o If present, drums stowed on deck were not marked to indicate their content.
176
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.8.2. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedure for safety inspections of the
Chapter 2 machinery spaces, and had inspections been effective in identifying hazards to health, safety and the
environment?
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
The Company should have a procedure which required that safety inspections of all the accessible areas of the
Chapter 5 ship, including the machinery spaces, are conducted at appropriate intervals by the designated Safety Officer.
Chapter 6 An appropriate checklist should have been developed to facilitate these inspections.
Chapter 7 In addition to the guidance stated above:
Chapter 8  Purifier rooms and fuel and lubricating oil handling areas should be ventilated and clean.
 Gauge glass closing devices on oil tanks should be of a self-closing, fail-safe type and not inhibited.
Chapter 9
 Self-closing sounding devices to double bottom tanks should be in good order, closed and capped.
Chapter 10 All fire doors on a ship are important, but machinery space fire doors should receive attention, particularly the
fire doors between the machinery space and Steering Gear Compartment, which are often found tied open.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
environment?
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Review the procedure which required that safety inspections of machinery spaces were conducted at
Chapter 5 appropriate intervals by the designated Safety Officer to identify hazards/potential hazards.
 Review the records of safety inspections of the machinery spaces including associated checklists.
Chapter 6
 Inspect the machinery spaces, including purifier rooms, fuel and lub oil handling areas, workshops,
Chapter 7 compressor rooms, chemical stores, spare gear stores, electrician’s store/workshop, IG rooms, boiler rooms
and the steering gear compartment with reference to the safety officer’s checklist and verify:
Chapter 8 o Suitable metal containers with an integral cover were provided for the storage of cotton waste,
Chapter 9
cleaning rags or similar materials after use, and these were emptied frequently.
o Wood, paints, solvents, oil or other flammable materials were not stored in boiler rooms or machinery
Chapter 10 spaces including st. gear compartments unless specifically identified areas had been prepared and
approved for storage of such items.
Chapter 11
o Suitable eye-protection and PPE was readily available where required, for example for welding,
Chapter 12 handling chemicals or operating a lathe or fixed or portable grinding wheel.
177
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
environment?
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4 o Lagging and insulation on all high temperature surfaces such as steam pipes, exhaust pipes etc. was in
Chapter 5
place, in good condition and free from oil.
o Safety notices and signs appropriate to specific compartments were posted to indicate hazards and
Chapter 6 obstructions or control measures to be taken where the hazard or obstruction could not be removed.
o Pipelines were colour coded or labelled to indicate their contents.
Chapter 7
o No broken or defective light fittings.
Chapter 8 o No unprotected open hatchways through which persons may fall or on which they may trip.
o The guardrails or fencing of any protected open hatchway were in good order.
Chapter 9
o Floor plates had not been removed and the opening left unguarded or insufficiently lit.
Chapter 10 o Floor plates were secured, level and even.
o Safety guards were in place for all machinery, rotating shafts or equipment, as necessary.
Chapter 11
o No visible oil leaks from any machinery.
Chapter 12 o Purifier rooms and fuel and lub oil handling areas were ventilated and clean.
o No accumulation of waste oil in bilges or in save-alls in way of machinery space fuel, lube and hydraulic
oil service, settling and storage tanks.
Chapter 1
environment?
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4 o Tank tops and bilges were painted a light colour so that leaks may be readily located.
Chapter 5 o E/R bilges were clear of rubbish or other substances that might prevent the bilges being readily and
easily pumped.
Chapter 6 o Spare gear was properly stowed and items of machinery under overhaul were safely secured so that
they do not break loose and cause injury or damage even in the heaviest weather.
Chapter 7
o Spare gear, tools and other equipment or material was not left lying around, especially near to steering
Chapter 8 gear rams, switchboards or batteries.
o There were no flammable materials left or stored near switchboards.
Chapter 9
o Gauge glass closing devices on oil tanks were of a self-closing, fail-safe type and were not inhibited.
Chapter 10 o Self-closing sounding devices to double bottom tanks were in order & closed with caps properly fitted.
o No non-approved hold-open methods such as tiebacks, hooks, wedges or other arrangements were
Chapter 11
used to hold any fire door open where it was required to be self-closing.
Chapter 12  Select several items from the machinery space inspection checklist and request that the accompanying
officer describes or demonstrates what was required to be checked.
178
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.8.3. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedure for safety
Chapter 2
inspections of the cargo pumproom, and had inspections been effective in identifying hazards
Chapter 3 to health, safety and the environment?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have a procedure which required that safety inspections of all the accessible areas of the ship, including
Chapter 5 cargo pumproom, are conducted at appropriate intervals by the designated Safety Officer. An appropriate checklist should have
been developed to facilitate these inspections.
 Review the procedure which required that safety inspections of the cargo pumproom were conducted at appropriate
Chapter 7 intervals by the designated Safety Officer to identify hazards and potential hazards to health, safety and the environment
 Review the records of safety inspections of the cargo pumproom including associated checklists.
Chapter 8
 Inspect the cargo pumproom with reference to the safety officer’s checklist and verify:
Chapter 9 o Entry procedures were displayed at the entrance - Lights were operational with no damage or defects to fittings or
covers.
Chapter 10 o Ventilation was fully operational with only lower suctions open.
o The emergency ventilation dampers, where fitted, were clearly marked and fully operational.
Chapter 11 o Pumproom fans were not running noisily or with excessive vibration.
o Bilges were clean and free of combustible material.
Chapter 12
o Items stored in the pumproom were properly secured against movement.
o No paint or other flammable material was stored in the pumproom.
o Cargo and hydraulic systems were free of oil leaks.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
inspections of the cargo pumproom, and had inspections been effective in identifying hazards
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
o Ballast systems were free of significant leaks.
Chapter 5 o Cargo and ballast piping were free of patches or temporary repairs.
Chapter 6 o Spray shields or spray protection covers were fitted around the glands of cargo pumps or
detachable connections.
Chapter 7 o Bulkhead seals and penetrations were in apparent good order.
Chapter 8 o A rescue harness and means of recovery was rigged ready for immediate use.
o All exposed rotating shafts were protected with guards.

Chapter 9 o Pipe lagging, where fitted, was clean and free from oil impregnation.
Chapter 10 o Safety chains were in place to prevent falling down open vertical ladder accesses.
o Gratings or removable deck plates were in good condition and properly fitted.
Chapter 11
o Cargo and ballast pump emergency stop buttons were clearly marked.
Chapter 12 o The pumproom telephone was fully operational.
 Select several items from the cargo pumproom inspection checklist and request that the accompanying
officer describe or demonstrate what was required to be checked.
179
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.8.4. Were the Master and officers familiar with the procedure for safety inspections of the
Chapter 2
cargo machinery rooms, and had inspections been effective in identifying hazards to health,
Chapter 3 safety and the environment?
• The Company should have a procedure which required that safety inspections of all the accessible areas of
Chapter 5 the ship, including the cargo machinery rooms, are conducted at appropriate intervals by the designated
Safety Officer. An appropriate checklist(s) should have been developed to facilitate these inspections.
Chapter 6
• Cargo machinery room air-lock audible and visual alarms and shut-down systems should be regularly tested.
Chapter 7 • Ethylene and Propylene Oxide – piping between cargo compressors and cargo containment should be
blanked or spool pieces removed when these cargoes are carried.
Chapter 8
Inspector Actions
Chapter 9  Review the procedure which required that safety inspections of the cargo machinery rooms were conducted
at appropriate intervals by the designated Safety Officer to identify hazards/potential.
Chapter 10
 Review the records of safety inspections of the cargo machinery rooms including associated checklists.
Chapter 11  Review the records of cargo machinery room air-lock audible & visual alarms and shutdown systems tests.
 Inspect the cargo machinery rooms with reference to the safety officer’s checklist and verify:
Chapter 12
o Entry procedures and ventilation requirements for cargo machinery rooms are displayed at the entrance.
o Lights are fully operational with no damage or defects to fittings or covers.
Chapter 1
5.8.4. Were the Master and officers familiar with the procedure for safety inspections of the
Chapter 2
cargo machinery rooms, and had inspections been effective in identifying hazards to health,
Chapter 3 safety and the environment?
o Ventilation is fully operational.
Chapter 5
o Cargo machinery room fans are not running noisily or with excessive vibration.
Chapter 6 o Gas sampling heads are correctly set.
o Where applicable, air-locks and associated alarms are in satisfactory condition
Chapter 7
o Cargo machinery room electrical fittings are not damaged/modified.
Chapter 8 o Where fitted, bulkhead seal lubricator reservoirs contain sufficient oil. (Bulkhead shaft seals on LNG
vessels are normally provided by means of pressurised nitrogen.)
Chapter 9
o All exposed rotating shafts are protected with guards.
Chapter 10 o No paint or other flammable material is stored in the cargo machinery room.
o Items stored are properly secured against movement & do not obstruct access.
Chapter 11
o Drainage arrangements are satisfactory.
Chapter 12 o Compressors are isolated whilst carrying a cargo of Ethylene Oxide or Propylene Oxide.
 Select several items from the cargo machinery room inspection checklist and request that the accompanying
180
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 forecastle, and had inspections been effective in identifying hazards to health, safety and the environment?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 3
• The Company should have a procedure which required that safety inspections of all the accessible areas of
Chapter 4 the ship, including the forecastle, are conducted at appropriate intervals by the designated Safety Officer.
Chapter 5 • An appropriate checklist should have been developed to facilitate these inspections.
• Weathertight doors to the forecastle space should be in satisfactory condition and capable of being properly
Chapter 6
secured. Forecastle spaces should be well illuminated, free of water, and clean and tidy.
Chapter 7 • Starter panels should be protected from leakage from SW line flanges and the watertight entrance door to the
space. Any stores, spare parts etc. should be properly secured against movement.
Chapter 8
• There should be no flammable liquids stored in forecastle unless it has been specifically designed and
Chapter 9 classified.
• Access to bitter end securing arrangements, safety equipment & bilge wells/alarms must be clear &
Chapter 10
unobstructed.
Chapter 11 • Chain lockers should be clearly marked as enclosed spaces and the doors securely closed.
Chapter 12 • Access to interconnected spaces such as bow thruster rooms, transfer pumprooms etc. should be clearly
marked with the entry controls in accordance with the company enclosed spaces entry procedures.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 forecastle, and had inspections been effective in identifying hazards to health, safety and the environment?
Inspector Actions
Chapter 3
 Review the procedure which required that safety inspections of forecastle were conducted at appropriate
Chapter 4 intervals by the Safety Officer to identify hazards and potential hazards to health, safety and the
environment.
Chapter 5
 Where necessary review the records of safety inspections of the forecastle, including associated checklists.
Chapter 6  Inspect the forecastle spaces and verify that:
o Weathertight doors to forecastle are in satisfactory condition and capable of being properly secured.
Chapter 7
o Forecastle spaces are well illuminated, free of water, and clean and tidy.
Chapter 8 o Any stores, spare parts etc. are properly secured against movement.
o No flammable liquids are stored in forecastle unless it has been specifically designed and classified.
Chapter 9
o Access to bitter end securing arrangements, safety equipment & bilge wells/alarms is
Chapter 10 clear/unobstructed.
o Chain lockers are clearly marked as enclosed spaces and the doors securely closed.
Chapter 11
o Thruster rooms, transfer pump rooms or other any other interconnected spaces are clearly marked with
Chapter 12 the required safe entry controls and requirements.

o Any electrical or hydraulic equipment or other machinery in the forecastle spaces is in satisfactory
condition.
181
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
inspections of the accommodation, and had inspections been effective in identifying hazards
The Company should have a procedure which required that safety inspections of all the accessible areas of the ship,
Chapter 5 including accommodation, are conducted at appropriate intervals by the Safety Officer with a checklist. In addition:
 Weathertight doors, windows & portholes must be in order and capable of being properly secured.
Chapter 6  The hospital, where provided, must be ready for use & not be used as an additional cabin or as a storeroom.
 Review the procedure.
Chapter 8  Review the records of safety inspections of accommodation, including associated checklists.
 Review the records of testing the refrigerated room alarm.
Chapter 9  Inspect the accommodation spaces, public spaces, sanitary areas, laundries, food store handling spaces,
refrigerated spaces, galley, pantries and hospital with reference to Safety officer’s checklist and verify that:
Chapter 10 o Accommodation spaces are well illuminated, clean, tidy, in a hygienic condition and obstruction free.
o No overloaded electrical sockets - condition of electrical equipment is satisfactory - smoking regulations are
Chapter 11 observed - Laundries are free of accumulations of clothing that could constitute a fire hazard.
o Laundry driers and vents are free of accumulations of lint and fluff that could constitute a fire hazard.
Chapter 12 o Weathertight doors, windows and portholes are in good order and capable of being properly secured.
o The hospital, where provided, is ready for use and not being used as an additional cabin or storeroom.
o The refrigerated room alarm is operational and regularly tested.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 ballast and/or bunker pumproom, and had inspections been effective in identifying hazards to health,
safety and the environment?
Chapter 3

The Company should have a procedure which required that safety inspections of all the accessible areas of the
Chapter 5 ship, including the ballast and/or bunker pumproom, are conducted at appropriate intervals by the Safety Officer.
Chapter 6
An appropriate checklist should have been developed to facilitate these inspections.
Chapter 7
• Pumproom fans must be operating in the extraction mode.
Chapter 8 • On some vessels with ballast or fuel oil transfer pumprooms only one extraction fan is fitted.
• In the event of failure, alternative temporary arrangements combined with a risk assessment/enclosed
Chapter 9
space entry permit must be made prior to entry.
Chapter 10 • Ballast and bunker pumprooms do not have to comply with SOLAS Chapter II-2 Regulation 4.5.10 for
temperature sensing devices, interlocked lighting, gas detection or bilge level monitoring.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
182
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Chapter 5  Review the procedure which required that safety inspections of ballast and/or bunker pumproom were
conducted at appropriate intervals by the Safety Officer to identify hazards and potential hazards.
Chapter 6  Review the records of safety inspections of ballast and/or bunker pumproom including associated
Chapter 7 checklists.
 Inspect the ballast and/or bunker pumproom with reference to the Safety Officer’s checklist and verify:
Chapter 8
o Entry procedures for the pumproom were clearly displayed at the entrance.
Chapter 9 o Lights were fully operational with no damage or defects to fittings or covers.
o Ventilation was fully operational with only lower suctions, (if higher suctions are fitted), open.
Chapter 10
o The emergency ventilation dampers, (if fitted), were clearly marked and fully operational.
Chapter 11 o Pumproom fan(s) were not running noisily or with excessive vibration.
Chapter 12 o Bilges were clean and free of combustible material.
o Items stored in the pumproom were properly secured against movement.
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4 o No paint or other flammable material was stored in the pumproom.
o Bunker and hydraulic systems were free of oil leaks.
Chapter 5
o Ballast systems, including ballast water treatment plant, were free of significant leaks.
Chapter 6 o Bunker and ballast piping were free of patches or temporary repairs.
o Bulkhead seals and penetrations were in order, and, if fitted with oil/grease cups, these were filled above the minimum
Chapter 7 level.
o A rescue harness and means of recovery was rigged ready for immediate use.
Chapter 8
o All exposed rotating shafts were protected with guards.
Chapter 9 o Pipe lagging, where fitted, was clean and free from oil impregnation.
o Safety chains were in place to prevent falling down open vertical ladder accesses.
Chapter 10
o Gratings or removable deck plates were in good condition and properly fitted.
Chapter 11 o Bunker and ballast pump emergency stop buttons were clearly marked.
o The pumproom telephone, if fitted, was fully operational.
Chapter 12  Select several items from the ballast and/or bunker pumproom inspection checklist and request that the accompanying
183
5/27/2022
5.9. Lifting and Rigging
Chapter 1
5.9.1. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the company lifting and rigging procedures,
Chapter 2 and was evidence available to demonstrate that each item of lifting and rigging equipment had been
maintained, inspected and tested in accordance with the procedure?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
Lifting equipment with a safe working load (SWL) > 1000kg and its associated loose gear will generally be
Chapter 5 inspected and certified by the vessel’s Class Society in accordance with Flag rules.
Chapter 6 Rigging equipment is considered to be any equipment used for lifting, pulling, dragging or moving objects
that is not defined as either lifting equipment or loose gear.
Chapter 7
The Company must have a procedure for the management of lifting & rigging equipment in following
Chapter 8 categories:
 Lifting equipment & loose gear certified by the Class. The procedure must provide guidance on:
Chapter 9
o The maintenance of the required certification in accordance with the Flag rules.
Chapter 10
o The routine maintenance and onboard inspection by a competent person.
Chapter 11 o The requirement to retain certificates for each fall wire or topping lift wire.
Chapter 12 o The company mandatory retirement criteria for fall wires and topping lift wires.
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
 Lifting equipment, loose gear and rigging equipment not inspected or certified by the Class, which remains
Chapter 5 the sole responsibility of crew to verify as fit for purpose. The procedure should provide guidance on:
o The definition of all equipment considered to fall under this classification.
Chapter 6
o The retention of certificates, or equivalent, for each item of lifting or rigging equipment, including fall wires.
Chapter 7
o The inspection of each item of equipment by a competent person at a defined interval.
Chapter 8 o The marking of each item of equipment with a unique identifier.
Chapter 9
o The marking of each item of equipment with its SWL.
o The marking of each item of equipment with a ready means to identify that the equipment remains fit for
Chapter 10 continued use.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
184
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
o The development and maintenance of an inventory of all such equipment which includes:
Chapter 5
 The normal storage location of each item of equipment.
Chapter 6  The date each item of equipment was brought into service.
Chapter 7  The safe working load (SWL) of each item of equipment.
 The date of the last inspection by a competent person of each item of equipment.
Chapter 8
 The date of the last proof load test, where required.
Chapter 9 o The retirement criteria for the rigging equipment.
Chapter 10 o The retirement criteria for fall wires of davits and hoists.
o The age at which mandatory retirement of specific items of rigging equipment must take place.
Chapter 11
 The requirement that each item of lifting and rigging equipment is inspected by the work supervisor prior to
Chapter 12 each use to verify that it remained fit for continued use.
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 Colour coding may be considered as a convenient method to identify the inspection status of each item of
Chapter 6
lifting or rigging equipment.
Chapter 7 Items of lifting equipment, loose gear and rigging equipment that should be considered under this question.
Chapter 8  Cranes, derricks, davits, beam chain blocks, lifting beams & pad eyes (which form part of vessel’s
outfitting)
Chapter 9
 Chain blocks, wire hoists, snatch blocks, webbing slings, hose slings, wire rope slings, multi-leg bridles,
Chapter 10 shackles, hooks, tripods, shear legs, mucking winches and tank rescue hoists. (which do not form part of the
vessel’s outfitting)
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
185
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Review the company procedure for the management of lifting and rigging equipment.
Chapter 5  Verify the validity of certificates for lifting equipment and loose gear required to be inspected and certified under the
vessel’s Class and/or Flag rules.
Chapter 6  Review the inventory of lifting & rigging equipment not covered by a Class inspection & certification process and verify that:
o The inventory listed all items of equipment defined by the company lifting & rigging procedure and included for each
Chapter 7
item the normal storage location - date brought into service - SWL - date of last inspection by a competent person.
Chapter 8 o Manufacturer’s certificates or equivalent were available for each item.
o Proof load test certificates were available, where required by the company procedure.
Chapter 9 o Inspections had been completed and documented in accordance with the company procedure.
 During the general inspection, inspect a selection of lifting and rigging equipment and verify:
Chapter 10
o That each item was marked with a unique identifier, its SWL and an indicator that it had been inspected in
Chapter 11 accordance with the company procedure.
o That each item was in apparently satisfactory condition and fit for continued use.
Chapter 12  Interview a rating to verify their understanding of the markings on a selected item of lifting or rigging equipment and the
checks they would undertake before using it during routine work.
Chapter 1
5.9.2. Where the vessel was fitted with a single cargo hose handling crane, was a risk assessment
Chapter 2 available which identified the minimum spare parts that must be carried onboard to ensure continued
operation in the event of a single component failure, and were the identified spare parts available onboard?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 To ensure that cargo hoses can be safely disconnected in the event of a single component failure of the cargo
hose crane, there should be the capability to replace a defective hydraulic hose or other essential mechanical
Chapter 5 component with an available spare.
Chapter 6
Where a vessel is fitted with 2 identical hose handling cranes, hydraulic hoses and other critical mechanical
Chapter 7 components can be exchanged between cranes as a temporary measure.
Chapter 8 Where a vessel is fitted with a single hose handling crane, the Company should have conducted a RA to identify
those crane components that may fail during operation and then to have made provision for an appropriate stock
Chapter 9
of spare parts to be carried. Items to be considered by the RA should include but not be limited to:
Chapter 10  Hydraulic hoses.
 Complete winch motors or a comprehensive set of manufacturers recommended spare parts.
Chapter 11
 Complete hydraulic pumps or a comprehensive set of manufacturers recommended spare parts.
Chapter 12  Lifting and luffing wires as appropriate to the design of the crane.
186
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
5.9.2. Where the vessel was fitted with a single cargo hose handling crane, was a risk
Chapter 2 assessment available which identified the minimum spare parts that must be carried onboard
Chapter 3 to ensure continued operation in the event of a single component failure, and were the
identified spare parts available onboard?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
At least one hydraulic hose of each size and length fitted to the hose handling crane should be
Chapter 6 carried as a spare.
Chapter 7 Where a vessel is fitted with a special purpose crane for lightering or offshore hose handling in
addition to two standard hose handling cranes, the special purpose crane should be treated as if it
Chapter 8
were a single crane unless it shared the same components as the standard hose handling cranes.
Chapter 9 This question will only be allocated where a vessel is fitted with a single hose handling crane.
Chapter 10 (HVPQ question 10.9.2.1 or 10.9.3.1 answered as 1)
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
5.9.2. Where the vessel was fitted with a single cargo hose handling crane, was a risk
Chapter 2 assessment available which identified the minimum spare parts that must be carried onboard
Chapter 3 to ensure continued operation in the event of a single component failure, and were the
identified spare parts available onboard?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
 Review the RA for the continued operation of a single hose crane.
Chapter 6
 Review the inventory of spare hydraulic hoses for the cargo hose handling crane and verify that
Chapter 7 at least one spare hose with the same specification and rating was available for each diameter
Chapter 8 and length of hydraulic hose fitted to the crane.
 Review the inventory of any other items or spare parts identified by the RA.
Chapter 9
 Sight the spare hydraulic hoses and any other spare parts required to be carried by the RA.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
187
5/27/2022
5.10. Safe Access
Chapter 1
5.10.1. Were the Master, deck officers and deck ratings familiar with the company procedures
Chapter 2 for rigging the pilot boarding arrangements, and was the equipment provided in satisfactory
Chapter 3 condition and used in accordance with industry best practice?

Chapter 5 The Company should have a procedure for the safe rigging of the pilot boarding arrangements,
which included :
Chapter 6
 The inspection of the pilot boarding equipment before each use.
Chapter 7  The required rigging process for pilot boarding arrangements.
Chapter 8
 The required level of supervision during the rigging and recovery of the pilot boarding
arrangement.
Chapter 9  The required level of supervision during pilot transfer.
Chapter 10
The procedure may refer to, or incorporate, industry best practice and/or ship pilot boarding
Chapter 11
arrangement drawings.
Chapter 12
5.10. Safe Access
Chapter 1
5.10.1. Were the Master, deck officers and deck ratings familiar with the company procedures for
Chapter 2 rigging the pilot boarding arrangements, and was the equipment provided in satisfactory condition and
used in accordance with industry best practice?
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Review the procedure which described the requirements for the rigging and recovery of the pilot boarding
Chapter 5 arrangements.
 Review the certification and maintenance records for the pilot ladders.
Chapter 6
 Inspect at least one pilot ladder and verify that:
Chapter 7 o The ladder was clearly identified with tags or other permanent marking to allow connection to
certification and maintenance records.
Chapter 8
o The side ropes were continuous with no shackles, splices or knots.
Chapter 9 o The steps were equally spaced.
o The steps were horizontal and tightly secured.
Chapter 10
o Each spreader was integral to a step was not a separate item lashed between steps.
Chapter 11 o The side ropes were equally spaced.
o The steps were not painted, varnished, dirty or slippery.
Chapter 12
o The steps were free of cracks or crush damage.
188
5/27/2022
5.10. Safe Access
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4 o There were no loops or tripping lines to present a tripping hazard or that could foul the pilot launch.
Chapter 5 o The ladder was apparently constructed in accordance with Bridge Procedures Guide (BPG) checklist
A4.
Chapter 6 o Where the ladder had been repaired with replacement steps, the number of replacement steps and the
Chapter 7
means of inserting them was in accordance with the manufacturer’s guidance.
 Inspect the pilot ladder securing arrangements and verify that the weight of the ladder was taken by the side
Chapter 8 ropes and not by a step.
 Inspect the access to deck and verify that deck securing points, handhold stanchions and a bulwark ladder
Chapter 9 were provided as appropriate to the pilot boarding arrangement provided.
 Inspect the deck at the pilot boarding position and verify that the deck was provided with an anti-slip finish.
Chapter 10
 Inspect the gateway in the rails or bulwark, where provided, and verify that it opened inwards, was provided
Chapter 11 with holdback arrangements and that it did not impede the safe passage of pilot when boarding or
disembarking.
Chapter 12  Verify that the pilot boarding position was within the parallel body length of the vessel for all normal operating
draughts.
5.10. Safe Access
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Chapter 5
 Inspect the lifebuoy and self-igniting light and verify that the heaving line was not connected to the lifebuoy.
Chapter 6 (as required by ICS BPG5 Checklist A4)
 Request that the pilot boarding illumination is switched on and demonstrated as functioning.
Chapter 7
Interview the accompanying Officer to verify their familiarity with:
Chapter 8  The required level of supervision for the rigging and recovery of the pilot boarding arrangements.
 The method of securing the pilot ladder and accommodation ladder to the ship’s side when rigging a
Chapter 9
combination ladder.
Chapter 10  The safety precautions required when working over the side while rigging or recovering a pilot ladder or
combination ladder.
Chapter 11
Interview a deck rating to verify their understanding of the process to rig and recover the pilot boarding
Chapter 12 arrangement especially as it related to working over the side.
189
5/27/2022
5.10. Safe Access
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 rigging the accommodation ladders, and were the accommodation ladders in good order and used in
accordance with the company procedure and manufacturer’s instructions?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 The Company should have a procedure for the safe rigging of the accommodation ladder, which included:
Chapter 5  The inspection of the accommodation ladder before each use.
 The rigging process for the accommodation ladder.
Chapter 6
 The required level of supervision during the rigging and recovery of the accommodation ladder.
Chapter 7  The provision of a lifebuoy, light and line in the vicinity of the accommodation ladder when in use.
 The circumstances in which a safety net is required to be rigged
Chapter 8
 Any restrictions imposed on the use of accommodation ladder for personnel transfer while vessel is
Chapter 9 underway.
 The required level of supervision during personnel transfer.
Chapter 10
The procedure may refer to, or incorporate, industry best practice and/or accommodation ladder arrangement
Chapter 11 drawings.
The line must be attached to lifebuoy & light & marked with the symbol described by IMO Res. A.1116(30) LSS008
Chapter 12
5.10. Safe Access
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Review the procedure which described the requirements for rigging & recovery of the accommodation
Chapter 5 ladders.
Chapter 6  Where necessary, review the manufacturer’s instructions and/or drawings for the accommodation ladders.
 Where necessary review the maintenance and load test records for the accommodation ladders, including
Chapter 7 the date of the fall wires installation.
Chapter 8  Inspect one accommodation ladder and its hoisting arrangement and verify that:
o The accommodation ladder was clearly marked at each end with a plate or other markings showing the
Chapter 9
restrictions on the safe operation and loading, including the maximum and minimum permitted design
Chapter 10 angles of inclination, design load, maximum load on bottom end plate.
o The fall wire(s) were in apparent good order.
Chapter 11
o There was sufficient wire remaining on the winch storage drum when the accommodation ladder was
Chapter 12 deployed at the maximum freeboard (It is not expected that inspector requests that this is demonstrated)
190
5/27/2022
5.10. Safe Access
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
o The visible parts of accommodation ladder and hoisting arrangement were in good order and free from:
Chapter 5  Cracks or fractures.
Chapter 6  Excessive corrosion especially in areas where dissimilar metals are used.
 Bucking or deformation of the individual steps or main structure.
Chapter 7
 Missing, broken or deformed stanchions or handrails.
Chapter 8  Seized turntables, rollers or pivots.
Chapter 9  Damage to lifting and support points.
 Missing locking or securing pins for adjusting the lower platform angle.
Chapter 10
 Request that the accommodation ladder illumination is switched on and demonstrated as functioning.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
5.10. Safe Access
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
Interview the accompanying Officer to verify their familiarity with:
Chapter 5
 The required level of supervision for the rigging and recovery of the accommodation ladder.
Chapter 6  The safety precautions required when working over the side or outside the ship’s rail while rigging or
recovering an accommodation ladder, where this was required.
Chapter 7  Any restriction, or additional precautions, for the use of accommodation ladder while vessel was underway.
 The circumstances where a safety net was required to be rigged when using an accommodation ladder.
Chapter 8
Interview a deck rating to verify understanding of the process to rig and recover the accommodation ladder
Chapter 9
arrangement especially as it related to working over the side or outside ship’s rails, where this was required.
Chapter 10
Where the information plate for a portable gangway was missing and the vessel had marked the required
Chapter 11 information on the accommodation ladder in some other manner, the vessel must be able to demonstrate that
the information was an exact representation of the information shown on the original plate.
Chapter 12
191
5/27/2022
5.10. Safe Access
Chapter 1
5.10.3. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the company procedure for providing safe
Chapter 2 access to the vessel while alongside a terminal/berth, and was safe access provided by the ship’s portable
gangway, the vessel’s accommodation ladder or a shore gangway?
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
The Company should have a procedure to ensure safe access to vessel when alongside a terminal/berth, which included:
Chapter 5  The inspection of the ship’s portable gangway or accommodation ladder before each use.
 The rigging process for the portable gangway including the use of strengthened rails and bulwark ladders,.
Chapter 6
 The required level of supervision during rigging & recovery of portable gangway or accommodation ladder.
Chapter 7  The use of a safety net when using a ship’s portable gangway or accommodation ladder.
 The circumstances where a safety net must be used when using a terminal provided gangway.
Chapter 8  The required level of supervision during personnel transfer.
 The provision of a lifebuoy, light and line at the head of the gangway.
Chapter 9
 The provision of warning signs which include:
Chapter 10 o Guidance in alignment with ISGOTT6 23.10.1.
o Specific warnings relating to the cargo being handled, such as high H2S content.
Chapter 11
o Specific warnings relating to onboard processes such as generating and using nitrogen.
Chapter 12
The procedure may refer to, or incorporate, industry best practice and/or safe access arrangement drawings.
The line must be attached to lifebuoy & light & marked with the symbol described by IMO Res. A.1116(30) LSS008
5.10. Safe Access
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 providing safe access to the vessel while alongside a terminal/berth, and was safe access
Chapter 3 provided by the ship’s portable gangway, the vessel’s accommodation ladder or a shore
gangway?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
 Review the procedure which described the requirements for providing safe access to vessel while alongside
Chapter 6 a terminal/berth.
 Review the manufacturer’s instructions and/or drawings for the portable gangway, where provided.
Chapter 7  Review the maintenance and load test records for the ship’s portable gangway, where provided.
 Inspect the portable gangway, where provided, and verify that:
Chapter 8
o It was clearly marked at each end with a plate showing the restrictions on the safe operation and loading,
Chapter 9 including the maximum and minimum permitted design angles of inclination, design load.
o The visible parts of the portable gangway were in apparent good order and free from:
Chapter 10  Cracks or fractures - excessive corrosion especially in areas where dissimilar metals are used.
 Bucking or deformation of the individual steps or main structure.
Chapter 11  Missing, broken or deformed stanchions or handrails - seized rollers or wheels.
Chapter 12
 Damage to lifting and support points.
 Missing or damaged locking or securing arrangements for portable stanchions.
• Request that the gangway illumination is switched on and demonstrated as functioning.
192
5/27/2022
5.10. Safe Access
Chapter 1
gangway?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5  Where the ship’s portable gangway or accommodation ladder was deployed verify that it was rigged in
accordance with its design limitations.
Chapter 6
 Where the ship’s portable gangway or accommodation ladder, or shore gangway was deployed verify that:
Chapter 7
o Where it was resting on handrails, the handrails were designed to take the load.
Chapter 8 o A safety net had been rigged when required.
o It was rigged in accordance with the guidance provided in ISGOTT6.
Chapter 9
Chapter 10 o The required level of supervision for the rigging and recovery of portable gangway, where provided.
o The safety precautions required when working over the side or outside the ship’s rail while rigging or
Chapter 11
recovering the portable gangway, where provided.
Chapter 12 o The provision of a safety net when using the ship’s portable gangway, accommodation ladder or where
a shore gangway without fixed railings was provided.
5.10. Safe Access
Chapter 1
gangway?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5  Interview a deck rating to verify their understanding of the process to rig and recover the portable
Chapter 6 gangway arrangement, especially as it related to working over the side or outside the ship’s rails
prior to the rigging of the safety net.
Chapter 7
Chapter 8 This question relates to portable gangways and safe access at a terminal. If an accommodation
ladder is in use as a means of access focus on the means of access rather than the technical
Chapter 9 details of the accommodation ladder.
Chapter 10
Where the information plate for a portable gangway was missing and the vessel had marked the
Chapter 11 required information on the gangway in some other manner, the vessel must be able to demonstrate
Chapter 12
that the information was an exact representation of the information shown on the original plate.
193
5/27/2022
5.10. Safe Access
Chapter 1
5.10.4. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company personnel transfer by crane
Chapter 2 procedure, and where a personnel transfer basket (PTB) and accessories were provided, were
Chapter 3 these in satisfactory condition and used in accordance with company procedures and
manufacturer’s recommendations?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Where transfer of personnel by crane is permitted and/or a personnel transfer basket (PTB) is
provided, the Company should have a procedure in alignment with the OCIMF ‘Transfer of
Chapter 7 Personnel by Crane between Vessels’. 1st Edition
Chapter 8
This question will be included in the inspection question pool when the following HVPQ question is
Chapter 9 answered in the affirmative:
Chapter 10
 13.1.6 Does the SMS provide instructions regarding the transfer of personnel using derricks or
Chapter 11 cranes?
Chapter 12
and/or the Company had declared the vessel carries a PTB through the PIQ.
5.10. Safe Access
Chapter 1
5.10.4. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company personnel transfer by crane
Chapter 2 procedure, and where a personnel transfer basket (PTB) and accessories were provided, were
Chapter 3 these in satisfactory condition and used in accordance with company procedures and
manufacturer’s recommendations?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
Chapter 6  Review the procedure describing the requirements for personnel transfer by crane.
Chapter 7  Sight the manufacturer’s test certificates for the PTB and any accessories.
 Where the vessel declared that the crane(s) were certified for personnel transfer through HVPQ
Chapter 8
13.1.7, sight the appropriate crane certification.
Chapter 9  Sight the training records for the personnel designated for personnel transfer by crane operations.
Chapter 10  Review the onboard maintenance & inspection records for the crane, PTB and accessories.
Chapter 11  Where personnel transfer by crane had taken place within the previous 3 months, review the
RA and personnel transfer by crane plan for one transfer or group of transfers.
Chapter 12
194
5/27/2022
5.10. Safe Access
Chapter 1
5.10.4. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company personnel transfer by crane procedure,
Chapter 2 and where a personnel transfer basket (PTB) and accessories were provided, were these in satisfactory
condition and used in accordance with company procedures and manufacturer’s recommendations?
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4  Inspect the PTB and accessories and verify that:
Chapter 5 o Each item of equipment was in order.
o Each item of equipment was marked with its SWL or capacity.
Chapter 6
o The PTB was marked with its empty weight.
Chapter 7 o A crane hook pennant was available to keep the main crane hook clear of the PTB.
o Two tag lines were available which met the specifications provided in the OCIMF information paper.
Chapter 8
Chapter 9 o The company procedure which described the transfer of personnel by crane.
Chapter 10
o The RA and personnel transfer by crane plan development process.
o The contingency plan for crane failure during a personnel transfer by crane.
Chapter 11 o The use of the PTB and accessories provided.
Chapter 12
Where no PTB or accessories were provided on board, focus on the procedural and familiarity aspects of the
question and guidance.
5.10. Safe Access
Chapter 1
5.10.5. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for
Chapter 2 helicopter/ship operations, and had these procedures been complied with?
Chapter 4 The Company should have procedures providing guidance on helicopter/ship operations including:
Chapter 5  Helicopter operations RA.
 Training and emergency drill requirements.
Chapter 6
 Preparation of a Helicopter Landing/Operating Area Plan.
Chapter 7
 Use of the ICS Shipboard Safety Checklist for Helicopter Operations (or equivalent).
Chapter 8  Responsible Officer and deck crew assignment.
Chapter 9  Emergency tools and equipment requirements.
Chapter 10  Restrictions on cargo / crane operations during helicopter/ship operations.
This question will only be allocated to vessels where HVPQ 5.2.1.1 is answered as yes.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
195
5/27/2022
5.10. Safe Access
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 helicopter/ship operations, and had these procedures been complied with?
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
 Review the procedures providing guidance on helicopter/ship operations.
Chapter 6
 Review the helicopter operations RA and evidence of last review.
Chapter 7  Sight the ICS Guide to Helicopter/Ship Operations.
Chapter 8  Review completed ICS Shipboard Safety Checklists for Helicopter Operations (or equivalent).
Chapter 9
 Review records of training and emergency drills for helicopter/ship operations.
 During the course of the inspection, inspect the emergency tools and equipment required by the
Chapter 10
ICS Guide to Helicopter/Ship Operations.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
5.10. Safe Access
Chapter 1
5.10.6. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for helicopter/ship
Chapter 2 operations, and had the crew involved received appropriate training?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 3
The Company should have procedures in the form of an operations manual providing guidance on routine and emergency
Chapter 4 helicopter/ship operations including:
 Helicopter operations RA.
Chapter 5
 Identification of job roles and responsibilities for all personnel involved.
Chapter 6  Training requirements of all personnel involved.
Chapter 7  Emergency drill requirements.

 Use of the ICS Shipboard Safety Checklist for Helicopter Operations (or equivalent).
Chapter 8  Emergency tools and equipment requirements.
Chapter 9  Restrictions on cargo operations during helicopter/ship operations.
 Reasons for, and extent of, any operational limitations.
Chapter 10 The training of personnel involved in helicopter/ship operations should include accredited courses such as Offshore Helicopter
Landing Officer (HLO) and Offshore Helideck Assistant (HDA) followed by ship-specific familiarisation of the helicopter facilities
Chapter 11
and operations.
Chapter 12 The vessel may have been issued with a Helicopter Landing Area Certificate (HLAC) by one of the Aviation Inspection Bodies
(AIBs) recognised by Flag. An HLAC can be taken as evidence of suitable training of personnel involved in helicopter/ship
operations.
196
5/27/2022
5.10. Safe Access
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 helicopter/ship operations, and had the crew involved received appropriate training?
Chapter 4  Review the procedures providing guidance on helicopter/ship operations.
Chapter 5  Review the helicopter operations RA and evidence of last review.
 Sight the Helicopter Landing Area Certificate (HLAC) if available.
Chapter 6
 If no HLAC is available, review records of appropriate formal accredited training courses such as Offshore
Chapter 7 Helicopter Landing Officer (HLO) and Offshore Helideck Assistant (HDA) followed by ship-specific
familiarisation of the helicopter facilities and operations.
Chapter 8
 Review records of emergency drills in helicopter/ship operations.
Chapter 9  Sight the ICS Guide to Helicopter/Ship Operations.
Chapter 10  Review completed ICS Shipboard Safety Checklists for Helicopter Operations (or equivalent).
 During the course of the inspection, inspect the required emergency tools and equipment as set out in the ICS
Chapter 11
Guide to Helicopter/Ship Operations.
Chapter 12
5.10. Safe Access
Chapter 1
5.10.7. Were the Master, officers and crew familiar with the escape routes from the machinery spaces,
Chapter 2 pump rooms, compressor rooms, accommodation spaces and, when in port, from the vessel, and were
these routes clearly marked, unobstructed and well illuminated?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 The Company should have a procedure that ensured:
Chapter 5  The identification and marking of escape routes from:
o Accommodation spaces - Machinery spaces - Compressor rooms - Thruster rooms.
Chapter 6
o Any other space where the means of escape may not be obvious when disorientated.
Chapter 7  Means of escape were unobstructed but, where external doors were locked for security reasons, a rapid
means of opening the door from the inside was provided.
Chapter 8  Where company security procedures did not explicitly require exterior doors to be locked and secured to
Chapter 9
prevent access from the outside, the doors either remained unlocked or secured in a manner that would
permit access from the outside to a properly equipped firefighting party.
Chapter 10  Whilst the vessel was in port, the escape route to terminal means of access was marked.
Escape routes should be marked by signs that are a green square or rectangle, with safety info shown by
Chapter 11
words or a symbol in white.
Chapter 12
197
5/27/2022
5.10. Safe Access
Chapter 1
5.10.7. Were the Master, officers and crew familiar with the escape routes from the machinery spaces,
Chapter 2 pump rooms, compressor rooms, accommodation spaces and, when in port, from the vessel, and were
these routes clearly marked, unobstructed and well illuminated?
Chapter 4  Review the procedure defining the requirements for identifying and marking escape routes.
 Inspect the escape routes from accommodation, machinery spaces, pump room, etc. and verify that:
Chapter 5 o The escape routes were clearly identified by signs in accordance with IMO guidance.
o Where an escape route terminated at a door, the door was either unlocked or, where the door was locked for security
Chapter 6
reasons, there was a rapid means of opening the door from the inside.
Chapter 7 o Where an escape route was provided with a self-closing fire door, the door was able to close and latch properly
without external assistance.
Chapter 8 o Where the escape route was an enclosed trunk, the em. lighting was fully maintained with functioning bulbs in every
lamp.
Chapter 9 o The escape routes, or doors forming part of an emergency escape route, were not obstructed.
Chapter 10  Inspect the escape route from accommodation to the means of shore access and verify that it was marked with signs
and, so far as possible, routed around mooring lines under tension and/or the cargo manifolds in use.
Chapter 11  Where an external door forming part of an escape route was locked for security reasons:
o Request that an officer or rating demonstrate the opening of door from the inside without the need for a key or tools.
Chapter 12 o Request that an officer or rating describes how a properly equipped firefighting party would open the door from the
outside in an emergency.
Unless documented security procedures override access in an emergency, then a means of access through a door forming
part of an emergency escape route should be possible from bothAlpha Marine Consulting P.C. –
directions. OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar
5.11. Sample Management
Chapter 1
5.11.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures addressing the management
Chapter 2 of samples of bunker fuel oil and Annex I and/or Annex II cargoes as applicable, and were samples being
Chapter 3
properly stored and eventually disposed of?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 The Company should have procedures addressing the management of samples of bunker fuel oil and Annex I and/or Annex II
cargoes as applicable, including:
Chapter 5
 Marking/labelling of samples.
Chapter 6  Storage arrangements.
 Records to be kept.
Chapter 7
A sample locker should be equipped with adequate ventilation arrangements but does not have to be mechanically ventilated.
Chapter 9  Review procedures addressing the management of samples of bunker FO & Annex I and/or Annex II cargoes as applicable.
 Review the records of bunker FO and cargo samples and ORB II or Cargo Record Book as applicable.
Chapter 10  Inspect the designated space(s) for storing samples.
Chapter 11  During the course of the inspection, note any samples stored outside the designated space(s) for storing samples.
 Interview the responsible officer to verify their familiarity with company procedures addressing the management of
Chapter 12 samples of bunker fuel oil and Annex I and/or Annex II cargoes as applicable.
The responsible officer can be any officer nominated by the Master to review the onboard sample management during an
inspection.
198
5/27/2022
5.12. Safety Equipment
Chapter 1
5.12.1. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the company procedures that
Chapter 2
addressed the use of respiratory protective equipment during cargo operations, and did the
Chapter 3 procedures prohibit the use of filter type respirators for this purpose?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 • The Company should have procedures that addressed the use of respiratory protective
Chapter 6 equipment during cargo operations including prohibiting the use of filter type respirators for this
purpose.
Chapter 7 • Filter masks should not be used during cargo operations.
Chapter 8
Inspector Actions
Chapter 9
 Review the procedures for the use of respiratory protective equipment during cargo operations.
Chapter 10
 During the course of the inspection, observe any respiratory protective equipment in use
Chapter 11 during cargo operations.
Chapter 12  Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with company procedures for the use
of respiratory protective equipment during cargo operations.
5.12. Safety Equipment
Chapter 1
5.12.2. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the location and operation of the
Chapter 2
decontamination showers and eyewash stations on deck, and were these facilities suitably
Chapter 3 marked, easily accessible and ready for use?
Chapter 5 The Company should have a procedure to ensure that decontamination showers and eye wash stations on deck
are ready for use, and suitably marked - easily accessible - regularly inspected and tested.
Chapter 6 • To be operable in any ambient condition, a recirculation system, or fully heat-traced line must be provided.
Chapter 7 • Uninsulated sections of freshwater supply lines may lead to water being heated by direct sunlight such that a
person would not be able to use a shower or eyewash station for the intended purpose.
Chapter 8
Inspector Actions
Chapter 9  Review the procedure.
 Inspect the decontamination showers and eye wash stations, select one and,
Chapter 10
o If the temperature is at or below freezing, verify that the selected shower or eye wash was not frozen.
Chapter 11 o If the temperature was high with strong sunlight, verify that the selected shower or eye wash was not
scalding hot.
Chapter 12  Review the records of inspection and testing of decontamination showers and eye wash stations.
 Interview a rating to verify familiarity with the location & operation of decontamination showers and eyewash
stations.
199
5/27/2022
Chapter 6
Pollution Prevention
6.1. Pollution Prevention – Record Books
Chapter 1
6.1.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedure for maintaining the Cargo
Chapter 2 Record Book (CRB), and did the entries contained in the CRB accurately record the cargo related
operations required to be documented by MARPOL Annex II?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 The Company should have procedures for maintaining the CRB, either in paper or electronic format, in accordance
with MARPOL Annex II and any Flag guidance. The procedures should include:
Chapter 5
 What cargo related operations are required to be entered in the CRB.
Chapter 6  Who is required to enter the details into the CRB - When entries are required to be entered.
 The use of the correct official name in accordance with the Certificate of Fitness for each entry requiring the cargo
Chapter 7
to be identified. The entries may also include the popular trading name or abbreviation.
Chapter 8  When the Master is required to verify the accuracy of the CRB entries and sign each page.
 The procedure for correcting entries made in error.
Chapter 9
 The procedure for entering cargo operations which had been overlooked and not entered in correct
Chapter 10 chronological order.
 Instructions for operations required to be entered under Section K, Additional operational procedures & remarks.
Chapter 11  Instructions for retention of completed CRBs.
Chapter 12 Where vessel is using an electronic record book, instructions for its use must be provided, including automatic
backing up of data to offline storage and an appropriate method of data recovery if the system were to fail or not be
available from ship’s network. The use of electronic record book should be authorised by a Declaration from
flag/class.
200
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
6.1.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedure for maintaining the Cargo
Chapter 2 Record Book, and did the entries contained in the Cargo Record Book accurately record the cargo related
operations required to be documented by MARPOL Annex II?
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4  Review the procedures for maintaining the CRB.
 Review the entries in CRB for a recent series of cargo operations relating to a single cargo and verify that:
Chapter 5
o Each operation had been entered in the CRB in the correct chronological sequence from the time the cargo was initially
Chapter 6 loaded until the completion of cargo tank cleaning and disposal of any generated tank washings.
o Each entry included the info required by the instructions in the CRB - Each entry was signed by the officer in charge of the
Chapter 7 operation - Each page was counter-signed by the Master.
o Each reference to a named cargo used the correct official name in accordance with the Certificate of Fitness.
Chapter 8
o Where prewash operations had been carried out in accordance with MARPOL, the CRB entry was endorsed by the
Chapter 9 local port authority inspector or equivalent.
o Discharge of tank washings was in accordance with the company procedure and MARPOL Annex II.
Chapter 10 o Where wash water had been discharged to a reception facility, a receipt or certificate specifying the quantity of tank
washings transferred, together with the time and date of the transfer, was kept together with the CRB.
Chapter 11
o Where tank washings had been transferred to sea, the entries in the CRB were consistent with the vessel’s operations
at the time of the operation by comparison with the deck logbook.
Chapter 12
o Where an error or omission had been made, the method of correcting or inserting an updated entry had been made in
accordance with the company procedure.
The review of CRB entries should be limited to the previous 6 months.
Chapter 1
6.1.2. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedure for maintaining the Oil Record
Chapter 2 Book Part II, and did the entries contained in the ORB II accurately record the cargo related operations
Chapter 3
required to be documented by MARPOL Annex I?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have procedures for maintaining the ORB II, either in paper or electronic format, in accordance with
Chapter 5 MARPOL Annex I and any Flag guidance. The procedure should include:
 What cargo related operations are required to be entered in the ORB II.
Chapter 6
 Who is required to enter the details of a cargo related operation into the ORB II.
Chapter 7  When entries are required to be entered in the ORB II.
 When the Master is required to verify the accuracy of the ORB II entries and sign each page.
Chapter 8
Chapter 9  The procedure for entering cargo operations which had been overlooked and not entered in the correct chronological
order.
Chapter 10
 Instructions for operations required to be entered under Section O, Additional operational procedures & general remarks.
Chapter 11  Instructions for retention of completed ORB II.
Where the vessel is using an electronic record book, instructions for its use should be provided, including automatic backing
Chapter 12 up of data to offline storage and an appropriate method of data recovery if the system were to fail or not be available from the
ship’s network. The use of the electronic record book should be authorised by a Declaration from flag/class.
201
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
6.1.2. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedure for maintaining the Oil Record
Chapter 2 Book Part II, and did the entries contained in the ORB II accurately record the cargo related operations
Chapter 3
required to be documented by MARPOL Annex I?
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
Chapter 5  Review the entries in the ORB II for a recent series of cargo operations relating to a single cargo and verify that:
o Each operation had been entered in the ORB II in the correct chronological sequence from the time the cargo was
Chapter 6
initially loaded until the completion of cargo tank cleaning and disposal of any generated tank washing water.
Chapter 7 o Each entry included the info required by the instructions in the ORB II - Each entry was signed by the officer in charge of
the operation - Each page was counter-signed by the Master.
Chapter 8 o Discharge of tank washings was in accordance with the company procedure and MARPOL Annex I.
o Where wash water had been discharged to a reception facility, a receipt or certificate specifying the quantity of tank
Chapter 9
washings transferred, together with the time and date of the transfer, was kept together with ORB II.
Chapter 10 o Where water from a slop tank had been discharged into the sea, the entries in the ORB II were consistent with the
vessel’s operations at the time of the operation by comparison with the deck logbook.
Chapter 11 o Where an error or omission had been made, the method of correcting or inserting an updated entry had been made in
accordance with the company procedure. Where a transfer of bilge water or sludge from the machinery space had taken
Chapter 12 place that a corresponding entry was recorded in ORB I.
The review of ORB II entries should be limited to the previous 6 months of records.
Chapter 1
6.1.3. Were the Master and engineer officers familiar with the company procedure for maintaining the
Chapter 2 Oil Record Book Part I, and did the entries contained in the ORB I accurately record the machinery space
Chapter 3
operations required to be documented by MARPOL Annex I?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have procedures for maintaining the ORB I, either in paper or electronic format, in accordance with
Chapter 5 MARPOL Annex I and any Flag guidance. The procedures should include:
 What machinery space operations are required to be entered in the ORB I.
Chapter 6  Who is required to enter the details of a machinery space operation into the ORB I.
Chapter 7  When entries are required to be made in the ORB I.
 When the Master is required to verify the accuracy of the ORB I entries and sign each page.
Chapter 8
Chapter 9  The procedure for entering machinery space operations which had been overlooked and not entered in the correct
chronological order.
Chapter 10  Instructions for operations required to be entered under Section I, Additional operational procedures and general remarks.
Chapter 11  Instructions for retention of completed ORB I.
Where the vessel is using an electronic record book, instructions for its use should be provided, including automatic backing up
Chapter 12 of data to offline storage and an appropriate method of data recovery if the system were to fail or not be available from the ship’s
network. The use of the electronic record book should be authorised by a Declaration from flag/class.
202
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
Chapter 5  Review the procedure.

 Review the entries in ORB I for a randomly selected period of approximately 10 uninterrupted days and verify
Chapter 6 that:
o The collection and transfer or disposal of oil residues (sludge) were consistent with the weekly
Chapter 7
inventory of oil residues retained on board (Code C).
Chapter 8 o The disposal of sludge using the incinerator was consistent with the capacity of the incinerator when in
sludge burning mode (Code 12.3)
Chapter 9 o The disposal of bilge water through the 15 ppm equipment was consistent with the capacity of the 15
ppm equipment (Code D15.1).
Chapter 10 o The voluntary declaration of quantities retained on board in oily bilge water holding tanks (Code I) was
consistent with the disposals made (Code D15.1).
Chapter 11 o The capacities of the oil residue tanks corresponded with the capacities listed in the IOPP supplement.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Review the entries in ORB I more generally, and verify that:
Chapter 5 o Each operation had been entered in the ORB I in the correct chronological sequence.
o Each entry included the info required by the instructions in the ORB I - Each entry was signed by the
Chapter 6
officer in charge of the operation - Each page was counter-signed by the Master.
Chapter 7 o Where an error or omission had been made verify that the method of correcting or inserting an
updated entry had been made in accordance with the company procedure.
Chapter 8
 Where sludge (C12.2) or bilge water (D15.3) had been transferred to a cargo area slop tank verify that there
Chapter 9 was a reciprocal entry in ORB II.
 Where sludge (C12.1) or bilge water (D15.2) had been disposed of to a reception facility, verify that a receipt
Chapter 10
or certificate detailing the quantity of residues or oily mixture transferred along with the date and time of the
Chapter 11 transfer was available with the ORB I.
 Where bunkering of FO (H26.3) had taken place verify that the entries were consistent with the BDN provided
Chapter 12 by the bunker supplier.
The review of ORB I entries should be limited to the previous 6 months.
203
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
6.1.4. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for maintaining the Garbage
Chapter 2 Record Book (GRB) in accordance with the Garbage Management Plan (GMP), and did the entries
Chapter 3
contained in the GRB accurately record the garbage management activities required to be documented by
MARPOL Annex V?
Chapter 5
The Company should have procedures for developing a GMP and maintaining the GRB, either in paper or electronic
format, in accordance with MARPOL Annex V and any Flag guidance. The procedure and/or GMP should include:
Chapter 6  What garbage related activities are required to be entered in the GRB.
 Who is required to enter the details of garbage related activities into the GRB.
Chapter 7
 When entries are required to be made in the GRB.
Chapter 8  When the Master is required to verify the accuracy of the GRB entries and sign each page.
Chapter 9  The procedure for correcting entries made in error.
 The procedure for entering garbage related activities which had been overlooked and not entered in the correct
Chapter 10 chronological order.
Chapter 11  Instructions for retention of completed GRB.
Where the vessel is using an electronic record book, instructions for its use should be provided, including automatic
Chapter 12
backing up of data to offline storage and an appropriate method of data recovery if the system were to fail or not be
available from ship’s network. The use of electronic record book must be authorised by a Declaration from flag/class.
Chapter 1
6.1.4. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for maintaining the GRB in
Chapter 2 accordance with the GMP, and did the entries contained in the GRB accurately record the garbage
Chapter 3
management activities required to be documented by MARPOL Annex V?
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Review the procedures for maintaining the GRB.
Chapter 5
 Review the entries in GRB for a selected period of 10 consecutive days which included a port visit &
Chapter 6 verify that:
Chapter 7 o Special areas.
o Distance from coastline.
Chapter 8
o Whether the waste had been comminuted or ground.
Chapter 9
o Food wastes had been disposed of overboard in accordance with restrictions based on:
Chapter 10 o Each operation had been entered in the GRB in the correct chronological sequence
Chapter 11
o Each entry included the information required by the instructions in the GRB.
o Each entry was signed by the officer in charge of operation - Each page counter-signed by the Master.
Chapter 12
o Where an error or omission had been made, the method of correcting or inserting an updated entry
had been made in accordance with the company procedure.
204
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
6.1.4. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for maintaining the GRB in
Chapter 2 accordance with the GMP, and did the entries contained in the GRB accurately record the garbage
Chapter 3
management activities required to be documented by MARPOL Annex V?

 Where garbage had been disposed of to a reception facility, verify that a receipt or certificate detailing the
Chapter 5 quantity of garbage by category transferred along with the date & time of transfer was available with the GRB.
 Where an error or omission had been made verify that the method of correcting or inserting an updated entry
Chapter 6
had been made in accordance with the company procedure.
Chapter 7  Where necessary review the GMP.
Chapter 8 The review of GRB entries should be limited to the previous 6 months.
 Inspect the garbage collection areas, including the incinerator space and verify:
Chapter 9
o Garbage was being stored and segregated in a safe / hygienic manner in accordance with the GMP.
Chapter 10 o Dangerous or toxic waste items, such as aerosols and batteries, were being properly collected and
segregated to prevent them from being incinerated or disposed of ashore with general waste.
Chapter 11
 Interview a rating to verify understanding of onboard garbage management including:
Chapter 12 o Garbage segregation onboard - Disposal of aerosols and batteries - Permitted disposals of garbage to the sea.
o Garbage management practices within their operational department.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 Ozone-depleting Substances (ODS) Record Book, and did the entries contained in the ODS Record Book
Chapter 3
accurately record the operations and emissions required to be documented by MARPOL Annex VI?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have procedures for maintaining the ODS Record Book, either in paper or electronic format,
Chapter 5 as per MARPOL Annex VI and any Flag guidance. The procedures should include:
 The operations and emissions required to be entered in the ODS Record Book, i.e.:
Chapter 6 o recharge, full or partial, of equipment containing ODS, repair or maintenance of equipment containing ODS.
o discharge of ozone-depleting substances to the atmosphere, both deliberate and non-deliberate.
Chapter 7 o discharge of ODS to land-based reception facilities - supply of ODS to the ship.
Chapter 8
 Who is required to enter the details of an operation or emission into the ODS Record Book.
 When entries are required to be made - when Master is required to verify the accuracy of entries & sign each page.
Chapter 9  The procedure for correcting entries made in error - the procedure for entering operations or emissions which had
been overlooked and not entered in the correct chronological order.
Chapter 10  Instructions for retention of completed ODS Record Books.
Chapter 11 Where vessel is using an electronic record book, instructions for its use must be provided, including automatic backing
up of data to offline storage and an appropriate method of data recovery if the system were to fail or not be available
Chapter 12
from the ship’s network. The use of the electronic record book should be authorised by a Declaration from flag/class.
205
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 ODS Record Book, and did the entries contained in the ODS Record Book accurately record the operations
Chapter 3
and emissions required to be documented by MARPOL Annex VI?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
 Review the list of equipment containing ODS included in the Supplement to IAPP Certificate, section 2.1.
Chapter 6  Select an item of equipment listed and review the relevant maintenance records.
Chapter 7  Review the ODS Record Book - verify that any equipment recharge, repair or maintenance noted had been
recorded.
Chapter 8  The supply or discharge of ODS to land facilities, had been recorded, as appropriate.
Chapter 9  Review the entries in the ODS Record Book more generally, and verify that:
o Each operation had been entered in correct chronological sequence - each entry included the info required -
Chapter 10 each entry was signed by the officer in charge of operation - each page was counter-signed by the Master.
Chapter 11 o Where an error or omission had been made verify that the method of correcting or inserting an updated
entry was in accordance with the company procedures.
Chapter 12 Where the vessel is using an electronic record book, verify that data is being automatically backed up to offline
storage and that there is an appropriate method of data recovery if the system were to fail or not be available from the
ship’s network. Sight the Declaration from flag/class.
Chapter 1
6.1.6. Were the documents and records required by MARPOL Annex VI Regulation 13 for the
Chapter 2
control of NOx and associated emissions in good order?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
Chapter 5 The details of each marine diesel engine installed onboard to which MARPOL Annex VI reg. 13
applies can be found in paragraph 2.2.1 of the IAPP Certificate.
Chapter 6
Chapter 7 • The level of NOx emissions for each engine is described by Tier designation.
• Tier I & Tier II status is usually achieved via engine design.
Chapter 8
• Tier III status is achieved by the use of additional equipment such as Selective Catalytic
Chapter 9 Reduction (SCR) or Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) systems.
• Such equipment is not run continuously and must be operating to achieve Tier III status. Thus
Chapter 10 engines may be run at Tier II or Tier III depending upon local requirements.
Chapter 11 • Engines must be operating in Tier III mode in a NOx ECA that applies to the vessel.
Chapter 12
206
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 4 NOx Emission Control Areas apply as follows:
 Baltic Sea and North Sea for vessels constructed after 1 Jan 2021.
Chapter 5
 North American for vessels constructed after 1 Jan 2016.
Chapter 6
 US Caribbean Sea for vessels constructed after 1 Jan 2016.
Chapter 7
Chapter 8 MARPOL Annex VI and the NOx Technical Code require Technical Files for each of these diesel engines to be
maintained on board, together with the following records in relation to NOx emissions:
Chapter 9  A Record Book of Engine Parameters for engines required to undergo Engine Parameter Checks at initial
and subsequent surveys.
Chapter 10
 A record that shows only engines operating at Tier III are in use in a NOx Tier III emission control area
Chapter 11 (NECA)
Chapter 12  Ships fitted with Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) are required to record the discharge of solid residues and
bleed-off water in an EGR Record Book.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
• Where diesel engines are fitted with a Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) System there should be a strategy for
Chapter 4
monitoring the catalyst condition/degradation set out in the engine’s technical file. This may involve continuous
Chapter 5 monitoring of NOx levels or a prediction of the life of catalyst under operating conditions together with annual spot
checks of NOx levels.
Chapter 6 • Vessel staff should be familiar with the strategy, its implementation and associated equipment.
Chapter 7 • Records should be available on board of measured NOx levels.
The Company procedures for maintaining these Records Books, either in paper or electronic format, as per MARPOL
Chapter 8 Annex VI Reg. 13, the NOx Technical Code and any Flag guidance must include:
Chapter 9 • The info required to be entered in the Record Books - Who is required to enter the details - When entries are
required to be made - When Master is required to verify the accuracy of Record Book entries and sign each page.
Chapter 10 • Guidance on any additional record keeping requirements of local or national legislation such as US VGP.
Chapter 11 • The procedure for correcting entries made in error - The procedure for entering operations or emissions
overlooked and not entered in the correct chronological order.
Chapter 12 • Instructions for retention of completed Record Books.
• The actions to take if any NOx abatement system fitted suffers a failure that cannot be rectified in 1 hour.
207
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4  Review the procedures for maintaining the documents & records required by MARPOL Annex VI
Chapter 5 Reg. 13 and the NOx Technical Code.
 Review the IAPP Certificate.
Chapter 6
 Sight the Technical Files for diesel engines listed in paragraph 2.2.1 of the IAPP Certificate.
Chapter 7
 Review the Record Books of Engine Parameters where applicable.
Chapter 8  Review the records of diesel engine Tier and on/off status on entering/leaving an NECA where
Chapter 9 applicable.
 Review the EGR Record Book where applicable.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Where the vessel is using an electronic record book for recording the entries required in the Record
Chapter 12 Books, verify that data is being automatically backed up to offline storage and that there is an
appropriate method of data recovery if system were to fail or not be available from the ship’s network.
Sight the Declaration from flag/class.
6.2. Cargo and Bunker Operations
Chapter 1
6.2.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with the arrangements to drain the cargo
Chapter 2 pumproom bilges in the event of flooding or accidental leakage, and were these arrangements
Chapter 3 in good order?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 The Company should have procedures for draining the pumproom bilges which should include:
Chapter 5  Transferring bilge contents to cargo/slop tanks or other containment tanks without risk of pollution.
 Pumping out the pumproom in the event of flooding, including controlling the bilge pump and suction
Chapter 6 and discharge valves remotely from the upper deck.
 Periodic testing of the arrangements for draining the pumproom bilges.
Chapter 7
Inspector Actions
Chapter 8  Review the procedures for draining the pumproom bilges.
 Inspect the arrangements for draining the pumproom bilges, including the controls on platforms above the
Chapter 9 freeboard deck or the upper deck and verify that:
o Valves required to remain open were correctly set.
Chapter 10
o Valves or controls were marked with their purpose.
Chapter 11  Where necessary, review ORB II for records of the disposal of pumproom bilge accumulations.
 Where necessary, review records of tests of the arrangements for draining the pumproom bilges.
Chapter 12
Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with the pipeline set up to pump the pumproom bilges to a
slop or cargo tank when the pumproom was flooded.
208
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
6.2.2. Were cargo system overboard and sea suction valves checked and verified as closed and
Chapter 2 secured prior to commencement of cargo transfer, and where provided, were sea valve-testing
Chapter 3
arrangements in order and regularly monitored for leakage?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 The Company should have procedures to prevent cargo spillages through cargo system overboard and sea suction
valves that included detailed guidance on:
Chapter 5
 Taking ballast into cargo tanks via sea-valves.
Chapter 6  Line displacement with sea water,
Chapter 7 and precautionary measures including:
Chapter 8
 Checking cargo system overboard & sea suction valves are closed & secured prior commencement of cargo
transfer.
Chapter 9  Checking cargo system overboard valves and sea suction valves for leakage, where arrangements are fitted.
 Testing cargo system overboard & sea suction valves for integrity between dry-docks, where arrangements
Chapter 10
are fitted.
Chapter 11  The maximum test pressure to which sea valve arrangements should be subjected.
 Recording these checks and tests.
Chapter 12
 Posting anti-pollution notices next to overboard valves & cargo system sea valves & at pump operating
position.
Chapter 1
6.2.2. Were cargo system overboard and sea suction valves checked and verified as closed
Chapter 2
and secured prior to commencement of cargo transfer, and where provided, were sea valve-
Chapter 3 testing arrangements in order and regularly monitored for leakage?
Chapter 5  Review the procedures to prevent cargo spillages through cargo system overboard
Chapter 6
and sea suction valves.
 Review records of:
Chapter 7
o Checks that cargo system overboard and sea suction valves are closed and
Chapter 8
secured prior to commencement of cargo transfer in the bridge or cargo logbook.
Chapter 9
o Checks of cargo system overboard and sea suction valves for leakage.
Chapter 10 o Tests of cargo system overboard and sea suction valves for integrity between dry-
Chapter 11 docks.
Chapter 12
 Inspect cargo system overboard valves, cargo system sea valves and testing
arrangements where fitted.
209
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
6.2.3. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for inspections
Chapter 2
and pressure tests of the bunker oil (HFO and MDO) pipeline system, and had the tests been
Chapter 3 performed and the results suitably recorded?
Chapter 5
The Company should have procedures for the inspection and pressure testing of the bunker pipeline
Chapter 6 system, including guidance on the:
Chapter 7  Equipment to be inspected/tested.
 Inspection and test frequency.
Chapter 8
 Testing method(s).
Chapter 9  Test pressure.
Chapter 10  Disposal of the liquid used to test the pipeline system.
 Records to be kept.
Chapter 11
Bunker pipelines are defined as any pipeline used for taking on, discharging, or internally transferring
Chapter 12 any fuel for consumption on board. Inspections should include any pressure relief valves, pressure
gauges, valves, ullage gauges, level alarms and emergency shutdown arrangements that form part of
the system.
Chapter 1
6.2.3. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for inspections
Chapter 2 and pressure tests of the bunker oil (HFO and MDO) pipeline system, and had the tests been
Chapter 3 performed and the results suitably recorded?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
Where ship’s drawings do not define the MAWP for bunker pipeline system, MAWP may be assumed to be
Chapter 5 either:
• The pressure at which the transfer piping relief valve is set; or, where no relief valve(s) are fitted, the
Chapter 6 maximum discharge pressure including hydraulic shock that can be developed by the vessel's pump.
Chapter 7
• Pipelines should be marked with the date of test and the test pressure.
• Records should include the date of test, the test pressure and the method and testing medium used. Pressure
Chapter 8 testing should be a hydrostatic test, pressure testing using compressed air or inert gas is not acceptable.
• Procedures and records may form part of the vessel’s maintenance plan.
Chapter 9
Inspector Actions
Chapter 10
 Review the procedures for the inspection and pressure testing of the bunker pipeline system.
Chapter 11  Review the records of inspection and testing of the bunker pipeline system.
Chapter 12  Review records of the disposal of the liquid used to test the pipeline system.
 During the inspection, observe the condition of bunker pipeline system & associated equipment.
 Verify pipelines had been marked with the date and pressure of the last test.
210
5/27/2022
6.3. Ballast Operations
Chapter 1
6.3.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for the safe operation of the
Chapter 2 ballast water management system (BWMS), and was the equipment in satisfactory condition and used in
Chapter 3
accordance with the company procedures and manufacturer’s instructions?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
Chapter 5 The Company should have procedures for the operation, inspection and maintenance of the ballast water
management system (BWMS), including guidance on:
Chapter 6  Who is responsible for supervising the use of the BWMS - Who is permitted to use it.
Chapter 7
 Identification of hazards to the crew presented by the operation of the BWMS.
 Mitigation measures for hazards presented by the operation of the BWMS.
Chapter 8  Use, handling and storage of any active substances, such as chemicals, used for disinfection or
Chapter 9 neutralisation.
 Safe disposal of any by-products of the process.
Chapter 10  The possible effect of water density/temperature and suspended solids on the operation of the BWMS.
Chapter 11  Actions in the event of a failure of the BWMS.
 Records to be kept of the operation of the BWMS.
Chapter 12
These procedures may refer to maker’s operation & safety manual for the BWMS and the vessel’s PMS.
6.3. Ballast Operations
Chapter 1
6.3.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for the safe operation of the
Chapter 2 ballast water management system (BWMS), and was the equipment in satisfactory condition and used in
Chapter 3
accordance with the company procedures and manufacturer’s instructions?
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Review the procedures for the operation, inspection and maintenance of the BWMS.
Chapter 5
 Inspect the BWMS control panel and verify that the system is operational with no apparent faults or
Chapter 6 alarms.
Chapter 7
 Review available self-monitoring data to verify satisfactory operation.
 Inspect the visible parts of the BWMS and verify that it is intact and not modified in any respect.
Chapter 8
 Where necessary, review the maintenance and inspection records of the BWMS.
Chapter 9  Where necessary, review the records of the operation of the BWMS.
Chapter 10  Interview the accompanying officer and verify familiarity with:
o Company procedures for operation, inspection and maintenance of the BWMS.
Chapter 11
o The hazards from the operation of equipment and handling & storage of any chemicals used.
Chapter 12 o The actions in the event of the failure of the BWMS.
211
5/27/2022
6.4. Deck Area Pollution Prevention
Chapter 1
6.4.1. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the company procedures for the removal of
Chapter 2 small quantities of oil or chemical spilled and contained on deck, and was suitable response equipment
Chapter 3
available, in satisfactory condition and effectively deployed?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have procedures for the removal of oil or chemical spilled and contained on
Chapter 5 deck. These procedures may be partly or wholly contained in the SOPEP or SMPEP and ensure that:
Chapter 6  Suitable equipment is readily available at the manifold and there is an adequate method (non-
sparking portable pumps, dump valves to a cargo/slop tank or other equally effective means) for
Chapter 7 the rapid disposal of spills at the aft end of the main deck on both sides of the vessel.
Chapter 8  If transferring to a cargo/slop tank is not a viable option, an enclosed container with a capacity of
at least 2 m3 is available for the disposal of spills and water from the deck.
Chapter 9
 Portable pumps are:
Chapter 10 o Bonded to vessel's structure to prevent electrical discharge to earth. Bonding may be made by
external means, or by discharge hose, if this is attached by means of a flanged connection to
Chapter 11
vessel's structure.
Chapter 12 o Mounted to prevent movement and subsequent damage during operation.
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
 If portable pumps are arranged to discharge to a cargo/slop tank, this is via a suitable fixed connection, not via the
Chapter 5 insertion of the spill pump discharge hose through a tank opening such as a sighting port.
 If effective draining of a spill cannot be achieved or if pressure release is required, an alternative method of
Chapter 6 immediately disposing of a spill should be provided.
Chapter 7  The arrangement and positioning of the equipment take into account the following:
o The effectiveness of dump-valves to a cargo/slop tank will be impacted by:
Chapter 8  Cargo/slop tank pressure, the liquid level in any U-bends fitted in the drain pipework.
 The ullage in the receiving tank and vessel’s trim, particularly when tank is full & vessel is trimmed by stern.
Chapter 9
o The location on deck where any spill will accumulate will be impacted by: Trim, Hogging/sagging.
Chapter 10  An inventory of spill clean-up equipment is maintained by a designated officer and periodic inspections carried out.
 Crew members receive suitable training in the use of the spill clean-up equipment.
Chapter 11
 Instructions are available for the safe use of spill clean-up equipment, including PPE requirements.
Chapter 12  No chemical agent is used in response to pollution on sea without authorization of the appropriate coastal State
 Removed spilled oil or chemical and clean-up materials are properly disposed of.
212
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Review the SOPEP or SMPEP.
Chapter 5  Review the procedures for the removal of oil or chemical spilled and contained on deck.
 Review the inventory of spill clean-up equipment provided on board and the records of periodic inspections.
Chapter 6
 During the main deck inspection:
Chapter 7 o Review the arrangement, positioning and condition of the spill clean-up equipment.
o Inspect the stored spill clean-up equipment and confirm actual quantities broadly agree with the inventory.
Chapter 8 o Review the means for the rapid disposal of oil or chemical at the aft end of the main deck on both sides of the vessel.
o Where dump valves were installed at the after end of the main deck verify that:
Chapter 9
 The valve operating controls would remain above the surface of an accumulation of spilled liquid.
Chapter 10  The valve operating controls could be accessed without the need to wade into an accumulation of spilled
liquid.
Chapter 11  The opening of the dump valves would result in the draining of accumulated liquid at any state of list and trim or vapour
pressure within the tank and, if not, the limitations that applied were clearly posted.. Where safe to do so, request that at
Chapter 12 least one portable pump is demonstrated and that it could create and maintain suction.
 Interview a rating to verify familiarity with location, purpose and safe use of spill clean-up equipment and PPE provided for
dealing with small spills.
Chapter 1
6.4.2. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for the disposal of
Chapter 2
accumulations of water contaminated with oil and/or marine pollutants in the forecastle and
Chapter 3 other internal spaces, and had the procedures been implemented?
Chapter 5
The Company should have procedures to ensure proper disposal of oily waste or other marine
pollutants accumulating in internal space bilge wells, including:
Chapter 6  Identification of relevant spaces.
Chapter 7  Measures to minimise oily waste generation.
Chapter 8
 Monitoring of bilge levels, by inspection or sensor/alarm.
 Arrangements for proper disposal of any liquid oily waste and marine pollutant waste generated.
Chapter 9
 Record keeping.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Where pumps or ejectors are fitted, pollution prevention notices should be posted and the
overboard valves should be secured against accidental opening. Testing and maintenance of such
Chapter 12 equipment should be included in the PMS.
213
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
6.4.2. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for the disposal of
Chapter 2
accumulations of water contaminated with oil and/or marine pollutants in the forecastle and
Chapter 3 other internal spaces, and had the procedures been implemented?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
Chapter 6  Review the procedures to ensure proper disposal of oily waste or other marine pollutants
accumulating in internal space bilge wells.
Chapter 7
 Review the records of disposal of oily waste or other marine pollutants accumulated in internal
Chapter 8 space bilge wells.
 Inspect bilge-wells in the forecastle and other internal spaces and note the arrangements for
Chapter 9 monitoring and disposal of the contents and arrangements to prevent unauthorised discharge.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
6.5. Machinery Space Pollution Prevention
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
the machinery space bilges in the event of flooding, and were these arrangements prominently
Chapter 3 marked and in good order?
Chapter 5 Although paragraph 3 of SOLAS II-1/reg 35-1 applies to passenger ships, arrangements such as described may be
required in tankers by flag and/or class rules.
Chapter 6 The purpose of “bilge injection system”, “direct suction” or ‘‘emergency bilge suction” is to discharge overboard
large quantities of sea water from E/R bilges in an emergency using the main circulating pump or other large pump.
Chapter 7
Chapter 8 The Company should have procedures for the use of emergency bilge pumping arrangements in machinery spaces
with guidance on:
Chapter 9
 The use of the various pumps connected to the bilge system, their direct suctions and overboard valves.
Chapter 10  The use of emergency bilge suction. The em. bilge suction valve must be accessible and marked as to its
purpose.
Chapter 11  MARPOL requirements concerning the discharge into the sea of oil or oily mixtures necessary for the purpose
of securing the safety of ship or saving life at sea or resulting from damage to a ship or its equipment.
Chapter 12
 The em. bilge discharge arrangements must not be used for disposal of daily machinery space bilge
accumulations.
214
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 5
 Ship specific requirements to seal emergency bilge suction and/or overboard valves, depending on the
Chapter 6 ship’s equipment and design, to prevent unauthorised discharge of oil or oily mixtures.
 The marking of system valves and controls to ensure correct operation and avoid accidental opening.
Chapter 7
Positive evidence that a valve has not been opened can be provided by use of a numbered seal, the number of
Chapter 8
which should be recorded in an official document such as the E/R Log Book or the ORB I. Such a method of
Chapter 9 sealing must be easily breakable to allow the valve to be opened in an emergency.
Chapter 10 The vessel-specific instructions for pumping of the machinery space bilges in an emergency may be included as
part of the vessel emergency response plan for machinery space flooding.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Emergency overboard discharge valve(s) should be provided with a notice warning against accidental opening.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
 Review the procedures for the use of the emergency bilge pumping arrangements in the machinery spaces.
Chapter 5
 Inspect the emergency bilge pumping arrangements in the machinery spaces, including the associated bilge direct
Chapter 6 suction valves, overboard valves and the emergency bilge suction valve and verify that:
o Each suction and/or discharge valve required to be opened and/or closed to permit the em. pumping of the E/R
Chapter 7 bilges was marked.
o Where an emergency bilge suction could be served by multiple pumps there was a clear indication of which
Chapter 8
pump should be started to take suction.
Chapter 9 o Warning signs to prevent accidental opening of em. overboard discharge valve(s) were posted at appropriate
locations.
Chapter 10  Review the records of numbered seals in the relevant logbook.
 Interview the accompanying officer or any other available E/R officer to verify understanding of how the machinery
Chapter 11
space bilges would be pumped out in an emergency utilising the various systems provided onboard. This should
Chapter 12
include the sequence of opening and closing valves and starting the appropriate pump based on the scenarios where:
o There had been a failure of the main seawater circulating system pipework.
o There had been flooding from any source other than a failure in main seawater circulating system pipework.
215
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
6.5.2. Were the engineer officers familiar with the company procedure for the safe use of the
Chapter 2 incinerator, and was the incinerator in satisfactory condition and used in accordance with the company
Chapter 3
procedure and in compliance with MARPOL?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 The Company should have procedures which described the safe use of the incinerator which should include:
Chapter 5  Who is responsible for supervising the use of the incinerator - Who is permitted to use the incinerator.
 When and where incinerator use is prohibited for either garbage or sludge disposal considering:
Chapter 6 o The geographical position of ship and proximity to land - Any local regulations relating to its use.
o Onboard operations.
Chapter 7
o The status of the machinery space.
Chapter 8  What is permitted to be incinerated considering the design of incinerator and restrictions by MARPOL Annex VI.
 The checks that must be conducted before the incinerator is used on each occasion.
Chapter 9  The PPE that must be used when loading garbage into the incinerator.
Chapter 10  The actions that must be taken if the incinerator fails or develops a fault.
 The requirement to review a RA for the safe use of the incinerator paying attention to the effectiveness of safety
Chapter 11 interlocks fitted to garbage loading chutes.
 The requirement to post clear and simple operating instructions at the incinerator controls.
Chapter 12
 The requirement to post a list of items that are not to be incinerated from a safety and/or regulatory perspective.
 How to dispose of incinerator ashes.
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
Chapter 5  Review the procedures which described the safe use of the incinerator.
Chapter 6  Review the RA for the safe operation of the incinerator.
 Inspect the incinerator and the garbage sorting area and verify that:
Chapter 7
o The incinerator appeared fully functional and operational.
Chapter 8 o Clear and simple operating instructions were posted at the incinerator controls.
o A list of items that were prohibited from being incinerated was posted in the incinerator space.
Chapter 9
o There was evidence that prohibited items were being separated and stored for disposal ashore.
Chapter 10 o The safety interlocks on the garbage loading chutes were properly connected and functioning (as far
as possible with the incinerator stopped).
Chapter 11
o There was no evidence of localised overheating or leaking of exhaust fumes on the exterior of
Chapter 12 either the combustion chambers or the exhaust trunk.
o There was no evidence of oil dripping around the incinerator casing and/or cooling space.
216
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
Chapter 5  Interview an engineer officer who was responsible for the supervision of incinerator to verify
Chapter 6
understanding and knowledge of:
o Who is permitted to use it for garbage disposal and what level of supervision must be
Chapter 7
maintained.
Chapter 8 o The safe operating procedure for the incinerator.
o The PPE that must be used when loading the incinerator with garbage.
Chapter 9
o The correct garbage loading process.
Chapter 10
o The safety interlocks that prevent the garbage loading chutes from being opened in the
Chapter 11 incorrect sequence or while the furnace is in operation.

o The location of the incinerator emergency stop controls.
Chapter 12
o The items that were prohibited from being incinerated.
6.6. Oil Discharge Monitors
Chapter 1
6.6.1. Were the Master and engineer officers familiar with the company procedures for the use of the
Chapter 2 oil filtering equipment, and was the oil filtering equipment in satisfactory condition and used in accordance
with the company procedure, manufacturer’s instructions and MARPOL Annex I?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The terms “oily water separator”, “15ppm bilge separator” and “oil filtering equipment” are
Chapter 5 considered to interchangeable for the purpose of this question.
Chapter 6
The Company must have procedures which described the use of OWS which should include:
Chapter 7
 Who is responsible for supervising its use - who is permitted to use it.
Chapter 8  When the OWS may be used for overboard discharge of bilge water, considering amongst other
things:
Chapter 9
o Whether the equipment was fitted with an automatic stopping device or not. (IOPP Form B
Chapter 10 section 2.2.2)
Chapter 11 o Operation in a special area, Arctic waters or any other area with restrictions and/or
prohibitions.
Chapter 12 o The company environmental protection policy.
217
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
 The authorisation that must be obtained before the overboard discharge of bilge water.
Chapter 5  The required checks to be conducted on the OWS and system pipework before an overboard
Chapter 6 discharge of bilge water.
 The required checks on OWS and system pipework upon completion of an overboard discharge.
Chapter 7
 The actions that must be taken if the OWS fails or develops a fault.
Chapter 8  The document retention instructions for the 15 ppm bilge alarm data.
Chapter 9  The required frequency of the 15 ppm bilge alarm sensor calibration.
 The control measures to prevent the unauthorised opening of the OWS overboard valve.
Chapter 10
 The control of anti-tampering devices or seals on flanges or pipe connection on the OWS and
Chapter 11 connected pipework.
 The actions to take if the OWS, its associated system pipework or machinery space pipework in
Chapter 12
general was suspected as having been used for the illegal discharge of bilge water or sludge
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Review the procedures which described the use of OWS.
Chapter 5  Where necessary, review the manufacturer’s instructions for the 15 ppm bilge alarm.
Chapter 6  Sight the calibration certificate for the 15 ppm bilge alarm sensor fitted to the OWS.
 Inspect the OWS and its associated pipework and verify that:
Chapter 7
o The overboard valve was secured and sealed against accidental opening.
Chapter 8 o A warning sign had been posted at the overboard valve indicating that opening the valve was
Chapter 9
prohibited without the authority of the C/E or the Master.
o There were no signs or indicators that the flanges and pipe connections on the OWS and
Chapter 10 associated piping had been tampered with.
Chapter 11 o That each flange or connection that could permit inappropriate use of the OWS or its
overboard had been sealed to prevent tampering.
Chapter 12
 Where the OWS was, or had recently been, defective verify that an entry had been made in ORB I
to record the time it was taken out of service and, where applicable, returned to service.
218
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 3

 Request that an engineer officer demonstrates the operation the OWS using the mandatory testing facility
Chapter 5 (MEPC 107(49) 6.1.1) to verify proper functioning of the 15 ppm bilge alarm - the automatic stopping device -
Chapter 6 the 15 ppm bilge alarm recorder.
 Interview the accompanying engineer officer and verify familiarity with:
Chapter 7 o The restrictions on the use of OWS for overboard discharge of bilge water, particularly as it related to a
vessel without an automatic stopping device - the actions to take if the OWS became defective - the
Chapter 8
actions if any part of OWs or its associated pipework was found to have been tampered with.
Chapter 9 o The actions to take if any piping system in the machinery space was suspected as being used to
illegally dispose of bilge water or sludge overboard.
Chapter 10
 Where the vessel was exempt from being fitted with an OWs verify that:
Chapter 11 o The vessel was trading within the limitations identified by MARPOL Annex I 14.5.1.
o The IOPP Certificate was endorsed appropriately (14.5.3.4).
Chapter 12
o No evidence that machinery space piping was being used inappropriately for bilge/sludge disposal
o Engineer officers were familiar with the machinery space bilge water & sludge management procedures.
Chapter 1
6.6.2. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for the use of the oil
Chapter 2 discharge monitoring and control system (ODME), and was the oil discharge monitoring and control
Chapter 3
system in satisfactory condition and used in accordance with the company procedures, manufacturer’s
instructions and MARPOL Annex I?
Chapter 5 The Company should have a procedure which described the use of the ODME which should include:
 Who is responsible for supervising the use of the ODME - who is permitted to use it.
Chapter 6
 When the ODME may be used for overboard discharge of oily mixtures, considering:
Chapter 7 o Whether the vessel was in a special area.
Chapter 8 o The proximity to land.
o The vessel’s route.

Chapter 9
o The operational status of the oil discharge monitoring and control system.
Chapter 10 o The company environmental protection policy.
Chapter 11  The authorisation that must be obtained before an overboard discharge of oily mixtures.
 The required checks on ODME before an overboard discharge may take place.
Chapter 12
219
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 discharge monitoring and control system, and was the oil discharge monitoring and control system in
Chapter 3
satisfactory condition and used in accordance with the company procedures, manufacturer’s instructions
and MARPOL Annex I?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5  The level of supervision and lookout required during an overboard discharge of an oily mixture:
Chapter 6 o In the CCR - on deck - on the bridge.
 The additional permissions that must be obtained before using the ODME with any of the
Chapter 7
automatic inputs and control functions in manual mode.
Chapter 8  The required checks to be conducted on ODME upon completion of an overboard discharge.
Chapter 9  The actions that must be taken if the ODME fails or develops a fault.
 The print-out or electronic data retention instructions for the ODME recorder data.
Chapter 10
 The required frequency of the oil content meter sensor calibration.
Chapter 11  The required frequency of the ODME test functions.
Chapter 12  The control measures to prevent the unauthorised opening of the ODME overboard valve(s).
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
and MARPOL Annex I?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5  Review the company procedures.
Chapter 6  Inspect the ODME and verify that:
o The system is operational with no apparent faults or alarms.
Chapter 7
o The recording device was printing the data legibly, or it is possible to store and subsequently
Chapter 8 download the data from memory.
Chapter 9 o The sensor input for speed and position is accurate.
o The time and date is synchronised to GMT.

Chapter 10
 During the deck inspection inspect the visible parts of ODME and verify that it is intact and not
Chapter 11 modified.
Chapter 12
 Where the vessel had conducted an overboard discharge of oily mixtures during the previous 6
months, inspect the recorder print out/memory and verify that a selected discharge had been
undertaken with the system in automatic mode with all sensors providing an automatic input.
220
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
and MARPOL Annex I?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5  Where a discharge of oily mixtures had taken place with ODME or any of its required data feeds in manual
mode:
Chapter 6 o Inspect the ORB II and verify that an entry had been made to record that the ODME was defective.
o Request documented confirmation that shore management had been advised of the failure and that
Chapter 7 approval for continuing the discharge in manual mode had been provided.
o Request evidence that the ODME had been repaired and demonstrated as fully operational as soon
Chapter 8 as possible after failure.
 Where the ODME was, or had recently been, defective verify that an entry had been made in ORB II to
Chapter 9
record the time the equipment was taken out of service and, where applicable, returned to service.
Chapter 10  Where necessary, review the maintenance and inspection records.
 Interview the accompanying Officer and verify familiarity with:
Chapter 11 o The test run and calibration function of ODME - the actions to take if ODME became defective.
o The procedure for using the ODME in manual mode.
Chapter 12 o The actions to take if during overboard discharge the dedicated overboard lookout reported sighting an
excessive discharge of oil or an oil slick astern of the vessel.
Chapter 7
Maritime Security
221
5/27/2022
7. Maritime Security
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
General Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The SSP is confidential and approved by flag state. Where the Master advises that the SSP and any other
Chapter 5 plans relating to security are confidential, the inspector should only confirm their existence by inspection of the
front cover.
Chapter 6
The inspector should address the question based on those documents and records that are not considered
Chapter 7 confidential in conjunction with the explanations of the accompanying officer.
Chapter 8 Where a comment is required to support an observation, it must not provide any detail relating to the content of
plans or RAs that are reported as confidential.
Chapter 9
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
7.1. Ship Routing
Chapter 1
7.1.1. Was security threat and risk assessment an integral part of voyage planning, and did the
Chapter 2 passage plan contain security related information for each leg of the voyage?
Chapter 4 • Passage plan and voyage charts should contain security related information for each leg of the
voyage.
Chapter 5
• In order to plan a voyage or transit through a security risk area, the Master should have
Chapter 6
available current threat information and a security RA based on:
Chapter 7 o Relevant UKHO or equivalent security charts.
Chapter 8 o Industry best management practice guidance (BMP) publications.
o Regional guidance where available.
Chapter 9
o Company specific guidance regarding recommended routing, speed, waiting areas and
Chapter 10 anchorages.
Chapter 11 • A detailed threat and RA should be:
o Completed for each voyage and activity within a security risk area
Chapter 12
o Reviewed and updated prior to entering an area which requires an increased state of
readiness and vigilance, and if necessary, the passage plan to be amended if necessary.
222
5/27/2022
7.1. Ship Routing
Chapter 1

Chapter 4
• The passage plan should identify points such as:
o Changes to security levels.
Chapter 5
o Points at which maritime reports should be made (e.g., entering a VRA/VCR)
Chapter 6
o Enhanced bridge manning levels (e.g., extra lookouts).
Chapter 7 o Vessel speed requirements.
Chapter 8
o Restricted access controls.
o Voyage day/night transit considerations.
Chapter 9
o Hardening of the vessel.
Chapter 10 o No planned maintenance on voyage critical equipment.
Chapter 11 • The Company should have provided bridge security cards and/or checklists to ensure that all
security related considerations were included within the passage plan.
Chapter 12
7.1. Ship Routing
Chapter 1
Chapter 4 The SSP is confidential and approved by Flag. Where the Master advises that the SSP and any
other plans relating to security are confidential, the inspector should only confirm their existence by
Chapter 5
inspection of the front cover.
Chapter 6
The inspector should address the question based on those documents and records that are not
Chapter 7
considered confidential in conjunction with the explanations of the accompanying officer.
Chapter 8
Where a comment is required to support an observation, it must not provide any detail relating to
Chapter 9
the content of plans or RAs that are reported as confidential.
Chapter 10
Inspectors should note that a Company may instruct its vessel not to participate in a VRA based on
Chapter 11 their own internal security assessment. In these circumstances the voyage planning records
Chapter 12 should identify the VRA reporting points and indicate that reports must not be made to comply with
company instructions.
223
5/27/2022
7.1. Ship Routing
Chapter 1
Chapter 4 For a recently completed voyage:
Chapter 5 • Sight UKHO or equivalent security charts, industry BMP guidance publications and/or
Chapter 6
regional guidance.
• Review the passage plan including security related notations on voyage charts.
Chapter 7
• Review the security risk assessment.
Chapter 8
• Review if necessary, the records of the voyage in the Bridge Log Book.
Chapter 9
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
7.2. Ship Hardening and access control
Chapter 1
7.2.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for hardening the vessel
Chapter 2 when entering areas of increased security risk, and was there a Vessel Hardening Plan (VHP) available?
Chapter 4 • Hardening vessel procedures in increased security risk areas are required that include:
o A ship-specific Vessel Hardening Plan (VHP), including a list of materials needed to implement the VHP
Chapter 5 and the required quantities.
Chapter 6 o Guidance on when the required quantities of hardening material should be available on board i.e. always
or only as needed.
Chapter 7 o An inventory of materials needed to implement the VHP currently on board
Chapter 8 o Inspection and maintenance requirements for security equipment i.e. water cannons, CCTV etc.
o Safety guidance to crew when rigging security equipment, e.g., working with razor wire or near the
Chapter 9 ships side.
• The VHP should not conflict with lifesaving appliance operation, e.g., life rafts should not be obstructed.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Note for the Inspector
Chapter 12 This question will only be allocated to vessels where the Company had declared through the pre-inspection questionnaire that
“the vessel’s usual trading area included entering or transiting areas of increased security risk”.
In this case, the Company will have declared whether the vessel always carried materials to implement its hardening plan. The
response will be inserted in the inspection editor and the final report.
224
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
7.2.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for hardening the
Chapter 2 vessel when entering areas of increased security risk, and was there a Vessel Hardening Plan
(VHP) available?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The SSP is confidential and approved by Flag. Where the Master advises that the SSP and any
Chapter 5
other plans relating to security are confidential, the inspector should only confirm their existence by
Chapter 6 inspection of the front cover.
Chapter 7 The inspector should address the question based on those documents and records that are not
considered confidential in conjunction with the explanations of the accompanying officer.
Chapter 8
Where a comment is required to support an observation, it must not provide any detail relating to
Chapter 9
the content of plans or RAs that are reported as confidential.
Chapter 10 This question will only be allocated to vessels where Company had declared through the PIQ
Chapter 11 that:
 The vessel’s usual trading area included entering or transiting areas of increased security risk,
Chapter 12
in which case, the Company will have declared whether the vessel always carried materials to
implement its hardening plan.
Chapter 1
7.2.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for hardening the vessel
Chapter 2 when entering areas of increased security risk, and was there a Vessel Hardening Plan (VHP) available?
Chapter 4  Review:
o The Vessel Hardening Plan (VHP).
Chapter 5
o Records of implementation of VHP i.e. logbooks, work planning records, reports, photos, etc.
Chapter 6
o Inventory of hardening materials.
Chapter 7 o Inspection and maintenance records for security equipment such as water cannons, CCTV, infrared
Chapter 8 detection cameras, etc.
 Inspect hardening materials stored on board.
Chapter 9
 If VHP at the time of inspection is implemented, verify LSA and FFA is accessible and unobstructed.
Chapter 10
 Interview the SSO for familiarity verification.
Chapter 11 Note for the Inspector
Chapter 12 Where the VHP was reported to be an integral part of the SSP and confidential, the date of the last
review/major changes to the plan should be sighted to verify that a VHP plan existed.
225
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
7.2.2. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the company procedures to control access to
Chapter 2 the vessel in port and to ensure the safety of visitors, and were these procedures effectively implemented?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have procedures, in accordance with the SSP, to control access to the vessel in port and
Chapter 5 to ensure the safety of visitors. These procedures should include:
Chapter 6
Access Control
Chapter 7  Pre-approval of visitors for terminal security purposes
 A continuous gangway watch
Chapter 8
 Regular patrols of the deck to monitor potential unauthorised access points e.g. hawse pipes, mooring ropes
Chapter 9  Remote monitoring by CCTV where available
 Visitor photo ID, visitor passes and record keeping
Chapter 10
 Baggage searches
Chapter 11  Escorting visitors.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
7.2.2. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the company procedures to control access to
Chapter 2 the vessel in port and to ensure the safety of visitors, and were these procedures effectively implemented?
Chapter 3 Visitor induction and familiarization
Chapter 4  Warning notices
 Visitor information cards
Chapter 5
 PPE requirements
Chapter 6  Smoking regulations
Chapter 7  Vessel movement restrictions
 Restrictions on portable electronic equipment.
Chapter 8
 Briefing on the hazards of the cargo and any operations taking place
Chapter 9  Emergency signals and actions.
Chapter 10  Drug and alcohol policy.
Provision of basic PPE for the period of a visit for those visitors who do not have it.
Chapter 11
Inspector Actions
Chapter 12
• When boarding the vessel, observe the implementation of induction and familiarisation procedures for visitors.
 During the inspection, observe for deck regular patrols to monitor potential unauthorised access points.
226
5/27/2022
7.3. Communications and Monitoring
Chapter 1
7.3.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with regional maritime security reporting requirements and
Chapter 2 operation of the ship security alert system (SSAS) and had this equipment been regularly tested?
Chapter 4 • Master & officers must be aware of the name & 24-hour posted contact details of
Chapter 5 CSO.
Chapter 6 • Master and SSO should be familiar with the company procedures for voluntary
Chapter 7 security reporting in VRAs.
• Security communication equipment, including the SSAS, LRIT and if fitted dedicated
Chapter 8
standalone units, should be regularly tested and in satisfactory condition.
Chapter 9 • Master and officers should be familiar with the procedures for the use of this
Chapter 10
equipment, including the location Note
of the
forSSAS activation buttons.
the Inspector
Inspectors should note that a company may instruct its vessel not to participate in a VRA based on their own
Chapter 11 internal security assessment. In these circumstances the voyage planning records should identify the VRA
reporting points and indicate that reports must not be made to comply with company instructions.
Chapter 12
7.3. Communications and Monitoring
Chapter 1
7.3.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with regional maritime security reporting requirements and
Chapter 2 operation of the ship security alert system (SSAS) and had this equipment been regularly tested?
Chapter 4  Sight the 24-hour contact details for the CSO.

 Verify with the Master or SSO that:
Chapter 5
o They were familiar with the company procedures for voluntary security reporting in VRAs.
Chapter 6 o Check that SSAS, LRIT and dedicated standalone security communications equipment, if fitted, is
in satisfactory condition, regularly tested and maintained.
Chapter 7
 Verify participation in operational VRAs had been considered during each passage planning phase, and:
Chapter 8 o Where security reporting to VRAs was required, there was evidence that reports had been made, or
o Where security reporting to VRAs was not to be made, the passage plan was annotated with the actions
Chapter 9
to take, if any, when passing reporting points.
Chapter 10 Interview the accompanying Officer to verify awareness of the:
o Purpose & operation of the SSAS, LRIT,dedicated standalone security communications equipment, if
Chapter 11
fitted.
Chapter 12 o 24-hour contact details of the CSO.
Note for the Inspector
Do not request details of communications equipment or to sight test and maintenance records.
227
5/27/2022
7.4. Ship Security Officer
Chapter 1
7.4.1. Did the Ship Security Officer (SSO) have a valid Certificate of Proficiency and a full
Chapter 2 understanding of their role, and were ship security records of port calls being maintained as required by
SOLAS?
Chapter 4  An SSO must be appointed on each ship, possessing a Certificate of Proficiency acceptable to the flag.
 SMS should clearly designate who is the SSO with a description of the role and duties.
Chapter 5
 The SSO must be a member of the crew.
Chapter 6  Ship security records must be maintained for the last 10 port calls (SOLAS requirement).
• Sight and verify the SSO’s Certificate of Proficiency.
Chapter 8
 Sight and where necessary review, the sections of the SMS relating to ship security.
Chapter 9  Sight evidence of regular security inspections of the vessel by the SSO.
Chapter 10  Sight the ship security records for the last 10 port calls.
 Interview the SSO to verify their familiarity with their role, responsibilities, and duties.
Chapter 11
 Interview a rating to verify knowledge of vessel specific security procedures.
Chapter 12 Note for the Inspector
Do not need to review the details of the information maintained in the records but whether records are maintained or not.
7.5. Cyber Security
Chapter 1
7.5.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for cyber security risk
Chapter 2 management, and had these procedures been fully implemented?
Chapter 4 Cyber risk management procedures must:
• Identify the roles and responsibilities of users, key personnel, and management both ashore and on
Chapter 5
board, including:
Chapter 6 o The officer with responsibility for cyber risk management on board
Chapter 7 o The person responsible for managing user profiles and passwords in the vessel network.
Chapter 8
 Identify the IT (information technology) & OT (operational technology) systems at risk on board such as:
o Cargo management systems.
Chapter 9
o Bridge systems.
Chapter 10 o Propulsion and machinery management and power control systems.
Chapter 11 o Access control systems.
o Administrative and crew welfare systems.
Chapter 12
o Communication systems.
228
5/27/2022
7.5. Cyber Security
Chapter 1
Chapter 4  Describe technical protection measures to protect against a cyber incident such as:
o Physical security of network components.
Chapter 5
o Anti-virus software.
Chapter 6 o Application software management.
Chapter 7 o Back-up facilities.
o Control of crew internet access.
Chapter 8
o Control of administrator profiles, user profiles and passwords.
Chapter 9
 Describe procedural protection measures to protect against a cyber incident such as:
Chapter 10 o Cyber security training and awareness raising for crew members.
o Control of local and remote access to the IT and OT systems.
Chapter 11
o Control of the use of personal devices on board.
Chapter 12
o Equipment disposal including data destruction.
o Contingency plans for possible cyber incidents.
7.5. Cyber Security
Chapter 1
Chapter 4  Spaces containing sensitive IT or OT control equipment should be securely locked
Chapter 5  Physical access to sensitive user equipment is required.
Chapter 6  All on-board computers should be protected by anti-virus software, regularly updated.
Chapter 7  Only senior officers should have administrator profiles.
Chapter 8  Responsibility for maintaining user profiles should be clearly set out.
Chapter 9  Generic user profiles and passwords should not be passed on as part of crew changes.
Chapter 10  Passwords should be changed regularly.
Chapter 11  Back-up facilities should be available and used to assist recovery following a cyber incident.
Chapter 12  OT systems critical to navigation and propulsion should have backup systems.
 Application software should be regularly updated with security patches and upgrades.
229
5/27/2022
7.5. Cyber Security
Chapter 1
7.5.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for cyber security
Chapter 2
risk management, and had these procedures been fully implemented?
Chapter 4  Crew members should receive cyber security training as appropriate to their responsibilities and duties.
Chapter 5  Cyber security awareness should be actively promoted using for example, posters, CBT or online courses.
Chapter 6  Computer access for visitors such as surveyors, technicians etc. should be restricted.
Chapter 7  Unauthorised access to sensitive OT computers should be prohibited.
Chapter 8  Procedures should strictly restrict the use of portable media. Where use is unavoidable, such media
Chapter 9 should be checked for malware.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
7.5. Cyber Security
Chapter 1
Chapter 4 • A sample list of cyber incidents, which should be addressed in plans for onboard contingencies:
o Loss of availability of electronic navigational equipment or loss of integrity of navigation data.
Chapter 5
o Loss of availability or integrity of external data sources, including but not limited to GNSS.
Chapter 6 o Loss of essential connectivity with the shore, including but not limited to GMDSS
communications.
Chapter 7
o Loss of availability of industrial control systems, including propulsion, auxiliary systems, and
Chapter 8 other critical systems, as well as loss of integrity of data management and control.
Chapter 9
o The event of a ransomware or denial of service incident.
These incidents may be addressed in the company’s shipboard emergencies as required by the ISM Code
Chapter 10 Chapter 8 (Emergency preparedness).
Chapter 11 • Contingency plans and related information should include communications and escalation management.
Chapter 12 • Contact details should be readily available for technical support from the operator’s IT department or
external IT contractors as appropriate.
230
5/27/2022
7.5. Cyber Security
Chapter 1
Chapter 4
 Interview the officer with responsibility for cyber risk management onboard to confirm the
Chapter 5
existence of:
Chapter 6
o The company procedures for cyber risk management
Chapter 7
o The inventory/register of sensitive IT/OT systems fitted on board
Chapter 8 o Records of approval for external local or remote access to sensitive IT/OT systems
Chapter 9 o Contact details for technical support from the operator’s IT department or external IT
contractors
Chapter 10
o Records of cyber security training
Chapter 11 o Cyber contingency plans in hard copy.
Chapter 12
 Inspect equipment to verify physical cyber security measures were in place.
Chapter 8
Cargo and Ballast Systems
231
5/27/2022
8.1. Oil
Chapter 1
8.1.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for the use of the inert gas
Chapter 2 system, and had the inert gas system been used in accordance with ISGOTT guidance, with cargo tanks
Chapter 3
maintained in an inert condition at all times, except when it was necessary to be gas-free for entry?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
The Company should have procedures for the operation of the vessel’s IGS which included:
Chapter 6
Chapter 7  Inerting empty cargo tanks.

 Operation during discharge, de-ballasting, COW and tank cleaning.
Chapter 8
 Purging tanks before gas freeing.
Chapter 9  Topping up the pressure in the cargo tanks when necessary during other stages of the voyage.
Chapter 10  Actions to be taken in the event of a failure of the IGS.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
8.1. Oil
Chapter 1
8.1.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for the use of the inert gas
Chapter 2 system, and had the inert gas system been used in accordance with ISGOTT guidance, with cargo tanks
Chapter 3
maintained in an inert condition at all times, except when it was necessary to be gas-free for entry?
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Review the company procedures for the operation of the IGS.
Chapter 5  Verify the oxygen content of IG being supplied to cargo tanks was not more than 5% by volume.
 Verify that the IG pressure in the cargo tanks/IG main had been maintained within the range of values identified within the
Chapter 6 cargo and ballast transfer plan throughout the discharge operation.
Chapter 7  Review a sample of records for cargo, tank cleaning or gas-freeing operations from the previous 3 months and verify that
the IGS had been used in accordance with the company procedures.
Chapter 8  Where permitted, request the accompanying officer to measure the oxygen content in a randomly chosen cargo tank to
verify that it is less than 8% by volume. Verify their familiarity with the procedures for the operation of IGS which included:
Chapter 9 o Inerting empty cargo tanks.
o Operation during discharge, de-ballasting, COW and tank cleaning.
Chapter 10
o Purging tanks before gas freeing.
Chapter 11 o Topping up the pressure in the cargo tanks when necessary during other stages of the voyage.
o Actions to be taken in the event of a failure of the IGS.
Chapter 12
232
5/27/2022
8.1. Oil
Chapter 1
8.1.2. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures and international regulations
Chapter 2 for the planning, preparation, conduct and documentation of crude oil washing operations (COW), and was
Chapter 3
the COW system in satisfactory condition and used in accordance with the company procedures for each
COW operation?
Chapter 5 The Company should have procedures for the planning, preparation, conduct and documentation of COW which included the:
 Roles, responsibilities and qualifications of those involved in COW operations.
Chapter 6  Requirement for COW of cargo tanks for:
o Sludge control purposes.
Chapter 7
o Preparation for the carriage of ballast in a cargo tank or tanks.
Chapter 8  Suitability of crude oils for COW.
 Use of dry crude oil for washing.
Chapter 9  Inspection and testing of COW equipment.
Chapter 10  Planning of COW operations.
 Testing of cargo tank oxygen content prior to commencing COW in each tank.
Chapter 11  Provision and completion of COW checklists.
 Maintaining records of COW operations.
Chapter 12
These procedures may refer to the Crude Oil Washing Operations and Equipment (COW) Manual.
8.1. Oil
Chapter 1
8.1.2. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures and international regulations
Chapter 2 for the planning, preparation, conduct and documentation of crude oil washing operations (COW), and was
Chapter 3
the COW system in satisfactory condition and used in accordance with the company procedures for each
COW operation?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
A record should be maintained of all COW operations, including the tanks washed, the number of
Chapter 6 machines used, the time washing started and was completed, the washing pattern employed, the
Chapter 7
washing line pressure and the method employed to ensure that the tanks were dry.
Chapter 8 The oxygen content of each cargo tank to be crude oil washed should be tested with portable
Chapter 9
equipment not more than 30 minutes prior to commencing COW in that tank and the results
recorded in the appropriate COW records.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
233
5/27/2022
8.1. Oil
Chapter 1
8.1.2. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures and international regulations for the planning,
Chapter 2 preparation, conduct and documentation of crude oil washing operations (COW), and was the COW system in satisfactory
condition and used in accordance with the company procedures for each COW operation?
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4  Review the Company procedures for planning, preparation, conduct and documentation of COW, COW manual and records and
checklists for previous COW operations.
Chapter 5
 Where COW operations were planned or underway, review the:
Chapter 6 o COW plan for the current operation, completed COW checklists.
o Ship Shore Safety Check Lists (SSSCL).
Chapter 7 o Records of the current COW operation.
o Bridge and/or Cargo Log Book
Chapter 8
 Inspect the COW system including the:
o Remote and local pressure gauges for the tank cleaning line, Tank cleaning line, including expansion joints and hydrant
Chapter 9
connections and Tank cleaning machines.
Chapter 10  Tank washing water heater, if fitted outside the engine room.
 Where COW operations were planned or underway, interview the person in charge of COW operations to verify familiarity with
Chapter 11 company procedures. Where no COW operations were planned or underway, interview the accompanying officer to verify
familiarity with company procedures.
Chapter 12 Where the vessel was not undertaking COW operations at the port of inspection:
 Review the records from the most recent COW operation.
 Conduct the interview(s) based on the potential for an upcoming COW operation.
8.1. Oil
Chapter 1
8.1.3. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for the isolation
Chapter 2
of individual cargo tanks from the common venting system in accordance with SOLAS, and
Chapter 3 were these procedures being followed?
The Company should have procedures for the isolation of individual cargo tanks from the common venting system
Chapter 5 which included:
Chapter 6  Maintenance and pre-operational testing of isolating valves.
 Checking the operational status of isolating valves prior to commencing operations.
Chapter 7
 Locking arrangements for isolating valves, under the control of the responsible officer.
Chapter 8  Guidance on personnel authorised to operate the isolating valves.
 Provision of clear visual indication of operational status of valves or other acceptable means of isolation.
Chapter 9
 A method of recording the current position of the valves/means at the cargo control room/position.
Chapter 11  Review the company procedures. Sight the record or display of the current operational status of the isolating
valves.
Chapter 12
 Inspect the isolating valves and verify their operational status & condition, including locking arrangements.
 Interview the accompanying Officer to verify familiarity with the company procedures.
234
5/27/2022
8.1. Oil
Chapter 1
8.1.4. Were the Master and deck officers familiar with the company procedures for planning
Chapter 2
and documenting cargo tank cleaning operations after the carriage of volatile products, and
Chapter 3 had these procedures been followed?
The Company should have procedures for planning and documenting cargo tank cleaning operations after the
Chapter 5 carriage of volatile products that address:
 Tank washing and gas freeing plans.
Chapter 6
 Risk assessment.
Chapter 7  Record keeping requirements.
 Tank washing procedures and arrangements.
Chapter 8
 The required atmosphere for tank washing.
Chapter 9  Special tank cleaning procedures including, where applicable, using chemicals in wash water / for local cleaning.
 Managing slops retained onboard after completion of tank washing.
Chapter 10
 Tank washing a slop tank on completion of slop discharge.
Chapter 11  Purging and gas freeing.
For all tank cleaning operations, the precautions set out in ISGOTT 12.3 Tank Cleaning must be observed.
Chapter 12
Procedures may refer to industry guidance such as: EI: HM50 Guidelines for the cleaning of tanks and lines for
marine tank vessels carrying petroleum and refined products 5th edition
8.1. Oil
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
and documenting cargo tank cleaning operations after the carriage of volatile products, and
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
 Review the company procedures for planning and documenting cargo tank cleaning operations
Chapter 7 after the carriage of volatile products.
Chapter 8  Review available tank cleaning plans, risk assessments, log books and records to verify
compliance with company procedures.
Chapter 9
 Interview the officer responsible for tank cleaning operations to verify familiarity with company
Chapter 10 procedures.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
235
5/27/2022
8.2. Chemicals
Chapter 1
8.2.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for the operation of the inert
Chapter 2 gas system, and had the inert gas system been used in accordance with these procedures, industry
Chapter 3
guidance, and SOLAS and IBC regulations?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have procedures for the operation of the vessel’s IGS which included:
Chapter 5  Inerting empty cargo tanks.
 Padding
Chapter 6  Inerting tanks before commencement of unloading.
 Operation during discharge and tank cleaning.
Chapter 7
 Purging tanks before gas freeing.
Chapter 8  Topping up the pressure in the cargo tanks when necessary during other stages of the voyage.
 Actions to be taken in the event of a failure of the IGS.
Chapter 9
Chemical tankers built after 1 Jan 2016 and over 8000 dwt must be fitted with an IGS in compliance with the current FSS Code
Chapter 10 and must use it in any tank when carrying a flammable cargo, chemical or petroleum. However, a flammable cargo may be
loaded into a gas free tank and then inerted before commencement of unloading. In such cases, only nitrogen systems are
Chapter 11 acceptable.
Chapter 12 Also, when carrying a product containing an oxygen-dependent inhibitor, the oxygen level in the vapour space should be
maintained at or above the minimum level required by the IBC and the cargo specification and the IG should not be applied
before the commencement of unloading.
8.2. Chemicals
Chapter 1
Chapter 3

Chapter 5
Chemical tankers built before 1 Jan 2016 and over 20,000 dwt, and carrying flammable
Chapter 6
petroleum cargo, must be fitted with and utilise an IGS approved by their flag administration.
Chapter 7
This IGS need not be used in any tank carrying flammable chemical cargoes provided the capacity
Chapter 8
of the tank is not more than 3000 m3, the individual nozzle capacity of the tank washing machines
Chapter 9 does not exceed 17.5 m3/hr, and the total combined throughput of the machines in use at any one
time does not exceed 110 m3/hr.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
236
5/27/2022
8.2. Chemicals
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Review the company procedures for the operation of the IGS.
Chapter 5  Verify the oxygen content of IG being supplied to the cargo tank(s) is not more than 5% by volume.
 Verify that the IG pressure in the cargo tanks/IG main had been maintained at the value identified within the cargo and
Chapter 6 ballast transfer plan throughout the discharge operation.
 Where permitted, request the accompanying officer to measure the oxygen content in a randomly chosen inerted cargo
Chapter 7 tank to verify that the oxygen content was less than 8% by volume.
 Review a sample of records for cargo, tank cleaning and gas freeing operations from the previous 3 months and verify that
Chapter 8 the IGS has been used in accordance with the company procedures.
 Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with the procedures which included:
Chapter 9
o How to identify when the IGS must be used with each potential cargo and operation.
Chapter 10 o Inerting empty cargo tanks.
o Inerting tanks before commencement of unloading.
Chapter 11 o Operation during discharge and tank cleaning.
o Purging tanks before gas freeing.
Chapter 12
o Topping up the pressure in the cargo tanks when necessary during other stages of the voyage.
o Actions to be taken in the event of a failure of the IGS.
8.2. Chemicals
Chapter 1
8.2.2. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures that addressed
Chapter 2
the carriage of inhibited cargoes, and had these procedures been followed?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have procedures that address the carriage of inhibited cargoes and include
Chapter 5 guidance on:
Chapter 6  Inhibited cargo certificates of protection.
Chapter 7  Temperature monitoring of inhibited cargoes and adjacent spaces.
 Inerting of inhibited cargoes and monitoring of the oxygen level in the vapour space.
Chapter 8
 Preventing a build-up of solid polymers in the venting system.
Chapter 9
 The use of compressed nitrogen to clear arms/hoses after loading.
Chapter 10  The addition of extra inhibitor when provided on board.
Chapter 11  Contingency planning for uncontrolled polymerisation.
Chapter 12
237
5/27/2022
8.2. Chemicals
Chapter 1
8.2.2. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures that addressed
Chapter 2
the carriage of inhibited cargoes, and had these procedures been followed?
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
Chapter 5  Review company procedures that address the carriage of inhibited cargoes.
 Review cargo operation log books and records, inhibited cargo certificates of protection and
Chapter 6 contingency plans in the event of uncontrolled polymerisation.
Chapter 7  During the inspection, note if any parts of the venting system are blocked by solid polymers.
 Interview the responsible officer to verify familiarity with company procedures.
Chapter 8
Chapter 9 Where the vessel had not carried any inhibited cargoes during the previous 6 months, make a
comment in the Process response tool noting the last occasion an inhibited cargo was carried.
Chapter 10
Focus on the balance of the human and procedural aspects of the guidance.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
8.2. Chemicals
Chapter 1
8.2.3. Were the Master and officers familiar with the information contained in the Procedures and
Chapter 2 Arrangements Manual, Certificate of Fitness for the Carriage of Noxious Liquid Substances in Bulk, the IBC
Chapter 3
Code and the latest MEPC.2/Circular, and was this information readily available to the officers engaged in
cargo planning and operations?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 The information contained in the documents listed should be available to Officers engaged in cargo planning and
operations. Master & officers must be familiar with the information they need to safely perform their duties:
Chapter 6
Chapter 7 P&A Manual: The physical arrangements and all the operational procedures with respect to cargo handling, tank
cleaning, slops handling and cargo tank ballasting and deballasting in order to comply with MARPOL Annex II.
Chapter 8 Certificate of Fitness: List of permitted cargoes attached to Certificate of Fitness. (It is not a requirement for the list of
cargoes to be attached to P & A Manual.)
Chapter 9 IBC Code: Chapter 17, Summary of minimum requirements. Chapter 18, List of products to which the Code does not
apply MEPC.2/Circular, Any new products, trade-named mixtures, and cleaning additives. (Circular is issued on 01/12
Chapter 10
each year)
Chapter 11 MEPC.2/Circular: Any new products, trade-named mixtures, and cleaning additives. (Circular is issued on 01/12 each
year)
Chapter 12
This question will be allocated to LPG carriers which have been issued with a NLS certificate.
238
5/27/2022
8.2. Chemicals
Chapter 1
8.2.3. Were the Master and officers familiar with the information contained in the
Chapter 2
Procedures and Arrangements Manual, Certificate of Fitness for the Carriage of Noxious Liquid
Chapter 3 Substances in Bulk, the IBC Code and the latest MEPC.2/Circular, and was this information
readily available to the officers engaged in cargo planning and operations?
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Inspector Actions
Chapter 6
 Sight the P&A Manual, the list of permitted cargoes, the IBC Code and the latest edition available
Chapter 7
of the MEPC.2/Circular.
Chapter 8  Interview the officer responsible for cargo planning and operations to verify their familiarity with
Chapter 9
the information contained in the P&A Manual, CoF for the Carriage of NLS in Bulk, the IBC Code
and the latest MEPC.2/Circular.
Chapter 10
 Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with the information contained in the
Chapter 11 P&A Manual that relates to their duties.
Chapter 12
8.2. Chemicals
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
and documenting cargo tank cleaning operations after the carriage of volatile and/or toxic
Chapter 3 products, and had these procedures been followed?
The Company should have procedures for planning and documenting cargo tank cleaning operations after the
Chapter 5 carriage of volatile and/or toxic products that addressed:
Chapter 6
 Tank cleaning guidelines for all expected cargoes - Written tank washing and gas freeing plans.
 Record keeping - Risk assessment.
Chapter 7  Tank washing procedures and arrangements - The required atmosphere for tank washing.
Chapter 8  Manufacturer’s coating guidelines to ensure any temperature and other coating restrictions are not exceeded.
 Special tank cleaning procedures including, where applicable, the use of washing media other than water -
Chapter 9 Recirculation washing - Using chemical additives in wash water - Using chemical solvents or other agents for local
cleaning.
Chapter 10
 Gas freeing.
Chapter 11 The P&A Manual will form part of these procedures. Tank cleaning guidelines may be the operators own guidelines
or a recognised professionally produced industry publication.
Chapter 12 For all tank cleaning operations, the precautions set out in the ICS Tanker Safety Guide (Chemicals), Chapter 8,
Tank Cleaning and Gas Freeing, must be observed.
239
5/27/2022
8.2. Chemicals
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
and documenting cargo tank cleaning operations after the carriage of volatile and/or toxic
Chapter 3 products, and had these procedures been followed?
Chapter 5  Review the company procedures for planning and documenting cargo tank cleaning operations
Chapter 6
after the carriage of volatile and/or toxic products.
 Review available tank cleaning plans, RAs, log books and records to verify compliance with
Chapter 7 company procedures.
Chapter 8  Observe any tank cleaning operations taking place during the inspection, including the
performance of mandatory prewash requirements in accordance with MARPOL Annex II.
Chapter 9
 Interview the officer responsible for tank cleaning operations to verify familiarity with company
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
8.2. Chemicals
Chapter 1
8.2.5. Were the Master and deck officers familiar with the company procedures for
Chapter 2
identifying and segregating incompatible cargoes during cargo stowage planning, and had
Chapter 3 these procedures been followed?
Chapter 5 The Company should have procedures for cargo stowage planning that included:
 Identification of incompatible cargoes using recognised compatibility charts.
Chapter 6
 Means of segregation of incompatible cargoes.
Chapter 7
Chapter 8 These procedures may refer to:

 Compatibility charts and appendices.
Chapter 9
 P&A Manual.
Chapter 10
 Relevant ship’s drawings showing acceptable segregation arrangements.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
240
5/27/2022
8.2. Chemicals
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 5
Chapter 6 The cargo stowage plan should identify when care should be taken to avoid the co-mingling of non-
compatible cargoes, which cargoes are involved, and the means of segregation. All areas where
Chapter 7 comingling is possible should be considered, i.e. cargo tanks, slop tanks, common pipelines, drip
Chapter 8 trays, tank venting systems etc.
Chapter 9 If the USCG compatibility chart is used, then reference to Appendix 1 (b) 'dangerously reactive
Chapter 10
exceptions to the compatibility chart' must be made during preparation of the stowage plan and the
latest updated information must be on board.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
If compatibility charts and supporting exception lists from commercial industry publications are
used, care must be taken to ensure that they provide the latest information.
8.2. Chemicals
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 5
Chapter 6  Review the company procedures for identifying and segregating incompatible cargoes during
cargo stowage planning.
Chapter 7
 Review the compatibility chart in use and verify it contains the latest information.
Chapter 8
 Review current and previous cargo stowage plans to verify compliance with company procedures.
Chapter 9  Sight any operational means of segregation identified in the cargo stowage plan such as spool
Chapter 10
pieces or spectacle flanges.
 Interview the officer responsible for cargo stowage planning to verify familiarity with
Chapter 11
company procedures & the contents and use of the compatibility charts provided on board.
Chapter 12
241
5/27/2022
8.2. Chemicals
Chapter 1
8.2.6. Were there sufficient escape sets as required by the IBC Code for everyone on board,
Chapter 2
and did the sets provide suitable respiratory and eye protection?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 Escape Set is synonymous with EEBD. The Company should have provided the emergency escape sets required
by the IBC Code that:
Chapter 5
 Provide suitable respiratory and eye protection - have a duration of at least 15 minutes.
Chapter 6  Do not use filter-type respiratory protection.
Chapter 7
And are:
 Available for every person on board.
Chapter 8  In addition to the EEBDs required by SOLAS to be located in the accommodation and machinery spaces.
Chapter 9  Suitably marked as not to be used for fire-fighting or cargo-handling purposes.
 Included in company procedures for the use & maintenance of EEBDs and the onboard maintenance plan.
Chapter 10
Inspector Actions
Chapter 11  Review the inspection & maintenance records for EEBDs within the onboard maintenance plan.
Chapter 12  Inspect 2 escape sets at random.
 Interview a rating to verify familiarity with the locations, purpose and operation of the escape sets.
8.2. Chemicals
Chapter 1
8.2.7. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures relating to the
Chapter 2
safety equipment required by the IBC Code, including SCBAs, and was the equipment in
Chapter 3 satisfactory condition ready for immediate use?
Chapter 5
An 'expert' in the context of this question may be a member of the crew provided that:
Chapter 6
Chapter 7  The crew member who conducted the annual maintenance had attended a manufacturer's
training course for the specific type of SCBA carried on board within the 5 years prior to the last
Chapter 8 service.
 The specialist testing equipment required to complete the annual service in accordance
Chapter 9
with the manufacturer's instructions was available on board at the time of the annual
Chapter 10 service.
 A copy of the manufacturer's training course certificate for the member of the crew who
Chapter 11
conducted the annual service was retained with the maintenance records.
Chapter 12
242
5/27/2022
8.2. Chemicals
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
The Company should have procedures relating to safety equipment, including SCBAs, required by the IBC Code, giving
Chapter 5
guidance on:
Chapter 6  Stowage and maintaining readiness of the equipment.
 Inspection and testing of the SCBAs.
Chapter 7
 Non-emergency use of the SCBAs, including routine maximum personal daily use and required rest periods.
Chapter 8
For vessels carrying toxic cargoes, the safety equipment should provide full protection. The protective suits themselves
Chapter 9 shall be capable of providing adequate protection against the product as indicated in the appropriate resistance table
that is provided by the manufacturer, and fitted with integral gloves and boots. The responsible officer should be aware
Chapter 10
of these limitations as they relate to cargoes being carried. Such protective suits are not required if the vessel does not
Chapter 11 carry toxic cargoes. If required to be carried, the protective suits must be suitable for:
Chapter 12  All chemicals listed on the CoF identified under column ‘o’ in the table of chapter 17 of IBC code.
 Use in a flammable atmosphere.
Some of these procedures may form part of the onboard maintenance plan.
8.2. Chemicals
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 5  Review company procedures for the use of the safety equipment, including SCBAs, required by
the IBC Code.
Chapter 6
 Review the records of inspection & testing of the SCBAs forming part of the safety equipment
Chapter 7 required by the IBC.
Chapter 8  Where the annual testing of the SCBA’s had been completed by an ‘expert’ member of the crew,
review:
Chapter 9
o The records of the last annual service and verify that a copy of the manufacturer's training
Chapter 10 course certificate for the specific type of SCBA carried on board was retained for the
crewmember who performed the service.
Chapter 11
o The specialist equipment required by the manufacturer to conduct the annual servicing.
Chapter 12
 Inspect at least one set of safety equipment required by the IBC Code.
 Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with company procedures.
243
5/27/2022
8.2. Chemicals
Chapter 1
8.2.8. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures addressing the
Chapter 2
protective equipment required by the IBC Code, and was this equipment in satisfactory
Chapter 3 condition and suitable for the products being handled?
The Company should have procedures addressing the protective equipment required by the IBC that included:
Chapter 5  A list of protective equipment to be available on board based upon RA and considering the products to be carried.
Chapter 6  What protective equipment is required to be worn for the different types of operations on board, and products
handled, preferably in the form of a cargo-specific PPE matrix.
Chapter 7  Crew training in the correct use of the protective equipment.
 Checks to be made that protective equipment is being correctly worn prior to entering a working area.
Chapter 8
 Assessment of a user’s fitness to wear particular protective equipment in given climatic conditions.
Chapter 9  Guidelines for the maximum time a person is allowed to work in a Type 1/level A and Type 3/level B suit protective
suit, if applicable.
Chapter 10
 How protective equipment should be cleaned and stored.
Chapter 11  Actions to be taken if defects are identified in protective equipment.
 Frequency of inspection of the protective equipment and records to be kept.
Chapter 12
8.2. Chemicals
Chapter 1
8.2.8. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures addressing the
Chapter 2
protective equipment required by the IBC Code, and was this equipment in satisfactory
Chapter 3 condition and suitable for the products being handled?
Chapter 5
 Review company procedures, including the cargo-specific PPE matrix where provided, addressing the
Chapter 6
protective equipment required by the IBC Code.
Chapter 7  Review the records of inspections of the protective equipment.
 Inspect a representative sample of the protective equipment in the storage location(s).
Chapter 8
 Observe, where possible, protective equipment in use on deck.
Chapter 9  Interview the officer in charge of cargo operations to verify their familiarity with company procedures, including
the cargo-specific PPE matrix where provided, addressing the protective equipment required by the IBC Code.
Chapter 10
 Request a deck officer or rating to demonstrate or describe the selection and donning of a full set of
Chapter 11 protective equipment including a protective suit.
Chapter 12
244
5/27/2022
8.3. Oil and Chemical
Chapter 1
8.3.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with the purpose, operation and testing of the
Chapter 2
inert gas generator, and had the system been operated and maintained in accordance with the
Chapter 3 manufacturer’s instructions and company procedures?
Chapter 5
The Company should have procedures for the operation, inspection, testing and maintenance of the
Chapter 6 vessel’s IGS which included the:
 Inert gas generator.
Chapter 7
 Gas regulating valve.
Chapter 8
Chapter 9 A record of inspection and maintenance of the IG plant, including defects and their rectification,
should be maintained on board.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11 These procedures and records may form part of the PMS.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 inert gas generator, and had the system been operated and maintained in accordance with the
Chapter 3
manufacturer’s instructions and company procedures?
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
 Review the procedures for operation, inspection, testing & maintenance of the IGS which included the IG
Chapter 5 generator - Gas regulating valve.
 Inspect the IG plant and verify that:
Chapter 6
o Where the IGS and generator was contained in an enclosed room or space, safe entry procedures were
Chapter 7 posted at each entrance to the room. If the IGS and generator was not located in the machinery spaces,
the compartment was provided with adequate positive-pressure-type mechanical ventilation
Chapter 8 o Each component of the IGS and generator was in order and free of gas or liquid leaks - the IG pipelines and
scrubber seawater lines were free of pinholes or temporary repairs - Blowers were free of excessive vibration.
Chapter 9
o If only 1 blower provided, there were sufficient spares available for the blower & prime mover. The actuators
Chapter 10 for gas regulating valve & remote operated isolation valves were operating automatically/ remotely.
o Local or remote temperature or pressure sensing devices are connected & indicate reasonable values.
Chapter 11
 Review the records of inspection, testing and maintenance of the IG generator and system and verify that
Chapter 12 scheduled inspections and maintenance on the equipment had taken place.
 Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with the purpose, operation, inspection, testing and
maintenance of the inert gas system, including the Inert gas generator & Gas regulating valve
245
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
nitrogen generator inert gas system, and had the system been operated and maintained in
Chapter 3 accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and company procedures?
• The Company should have procedures for the operation, inspection, testing and maintenance of the
Chapter 5
vessel’s IGS which included the nitrogen generator and its associated equipment.
Chapter 6 • A record of inspection and maintenance of the IG plant, including defects and their rectification,
Chapter 7
• These procedures and records may form part of the vessel’s PMS.
Chapter 8
• It is recommended a warning sign is posted at an appropriate place to warn of the dangers of the
Chapter 9 oxygen-enriched waste gases from the nitrogen generator.
• It is recommended that a warning sign is posted at each entrance to the space(s) containing the air
Chapter 10
compressor, nitrogen generator, nitrogen receiver or buffer tank warning of the dangers of
Chapter 11 asphyxiation in a nitrogen enriched atmosphere.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
• Review the company procedures for the operation, inspection, testing and maintenance of the vessel’s IGS
Chapter 5 which included the nitrogen generator and its associated equipment.
Chapter 6 • Inspect the nitrogen generator and its associated equipment including, where fitted:
o Air and nitrogen compressor.
Chapter 7
o Feed air treatment system.
Chapter 8 o PSA or membrane nitrogen. generating units.
o Nitrogen receiver or buffer tank.
Chapter 9
• Verify the following visual and audible alarms are in good order:
Chapter 10 o Failure of the electric heater, if fitted.
o Low feed-air pressure or flow from the compressor.
Chapter 11
o High-air temperature.
Chapter 12 o High condensate level at the automatic drain of the water separator.
246
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
• Where the air compressor and nitrogen generator, nitrogen receiver or buffer tank are installed in a
Chapter 5
dedicated compartment, verify:
Chapter 6 o That the independent mechanical extraction ventilation system is operating correctly.
Chapter 7 o Safe entry procedures are posted at each entrance to the compartment.
o Warning signs are posted at each entrance to the space warning of the dangers of asphyxiation
Chapter 8
in a nitrogen enriched atmosphere.
Chapter 9 • Where necessary, review the records of inspection, testing and maintenance of the IGS and verify
that scheduled inspections and maintenance on the equipment had taken place.
Chapter 10
• Interview the accompanying Officer to verify familiarity with the purpose, operation, inspection,
Chapter 11 testing and maintenance of the IGS including the nitrogen generator and its associated equipment
and the dangers of:
Chapter 12
o An oxygen deficient atmosphere as a result of nitrogen leakage.
o An oxygen-enriched exhaust from the nitrogen generator.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
flue gas inert gas system, and had the system been operated and maintained in accordance
Chapter 3 with the manufacturer’s instructions and company procedures?
• The Company should have procedures for the operation, inspection, testing and maintenance of the
Chapter 5
vessel’s IGS which included the Boiler uptake valves – Scrubber – Demister – Blowers - Gas
Chapter 6 regulating valve.
Chapter 7 • A record of inspection and maintenance of the IG plant, including defects and their rectification,
Chapter 8 • These procedures and records may form part of the vessel’s PMS.
Chapter 9
Inspector Actions
Chapter 10
• Review the procedures for the operation, inspection, testing and maintenance of the vessel’s IGS
Chapter 11 which included the Boiler uptake valves - Scrubber – Demister – Blowers - Gas regulating valve.
Chapter 12 • Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with the purpose, operation, inspection,
testing and maintenance of the IGS including the above issues.
247
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
flue gas inert gas system, and had the system been operated and maintained in accordance
Chapter 3 with the manufacturer’s instructions and company procedures?
• Inspect the IG plant located in the machinery spaces and verify that:
Chapter 5
o Where the IG plant was contained in an enclosed room or space, safe entry procedures were
Chapter 6 posted at each entrance to the room.
Chapter 7 o Each component of the IGS was in good order and free of inert gas or liquid leaks.
o The IG pipelines and scrubber seawater lines were free of pinholes or temporary repairs.
Chapter 8
o Blowers were free of excessive vibration.
Chapter 9 o The actuators for the gas regulating valve and remote operated isolation valves were operating
Chapter 10
automatically/remotely.
o Local or remote temperature or pressure sensing devices were connected and indicating
Chapter 11 reasonable values
Chapter 12 Review the records of inspection, testing and maintenance of the IGS and verify that scheduled
inspections and maintenance on the equipment had taken place.
Chapter 1
8.3.4. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for the maintenance,
Chapter 2 testing and setting of the cargo tank high-level and high-high-level alarms, and were these
Chapter 3 alarm systems fully operational and properly set?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
• For the purposes of this question, the term “high-high-level alarms” includes Overfill alarms - Overflow
Chapter 5 alarms - Overflow control systems
• In oil ships, high-level alarms may be integral to the fixed gauging system, but not high-high alarms.
Chapter 6
• In chemical ships, both high-level and high-high-level alarms must be independent of the fixed gauging
Chapter 7 system, and each other.
The Company should have procedures for the maintenance, setting and testing of the cargo tank high-level and
Chapter 8 high-high-level alarm systems, including:
Chapter 9 • The mandatory use of the alarms during all cargo tank loading, discharging and transfer operations.
• Set points for all alarms - Testing procedures & frequency - Records of testing and maintenance to be kept.
Chapter 10
• Guidance on the use of shipboard automatic closing valves, if fitted.
Chapter 11 • Procedure, based on RA, to enable continued cargo loading, discharge or transfer operations in the event of
a failure of the cargo tank high-level or high-high-level alarm system or a single alarm for an individual cargo
Chapter 12 tank.
The instruction within the PMS may form part of the procedures.
248
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
8.3.4. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for the maintenance,
Chapter 2
testing and setting of the cargo tank high-level and high-high-level alarms, and were these
Chapter 3 alarm systems fully operational and properly set?
• Review the procedures for the maintenance, setting and testing of the cargo tank high-level and high-
Chapter 5
high-level alarm systems.
Chapter 6 • Review the records of testing & maintenance of cargo tank high-level and high-high-level alarm systems.
• Inspect the alarm indicator panels in the cargo control room or position and verify:
Chapter 7
o The panel was switched on with all cargo tanks being monitored.
Chapter 8 o The audible and visible alarms were operational.
Chapter 9 • Inspect the alarm equipment on deck including the audible and visible alarm fittings.
• If safe to do so, request that the accompanying officer demonstrates the operation of the audible and
Chapter 10 visible alarms on the deck area by the test activation of a high-high-level alarm on a randomly selected
cargo tank.
Chapter 11
• Interview the accompanying officer to verify their familiarity with the procedures and the circumstances
Chapter 12 under which the cargo tank high-level and high-high-level alarm systems or individual tanks alarms may
be isolated and the safeguards to ensure they were always in operation during cargo transfer operations.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 for dipping, ullaging and sampling flammable static accumulator cargoes in non-inerted tanks,
Chapter 3 and were these procedures being followed?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have procedures for dipping, ullaging and sampling flammable static accumulator cargoes
Chapter 5 in non-inerted tanks that described the additional precautions to be taken against static electricity including:
• A description of the dipping, ullaging and sampling equipment to be used.
Chapter 6
• Bonding/earthing/cleaning procedures for this equipment.
Chapter 7 • Settling time after completion of operations.
Chapter 8 • Additional precautions if vessel is not fitted with properly designed and installed full length sounding pipes.
• Actions to be taken in the event of a failure of the fixed tank gauging system, if fitted.
Chapter 9
Chapter 10 Information on the type of sounding pipes fitted should be clearly displayed at the cargo control position.
Chapter 11
Ropes or tapes made of synthetic materials should not be used for lowering equipment into cargo tanks at any
Chapter 12 time. This question will be allocated as follows:
• Oil tankers: not fitted with an inert gas system. Determined by HVPQ 9.15.1 answered in the negative.
• Oil / Chemical tankers - Chemical tankers: All.
249
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
for dipping, ullaging and sampling flammable static accumulator cargoes in non-inerted tanks,
Chapter 3 and were these procedures being followed?
Chapter 5
• Review the company procedures for dipping, ullaging and sampling flammable static accumulator
Chapter 6 cargoes in non-inerted tanks.
Chapter 7
• If the vessel is fitted with a fixed tank level gauging system but is not fitted with IG and not fitted
with full depth sounding pipes, the operator's procedure to be followed in the event of failure of the
Chapter 8 fixed gauging system must be reviewed.
Chapter 9 • Observe dipping, ullaging and sampling taking place, if possible.
• Review cargo log books and records to verify compliance with company procedures.
Chapter 10
• Interview the officer in charge of cargo operations to verify familiarity with company procedures
Chapter 11 • Interview a deck rating to verify their familiarity with company procedures for dipping, ullaging and
sampling flammable static accumulator cargoes in non-inerted tanks.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
8.3.6. Were the Master and deck officers familiar with the company procedures for loading
Chapter 2
flammable static accumulator cargoes into non-inerted tanks, and were these procedures
Chapter 3 being followed?
The Company should have procedures for loading flammable static accumulator cargoes into non-
Chapter 5
inerted tanks that described the:
Chapter 6 • Identification of flammable static accumulator cargoes.
Chapter 7 • Precautions against hazards from static electricity when loading these cargoes including:
o Minimising hazards from water.
Chapter 8
o Initial loading rates.
Chapter 9 o Bulk loading rates.
Chapter 10 o Spread loading.
o Switch loading.
Chapter 11
o Use of anti-static additives.
Chapter 12 o Effect of filters in the pipeline.
o Avoiding Free fall into tanks - Splash loading - Blowing lines with compressed air.
250
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
ISGOTT6 table 3.1 identifies the following examples:
Chapter 5
Static accumulators: Non accumulators:
Chapter 6 • Benzene • Fuel with anti‐static additive
Chapter 7
• Xylene • Heavy black fuel oils
• Gasoline (straight‐run) • Semi‐conductive crude oil
Chapter 8 • Diesel (ultra‐low sulphur) • Bitumen
• Lube oil (base) • Conductive crude oil
Chapter 9
• Commercial jet fuel • Alcohols
Chapter 10 • Toluene • Ketones
• Kerosene
Chapter 11
• Diesel
Chapter 12 • Cyclohexane
• Motor gasoline
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Provided that:
Chapter 5
• The tank is maintained in an inert condition, or
Chapter 6 • The cargo is not a static accumulator, or
Chapter 7 • It can be guaranteed that the tank atmosphere is non-flammable,
Chapter 8
Then no anti-static precautions are necessary. However, in case of doubt it should be assumed that a
Chapter 9 product is a static accumulator, and the appropriate precautions should be taken.
Chapter 10
This question will be assigned as follows:
Chapter 11
• Oil tankers that are not fitted with an IGS (HVPQ 9.15.1)
Chapter 12 • Chemical tankers which are not fitted with a nitrogen generator (HVPQ 9.31.1)
251
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 5
• Review the company procedures for loading flammable static accumulator cargoes into
Chapter 6 non-inerted tanks.
Chapter 7 • Observe loading taking place, if possible.
Chapter 8
• Review cargo log books and records to verify compliance with company procedures.
• Interview the officer in charge of cargo operations to verify familiarity with company
Chapter 9
procedures.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
8.3.7. Were the Master and officers familiar with the purpose, operation and calibration of
Chapter 2
the inert gas system fixed oxygen analyser, and had the equipment been operated, maintained
Chapter 3 and calibrated in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and company procedures?
The Company should have procedures for the operation, inspection, testing and maintenance of the
Chapter 5 vessel’s IGS which included the fixed oxygen analyser and gave guidance on:
Chapter 6 • The method and frequency of calibration.
Chapter 7
• Actions to be taken in the event of a failure of the fixed analyser.
Chapter 8
These procedures and records may form part of the vessel’s PMS and may refer to manufacturer’s
Chapter 9 instruction and maintenance manual for the fixed oxygen analyser.
• A record of inspection and maintenance of the IG plant, including defects and their rectification,
Chapter 10
Chapter 11 • The fixed oxygen analyser must have been calibrated not more than 24 hours prior to starting of
the IGS.
Chapter 12
• Clear instructions should be provided for operating, calibrating and testing the fixed oxygen
analyser in the vicinity of the equipment.
252
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
8.3.7. Were the Master and officers familiar with the purpose, operation and calibration of
Chapter 2
the IGS fixed oxygen analyser, and had the equipment been operated, maintained and
Chapter 3 calibrated in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and company procedures?
Chapter 5 • Review the company procedures for the operation, inspection, testing and maintenance of the
Chapter 6 vessel’s IGS which included the fixed oxygen analyser.
• Inspect the fixed oxygen analyser including the fixed zero and/or span calibration arrangements.
Chapter 7
• Verify that the local reading at the fixed oxygen analyser agrees with the remote indications of the
Chapter 8 oxygen content in the CCR or station and the machinery space control room.
• Review the calibration records of the fixed oxygen analyser and verify that it had been calibrated
Chapter 9
not more than 24 hours before being used for each cargo, purging or inerting operation.
Chapter 10 • Where necessary review the records of inspection, testing and maintenance of the IGS and verify
Chapter 11
that scheduled inspections and maintenance on the equipment had taken place.
• Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with the purpose, operation and testing of
Chapter 12 the fixed oxygen analyser including the method and frequency of calibration and the actions in the
event of a failure of the fixed oxygen analyser.
Chapter 1
8.3.8. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the cargo system Emergency
Chapter 2
Shutdown (ESD) system, where fitted, and/or the cargo pump emergency stop controls, and
Chapter 3 was there evidence that the systems and equipment had been tested in accordance with
company procedures?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
The Company should have cargo operation procedures for all vessel types within the fleet which
Chapter 6 included:
Chapter 7 • The testing of Emergency Shutdown (ESD) systems, if fitted to the vessel.
• The periodic testing of automatic cargo pump shut down systems and associated sensors, if fitted.
Chapter 8
• The periodic testing of manual cargo pump shut down controls from all locations.
Chapter 9 • The testing of each cargo pump shut down system prior to each cargo operation.
Chapter 10
• The familiarisation of the crew with the cargo system shut down controls and the circumstances in
which they should be activated.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
253
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
8.3.8. Were the Master, officers and ratings familiar with the cargo system Emergency
Chapter 2
Shutdown (ESD) system, where fitted, and/or the cargo pump emergency stop controls, and
Chapter 3 was there evidence that the systems and equipment had been tested in accordance with
company procedures?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
• Review the procedures which described the operation and testing of ESD systems and/or cargo
Chapter 6 pump emergency stop controls.
• Review the most recent records for the testing of:
Chapter 7
o The ESD system, where fitted.
Chapter 8 o The automated cargo pump shut down systems and associated sensors, where fitted.
o The individual cargo pump emergency stop controls from each location provided.
Chapter 9 o The cargo pump shutdown system for each pump prior to use.
Chapter 10
• Interview a deck rating to verify their familiarity with:
Chapter 11 o The circumstances in which the cargo pump emergency stop control should be activated.
Chapter 12 o The locations of the cargo pump emergency stop controls.
o The actions once the cargo pump emergency stop control had been activated.
o The danger of shutting a manifold valve against the flow while loading/discharging.
Chapter 1
8.3.9. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for the inspection
Chapter 2
and testing of cargo, vapour and inert gas pipelines, and were records available for these
Chapter 3 activities?
The Company should have procedures for the inspection and testing of cargo transfer system, vapour
Chapter 5 and inert gas pipelines which should include the:
Chapter 6 • Frequency of visual external examinations of each type of pipeline.
• Determination of the MAWP of the cargo transfer system.
Chapter 7 • Frequency of periodic hydrostatic pressure testing of cargo system pipelines.
Chapter 8 • Requirement for hydrostatic pressure testing of cargo system pipelines after repairs, sectional
replacements or modifications.
Chapter 9 • Marking of cargo system pipelines with the date and pressure of the last hydrostatic pressure test.
Chapter 10
• Details of the records required to be maintained of inspections and tests.
• And may include periodic internal visual examinations of sections of each type of pipeline and non-
Chapter 11 destructive testing, such as ultrasonic wall thickness measurement of sections of each type of
pipeline.
Chapter 12
The instructions in the PMS may form part of the procedures.

254
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 and testing of cargo, vapour and inert gas pipelines, and were records available for these
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
External visual examination of pipelines should cover all components including flanges and their bolts,
Chapter 5 expansion couplings, local and/or remote pressure gauge and thermometer inserts or connections and the
condition and adjustment of U bolts and any rubbing inserts.
Chapter 6
Chapter 7 • The cargo transfer system should be hydrostatically pressure tested to 100% maximum allowable
working pressure (MAWP) at least annually.
Chapter 8 • The cargo transfer system, which includes the COW line, should be hydrostatically pressure tested to at
least 150% MAWP at least twice within any 5-year period.
Chapter 9
• The cargo transfer system includes the discharge pump and piping between the pump and vessel's
Chapter 10 manifold, excluding any non-metallic, i.e. flexible, hoses.
• In this context, the MAWP can be assumed to be either the pressure at which the cargo transfer system
Chapter 11 relief valve is set or, where no relief valve is fitted, the max. discharge pressure that can be developed by
vessel's pump. For centrifugal pumps this is the pressure developed by pump at zero flow conditions.
Chapter 12
• Cargo transfer system pressure testing should be a hydrostatic test. Pressure testing using compressed
air or IG is not acceptable.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
and testing of cargo, vapour and inert gas pipelines, and were records available for these
• Review the company procedures for the inspection and testing of cargo, vapour and inert gas pipelines.
Chapter 5 • Review the records of inspection and testing of cargo, vapour and IG pipelines and verify that:
Chapter 6 o The MAWP of the cargo transfer system had been determined and documented.
o Each pipeline had been visually inspected in accordance with the company procedure.
Chapter 7 o Each cargo system pipeline had been hydrostatically pressure tested to 100% of MAWP annually.
o Each cargo system pipeline had been hydrostatically pressure tested to 150% of MAWP at least twice
Chapter 8
in the previous 5 years.
Chapter 9 • Observe the visual condition of the cargo, vapour and inert gas pipelines.
• Where necessary, compare the observed condition of pipelines with the records of inspection and testing
Chapter 10 of cargo, vapour and IG pipelines.
• Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with the items to pay attention to when conducting
Chapter 11
a visual inspection of cargo, vapour or IG pipelines and how and when the previous hydrostatic pressure
Chapter 12 test of the cargo system pipelines had been conducted.
255
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
8.3.10. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for the inspection,
Chapter 2
testing and operation of the vapour collection system, and was this equipment in satisfactory
Chapter 3 condition?
The Company should have procedures for inspection, testing and operation of the vapour collection
Chapter 5 system which included:
Chapter 6 • A line diagram of the vessel’s vapour collection piping indicating the locations and purpose of all
control and safety devices.
Chapter 7 • The initial transfer rate.
Chapter 8 • The maximum allowable transfer rate as limited by the venting capacity of the pressure or vacuum
relief valves, or any other factor which would limit the transfer rate.
Chapter 9 • The maximum pressure drop in the vessel’s vapour collection system for various transfer rates.
Chapter 10
• The relief settings of each pressure and vacuum valve.
• Pre-transfer procedures, including tests of P/V valves, tank level gauges and alarms, and high-and
Chapter 11 low-pressure alarms.
• Procedures to be followed in the event of a fault during vapour collection operations.
Chapter 12
• Training and familiarisation requirements.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 5 The vapour collection systems on oil and chemical tankers are also described as Vapour Control
Chapter 6 Systems (VCS), Vapour Emission Control Systems (VECS) and Vapour Return Systems.
Chapter 7 These procedures may be in the form of a dedicated system manual approved by the Flag or RO.
Chapter 8
The pressure sensing device in the system should have an indicator and visible and audible high- and
Chapter 9 low-pressure alarms at the cargo control room or position.
Chapter 10
This question will only be allocated to:
Chapter 11 • Oil vessels when HVPQ 9.9.1 “Is a vapour return system fitted?” is answered in the affirmative.
• Chemical vessels when the vessel operator had declared through the PIQ that the vessel is fitted
Chapter 12
with a vapour collection system.
256
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 5 • Review the company procedures for inspection, testing & operation of the vapour collection
Chapter 6 system.
• Review, if available, the records of cargo operations, including tank pressures, where the vapour
Chapter 7 control system had been used.
Chapter 8
• Review, where necessary, vapour collection system training/familiarisation records.
• During the deck inspection:
Chapter 9 o Observe the operation, condition and configuration of the vapour collection system.
o Where provided on chemical tankers, inspect any vapour hoses used for direct connection at
Chapter 10
the cargo tank.
Chapter 11 • Verify the satisfactory operation of visible and audible high- and low-pressure alarms at the CCR or
position.
Chapter 12
• Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with the company procedures.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
for cargo tank washing after the carriage of volatile products in a non-inert atmosphere, and
Chapter 5 The Company should have procedures for cargo tank washing after the carriage of volatile products in
Chapter 6 a non-inert atmosphere that included:
• Precautions to:
Chapter 7 o Control the fuel in the tank atmosphere.
Chapter 8 o Control the sources of ignition in the tank.
• Bonding of portable tank washing machines and hoses.
Chapter 9 • Testing tank cleaning hoses.
Chapter 10
• Avoiding the free-fall or spraying of water into a tank.
• Prohibition of steaming.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
257
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
for cargo tank washing after the carriage of volatile products in a non-inert atmosphere, and
• Review the procedures for cargo tank washing after the carriage of volatile products in a non-inert
Chapter 5 atmosphere.
Chapter 6 • Review available tank cleaning plans, RAs, log books and records to verify compliance with
company procedures.
Chapter 7 • Review records of electrical continuity testing of portable tank cleaning hoses and portable
Chapter 8 hydrant/hose/machine connections, where applicable.
• Inspect fixed & portable tank cleaning equipment to verify its condition and marking for
Chapter 9 identification.
Chapter 10
• Interview the officer responsible for tank washing operations to verify familiarity with company
procedures.
Chapter 11 • Interview a deck rating to verify familiarity with company procedures relating to introducing
sounding rods and other equipment into a tank during tank washing after the carriage of volatile
Chapter 12
products in a non-inert atmosphere.
Chapter 1
8.3.12. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for the use of
Chapter 2
portable cargo ullage/temperature/interface (UTI) measurement and sampling equipment, and
Chapter 3 was the equipment in satisfactory condition and used in accordance with the company
procedures?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
The Company should have procedures describing the use, operation, testing, calibration and servicing
Chapter 6 of the portable cargo ullage/temperature/interface (UTI) measurement and sampling equipment which
included:
Chapter 7
• The definitions of closed, restricted and open cargo measurement and sampling.
Chapter 8 • The circumstances in which:
o Closed cargo measurement and sampling equipment must be used.
Chapter 9 o Restricted cargo measurement and sampling equipment may be used.
Chapter 10 o Open cargo measurement and sampling may take place.
• The bonding requirement for using the portable measurement equipment in both inerted and non-
Chapter 11 inerted tank atmospheres.
Chapter 12 • The restrictions on introducing portable measurement and sampling equipment into non-inerted
cargo tanks when handling static accumulator cargo.
• The required service and calibration interval for the portable UTI equipment.
258
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
procedures?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
• The required pre-operational checks for the portable UTI measurement and sampling equipment.
Chapter 6 • The procedures for safe use of the portable measurement and sampling equipment including PPE
and respiratory protective equipment (RPE) requirements.
Chapter 7
• The total number of portable UTI measurement units required to be carried onboard.
Chapter 8 • The total number of cargo sampling units required to be carried onboard.
• These procedures may refer to equipment manufacturer’s manuals and instructions.
Chapter 9
Chapter 10 Portable UTI equipment may be rated for open, restricted or closed service and will be certificated
accordingly. The appropriately rated equipment should always be used as required for volatile and/or
Chapter 11 toxic cargoes e.g. equipment certificated for restricted service must not be used when handling a
Chapter 12 cargo specified for closed gauging in IBC chapter 17, column ‘j’.
Portable UTI equipment should be serviced and calibrated as per maker's recommendations and valid
certificates of calibration should be provided for each instrument.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
procedures?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5 • Review the company procedures describing the use, operation, testing, calibration and servicing of the of portable
Chapter 6 cargo ullage/temperature/interface (UTI) measurement and sampling equipment
• Review the service and calibration records for each portable cargo UTI measurement unit carried.
Chapter 7 • Where necessary review the:
o Manufacturer’s manuals and instructions for the portable cargo UTI measurement and sampling equipment.
Chapter 8 o Records of pre-operational checks of the portable cargo UTI measurement and sampling equipment.
• Inspect 2 portable cargo UTI measurement units and verify that:
Chapter 9 o The units were appropriately rated as closed, restricted or open for the operations being undertaken.
o The grounding wire and clip was properly fixed to the device and in use where required.
Chapter 10 o When the sensors were placed in a bucket of water the ullage/interface function sounded, and the temperature
reading was accurate compared to a manual thermometer.
Chapter 11
• Interview a deck rating to verify familiarity with the company procedures for safe use of the portable UTI
Chapter 12 measurement and sampling equipment, including grounding requirements and PPE and RPE requirements.
259
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
8.3.13. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for the operation
Chapter 2
of the primary and secondary cargo tank venting systems in accordance with SOLAS, and
Chapter 3 were these systems correctly set?
The Company should have procedures for the operation of the primary and secondary cargo tank
Chapter 5
venting systems in accordance with SOLAS which described:
Chapter 6 • The primary and secondary system for each anticipated cargo tank/group configuration.
• The associated settings of the pressure/vacuum sensor alarms, where fitted.
Chapter 7
• Maintenance, test and calibration procedures for the cargo tank pressure/vacuum monitoring
Chapter 8 system per the manufacturer’s instructions.
Chapter 9
These procedures may be contained in the vessel’s cargo handling manual(s) and/or the PMS.
Chapter 10
In the case of inerted vessels, if pressure sensors are provided as the means of secondary protection,
Chapter 11 the alarm settings for pressure sensors must be set to actuate when the tank pressure reaches 10%
Chapter 12 greater than the normal actuation settings of the pressure valves themselves. In case of the low-
pressure settings, the pressure in a tank should never be permitted to fall below zero and the pressure
sensors should be set to alarm above zero.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 of the primary and secondary cargo tank venting systems in accordance with SOLAS, and
were these systems correctly set?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 • In case of non-inerted vessels if pressure sensors are provided, the over-pressure setting should be set to alarm
Chapter 5 at either 10% greater than the normal actuation settings of the pressure valves or slightly higher than the
pressure at which the pressure valve meets the max. load rate for the tank as measured from the pressure flow
Chapter 6 diagram.
• The vacuum setting should be either 10% greater than the normal actuation settings of the vacuum valves or
Chapter 7 slightly higher than the vacuum at which the vacuum valve meets the maximum discharge rate for the tank as
measured from the vacuum flow diagram.
Chapter 8
• At no time should the alarm settings for pressure sensors exceed the safe design pressures of cargo tank.
Chapter 9
Class societies may accept a system that may not comply with SOLAS for 'secondary means of allowing full flow
Chapter 10 relief'. In such cases an observation should still be made.
If vessel is described in IOPPC Form B 1.11.4 as a Crude oil/Product carrier and carries crude & products
Chapter 11 simultaneously, the cargo tank vapour isolating valve will be intentionally closed to prevent vapour carryover. In such
cases, both primary & secondary protection must be provided on the cargo tank side of the cargo tank vapour
Chapter 12
isolating valve.
The Company will have described the secondary venting arrangements fitted to vessel though the PIQ. The
description provided will be inserted in the inspection editor and the final report.
260
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
of the primary and secondary cargo tank venting systems in accordance with SOLAS, and
Chapter 3 were these systems correctly set?
Chapter 5 • Review the procedures for the operation of the primary and secondary cargo tank venting systems.
• Review the primary and secondary venting arrangements and verify they comply with SOLAS (and
Chapter 6 the HVPQ).
Chapter 7 • Where an electronic pressure/vacuum monitoring system is provided:
o Verify the satisfactory operation of the system.
Chapter 8 o Verify that the alarms are set to operate at the correct value.
Chapter 9
o Review records of tests and calibration of the pressure sensors.
• Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with:
Chapter 10 o The procedures for operation of the primary & secondary cargo tank venting systems.
o The required settings for pressure alarms, where fitted.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
8.3.14. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for the operation,
Chapter 2
inspection, testing and maintenance of the cargo tank venting systems, and were the systems
Chapter 3 in satisfactory condition?
The Company should have procedures for the operation, inspection, testing and maintenance of the cargo tank
Chapter 5
venting systems including, where fitted:
Chapter 6 o P/V valves.
o High velocity vents
Chapter 7 o Mast risers
o Vent stacks.
Chapter 8 o Vacuum valves.
o Flame screens.
Chapter 9
o Vapour lines.
Chapter 10 • P/V valves and/or high velocity vents should be checked for free movement prior to commencement of each
cargo operation as required by the Ship Shore Safety Check List – Part 1A. Tanker checks pre-arrival, item 6.
Chapter 11 • High velocity vents should not be jacked open, particularly when loading. Their correct operation relies on a
pressure build-up within the compartment, which opens the valve at a predetermined level, and which then results
Chapter 12 in a gas exit velocity of a minimum of 30 m/sec. The high velocity flow means no flame screen is needed at the
vapour outlet on this type of valve.
261
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
inspection, testing and maintenance of the cargo tank venting systems, and were the systems
Chapter 3 in satisfactory condition?
• Review the procedures for operation, inspection, testing & maintenance of cargo tank venting systems.
Chapter 5 • Review the records of inspection, maintenance and pre-operational tests of P/V valves and/or high
Chapter 6 velocity vents.
• Review the information provided regarding the maximum permissible loading rate for each cargo tank
Chapter 7 and in the case of combined venting systems, for each group of cargo tanks.
• Assess the condition of, where fitted:
Chapter 8
o P/V valves.
Chapter 9 o High velocity vents
o Mast risers.
Chapter 10 o Vent stacks.
o Vacuum valves.
Chapter 11
o Flame screens.
Chapter 12 o Vapour lines.
• Verify that high velocity vents were being operated correctly.
• Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with company procedures.
Chapter 1
8.3.15. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for monitoring
Chapter 2
leakage into the cofferdams of deepwell pumps, and had regular purging of the cofferdams
Chapter 3 taken place to identify any excessive leakage?
Chapter 5 The Company should have procedures for monitoring leakage into the cofferdams of deepwell pumps
which included:
Chapter 6 • Purging procedures.
Chapter 7 • Safety precautions to be followed when purging cofferdams.
• Precautions with regards to purging medium and purging medium pressure.
Chapter 8 • Frequency of purging.
Chapter 9
• Records to be maintained.
• Guidance on acceptable levels of leakage from both the cargo and hydraulic oil sides.
Chapter 10 • Actions to be taken when unacceptable levels of leakage are encountered.
• Precautions to be taken when handling specialist cargo types.
Chapter 11
• Actions, if any, to be taken to prevent cofferdam blockage when carrying heated or solidifying
Chapter 12 cargo.
• Actions to be taken when a cofferdam is blocked by solidified cargo.
262
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
• These procedures may refer to manufacturer’s instruction manual and form part of the PMS.
Chapter 5 • In line with manufacturer’s instructions, the cofferdams of deepwell pumps should be purged
Chapter 6 regularly, with air or an IG, to monitor the condition of the seals and detect any leakage of cargo,
hydraulic or lubricating oil into the cofferdams.
Chapter 7 • When purging deepwell pump cofferdams, the exhaust gas and any entrained liquid are likely to be
Chapter 8 hazardous and suitable safety precautions should be taken, including wearing suitable PPE.
• Detailed records of purging routines should be maintained, the results analysed, and suitable
Chapter 9 action taken when abnormal leakage is detected.
Chapter 10
• In some cases, small leakage rates during pump operation are normal, rates may vary with the
properties of different cargoes. The maker’s manuals should provide guidance on acceptable limits.
Chapter 11 • When handling heated or solidifying cargoes, the cofferdams may be filled with, for example, diesel
oil or a light lubricating oil to keep any leakage into the cofferdam in liquid form.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 5 • Review the company procedures for monitoring leakage into the cofferdams of deepwell pumps.
• Review the records of purging of the deepwell pump cofferdams.
Chapter 6 • Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with:
Chapter 7 o The company procedures for monitoring leakage into the cofferdams of deepwell pumps.
o The connections, controls and indicators used during the purging process.
Chapter 8 o The maximum pressure permitted for the purging medium.
Chapter 9
o The purging medium required for the types of cargo recently carried.
o The manufacturer’s and company guidance on the use of liquid to fill the cofferdams for
Chapter 10 speciality products, where this practice was utilised.
• Interview a selected rating, for example the pumpman, to verify familiarity with the safety
Chapter 11
precautions when purging deepwell pump cofferdams.
Chapter 12
263
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
8.3.16. Were the Master and officers familiar with the purpose, operation, testing and
Chapter 2
maintenance of the non-return devices installed in the inert gas system, and were these
Chapter 3 devices in satisfactory condition?
Chapter 5 The Company should have procedures for operation, inspection, testing & maintenance of
the IGS which included the:
Chapter 6
• Deck seal or double block and bleed arrangement.
Chapter 7 • Non-return valve.
Chapter 8
A record of inspection and maintenance of the IG plant, including defects and their
Chapter 9
rectification, should be maintained. This may form part of the PMS.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 maintenance of the non-return devices installed in the inert gas system, and were these
Chapter 3
devices in satisfactory condition?
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
• Review the procedures for the operation, inspection, testing and maintenance of the IGS which
Chapter 5 included the deck seal or double block and bleed arrangement and non-return valve.
• Inspect the IG main non-return valve and verify it had been opened and inspected as required by
Chapter 6
company procedures.
Chapter 7 • Inspect the deck seal, if fitted, and verify that the:
o Water level gauge is clear, readable and as required.
Chapter 8
o Overall fabric condition of the deck seal is satisfactory, including pipework.
Chapter 9 o Deck seal had been opened & inspected as required by company procedures, including
pipework.
Chapter 10
o Inspect the double block and bleed arrangement, if fitted, and verify that all valves are
Chapter 11 operating automatically and there was evidence that the valves had been tested/inspected for
automatic operation and tightness.
Chapter 12 • Review the records for inspection, testing & maintenance of non-return devices installed in the IGS
• Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with the procedures.
264
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
8.3.17. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for the use,
Chapter 2
inspection and testing of manifold reducers, spool pieces and other portable pipework, and
Chapter 3 were these items in satisfactory condition and properly fitted when in use?
Chapter 5 The Company should have procedures for the use, inspection and testing of manifold reducers, spool
pieces and other portable pipework that included guidance on:
Chapter 6 • The correct use of manifold reducers, spool pieces and other portable pipework.
Chapter 7 • Provision of test certification.
• Suitable storage arrangements, including the protection of flange faces.
Chapter 8 • Regular inspection.
Chapter 9
• Pressure testing at least annually.
• Records to be maintained of inspections and tests.
Chapter 10
All manifold reducers, spool pieces and other portable pipework should be provided with pressure test
Chapter 11
certificates.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 inspection and testing of manifold reducers, spool pieces and other portable pipework, and
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
• A manifold reducer, spool piece or other item of portable pipework should have the same or greater
Chapter 5 certified rating as the fixed manifold piping to which it is connected.
Chapter 6
• Manifold reducers, spool pieces and other portable pipework should be marked with the date and
pressure of the last test.
Chapter 7 • Other portable pipework may include cargo Y pieces, spiders or other hard configurations.
Chapter 8
This question will apply to all manifold reducers, spool pieces and other items of portable pipework
Chapter 9 carried onboard for use for cargo or bunker operations unless they are clearly marked as out of
service for refurbishment.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11 Where reducers or spool pieces are provided by the terminal this question will apply in respect of:
• Physical condition and pressure rating.
Chapter 12
• The number of reducers fitted between the manifold flange & the flange presented for connection.
265
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
inspection and testing of manifold reducers, spool pieces and other portable pipework, and
Chapter 5
• Review the procedures for use, inspection and testing of manifold reducers, spool pieces
and other portable pipework.
Chapter 6 • Review the inventory of manifold reducers, spool pieces and other portable pipework.
Chapter 7 • Review the records of inspection & testing of manifold reducers, spool pieces & other
portable pipework.
Chapter 8 • Observe the disposition and visual condition of manifold reducers, spool pieces & other
Chapter 9 portable pipework.
• Compare the observed condition with the records of inspection and testing of manifold
Chapter 10
reducers, spool pieces and other portable pipework.
Chapter 11 • Request that the blanks or covers are removed from at least one stored reducer or spool
piece and verify that the presentation flanges were undamaged and free from pitting or
Chapter 12
scoring.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
maintenance of the pressure/vacuum-breaking (P/V) device(s) installed in the inert gas main,
Chapter 3 and was this device(s) in satisfactory condition?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 • The Company should have procedures for the operation, inspection, testing and
Chapter 6 maintenance of the inert gas system which included the P/V devices.
• A record of inspection and maintenance of the IG plant, including defects and their
Chapter 7
rectification, should be maintained. This may form part of the PMS.
Chapter 8 • The P/V breaker should not be set to operate at a lower pressure than that of the
Chapter 9 secondary venting system fitted to the individual cargo tanks.
• In all cases, the P/V breaker should be set within the safe parameters of the tank
Chapter 10
structure.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
266
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
maintenance of the pressure/vacuum-breaking (P/V) device(s) installed in the inert gas main,
Chapter 3 and was this device(s) in satisfactory condition?
Chapter 5 • Review the procedures for the operation, inspection, testing and maintenance of the IGS which
included the pressure/vacuum-breaking devices.
Chapter 6 • Inspect the P/V breaker(s) and verify that it is marked with the:
Chapter 7
o Design pressure and vacuum opening settings.
o Date of the last inspection.
Chapter 8 o Type/quantity of anti-freeze and the lowest allowable ambient temperature.
• Assess the fabric condition of the P/V breaker(s), including flame screens.
Chapter 9
• Where possible, verify the liquid level in the P/V breaker(s).
Chapter 10 • Review the records of inspection, testing and maintenance of the pressure/vacuum breaking
device(s) installed in the IGS.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12 o The purpose of P/V device(s) installed in the IGS.
o The method of verifying the correct liquid level in the P/V breaker, especially where the
level could only be verified at atmospheric pressure.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
indicators and alarms in the inert gas system, and had the equipment been operated,
Chapter 3 maintained and calibrated in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and company
procedures?
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Inspection Guidance
• The Company should have procedures for the operation, inspection, testing and
Chapter 6
maintenance of IGS which included the indicators & alarms and gave guidance on the:
Chapter 7 o Method and frequency of testing and calibration of the indicators and alarms.
Chapter 8
o Actions to be taken in the event of a failure of any of the indicators and alarms.
• These procedures and records may form part of the vessel’s planned maintenance
Chapter 9 system and may refer to the manufacturer’s instruction and maintenance manual for the
Chapter 10 indicators and alarms.
• A record of inspection and maintenance of the IG plant, including defects and their
Chapter 11
rectification, should be maintained on board.
Chapter 12 • Clear instructions should be provided for operating, calibrating and testing all
instruments and alarms. Suitable calibration facilities should be provided.
267
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
indicators and alarms in the inert gas system, and had the equipment been operated,
Chapter 3 maintained and calibrated in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and company
procedures?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5 • Review the procedures for operation, inspection, testing and maintenance of the IGS which included the
indicators and alarms.
Chapter 6 • Inspect the IGS fixed instrumentation, controls, indicators and alarms and verify:
o The oxygen and pressure recording devices were accurately recording the IG oxygen content and main IG
Chapter 7
line pressure against the date and time.
Chapter 8 o Lamps and indicators were functioning by requesting that the lamp and alarm test feature is operated.
• Verify that local and remote indicators for oxygen content, IG pressure, temperature etc. were consistent.
Chapter 9 • Review the test and calibration records for the IGS instruments and alarms.
• Review the records of inspection, testing and maintenance of the IGS and verify that scheduled inspections and
Chapter 10 maintenance on the equipment had taken place.
• Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with the purpose, operation, and testing of IGS indicators
Chapter 11
and alarms including the:
Chapter 12 o Method and frequency of testing and calibration of the indicators and alarms.
o Actions to be taken in the event of a failure of any of the indicators and alarms.
o Actions to be taken in the event of the activation of any of the alarms.
Chapter 1
8.3.20. Were the Master and officers familiar with the purpose and operation of the
Chapter 2
connections and interconnections to the inert gas system for routine and emergency inert gas
Chapter 3 operations, and were these arrangements in satisfactory condition and clearly identified as to
their purpose?
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 6 The Company should have procedures for the operation, inspection and maintenance of
Chapter 7 the vessel’s IGS which included the arrangements for the:
• Supply of IG to the double-hull spaces in an emergency.
Chapter 8
• External supply of IG in the event of a failure of the IGS.
Chapter 9 • Connection of the IG supply main to the cargo piping system for inerting, purging and
Chapter 10
gas-freeing, where such an arrangement was provided.
Chapter 11
A record of inspection and maintenance of the IG plant, including defects and their
Chapter 12 rectification, should be maintained. This may form part of the PMS.
268
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
their purpose?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
• Review the company procedures for the operation, inspection and maintenance of the IGS. which included
Chapter 6 the arrangements for the:
o Supply of IG to double-hull spaces in an emergency.
Chapter 7 o External supply of IG in the event of a failure of the IGS.
o Connection of IG supply main to cargo piping system for inerting, purging and gas-freeing, if fitted.
Chapter 8
• Inspect the:
Chapter 9 o Arrangements for supply of IG to double-hull spaces, including portable hoses if they form part of the
arrangements.
Chapter 10 o Where hull spaces were connected to a permanently fitted IG distribution system, inspect the means to
prevent hydrocarbon gases from cargo tanks entering the double hull spaces through the system.
Chapter 11 o Connection for an external supply of IG.
Chapter 12
o Arrangements for the connection of the IG supply main to cargo piping system for inerting, purging and
gas-freeing, if fitted.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
their purpose?
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Inspector Actions
Chapter 6
• Review the records of inspection, testing and maintenance of the arrangements for
Chapter 7 connection to the IGS.
Chapter 8
• Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with the arrangements for the:
o Supply of IG to double-hull spaces in an emergency, including the forepeak where
Chapter 9 this was adjacent to a cargo space or spaces.
Chapter 10 o External supply of IG in the event of a failure of the IGS.
o Connection of IG supply main to the cargo piping system for inerting, purging and
Chapter 11
gas-freeing, if fitted.
Chapter 12
269
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
8.3.21. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedure for cargo heating,
Chapter 2 and was the cargo heating system in satisfactory condition and tested and used in accordance
Chapter 3 with the company procedure?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have procedures describing the operation, testing and maintenance of the cargo heating
Chapter 5 system. These procedures should be ship and cargo specific and include, as applicable to the ship type:
• Testing of the heating equipment.
Chapter 6 • Monitoring the system return for leaks via an observation tank or other means, including special arrangements
when heating toxic cargoes.
Chapter 7 • Maintaining the required pressure in the heating system.
• Blanking of heating coils when carrying cargoes not to be exposed to excessive heat.
Chapter 8
• Blanking of coils when the heating or cooling medium is incompatible with the cargo to be loaded.
Chapter 9 • The precautions that may be required when considering the contents of tanks adjacent to heated cargo, such as
allowances for expansion, or the dangers of polymerisation.
Chapter 10 • The means of checking cargo temperatures, including the use of restricted or closed type devices where required.
• The means of controlling the heating applied to each cargo tank.
Chapter 11 • Avoiding localised overheating of sensitive cargoes.
• The use of high temperature alarms.
Chapter 12
• Any cargo temperature limits set by the Company, Class or the coating manufacturer.
• The records to be maintained of cargo heating and system testing.
Chapter 1
8.3.21. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedure for cargo heating,
Chapter 2 and was the cargo heating system in satisfactory condition and tested and used in accordance
with the company procedure?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 • These procedures may refer to vessel’s operation manuals, regulations, industry guidance, the heating
Chapter 5 equipment manufacturer’s instructions and/or the coating manufacturer’s instructions.
• Vessels may be fitted with heating coils in the cargo tanks or deck mounted heat exchangers, using
Chapter 6 steam, hot water or thermal fluid as a heating medium.
• Where steam cargo heating systems are fitted and when a heated cargo is being carried, an indication of
Chapter 7
the condition of heating coils can be provided by inspection of the hot well or observation tank. A very
Chapter 8 small amount of oil on the surface can be considered normal, but a layer of oil indicates that there is a
problem.
• Review the procedures describing the operation, testing and maintenance of the cargo heating system.
Chapter 10
• Inspect the cargo heating system including the heating coil manifolds and associated pipework, where
Chapter 11 fitted, deck mounted heat exchangers and associated pipe work, where fitted, observation tank or other
means for monitoring the system return, remote temperature indication and alarm system, if fitted.
Chapter 12 • Review the cargo heating records and records of the inspection and testing of the cargo heating system.
270
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
8.3.22. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for managing on-
Chapter 2
board doping operations, and had these procedures been complied with?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 • The Company should have procedures for managing on-board doping operations that included:
o Reviewing the supplier’s/contractor’s doping plan.
Chapter 5 o Performing a RA of the proposed operation and supervising the doping operation.
Chapter 6 • Preference is for additive injection at a shore location, or via an in-line injection system, e.g. via a spool
piece at the ship’s manifold. In this case, pressure test records for the injection system should be verified
Chapter 7 prior to commencing cargo operations. Injection may also be carried out via the cargo tank vapour locks.
• Doping via an open tank lid should only take place in exceptional circumstances. The doping plan &
Chapter 8
associated RA should identify:
Chapter 9 o Any flammability or toxicity hazards associated with the additive.
o The method of doping to be used and any operational restrictions.
Chapter 10 o Arrangements for supervision by ship’s crew.
o PPE and handling equipment requirements.
Chapter 11
o Contingency measures including the method of clean-up of any spillages.
Chapter 12 o Storage requirements for any additive to be carried on board.
o Appropriate anti-static precautions if tanks are not inerted.
Chapter 1
8.3.22. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for managing on-
Chapter 2
board doping operations, and had these procedures been complied with?
Chapter 3

Chapter 5
• Review the company procedures for managing on-board doping operations.
Chapter 6
• Review records of current and/or past doping operations.
Chapter 7 • If doping operations are taking place during the inspection, observe the operation
Chapter 8
including the method of doping used, supervision by ship’s crew, use of PPE and anti-
static precautions.
Chapter 9 • Inspect stowage arrangements of any additives stored on board.
Chapter 10 • Verify that safety data sheets for any additives stored onboard were available.
• Interview the officer responsible for cargo operations to verify familiarity with the
Chapter 11
company procedures.
Chapter 12
271
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
8.3.23. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for the
Chapter 2
maintenance, testing and calibration of the cargo temperature monitoring equipment, and was
Chapter 3 the equipment in satisfactory condition?
• The Company should have procedures for the maintenance, testing and calibration of the cargo
Chapter 5 temperature monitoring equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. These procedures
may refer to the equipment manufacturer’s manuals and instructions and in part be contained in the PMS.
Chapter 6
• The cargo temperature monitoring equipment may be portable ullage/temperature/interface (UTI)
Chapter 7 instruments or a fixed system with sensors fitted in cargo tanks and remote readouts in CCR, which may
be integrated into a cargo tank monitoring system. Visible & audible cargo temperature alarms may be
Chapter 8 installed in CCR and on the bridge.
• Portable UTI equipment should be serviced and calibrated in accordance with manufacturer's
Chapter 9
recommendations and valid certificates of calibration should be provided for each instrument. (The safe
Chapter 10 operation and condition of UTI instruments is addressed by question 8.3.12.)
• Fixed cargo temperature monitoring equipment should also be serviced and calibrated in accordance with
Chapter 11 maker. Calibration must be carried out preferably at intervals not exceeding 30 months. Calibration of
Chapter 12
instrumentation is difficult whilst vessel is in service, and it is usually carried out during repair periods.
• However, comparisons between portable and fixed equipment readings provide a practical cross-
reference. Records should be maintained of all checks, tests and calibrations.
Chapter 1
8.3.23. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for the
Chapter 2
maintenance, testing and calibration of the cargo temperature monitoring equipment, and was
Chapter 3 the equipment in satisfactory condition?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
Chapter 6 • Review the company procedures for the maintenance, testing and calibration of the
cargo temperature monitoring equipment.
Chapter 7
• Request a demonstration of fixed cargo temperature monitoring equipment, including
Chapter 8 alarms, if fitted.
Chapter 9 • Review where necessary the:
o Maker’s manuals and instructions for the fixed cargo temperature monitoring
Chapter 10
equipment.
Chapter 11 o Records of checks, tests & calibration of cargo temperature monitoring equipment.
Chapter 12
272
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
8.3.24. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for managing
Chapter 2 cargo and vapour connections at the cargo manifolds, and were the manifold arrangements in
Chapter 3
satisfactory condition?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have procedures with guidance for managing cargo and vapour
Chapter 5 connections at cargo manifolds to prevent and detect leakages. These should include:
Chapter 6 • Manifold connection via hose or marine loading arm.
• The fitting and monitoring of pressure gauges at each manifold connection outboard of
Chapter 7
the manifold valve.
Chapter 8 • The fitting of blanks to all unused manifold connections.
Chapter 9 • The fitting of blanks or caps to all drains and sample points, except while in use.
• The use of fixed & portable drip-trays and the management of drained or spilled cargo.
Chapter 10
• The management of vapour manifolds and connections.
Chapter 11 • Safe work on elevated manifold platforms, if fitted.
Chapter 12
• The supporting of cargo hoses during cargo transfer.
• Restrictions on use of the mid-ships hose-handling crane(s) during cargo operations.
• The management of bow and stern manifolds, if fitted.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
cargo and vapour connections at the cargo manifolds, and were the manifold arrangements in
Chapter 3 satisfactory condition?
• Manifold drip trays should be clean and free from cargo residues.
Chapter 5
• Suitable means of draining the drip trays to a cargo tank or drain tank should be provided.
Chapter 6 On chemical tankers, drip-trays should be drained to appropriate tanks with due regard to
Chapter 7
toxicity and compatibility requirements.
• Manifold drip-tray drains to deck must be fitted with valves and either capped or plugged.
Chapter 8 Pressure gauge stems must be fitted with valves & capped whenever gauges are not fitted.
Chapter 9 • It is generally accepted that steel blanks should be of the same thickness as the flanges to
which they are attached, but this will not necessarily result in the pressure capability being
Chapter 10 the same as that of the associated pipework. It is the pressure rating of blank which is
Chapter 11 important, and blanks made of e.g. titanium have a superior strength and may therefore be
significantly thinner for the same pressure rating as a mild steel blank. If such blanks are
Chapter 12
fitted, documentation should prove that the pressure rating is adequate for the service.
273
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
cargo and vapour connections at the cargo manifolds, and were the manifold arrangements in
Chapter 3 satisfactory condition?
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Inspector Actions
Chapter 7
• Review the procedures which described the management of cargo and vapour
Chapter 8 connections at the cargo manifolds to prevent and detect leakages.
• Inspect cargo and vapour manifolds, including bow and stern manifolds where fitted,
Chapter 9
and verify that the arrangements were in alignment with industry best practice and,
Chapter 10 where applicable, regulation.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
8.3.25. Were the Master and deck officers familiar with the company procedures for receiving
Chapter 2
nitrogen from shore for operations such as inerting, purging or padding cargo tank, or for
Chapter 3 clearing cargo lines?
The Company should have procedures that described the actions to be taken to avoid over
Chapter 5
pressurisation of cargo tanks when nitrogen is received from shore which should include
Chapter 6 the:
Chapter 7 • Requirement to carry out a RA prior to operations.
• Choice of connection and piping system for receiving the nitrogen.
Chapter 8
• Methods of controlling the incoming flow of nitrogen.
Chapter 9
Chapter 10
If possible, padding operations should be conducted through the vessel’s vapour system
rather than through the cargo system and the liquid in the cargo line and tank.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12 Shore line clearing to the ship involving flammable cargoes should only be conducted
using nitrogen and not compressed air.
274
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
8.3.25. Were the Master and deck officers familiar with the company procedures for receiving
Chapter 2
nitrogen from shore for operations such as inerting, purging or padding cargo tank, or for
Chapter 3 clearing cargo lines?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
Chapter 6 • Review the procedures which described the procedure for receiving nitrogen from the
shore for operations such as inerting or purging tanks, for padding cargo tanks or to
Chapter 7
clear lines.
Chapter 8 • Review the records and completed Ras for at least one operation where nitrogen had
Chapter 9 been received from shore within the last six months.
• Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with the procedures for receiving
Chapter 10
nitrogen from shore.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
8.99. All Types
Chapter 1
8.99.1. Were the Master and all officers directly involved in cargo transfer operations familiar
Chapter 2 with the company procedure for planning cargo and ballast transfers, and were records
Chapter 3
available to demonstrate that cargo operations had been planned in accordance with the
company procedure and conducted in accordance with the agreed plan?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 The company should have procedures for planning cargo and ballast transfers which described:
Chapter 6
• The factors that must be considered and documented within a cargo and ballast transfer plan.
• The operations which require a cargo and ballast transfer plan to be developed, such as loading, discharging,
Chapter 7 ballast exchange, internal transfer etc.
• The requirement to document the cargo tank atmosphere management processes and operational limits that
Chapter 8
will be utilised during cargo transfer operations.
Chapter 9 • The activities that must be included in the cargo and ballast transfer plan, such as tank cleaning, COW, gas
freeing, sampling, blending and the management of doping and additives, where applicable to the operation.
Chapter 10
• The review and approval process for cargo transfer plans.
Chapter 11 • The process to update a cargo and ballast transfer plan when circumstances change.
• The record keeping requirements for cargo and ballast transfers such that sufficient detail is recorded, within
Chapter 12
aggregated documents, to accurately reconstruct a cargo operation should the need arise.
275
5/27/2022
8.99. All Types
Chapter 1
8.99.1. Were the Master and all officers directly involved in cargo transfer operations familiar
Chapter 2 with the company procedure for planning cargo and ballast transfers, and were records
Chapter 3
available to demonstrate that cargo operations had been planned in accordance with the
company procedure and conducted in accordance with the agreed plan?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5 • Review the company procedures for planning cargo and ballast transfers.
• Review a recent cargo and ballast transfer plan and verify that it:
Chapter 6 o Contained the info required by the company procedures, included draught, trim and stress calculations for key stages
of the cargo and ballast operation.
Chapter 7
o Was signed by the C/O, deck officers and, where necessary, engineer officers for understanding.
Chapter 8 o Was signed by the Master for approval ‐ Was signed by the Terminal Representative.
• Review the records of the same cargo and ballast operation and verify that:
Chapter 9 o The sequence of cargo and ballast transfer followed the plan as presented.
o The atmosphere of cargo tanks was maintained according to plan.
Chapter 10 o The venting or vapour management system was used in accordance with the plan.
o COW or other specialist cargo operations were completed in accordance with the plan.
Chapter 11 o Requests for increasing and decreasing cargo transfer rates were noted with confirmation that the requested rate was
achieved.
Chapter 12
o Sufficient detail included within the aggregated cargo records to reconstruct the progress of cargo operation and
determine which tanks, pumps and lines were involved at any point during a cargo transfer.
8.99. All Types
Chapter 1
8.99.2. Were the Master and all officers with a direct responsibility for cargo, tank cleaning or
Chapter 2 ballast operations familiar with the requirements of the ISGOTT Ship/Shore Safety Checklist
(SSSCL) and, were appropriate sections of the SSSCL in use with all applicable provisions and
Chapter 3
agreements maintained throughout?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 The Company should have procedures that required the relevant sections of a Ship/Shore safety checklist (SSSCL),
conforming to ISGOTT 6 Ch. 25, are completed by the vessel during every cargo, tank cleaning or ballast operation at a
Chapter 6 terminal or during STS transfer operations. The relevant sections of the SSSCL may be provided by the terminal or the
Chapter 7 ship may use one provided by the company. Duplication is not expected but the vessel must confirm that any checklists
provided by the terminal meet ISGOTT 6.
• Review the company procedures.
Chapter 9 • Review the sections of SSSCL that had been completed and were in use to monitor ongoing operation & for each
Chapter 10 checklist:
o Select at least 1 item and request that an officer having responsibility for cargo operations describes how the
Chapter 11 check is performed or documented.
o Select at least 1 item that required some form of evidence and verify that the evidence was available.
Chapter 12
o Compare the SSSCL remarks against the list of open defect reports recorded in the defect reporting system as
provided by the vessel during the opening meeting; verify that any defective equipment relevant to SSSCL had
been declared appropriately.
276
5/27/2022
8.99. All Types
Chapter 1
8.99.2. Were the Master and all officers with a direct responsibility for cargo, tank cleaning or
Chapter 2 ballast operations familiar with the requirements of the ISGOTT Ship/Shore Safety Checklist
(SSSCL) and, were appropriate sections of the SSSCL in use with all applicable provisions and
Chapter 3
agreements maintained throughout?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5 • Review Part 6, pre‐transfer agreements, of the SSSCL and:
o Verify that each agreement had been properly completed if it was applicable to the operation.
Chapter 6
o Select any 2 items and verify that the agreements had been understood and complied with during the
Chapter 7 operations to that point.
o Verify that the cargo & ballast transfer plan had been updated to reflect the agreements documented in
Chapter 8
the pre‐transfer conference.
Chapter 9 • Review Part 8, repetitive checks during and after transfer and verify that:
o Repetitive checks were being completed in accordance with the pre‐transfer agreement.
Chapter 10 o A responsible officer had conducted the repetitive checks on deck at least once during each watch.
Chapter 11 • Verify that all items included in the relevant sections of the SSSCL and agreed during the pre‐transfer
conference were maintained in compliance with the guidance provided in ISGOTT Sixth Edition.
Chapter 12 Where the inspection was being conducted at anchor or idle, the inspector should review the SSSCL used during
a recent cargo operation and compare the responses in the SSSCL with Bridge Log Book and cargo records.
8.99. All Types
Chapter 1
8.99.3. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures which provided
Chapter 2 guidance on the level of supervision and support for cargo / port operations, and were
operations supervised and supported by an appropriate team in accordance with the company
Chapter 3
procedures?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 • The Company should have procedures to provide guidance on the minimum number of personnel that should form the cargo
operations team on duty during operations. The procedures should consider the various stages of a cargo operation and
Chapter 6 describe the level of supervision and support required in the cargo control room and on deck while:
o Connecting or disconnecting cargo hoses or marine loading arms.
Chapter 7 o Commencing loading or discharging operations.
o Bulk loading and/or discharging.
Chapter 8
o Topping off cargo tanks ‐ COW or cargo tank cleaning.
Chapter 9 o Stripping cargo tanks ‐ Draining lines.
• The procedure should additionally consider that:
Chapter 10 o Moorings and means of access must be properly tended throughout all port operations, and that cargo operations such
as topping off, sounding tanks during stripping and surveying activities may distract the deck support rating(s) for
Chapter 11 considerable periods of time.
o Simultaneous operations may require additional personnel to be on duty to supervise and conduct any SIMOPS without
Chapter 12
impacting the cargo operation and mooring system management.
• The cargo / port operations planning documentation should include details of the supervision and manning required for the
various stages of operations.
277
5/27/2022
8.99. All Types
Chapter 1
8.99.3. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures which provided
Chapter 2 guidance on the level of supervision and support for cargo / port operations, and were
operations supervised and supported by an appropriate team in accordance with the company
Chapter 3
procedures?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5 • Review the company procedures.
Chapter 6 • Review the cargo / port operations planning documentation for a recent cargo operation and
verify that the supervision and support levels identified for the various stages of the operation
Chapter 7
were in accordance with the guidance provided by the company procedures.
Chapter 8 • Verify that the supervision and support available for cargo / port operations was maintained in
Chapter 9 accordance with the cargo / port planning documentation and the company guidance for cargo
operations team.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
8.99. All Types
Chapter 1
8.99.4. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for checking and
Chapter 2 testing cargo and ballast system valves, and were the valves and the remote control system in
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 The Company should have procedures for the regular checking and testing of cargo and ballast system valves,
including manifold valves, which included the:
Chapter 6
• Frequency of checks and tests of cargo and ballast system valves.
Chapter 7 • Records to be kept of checks and tests of cargo and ballast system valves.
• Procedure for checking of the time taken for power operated valves to move from open to closed, and from
Chapter 8
closed to open.
Chapter 9 • Procedure for verifying the accuracy of local and remote valve indicators.
• Procedure for testing the emergency valve control mode and local hand pumps, as applicable to the vessel.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11 These procedures may form part of the PMS and should refer to:
• The valve manufacturer’s instructions.
Chapter 12 • The ship’s drawings which identified the designed opening and closing times for each size, type and service of
power operated valve fitted in the cargo and ballast systems.
278
5/27/2022
8.99. All Types
Chapter 1
8.99.4. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for checking and
Chapter 2 testing cargo and ballast system valves, and were the valves and the remote control system in
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
Chapter 5 • Review the company procedures for the regular checking and testing of cargo and ballast system valves.
• Review the records for valve testing which included:
Chapter 6
o The actual times recorded for opening and closing.
Chapter 7 o The verification of the accuracy of local and remote valve indicators.
• Observe the operation of cargo and ballast system valves to verify their condition and satisfactory operation.
Chapter 8
Chapter 9 o The company procedures.
o The required times for opening and closing of each size, type & service of power operated valve fitted in
Chapter 10 the cargo and ballast systems.
Chapter 11 o The actions to take if the opening and closing times for cargo or ballast system valves were not in
accordance with the designed valve operating speed.
Chapter 12 o The procedure to operate the emergency valve control mode and local hand pumps, as applicable to
the vessel.
8.99. All Types
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 maintenance, testing, calibration and comparison of the fixed cargo tank level gauging system,
and was the system in satisfactory condition and fully operational?
Chapter 3
The Company should have procedures for the operation, maintenance, testing, calibration and comparison of the
Chapter 5 fixed tank level gauging system, based on the manufacturer’s instructions, which included the:
Chapter 6
• Procedure & frequency for tests and calibrations.
Chapter 7 • Procedure & frequency for comparison checks against portable equipment or secondary tank level gauges,
Chapter 8 where practicable.
• Procedure, based on RA, to enable continued cargo transfer operations in the event of a failure of the fixed
Chapter 9 tank level gauging system or individual cargo tank fixed gauging device.
Chapter 10
• Records to be maintained.
Chapter 11 These procedures and records may form part of the PMS.
Chapter 12
279
5/27/2022
8.99. All Types
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 maintenance, testing, calibration and comparison of the fixed cargo tank level gauging system,
and was the system in satisfactory condition and fully operational?
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
Chapter 6 • Review the records of maintenance, testing, calibration, and comparison checks of the fixed tank
Chapter 7
level gauge system.
• Request the accompanying officer to demonstrate the use of the fixed tank level gauging system
Chapter 8 to verify operation and familiarity.
Chapter 9 • Interview the accompanying officer to verify their familiarity with:
o The company procedures.
Chapter 10
o The actions to take if the fixed gauging system or an individual cargo tank fixed gauging
Chapter 11 device is defective or unreliable.
Chapter 12 o The setting and monitoring of any level alarms built into the fixed tank level gauging system.
8.99. All Types
Chapter 1
8.99.6. Were the Master and deck officers familiar with the company procedure and
Chapter 2 manufacturer’s instructions for the periodic testing of the stability and loading instrument(s),
and were records maintained to confirm that tests had been completed in accordance with the
Chapter 3
procedure?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 • By IMO regulation, all oil tankers, chemical tankers and gas carriers must be fitted with a stability instrument,
capable of verifying compliance with intact and damage stability requirements.
Chapter 6
• It is a class requirement that all oil tankers, chemical tankers and gas carriers >100 m in length must be fitted
Chapter 7 with a loading instrument for calculating SF/BMs etc. In most cases these requirements will be combined in
one stability and loading instrument, which may be computer based.
Chapter 8
• Class approvals for stability and loading instruments are made under a type approvals process. Type‐approval
Chapter 9 certificates are generally valid for periods of not more than 5 years.
• IMO: MSC.1/Circ.1221 states that the validity of type approval certificate itself has no influence on the
Chapter 10
operational validity of a product accepted and installed onboard and that a product manufactured during the
Chapter 11 period of validity of the type approval certificate need not be renewed or replaced due to the expiry of such
type approval certificate.
Chapter 12 • The Company should have procedures requiring the vessel’s stability and loading instrument to be tested
regularly, at least at annual and special surveys, using approved test conditions and test records maintained.
280
5/27/2022
8.99. All Types
Chapter 1
8.99.6. Were the Master and deck officers familiar with the company procedure and
Chapter 2 manufacturer’s instructions for the periodic testing of the stability and loading instrument(s),
and were records maintained to confirm that tests had been completed in accordance with the
Chapter 3
procedure?
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
• Review the company procedures for the testing of the stability and loading instrument.
Chapter 7
• Review a recent test of the stability and loading instrument and verify that the condition used
Chapter 8 was an approved test condition and that the test was conducted in accordance with the
Chapter 9 manufacturer’s instructions.
• Verify that the stability and loading instrument had been tested at Special Survey in the presence
Chapter 10
of a class surveyor.
Chapter 11 • Verify that the accompanying officer was able to demonstrate the damage stability function of
Chapter 12
the instrument.
8.99. All Types
Chapter 1
8.99.7. Where the vessel was subject to loading restrictions and/or intact stability concerns at
Chapter 2 any phase of a voyage or cargo operation, had the company developed procedures to manage
these restrictions and/or concerns, and were the Master and cargo officers familiar with the
Chapter 3
company procedures?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 • The Company should have identified whether the vessel was subject to:
o Restrictions in the density of the cargoes that may be loaded onboard or in any individual tanks.
Chapter 6
o Restrictions in the filling height for any tanks onboard and the phases of operations for which the
Chapter 7 restrictions are in place.
o Intact stability concerns due to large width cargo tanks, double bottom tanks without a centreline
Chapter 8
bulkhead or “U” section ballast tanks.
Chapter 9 o Any other loading limitations or stability concerns.
• Where vessel is subject to any of the above restrictions or concerns the Company should have procedures to:
Chapter 10 o Warn the vessel staff of the limitations imposed ‐ Instruct them to avoid any limitations or concerns
Chapter 11 entirely, or where this is not possible ‐ Advise actions to take to mitigate the restrictions and/or concerns.
• Where a vessel had undergone any weight variations, such as installation of a scrubber or ballast treatment
Chapter 12 plant or, major structural modifications, the Company should have arranged for the loading instrument and
stability booklet to be updated.
281
5/27/2022
8.99. All Types
Chapter 1
8.99.7. Where the vessel was subject to loading restrictions and/or intact stability concerns at
Chapter 2 any phase of a voyage or cargo operation, had the company developed procedures to manage
these restrictions and/or concerns, and were the Master and cargo officers familiar with the
Chapter 3
company procedures?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5 • Review the vessel loading and stability manual, identify whether the vessel was subject to any loading
restrictions or stability concerns and verify that the vessel operator’s declaration in the pre‐inspection
Chapter 6
questionnaire was correct.
Chapter 7 • Where the vessel was subject to loading limitations or stability concerns, review the company procedures
that addressed the issues and verify that:
Chapter 8
o Cargo & ballast plans had been developed to address the loading limitations or stability concerns.
Chapter 9 o Warning signs had been posted to inform the cargo officers of the loading limitations and/or stability
concerns.
Chapter 10 o Cargo & ballast records confirmed that company procedures relating to limitations & concerns had been
Chapter 11 complied with.
• Where a vessel had undergone any weight variations, such as installation of a scrubber or ballast treatment
Chapter 12 plant or, major structural modifications, verify that the loading instrument and stability booklet had been
updated as appropriate.
8.99. All Types
Chapter 1
8.99.8. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for the selection,
Chapter 2 inspection, testing and storage of cargo transfer hoses, and were the hoses in satisfactory
condition?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 The Company should have procedures for selection, inspection, testing, storage and retirement of cargo transfer hoses that
Chapter 5 included the:
• Selection of compatible hoses for specific cargo service.
Chapter 6 • Information to be clearly marked on the hoses including:
o The manufacturers name or trademark.
Chapter 7 o Identification of the standard specification for manufacture.
Chapter 8
o Maximum working pressure.
o Month and year of manufacture and manufacturers serial number.
Chapter 9 o Indication that the hose is electrically continuous, electrically discontinuous, or semi‐continuous.
o The type of service for which it is intended e.g. oil, product, petroleum gas.
Chapter 10 o Last hydrostatic test date and test pressure.
o Any operational restrictions for use of the hose such as minimum bend radius (MBR) or maximum flow rate.
Chapter 11
• Details and frequency of:
Chapter 12 o Hydrostatic tests.
o Tests for electrical continuity.
282
5/27/2022
8.99. All Types
Chapter 1
condition?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
• Records and documentation to be maintained, including:
Chapter 5 o Inspection and pressure/elongation/electrical continuity test data.
o Compatibility data.
Chapter 6
o Service history.
Chapter 7 o Hose retirement criteria.
o Guidance on hose storage.
Chapter 8
• Hoses should be tested to 1.5 times their MWP.
Chapter 9 • Cryogenic hoses can only be safely tested under controlled conditions ashore which may include liquid
nitrogen as the test medium. Cargo hoses used on LNG carriers should be pressure tested prior to each use,
Chapter 10 however, vessels conducting transfers using hoses on a regular basis, may have an alternative procedure to
Chapter 11 ensure the integrity of the transfer hoses.
• Cryogenic hoses should be protected from sunlight and weather and kept covered except when in use. Blank
Chapter 12 flanges must be fitted to each end each and the hoses charged internally with nitrogen.
• Portable cargo pump hoses should be tested and maintained as per manufacturers guidelines.
8.99. All Types
Chapter 1
condition?
Chapter 3
Chapter 5
• Review the certificates, compatibility data, inspection records, service history and, hydrostatic
Chapter 6 and electrical continuity test records for the cargo transfer hoses.
Chapter 7 • Inspect ship supplied cargo transfer hoses which were either in use and/or stored onboard.
Chapter 8
o The company procedures.
Chapter 9 o The inspections that must be conducted before a cargo transfer hose is used.
Chapter 10
o Any limitations or special handling considerations for the hoses provided onboard.
o The records that must be maintained for cargo transfer usage.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
283
5/27/2022
8.99. All Types
Chapter 1
8.99.9. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for periodically
Chapter 2 verifying the accuracy of cargo and ballast system controls and indicators, and were legible
and up-to-date pipeline and/or mimic diagrams available at the cargo control location(s) and in
Chapter 3
the pumproom(s) as applicable?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 Pipeline and/or mimic diagrams should be updated to reflect any modifications made to cargo and/or ballast systems.
Cargo and ballast system controls and indicators should be accurate and fully operational, including, where fitted:
Chapter 6 • Draft, trim and list monitoring.
• Control and monitoring of cargo and ballast pumps and associated plant.
Chapter 7
• Control of cargo and ballast system valves and indication of status.
Chapter 8 • Temperature monitoring in cargo and ballast plant and pipeline systems.
• Pressure and vacuum monitoring in cargo and ballast plant and pipeline systems.
Chapter 9 • Cargo and ballast system information mimics/displays.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11 • All cargo and ballast system pressure, temperature and level sensors are periodically verified for accuracy.
• Cargo information displays & mimics are checked periodically to verify that info is being transferred & displayed
Chapter 12 correctly.
• Cargo and ballast system controls incorporated into cargo info displays & mimics are functioning properly.
These procedures may form part of the PMS.
8.99. All Types
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Sight the pipeline and/or mimic diagrams in the CCR or cargo control position as appropriate.
Chapter 5
Inspect cargo and ballast system controls and indicators in the cargo control room / pump control station and verify that:
Chapter 6 o Where fitted, remote pressure indicators are connected and displaying a value which is appropriate to status & operation of the system
or pipeline being monitored.
Chapter 7 o Where fitted, remote temperature indicators are connected & displaying a value which is appropriate to status & operation of system or
pipeline being monitored.
Chapter 8 o Where fitted, the draught, list and trim indicators are displaying an accurate value.
o Cargo and ballast pump speed controls are functional and pumps are being controlled from CCR / pump control station and not from
Chapter 9 the machinery space or locally.
o Cargo and ballast system mimic diagrams or displays, where fitted, are showing the correct status of valves, pumps, temperatures,
Chapter 10 pressures, levels and any other monitoring function designed to be displayed.
Chapter 11 Where the vessel is provided with a cargo and/or ballast pumproom sight the pipeline and/or mimic diagrams. Inspect the cargo and

ballast system and verify that:
Chapter 12 o Where fitted, pressure indicators are connected and displaying a value appropriate to status & operation of the system or pipeline
being monitored.
o Where fitted, temperature indicators are connected and displaying a value which is appropriate to the status and operation of the
system or pipeline being monitored.
284
5/27/2022
8.99. All Types
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5 The degree of automation and monitoring will determine what will be in scope while addressing this question.
Chapter 6 The following principle should be adopted:
Chapter 7 • If a cargo or ballast system or plant monitoring device or system is provided, it should be functioning and
Chapter 8
accurate.
• If the information from an individual monitoring device or system is transmitted to a central mimic diagram
Chapter 9 or information display, then the information displayed should be accurate.
• If a cargo or ballast pump or component of plant is designed to be remotely controlled, then the remote
Chapter 10
control and status indication should be functioning.
Chapter 11 • Where a cargo or ballast system is designed to operate automatically then the system should be maintained
to permit automatic operation where required or permitted.
Chapter 12
• Where isolated faults develop which cannot be rectified with the staff and resources available onboard, they
should be addressed through the defect reporting system.
8.99. All Types
Chapter 1
8.99.10. Were the Master and officers a familiar with the company procedures for the
Chapter 2 inspection and maintenance of the bonding arrangements for independent cargo tanks,
process plant and cargo pipelines and, were these arrangements in satisfactory condition?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
• The Company should have procedures for the inspection and maintenance of the bonding arrangements for
Chapter 5 independent cargo tanks, process plant and cargo pipelines. These may form part of the PMS.
• Effective bonding of independent cargo tanks, process plant and cargo pipelines may be achieved in a
Chapter 6
number of ways, such as direct structural connection to the deck or bonding straps.
Chapter 7 • All bonding arrangements should be maintained to the original design and size.
Chapter 9 • Examine visible bonding arrangements, such as bonding straps, for cargo tanks/process plant/piping systems
Chapter 10 which are not permanently connected to the hull of the ship.
• Where the application of bonding straps or other forms of bonding was inconsistent or apparently missing,
Chapter 11 review the ship’s drawings to confirm whether bonding straps or arrangements were required in the area of
Chapter 12
concern.
• Interview the accompanying officer to verify understanding of bonding arrangements fitted & their purpose.
285
5/27/2022
8.99. All Types
Chapter 1
8.99.11. Was there a procedure in place to complete an independent check of the entire cargo
Chapter 2 liquid, vapour and venting pipeline system prior to commencement of cargo operations to
ensure that valves, vacuum breakers, sampling connections, drains and unused connections or
Chapter 3
interconnections were correctly set, and blanked or capped, where appropriate?
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Inspection Guidance
The Company should have procedures to ensure that the entire cargo liquid, vapour and venting
Chapter 6
pipeline system is independently cross‐checked by a second person under the control of the
Chapter 7 responsible officer prior to commencement of cargo operations. The procedure should describe:
Chapter 8
• Who may conduct the independent cross‐checks of the cargo pipelines.
Chapter 9 • When the cross‐checks should be completed.
Chapter 10 • Where the verification of the cross‐checks should be recorded.
Chapter 11
Cargo pipeline system drains, stub pieces, sampling connections and vacuum breakers should be
Chapter 12 fitted with valves and either capped or blanked.
8.99. All Types
Chapter 1
8.99.11. Was there a procedure in place to complete an independent check of the entire cargo
Chapter 2 liquid, vapour and venting pipeline system prior to commencement of cargo operations to
ensure that valves, vacuum breakers, sampling connections, drains and unused connections or
Chapter 3
interconnections were correctly set, and blanked or capped, where appropriate?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5 • Review company procedures to ensure that that the entire cargo liquid, vapour and venting pipeline system is
independently cross‐checked by a 2nd person under the control of the responsible officer prior commencement of
Chapter 6 cargo operations.
Chapter 7 • Review the cargo records for a recent cargo operation and verify that the independent cross‐checks on the entire
cargo liquid, vapour and venting pipeline system had been completed and documented in accordance with the
Chapter 8 company procedure.
• Verify that all cargo pipeline system drains, stub pieces, sampling connections and vacuum breakers were closed and
Chapter 9
capped or blanked as necessary.
Chapter 10 • Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with:
o The procedure & process to ensure that that the entire cargo liquid, vapour & venting pipeline system is
Chapter 11 independently cross‐checked by a 2nd person under the control of the responsible officer prior to
commencement of cargo operations.
Chapter 12
o Who was required to conduct the independent cross‐checks in accordance with the company procedure.
o How and where the result of the independent cross‐check was recorded.
286
5/27/2022
Chapter 9
Mooring and Anchoring
9.1. Mooring equipment Management
Chapter 1
9.1.1. Were the Master and deck officers familiar with the company procedures for the
Chapter 2 testing and correct operation of the mooring winch brakes, and were records available to
demonstrate that brakes had been tested periodically, after maintenance or when there was
Chapter 3
evidence of premature brake slippage?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 The Company should have mooring procedures in alignment with MEG4 and the information recommended for
inclusion within the Mooring System Management Plan (MSMP). The procedures should provide guidance on:
Chapter 6 • The frequency of winch brake testing (MEG4 6.4.6.1).
Chapter 7 • The method of winch brake testing (MEG4 6.4.6.2).
• The method of ensuring the correct torque is applied (MEG4 6.4.6.5).
Chapter 8 • The primary brake holding load – adjusted to 60% of the Ship Design MBL (MEG4 6.3.4.1).
• The use of split drum winches – not more than 1 layer of mooring line on tension side (MEG4 6.3.4.1), and/or
Chapter 9
• The use of undivided drum winches (6.4.5.1)
Chapter 10 • The reeling of lines onto drums – band brakes are designed to work effectively in only 1 direction (MEG4 6.3.4.2).
The intent of the question is to establish that Master and deck officers are familiar with the requirement for brake
Chapter 11 testing, operation of mooring winch brake systems and, the indicators during operation when maintenance and further
testing is required.
Chapter 12
The Company should upload 1 photo relating toe brake mechanism for a representative mooring winch to the document
portal prior to inspection. This will be linked to this question within the inspection editor.
287
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5 • Review the procedure for the testing and operation of the vessel’s mooring winch brakes.
• Review the MSMP ‐ verify that it contained the mooring winch brake testing records or, where records were
Chapter 6 integrated within the ships document control system, that location of mooring winch brake testing records was
Chapter 7 identified.
• Review the mooring winch brake testing records and verify that the brakes had been tested and adjusted to render
Chapter 8 at 60% of the ship’s design MBL at least annually and after completion of any modification or maintenance, or where
there had been evidence of premature brake slippage or related malfunctions.
Chapter 9
• During the physical inspection of the vessel verify that winches were marked with:
Chapter 10 o The correct reeling direction (MEG4 6.3.4.2).
o The date of the last brake test ((MEG 6.4.6.1).
Chapter 11 o The primary brake holding load value as set (MEG4 6.3.6).
o The torque setting value where a brake is set with a torque wrench (MEG4 6.4.6.5).
Chapter 12
o The pressure gauge setting value where a brake is initially applied by a hydraulic assist (MEG4 6.4.6.5).
o Where applicable, an indicator to show that a brake was set to the correct value.
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
• During the inspection verify that:
Chapter 6 o The lines were reeled on the winch drums in the correct direction (MEG4 6.3.4.2).
o Where winches were provided with split drums, that there was no more than a single layer of line on the
Chapter 7
tension side of a drum (MEG4 6.3.4.1).
Chapter 8 o Where winches were provided with split drums, that the number of turns of mooring line on the tension
side of a drum were at least the minimum number as indicated within the LMP (MEG4 6.3.3.1).
Chapter 9
o The winch brakes were set in accordance with any instructions or indicators provided.
Chapter 10 o The winch drum brake assemblies including brake lining material and brake drum surface were in order
and well maintained.
Chapter 11 o The brake test equipment was safely stored as per manufacturer’s instructions, if kept onboard.
Chapter 12 • Where safe to do so and the appropriate personnel are available, observe the adjustment of a mooring line.
288
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
9.1.2. Was the vessel satisfactorily moored in accordance with both the terminal mooring
Chapter 2 plan and the mooring configurations permitted by the vessel’s Mooring System Management
Plan?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have the MSMP to include optimal, sub‐optimal and alternate mooring patterns permissible to
Chapter 5 assist vessel staff in evaluating a terminal’s published or proposed mooring plan prior to mooring. The mooring patterns
should identify:
Chapter 6 • The minimum number of lines that must be deployed in each service (spring, breast, head and stern) to meet the
design mooring constraint requirement for the standard environmental criteria at a conventional tanker jetty.
Chapter 7
• The minimum number of lines that must be deployed in each service (breast, quarter & stern) to meet the design
Chapter 8 mooring constraint requirement for the standard environmental criteria at a CBM (multi‐buoy mooring).
• Environmental conditions where additional mooring lines are required to be utilised and in what service.
Chapter 9 • The permissible alternative mooring configurations where shore hooks or bollards are not in the optimal position or
Chapter 10
are out of service.
• The horizontal angles of lines to the perpendicular of ship’s fore & aft axis and vertical angles of lines (in true
Chapter 11 elevation) with the vessel in the least favourable load state that are permitted for mooring lines in each service in
the standard or alternative mooring patterns.
Chapter 12 The Company should have a procedure for evaluating proposed mooring configurations which do not conform to, or
modify, the criteria upon which the MSMP was developed. This should include double banking operations at a berth.
Chapter 1
Plan?
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
• Review the MSMP and identify the permissible mooring configurations that may be used by the vessel to meet optimal,
Chapter 6 sub‐optimal and alternate mooring arrangements.
• Review the published terminal mooring plans for recent terminal visits and verify that there was a process to confirm
Chapter 7
that the vessel could comply with both the terminal mooring layout and the mooring patterns permitted by the MSMP.
Chapter 8 • Where the vessel was moored at the time of the inspection, verify that the mooring pattern employed was in
accordance with both the mooring plan published by the terminal and the MSMP. (Where the number of mooring lines
Chapter 9 required to be utilised between the terminal and vessel mooring plans was different, the plan requiring the higher
number of lines should be followed.)
Chapter 10 • Where the terminal mooring plan required the use of swamp lines or other shore‐lines to supplement the vessel’s
Chapter 11
mooring system, verify that these lines had been utilised.
Chapter 12
289
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Plan?
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
Chapter 5 • Verify that the vessel’s mooring lines were deployed within the permitted horizontal angles to the perpendicular of ships
fore and aft axis and vertical angles of lines as documented within the MSMP.
Chapter 6 • Where the vessel was required to undertake a mooring analysis as part of the terminal acceptance process, verify that
the vessel had moored in accordance with the mooring analysis provided to the vessel.
Chapter 7 • Where the vessel was involved in a double banking operation* verify that;
Chapter 8 o A mooring analysis was available to confirm that both the inside and outside vessel were provided with adequate
restraint,
Chapter 9 o That the inside vessel was not bearing the load of both vessels on its own moorings unless the mooring analysis
determined that the moorings deployed were sufficient for the forces of both vessels,
Chapter 10 o That both the inside and outside vessels were moored in accordance with the agreed mooring plan.
Chapter 11
The mooring of a bunker barge or small coastal tanker to outboard side does not constitute a double banking operation*.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
9.1.3. Were the Master, deck officers, and ratings involved with mooring operations, familiar
Chapter 2 with the content of the Line Management Plan and was the plan maintained in accordance with
company instructions with mooring line, mooring tail and joining shackle certificates available
Chapter 3
for each item included within the Line Management Plan?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
The Company should have developed a Line Management Plan (LMP) in alignment with MEG4 Table 5.2 with guidance on:
Chapter 6 • Maintenance; including line installation, storage, repair, line maintenance and wear zone management.
• Inspection; including routine inspection and detailed inspection. (detailed in MEG4 5.4.3)
Chapter 7 • Service life and retirement criteria; including determination of expected service life and planned retirement criteria policy. (it
may also include residual strength testing, but this is not a required aspect of an LMP)
Chapter 8 • General, including hazards and precautions, operator’s SMS and ship HSE procedures, training and competence requirements,
and roles and responsibilities.
Chapter 9
The LMP can be a standalone tool, or it may be integrated into existing safety or maintenance management systems as hard or
Chapter 10 electronic copy, or both. LMP info must be stored in a location that is easy for all users to access, e.g. on a computer that can be
accessed from both the ship and shore or compiled in a single physical location. It should be easy for users to access the LMP from a
Chapter 11 single physical or virtual location. This is necessary for access by all officers and crew who will be involved in mooring operations.
Chapter 12 The vessel should retain manufacturer’s product certificates onboard which will be referenced to the location of each mooring line,

mooring tail and joining shackle onboard, both in use and available as spares.
290
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5 • Review the mooring line, mooring tail and joining shackle certificates and verify that the vessel has an effective process in
place to identify each individual item and associate it with its location onboard and its manufacturer’s product certificate.
Chapter 6 • Review the Line Management Plan (LMP) and verify that, as a minimum, the four key categories and their subcategories
identified in table 5.2 (MEG4) had been addressed and populated with the relevant information.
Chapter 7 • Identify the stated service life criteria for mooring lines & tails and verify that lines & tails in service are within the company’s
stated service life criteria. This may be elapsed time or hours in service since being brought into service & will be defined
Chapter 8
within the LMP.
Chapter 9 • Review the inspection history for the mooring lines and tails and verify that inspections had been carried out as required by
the inspection intervals defined within the LMP.
Chapter 10 • Review the inspection history and where a line had parted in service verify that an incident investigation report was onboard
that identified the causes of the line failure.
Chapter 11 • Review the maintenance records and verify that mooring lines had been “end for ended” or moved to a different service in
accordance with the LMP to meet the wear zone management expectations.
Chapter 12
• Identify whether the Company permitted the splicing of mooring lines and if so verify that the persons permitted to conduct
the splicing had been identified within the LMP. Where specialist training was required verify that the identified persons had
received the training.
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5 During the physical inspection:
• Randomly inspect several accessible mooring lines, mooring tails and joining shackles and verify that they
Chapter 6
were in good order and that they were tagged or marked to permit identification within the LMP and the
Chapter 7 associated retained product certificate.
• Where the vessel was provided with mooring tails connected to the mooring lines verify that the connection
Chapter 8
method was in accordance with the LMP and MEG4 5.8.4, connection devices (MEG4 figure 5.20) or cow
Chapter 9 hitch (MEG4 Figure 5.21) and that these were correctly fitted.
• Interview at least one rating involved in mooring operations and verify that they were familiar with the
Chapter 10
location of the LMP and, who was responsible for the splicing of the mooring lines or any other relevant item
Chapter 11 that would confirm familiarity with the LMP and its content.
Chapter 12
291
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
9.1.4. Did all mooring lines, mooring tails and joining shackles, including those carried as
Chapter 2 spares, meet industry guidelines?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 The Company should have provided the vessel with a MSMP (MEG4 1.9) which consisted of the following:
Chapter 5
• Part A – General ship particulars
Chapter 6 • Part B ‐Mooring equipment design philosophy (MEG4 1.9.2.2).
Chapter 7 o 4. Design loads, safety factors and strength for required mooring lines and fixed equipment.
• Part C – Detailed list of mooring equipment (MEG4 1.9.2.3).
Chapter 8 o 3. Loose equipment (mooring lines, tails, pennants, joining shackles etc.).
Chapter 9 • Part D – Inspection, maintenance and retirement strategies/principles.(MEG4 1.9.2.4)
o 4. A Mooring Line Management Plan covering all mooring ropes and wires in use including joining
Chapter 10 shackles.
Chapter 11
• Part E – Risk and change management, safety of personnel and human factors
• Part F – Records and documentation
Chapter 12 • Part G – Mooring System Management Plan Register
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
Chapter 5 Mooring lines shall have a Line Design Break Force (LDBF) of 100‐105% of the Ship Design MBL (MEG4 5.2.1).
Chapter 6 Synthetic mooring tails shall have a Tail Design Break Force (TDBF) of 125‐130% of the Ship Design MBL (MEG4
Chapter 7 5.8.2).
Chapter 8 The LDBF for nylon (polyamide) mooring lines should be specified as break tested wet, because nylon lines
Chapter 9 change strength characteristics once exposed to water and generally do not fully dry to their original
construction state.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Connection devices (joining shackles) should have a safety factor of three, i.e. the breaking load is 3 times the
SWL. The SWL of the joining shackle should always be equal to, or greater than, the working load limit (WLL) of
Chapter 12 the lines in the mooring system. (MEG4 5.8.4.1).
292
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
Chapter 5 • Review the MSMP and identify the values for Ship Design MBL and the working load limit (WLL) of the lines.
• Review the detailed list of mooring equipment and loose equipment and verify that;
Chapter 6 o The mooring lines had a Line Design Break Force (LDBF) in the range of 100‐105% of the Ship Design
Chapter 7 MBL.
o The mooring tails, where provided, had a Tail Design Break Force (TDBF) in the range 125‐130% of the
Chapter 8 Ship Design MBL.
Chapter 9 o The joining shackles, where provided, had a SWL equal to, or greater than, the working load limit (WLL)
of the mooring lines in the system. (it is not expected that the SWL and WLL exactly match).
Chapter 10 • Where the vessel had a summary list of all mooring system loose equipment with the values of LDBF and
Chapter 11
TDBF tabulated, verify that the values for the components were accurate by spot‐checking the values against
several manufacturer’s product certificates.
Chapter 12
9.2. Emergency Towing Arrangement
Chapter 1
9.2.1. Were the Master and all officers familiar with the vessel specific emergency towing
Chapter 2 procedure, and was the emergency towing equipment, where fitted, in satisfactory condition
and ready for immediate use?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 The Company should have provided the vessel with an emergency towing procedure in the form of an Emergency Towing
Chapter 5 Booklet (ETB) in accordance with SOLAS regulation and supporting IMO Marine Safety Circulars.
Chapter 6
Inspector Actions
Chapter 7 • Review the vessel specific emergency towing procedure (Emergency Towing Booklet ‐ ETB).
• Verify a copy of the ETB was available on the bridge, in the ship’s office or CCR and in the forecastle space.
Chapter 8 • Where fitted, inspect the emergency towing arrangements fitted to vessel and verify that the ETB is aligned with the
Chapter 9 equipment provided.
• Inspect the physical condition of the emergency towing equipment and confirm that all visible and accessible parts are
Chapter 10 functional with evidence of recent maintenance.
• Verify, by sampling, that the ancillary equipment listed in the ETB is present in the correct location.
Chapter 11 • Interview the accompanying officer to verify they understand how to deploy the emergency towing equipment.
Chapter 12
293
5/27/2022
9.3. Mooring and Anchoring Procedures
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 anchoring operations, and were records available to confirm that recent anchoring operations
had been conducted in compliance with company expectations?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 The Company should have anchoring procedures and supporting checklists in alignment with
Chapter 5 • TMSA KPI 6A.2.2 and its best practice guidance.
• OCIMF Anchoring Systems and Procedures First Edition 2010:
Chapter 6 o 5.1 Anchoring Procedures.
o 5.1.1 General.
Chapter 7
o 5.1.2 Preparations for anchoring.
Chapter 8 o 5.1.3 Methods of anchoring.
o 5.1.4 Commonly used anchoring procedures.
Chapter 9 o 5.2.1 Watchkeeping Responsibilities.
o 5.2.2 Securing the Cable at Anchor.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11 The procedures should provide specific guidance on the environmental limits for:
• Safe anchoring operations as determined by company risk assessment processes.
Chapter 12 • Remaining at anchor.
• Recovering the anchor and proceeding to sea.
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
• Review the company procedures for anchoring operations.
Chapter 5
• Verify that the anchoring procedures gave guidance relating to:
Chapter 6 o The maximum depth of water for normal anchoring operations.
o The maximum recommended wind strength and wave height for anchoring.
Chapter 7 o The weather conditions when the company requires the vessel to depart an anchorage.
o The required level of supervision for the anchoring party.
Chapter 8
o The minimum composition of the anchoring party.
Chapter 9 o The required checks on the windlass, anchors, stoppers and power systems prior to use.
• Review a recent anchoring operation to:
Chapter 10 o Verify that the necessary appraisal and planning checklists were completed prior to the operation.
o Verify that checks on the windlass, anchor, stopper and power systems had been completed prior to the operation.
Chapter 11
o Verify that the weather conditions during the time at anchor were within company guidelines for remaining at
Chapter 12 anchor.
o Verify that the depth of water at the anchoring location was within the limits provided by the company.
294
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Chapter 5
During the physical inspection:
Chapter 6 • Inspect the windlass, anchors, chain and stoppers and verify that they were in satisfactory
Chapter 7 condition.
• Verify that the accompanying officer was familiar with the anchor brake adjustment setting and
Chapter 8
other checks on equipment required to be completed prior to and after anchoring.
Chapter 9 • Verify that the anchors were free to be used in an emergency – anchor chain not hard up against
Chapter 10
the stopper bar when in port or at sea.
• Verify that, when the vessel was in port, the anchor lashings were removed unless specifically
Chapter 11
required to be in place in accordance with terminal regulations.
Chapter 12
9.4. Mooring and Anchoring Team Management
Chapter 1
9.4.1. Were the Master, deck officers and deck ratings familiar with the company procedure
Chapter 2 that defined mooring team supervision and composition for the various mooring and anchoring
operations likely to be undertaken, and was evidence available that each mooring work space
Chapter 3
had been supervised and manned in accordance with company expectations?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
Chapter 6 The Company should have procedures aligned with the MSMP which described:
Chapter 7 • The onboard roles permitted to supervise mooring and anchoring teams.
• Where the identified supervisor was not a licensed officer, the additional training and
Chapter 8
competency evaluations that an individual must have undertaken prior to undertaking a
Chapter 9 supervisory role.
Chapter 10 • The minimum number of ratings that must form part of the mooring team(s) for the various
types of mooring and anchoring activities expected to be conducted onboard the vessel.
Chapter 11
• The roles and responsibilities of the mooring and anchoring team members.
Chapter 12 • How the mooring team will be informed of expectations around the mooring or anchoring
operation, for example, though the use of toolbox talks or risk assessment review.
295
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
9.4.1. Were the Master, deck officers and deck ratings familiar with the company procedure
Chapter 2 that defined mooring team supervision and composition for the various mooring and anchoring
operations likely to be undertaken, and was evidence available that each mooring work space
Chapter 3
had been supervised and manned in accordance with company expectations?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
• Review the procedure which defined the supervision and composition of mooring and anchoring teams.
Chapter 6 • Review the sections of MSMP relating to Manning & Training, and Mooring Operations Plans and Procedures
and verify that they had been developed to include detail of the mooring team composition and workspace
Chapter 7
supervisor.
Chapter 8 • Where the procedure required the review of a risk assessment prior to a mooring or anchoring operation,
review the risk assessment for a recent operation and verify that it reflected the operation undertaken.
Chapter 9 • Interview one deck officer and one rating involved in mooring operations to understand who supervised
Chapter 10 mooring and anchoring operations during recent operations and whether there was a clear understanding of
company expectations around mooring team composition, supervision & toolbox talks prior to each
Chapter 11 operation.
Chapter 12
• While conducting the review of hours of rest records, consider the required mooring and anchoring team
composition and verify that vessel records gave an accurate representation of the vessel complement
involvement in mooring and anchoring operations.
Chapter 1
9.4.2. Were the deck officers and ratings involved with mooring operations familiar with the
Chapter 2 safe operation of the mooring winches and the dangers of working with and around mooring
lines during mooring operations and while under tension?
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
The Company should have mooring procedures which include:
Chapter 6
• The role of the supervisor and their responsibilities.
Chapter 7
• The role of the supporting ratings and their responsibilities.
Chapter 8 • The hand signals that should be used during mooring operations.
• The requirement for a toolbox talk or risk assessment review prior to commencing mooring operations.
Chapter 9 • The areas that should be considered as hazardous due to potential snap‐back from parted mooring lines.
Chapter 10 • The safety features of a mooring winch that must be tested prior to use and be consistently used during
winch operation.
Chapter 11 • Where stoppers are to be used, the correct type and application for the lines in use.
Chapter 12
Procedures may reference industry guidance such as OCIMF: Effective Mooring.
296
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
9.4.2. Were the deck officers and ratings involved with mooring operations familiar with the
Chapter 2 safe operation of the mooring winches and the dangers of working with and around mooring
lines during mooring operations and while under tension?
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4 Review the mooring procedure which included operational safety during mooring operations and in areas where
mooring lines were under tension.
Chapter 5
During the physical inspection verify that:
Chapter 6 • The winch drums were out of gear and pins were available to lock the clutch in position while engaged & disengaged
• The mooring winch control levers were free to move and returned to the neutral position when released.
Chapter 7 • The mooring winch control levers were clearly marked with the direction of heave and slack.
Chapter 8 • That there was no evidence that mooring winch controls had been tied or secured to permit unmanned operation.
• The winch controls were mounted to give the operator a clear sight of the operational working area and other
Chapter 9 mooring team members.
• The working platforms around the winches gave uninterrupted safe access to mooring drums and winch controls.
Chapter 10 • The winch controls were sited to make sure that the operator was not at risk from moving parts.
Chapter 11 • Stoppers in use were appropriate for the types of mooring line in service and were of sufficient strength.
• Warning signs and barriers were in place to warn personnel of the dangers posed by mooring operations and
Chapter 12 mooring lines under tension.
• Interview one deck officer and one rating who had been involved in mooring operations to establish how they had
been informed of the dangers of snap‐back and how to keep safe during mooring operations.
9.5. STS Operation Management
Chapter 1
9.5.1. Were the appropriate industry checklists used during STS operations, and were
Chapter 2 comprehensive records of these operations maintained?
Chapter 4 The Company should have procedures to requiring:
Chapter 5
• Checklists identified by the OCIMF* STS Transfer Guide for “at sea” or “in port” cargo specific operations are
Chapter 6 completed before, during and after each relevant STS operation and, as required by an individual checklist.
• Checklists are retained onboard along with other STS related records applicable to the type of STS operation,
Chapter 7
which may include;
Chapter 8 o The JPO (Joint Plan of Operations) as provided by the service provider.
o Risk assessment as submitted by the Service Provider.
Chapter 9 o Detailed Mooring Plan of participating vessels.
Chapter 10 o Copies of certificates of fenders and hoses.
o Notification to coastal authorities.
Chapter 11 o Details of Drills associated with the specific STS Operation.
Chapter 12
o Records of Crew Experience.
o Post operation feedback/ assessment by the Master.
297
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
9.5.1. Were the appropriate industry checklists used during STS operations, and were
Chapter 2 comprehensive records of these operations maintained?
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4 • Review the procedures which required the vessel to use the checklists identified by the OCIMF* STS Transfer
Guide.
Chapter 5
• Where the vessel was involved in an STS operation, review the STS checklists completed during the operation
Chapter 6 thus far and verify that the correct checklists, including a standard pre‐transfer checklist, had been utilised
and that they had been completed appropriately.
Chapter 7
• Where the vessel had conducted STS operations during the previous twelve months, select the records for an
Chapter 8 STS operation at random and verify that the following records were available as applicable to the operation:
o The JPO (Joint Plan of operations) as provided by the service provider,
Chapter 9
o Risk assessment as submitted by the Service Provider,
Chapter 10 o Detailed Mooring Plan of participating vessels.
o Copies of certificates of fenders and hoses,
Chapter 11 o Notification to coastal authorities,
Chapter 12 o Details of Drills associated with the specific STS Operation,
o Records of Crew Experience,
o Post operation feedback/ assessment by the Master.
Chapter 1
9.5.2. Where the vessel was involved in an “at sea” STS operation, was an accurate Joint
Chapter 2 Plan of Operation available onboard, were the Master and deck officers familiar with its content,
and were operations being conducted in accordance with its requirements?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have procedures which required that a JPO is developed, available onboard and reviewed
Chapter 5 by vessel staff prior to an STS operation commencing.
• Review the Joint Plan of Operations for the STS operation and verify that:
Chapter 7 o The plan contained all information required by the OCIMF* guidance.
o The RA(s) had been developed to address the risks of the specific location and type of STS operation being
Chapter 8
undertaken.
Chapter 9 o The means for eliminating the potential for incendive sparking between the two ships had been addressed.
o There was evidence that any mandatory notifications to comply with local or government requirements
Chapter 10 had been made.
o That the vessel had been moored in accordance with the agreed mooring plan.
Chapter 11
o That the vessel was complying with any environmental operating parameters.
Chapter 12 o The unmooring sequence was documented.
• Interview one deck officer and one deck rating to gauge their level of understanding of the Joint Plan of Operation
for the STS operation being undertaken.
298
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
9.5.3. Were the Master, officers and deck ratings familiar with the vessel’s STS Operations
Chapter 2 Plan?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 The Company should have an STS Operations Plan as follows:
• For vessels involved in transfer of MARPOL Annex 1 cargo – Administration approved.
Chapter 5
• For vessels involved in transfers of all other liquid cargoes – As recommended best practice.
Chapter 6
Copies should be available in the following locations:
Chapter 7
• Bridge.
Chapter 8 • Cargo transfer control station.
• Engine Room.
Chapter 9
Chapter 10 And should contain the following information:
• A step‐by‐step description of the entire STS operation.
Chapter 11 • A description of the mooring and unmooring procedures and arrangements, including diagrams where
Chapter 12 necessary, and procedures for tending the oil tankers’ moorings during the transfer of cargo.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 Plan?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
• A description of the cargo and ballast transfer procedures, including those used while underway or
Chapter 5
anchored and procedures for connecting and testing the integrity of cargo hoses and hose to manifold
Chapter 6 interface, topping off cargo tanks and disconnecting cargo hoses.
Chapter 7 • The titles, locations and duties of all persons involved in the STS operation.
• Procedures for operating the emergency shutdown & communication systems & for rapid breakaway.
Chapter 8 • A description of the drip trays and procedures for emptying them.
Chapter 9 • Procedures for reporting spillages of oil into the water.
• An approved contingency plan.
Chapter 10
• A cargo and ballast plan.
Chapter 11
The Master should ensure that the STS Operations Plan on board is current and should require all
Chapter 12
personnel on board to follow the procedures in the plan.
299
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 Plan?
• Review the STS Operations Plan and verify that:
Chapter 4
o A copy of the STS Operations Plan is located on the bridge, in the cargo transfer station and in the E/R.
Chapter 5 o Where the vessel carries MARPOL Annex 1 cargo, the STS Operations plan has been approved by the
Chapter 6 Flag.
o Where the vessel did not carry MARPOL Annex 1 cargo, the STS Operations Plan was developed in
Chapter 7
alignment with Annex A of the OCIMF* Ship to Ship Transfer Guide.
Chapter 8 o Where the vessel was involved in an STS operation, that the STS Operations Plan had been updated
with:
Chapter 9
The mooring plan for the current operation.
Chapter 10 The cargo plan for the current operation.
• Where the vessel was involved in an STS operation during the inspection or had conducted an STS
Chapter 11
operation within the previous 2 months, interview one rating and gauge their familiarity with the
Chapter 12 location and content of the STS Operations Plan.
9.6. Single Point Mooring
Chapter 1
9.6.1. Were the vapour collection system manifold arrangements suitable for hose handling
Chapter 2 at buoy moorings?
For vapour collection system manifolds on vessels likely to conduct operations at buoy moorings (SPM, CBM and tandem
Chapter 4 berthing):
Chapter 5 • The vapour manifolds should be supported to the same strength as the cargo manifolds.
• The hose rails should be of the same strength & construction throughout their length, extend beyond the vapour
Chapter 6 manifolds to permit use at buoy moorings and be fitted with stopper plates at both forward & aft ends of hose rails.
• A closed chock should be fitted at the ship's side in line with the vapour manifolds.
Chapter 7
• A cruciform bollard should be fitted in line, or nearly in line with the vapour manifolds to allow securing of the
Chapter 8 vapour hose hang‐off chain.
• Two deck pad‐eyes of a size sufficient to secure a 16‐inch floating hose should be provided, one to either side of the
Chapter 9 line from the closed chocks to the vapour manifolds.
• Fittings for securing the vapour hose should be permanently marked with their safe working load (SWL).
Chapter 10
• Means to thoroughly drain the vapour manifold should be provided at the lowest point in the vapour collection
Chapter 11 system line to avoid risk of liquid carry‐over into the floating hose.
Chapter 12
Inspector Actions
• Inspect the vapour collection system manifolds and verify that the required fittings are in place.
300
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
9.6.2. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for mooring at an
Chapter 2 SPM or F(P)SO and were the fittings required accurately described in the HVPQ?
The Company should have procedures for mooring at SPM or F(P)SO terminals that included:
Chapter 4 • Preparations for mooring at SPM or F(P)SO terminals.
• Instructions for safe mooring at SPM or F(P)SO terminals.
Chapter 5 • Inspection and maintenance of the bow stoppers.
Chapter 6
The Company should have confirmed via the HVPQ 10.6 whether the ship meets the latest OCIMF recommendations for
Chapter 7 equipment employed in the bow mooring of conventional tankers at single point moorings, and supplied the following details:
• Single Point Mooring (SPM) Equipment
Chapter 8 o Details of the bow chain stoppers.
o Details of the closed bow fairleads.
Chapter 9
o Distance between bow fairleads.
Chapter 10
o Distance between the bow fairlead and the bow stopper.
o Distance from the bow stopper to the roller lead or winch drum.
Chapter 11 o The lead from the bow stopper to the winch drum.
o The capacity of the winch drum.
Chapter 12 • Bow Mooring Arrangement Diagram.
This question will only be assigned to vessels where HVPQ question 10.6.2 (are bow chain stoppers fitted) is answered
affirmatively.
Chapter 1
9.6.2. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for mooring at an
Chapter 2 SPM or F(P)SO and were the fittings required accurately described in the HVPQ?
Chapter 4
• Review the company procedures for mooring at SPM or F(P)SO terminals.
Chapter 5
• Review the certificates for the bow stoppers and closed bow fairleads, particularly if these have
Chapter 6 been modified or retro‐fitted.
Chapter 7
• Review, the records of inspection and maintenance of the bow stoppers
• Inspect the arrangements at the bow for mooring to an SPM or F(P)SO terminal.
Chapter 8
• During the inspection verify, as far as practicable, that the HVPQ accurately describes the
Chapter 9 arrangements for mooring at an SPM or F(P)SO terminal.
• Interview the accompanying officer to verify their familiarity with the company procedures for
Chapter 10
mooring at SPM or F(P)SO terminals.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
301
5/27/2022
Chapter 10
Machinery Spaces
10.1. Engineering Procedures
Chapter 1
10.1.1. Had the Chief Engineer prepared Standing Orders, supplemented by Daily Orders,
Chapter 2 which emphasised and reinforced the company expectations with regards to engine room
management and, if so, had all engineer officers signed to acknowledge their understanding of
Chapter 3
the same?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
The Company should have procedures which require the C/E to create Standing Orders, supplemented by Daily Orders,
Chapter 6 which reiterate key machinery space management expectations of the company along with any additional expectations of
the C/E.
Chapter 7
The Standing Orders should include:
Chapter 8 • UMS procedures and arrangements for periodic inspections of the machinery space.
• Entry into the machinery space during periods of UMS, including use of dead man alarm and/or communicating
Chapter 9 procedures to be utilised.
• Actions when a machinery space alarm is activated, particularly when equipment involved was identified as critical.
Chapter 10 • The actions to be taken when machinery or equipment is found to be defective.
• Instructions for supervision and documentation of bilge water, sludge, FO and LO transfers and disposal.
Chapter 11
• Instructions for the supervision and documentation of incinerator use.
Chapter 12 • Instructions and limitations for hot and cold work in the machinery space workshop.
• Calling the C/E.
302
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
10.1.1. Had the C/E prepared Standing Orders, supplemented by Daily Orders, which
Chapter 2 emphasised & reinforced the company expectations with regards to engine room management
and, if so, had all E/R officers signed to acknowledge their understanding of the same?
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
Chapter 6 The Daily Orders should include the anticipated time(s) of:
Chapter 7
• Changing the E/R status for navigational operations.
• Conducting machinery tests for navigational operations.
Chapter 8 • Changing the number of generators to accommodate operational needs.
Chapter 9 • Commencing changing of fuel grades or other measures to comply with environmental
restrictions.
Chapter 10
• When the incinerator and/or OWS may be used in compliance with regulations and company
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
10.1.1. Had the C/E prepared Standing Orders, supplemented by Daily Orders, which
Chapter 2 emphasised & reinforced the company expectations with regards to engine room management
and, if so, had all engineer officers signed to acknowledge their understanding of the same?
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5 Potential Grounds for a Negative Observation
Chapter 6
• There was no company procedure defining the requirement for the Chief Engineer to prepare
Chapter 7
Standing and Daily Orders.
Chapter 8 • The Standing Orders did not define the Chief Engineer’s expectations in respect of the
Chapter 9 elements discussed previously.
• The engineer officers onboard at the time of the inspection had not signed the Standing
Chapter 10
Orders, (unless they had only joined that day).
Chapter 11 • The watchkeeping engineer officers had not signed the Chief Engineer’s Daily Orders for
understanding.
Chapter 12
303
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
10.1.2. Were the Chief Engineer and engineer officers familiar with the company procedures
Chapter 2 for testing main propulsion, steering gear, thrusters and power generation plant prior to use
and at critical points during a voyage or operation, and were checklists and log book entries
Chapter 3
completed as required?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
Chapter 6 The Company should have procedures/checklists for preparing and testing all machinery necessary to ensure
that vessel can be safely and efficiently manoeuvred at all stages of the voyage. These should include all checks
Chapter 7 and/or tests required by international & local regulations and reflect the equipment fitted to vessel. The
Chapter 8 procedures should define:
• Which items of machinery and equipment are required to be checked and/or tested pre‐arrival, pre‐
Chapter 9 departure and/or pre‐transit.
Chapter 10
• What functions of each item of machinery or equipment is required to be checked and/or tested.
• Who will conduct the checks and/or tests.
Chapter 11 • When the checks and tests are required to be carried out.
• The record keeping requirements for the checks and tests that have been completed.
Chapter 12
• The actions to take when equipment is found to be defective during the testing process.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 for testing main propulsion, steering gear, thrusters and power generation plant prior to use
and at critical points during a voyage or operation, and were checklists and log book entries
Chapter 3
completed as required?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5 • Review the procedures which defined the machinery tests required to be carried out pre‐arrival, pre‐
Chapter 6
departure and at defined stages during a voyage or operation.
• Review a recently completed pre‐arrival, pre‐departure and/or pre‐transit machinery check list or record
Chapter 7 and verify that the required tests were completed as per company expectations.
Chapter 8
• Randomly select an item from the pre‐arrival, pre‐departure and/or pre‐transit machinery check list and
verify that the accompanying E/R officer understood how to complete the test or check.
Chapter 9
Potential Grounds for a Negative Observation
Chapter 10
• There was no documented procedure for testing and checking equipment and machinery at defined points
Chapter 11 in the voyage.
• The accompanying engineer officer was unfamiliar with the machinery testing process or any test or check
Chapter 12
that was required to be carried out by the vessel specific checklist.
304
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
10.1.3. Were the Chief Engineer and engineer officers familiar with company procedures for
Chapter 2 periodic rounds and monitoring of the machinery space, and were log book entries and
checklists available to confirm that the rounds had been completed as required?
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
The Company should have procedures, supplemented by checklists, which described the
Chapter 6 requirement for monitoring the machinery space(s) and include:
Chapter 7
• Requirements for routine machinery space rounds by the engineer officer on watch.
• Vessel and operation specific checklists to ensure machinery space rounds are conducted
Chapter 8 thoroughly with local instrument readings recorded for comparison with remote values.
Chapter 9 • Checklists to reflect the equipment and machinery fitted onboard.
Chapter 10
Expected Evidence
Chapter 11 • Procedures which defined the requirement for routine monitoring of machinery spaces.
Chapter 12 • Engine room operational records and checklists for recent voyages.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 periodic rounds and monitoring of the machinery space, and were log book entries and
checklists available to confirm that the rounds had been completed as required?
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6 • The accompanying engineer officer was unfamiliar with the company
Chapter 7 procedures for monitoring the machinery spaces.
Chapter 8 • The accompanying engineer officer was unfamiliar with any of the
Chapter 9 checks required to be conducted during the machinery space rounds
Chapter 10 and included on the checklists.
Chapter 11 • There were no vessel specific checklists for periodic rounds of the
Chapter 12 machinery space.
305
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 periodic machinery space rounds and monitoring of the machinery space during both manned
and unmanned (UMS) periods, and were log book entries and checklists available to confirm
Chapter 3
that the inspections had been completed as required?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
Chapter 6 The Company should have procedures/checklists which described the requirement for monitoring
Chapter 7
the machinery space(s) in both the manned and unmanned mode and include:
• Requirements for routine machinery space rounds by the engineer officer on watch.
Chapter 8 • Requirements for machinery space rounds and checks prior to beginning a UMS period.
Chapter 9 • Maximum period which a machinery space may be operated in the unmanned mode according
to the governing rules of Class and/or Flag.
Chapter 10
• Vessel and operation specific checklists to ensure machinery space rounds are conducted
Chapter 11 thoroughly with local instrument readings recorded for comparison with remote values.
Chapter 12 • Circumstances in which UMS operations will be permitted which should include the proper
functioning of all systems required to be fitted under SOLAS II‐1 Part E.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 periodic machinery space rounds and monitoring of the machinery space during both manned
and UMS periods, and were log book entries and checklists available to confirm that the
Chapter 3
inspections had been completed as required?
Chapter 4
Expected Evidence
Chapter 5
• Machinery space operational records for recent voyages.
Chapter 6 • Machinery space alarm records for recent voyages.
Chapter 7
Chapter 8 • There was no procedure that required periodic machinery space rounds during manned
Chapter 9 periods and prior to unmanned periods.
• The accompanying engineer officer was unfamiliar with the company procedures for
Chapter 10
monitoring the machinery spaces during manned and unmanned operation.
Chapter 11 • The vessel had been operated in the manned mode during open sea passages due to reliability
Chapter 12 concerns where the cause of the concern was not entered into the defect reporting system for
rectification.
306
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
10.1.5. Were the Chief Engineer and engineer officers familiar with the operation, inspection
Chapter 2 and testing of the means provided to control propulsion machinery and related auxiliary
systems locally in the event of failure of a remote-control system?
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
The Company should have procedures for the operation, inspection and testing of the
Chapter 6 means provided to control propulsion machinery and related auxiliary systems locally, in
Chapter 7 the event of failure of a remote‐ control system which defined:
Chapter 8
• The actions to take in the event of a failure of a remote‐control system
• The frequency of inspection and testing of the local control systems.
Chapter 9
Ship‐specific operating instructions should be posted at each local control station.
Chapter 10 A means of communicating with the bridge should be provided at each local control
Chapter 11 station.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
10.1.5. Were the C/E and engineer officers familiar with the operation, inspection and testing
Chapter 2 of the means provided to control propulsion machinery and related auxiliary systems locally in
the event of failure of a remote-control system?
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5 • Review the procedures that defined the operation, inspection and testing of the means provided to control
the propulsion machinery and related auxiliary systems locally.
Chapter 6
• Review inspection & testing records available at local control stations or in the engine control room.
Chapter 7 • If necessary, review the records of inspections and tests carried out contained within the PMS.
• If the vessel was fitted with a CPP, interview a nav. officer to verify their familiarity with the failure mode
Chapter 8
of the CPP.
Chapter 9
Chapter 10 • The accompanying engineer officer was not familiar with the purpose, operation and testing of the
propulsion local control systems.
Chapter 11
• Ship specific operating instructions for the local control systems were not posted close to the control
Chapter 12 locations.
• The means of communication from any local control location was not ready for immediate use or was
defective
307
5/27/2022
10.2. Machinery Status
Chapter 1
10.2.1. Were the officers familiar with the starting procedure for the emergency generator and
Chapter 2 were records available to demonstrate that the emergency generator had been tested according
to company procedures?
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 The Company should have procedures for the starting and testing of emergency D/G, including:
Chapter 6 • Primary and secondary starting arrangements.
Chapter 7
• Arrangements for supplying the emergency switchboard.
• Description of the fuel system.
Chapter 8 • Instructions for testing the emergency generator and switchboard, including on‐load tests
Chapter 9 and testing of consumers for continued satisfactory performance.
• The required frequency of testing and method of recording the results.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11 Starting instructions for the em. generator should be displayed adjacent to the equipment.
Chapter 12
All officers should be fully familiar with these starting instructions.
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Where the emergency generator starting source relies on a single starter motor, a spare starter
Chapter 5 motor should be available. This spare starter motor should be tested periodically.
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Periodic testing of the em. generator should be carried out under load, but to do this may require
the vessel to be blacked out. This testing under load is not to be conducted during an inspection.
Chapter 8
Chapter 9 The requirement to provide full load requirements for at least 18 hours may not necessarily mean a
full fuel tank. A minimum quantity to provide enough fuel for this requirement should have been
Chapter 10
established and marked on the tank level gauge.
Chapter 11 If necessary, the em. generator fuel tank must be charged with fuel for use in sub‐zero
Chapter 12 temperatures.
The position and identification of closing devices for the em. generator fuel supply must be marked.
308
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
Chapter 5 • Provided it is safe to do so, witness the starting of the emergency generator by primary and secondary
methods.
Chapter 6
• Verify that the voltage and frequency displayed on the emergency switchboard when the emergency
Chapter 7 generator was running were appropriate.
• Sight the level in the emergency generator fuel tank.
Chapter 8
• Check maintenance records for the emergency generator to verify that generator had been routinely run
Chapter 9 on load for sufficient time to ensure that normal running temperatures and pressures had been achieved.
• Check records to verify spare starter motor had been tested in accordance with company procedures.
Chapter 10 • Interview a deck officer, if present, to verify their familiarity with emergency generator starting and
Chapter 11 operating procedures.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 for the regular inspection, maintenance and testing of the ship’s emergency batteries, and were
the batteries fully charged and in satisfactory condition?
Chapter 3
Chapter 5 The Company should have procedures for the regular inspection, maintenance and testing of the emergency battery source
Chapter 6
of electrical power, including:
• Inspection of the batteries.
Chapter 7 • Assessment of the condition of the batteries.
• Periodic testing of the complete emergency battery system including bringing it onload as part of a blackout
Chapter 8 simulation test.
• The battery retirement criteria based on the maximum service life and/or functional condition.
Chapter 9
These activities should be integrated into the ship’s operational maintenance routine.
Chapter 10
Emergency batteries must be capable of supplying the designed power load for up to 18 hours (refer to SOLAS Ch II‐ 1 Reg
Chapter 11 43) and should be maintained in a fully charged condition.
Chapter 12
This question will only be allocated to vessels where the source of emergency electrical power was declared as batteries.
309
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 for the regular inspection, maintenance and testing of the ship’s emergency batteries, and were
the batteries fully charged and in satisfactory condition?
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
• Sight and if necessary, review the company procedures for the regular inspection, maintenance and testing of the
Chapter 5 emergency battery source of electrical power.
Chapter 6 • Review the records of inspection and periodic testing, including bringing it onload as part of a blackout simulation test.
• Inspect the emergency battery compartment to verify the batteries are in satisfactory physical condition.
Chapter 7 • During the inspection of the machinery space, verify that the emergency batteries are fully charged, and the battery
charger is functional.
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
• The accompanying officer was not familiar with the periodic testing of the complete emergency battery system including
Chapter 10
bringing the system online as part of a blackout simulation test.
Chapter 11
• The metal terminals of the batteries were exposed and not protected by rubber or plastic caps or other protective devices
to prevent arcing or shorting.
Chapter 12 • The batteries were not fully charged.
• The battery charger was defective in any respect.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 for the operation, calibration and maintenance of the exhaust gas cleaning system (EGCS), and
were required safety and regulatory measures being complied with?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
Chapter 5 The Company should have procedures, based on risk assessment(s), for the operation, calibration and

maintenance of the exhaust gas cleaning system (EGCS), including
Chapter 6
• The identification of associated hazards (exposure to chemicals, exhaust gases, location of installation and
Chapter 7 storage of gases/chemicals).
• The proper management and disposal of spent/waste chemicals and/or residual sludge/wastewater.
Chapter 8
• Crew training requirements.
Chapter 9 • PPE and signage requirements.
• Instructions for routine operations, calibration and maintenance.
Chapter 10
• Any restrictions imposed on the use of the type of EGCS fitted by local and/or national regulation.
Chapter 11 • Actions to be taken in the case of system failure or deviation from normal operation.
• Records to be kept.
Chapter 12
310
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Chapter 4 Expected Evidence
Chapter 5
Chapter 6 • Company procedures for the operation, calibration and maintenance of
Chapter 7 the EGCS.
Chapter 8 • Any checklists provided for the routine operation of the EGCS.
Chapter 9 • The planned maintenance records for the EGCS.
Chapter 10 • Risk assessments for the operation, calibration and maintenance of
Chapter 11
the EGCS.
Chapter 12
• Records of crew training or familiarisation in the operation, calibration
and maintenance of the EGCS.
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5 • There was evidence that the vessel had operated the EGCS in locations where the company
Chapter 6 procedure or local/national regulations prohibited its use.
Chapter 7
• The accompanying officer was not familiar with the company procedures for the operation,
calibration and maintenance of the EGCS.
Chapter 8 • There was no evidence of crew training or familiarisation in the operation, calibration and
Chapter 9 maintenance of the EGCS.
• The maintenance and calibration of the EGCS was not included in the PMS.
Chapter 10
• There were no risk assessments available for the operation, calibration and maintenance of
Chapter 11 the EGCS.
Chapter 12
311
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
10.2.4. Were seawater pipelines, sea chests and seawater pumps in satisfactory condition
Chapter 2 and free of temporary repairs?
Chapter 3
Chapter 5
The condition of seawater pipelines, sea chests, storm valves, hull penetrations and
Chapter 6 seawater pumps should be carefully checked to ensure that they are in satisfactory
Chapter 7 condition. All coatings should be checked for failure, particularly pitting and/or hard rust.
Chapter 8
Any necessary local repair should be treated as temporary only. Permanent repairs
Chapter 9
usually involve the removal and replacement of a length of piping. After the repair has
Chapter 10 been completed, pipe supports, or clips should be refitted. A permanent repair should
Chapter 11 only be done with classification society approved materials, and subsequently examined
Chapter 12
and approved by a class surveyor.
Chapter 1
10.2.4. Were seawater pipelines, sea chests and seawater pumps in satisfactory condition
Chapter 2 and free of temporary repairs?
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5 • A seawater pipeline, sea chest, storm valve, hull penetration or seawater pump was corroded
with pitting or hard rust/scale.
Chapter 6
• A seawater pipeline, sea chest, storm valve, hull penetration or seawater pump was leaking
Chapter 7 (give details and location).
Chapter 8 • A series of pipe clips and/or supports in a single pipe length were heavily corroded or missing.
• There was a temporary repair on a seawater pipeline e.g. a clamp or bandage.
Chapter 9
• There was an unacceptable ‘permanent’ repair on a seawater pipeline e.g. a doubler plate or
Chapter 10 coupling (give details and location).
Chapter 11
• Pipe clips or supports had not been replaced after a pipeline repair.
• There was no evidence of class approval for a completed repair to a seawater pipeline.
Chapter 12
312
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
10.2.5. Were the officers familiar with the company procedure for testing the bilge monitoring
Chapter 2 devices within their area of responsibility, and were records available to demonstrate that the
bilge monitoring devices and associated alarms had been tested in accordance with the
Chapter 3
company procedure?
Chapter 4
Chapter 6
The Company should have a process to identify all bilge level monitoring or flooding
Chapter 7 detection devices fitted to the vessel, whether required by regulation or not, and a procedure to
Chapter 8
require that each device and its associated alarm is periodically tested to verify that:
• The level monitoring or flooding device activates its associated alarm at the correct level.
Chapter 9
• Any delay programmed into the activation circuit remains in accordance with the design
Chapter 10 criteria.
• The remote warning alarm is activated in the locations required by regulation or by design of
Chapter 11
the shipbuilder where a device is fitted in addition to any regulatory requirement.
Chapter 12
The job instructions in the planned maintenance system may form part of the procedure.
Chapter 1
10.2.5. Were the officers familiar with the company procedure for testing the bilge monitoring
Chapter 2 devices within their area of responsibility, and were records available to demonstrate that the
bilge monitoring devices and associated alarms had been tested in accordance with the
Chapter 3
company procedure?
Chapter 4
Chapter 6
• The accompanying deck or engineer officer was not familiar with company procedure for the
Chapter 7 testing of the bilge level monitoring devices and water level detectors within their area of
Chapter 8 responsibility.
• There were no records available to demonstrate that the periodic testing of all bilge level
Chapter 9
monitoring devices and water level detectors and their associated alarms, including any
Chapter 10 activation delay, had been completed in accordance with company procedures.
Chapter 11
• There was evidence that bilge level monitoring devices or water level detectors and/or their
associated alarms and indicators had been modified or prevented from activating as designed.
Chapter 12
313
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 for the operation, inspection and testing of the emergency air compressor and emergency air
reservoir, and was the equipment in satisfactory condition?
Chapter 3
Chapter 5
The Company should have procedures for:
Chapter 6 • The operation, inspection and testing of the emergency air compressor and emergency air
Chapter 7 reservoir.
• The use of the emergency air compressor and emergency air reservoir for bringing machinery
Chapter 8
into operation from the dead ship condition.
Chapter 9
Chapter 10 The emergency air compressor should be regularly tested to the starting pressure of the diesel
generator. It may be powered by a hand‐started diesel engine or an electric motor.
Chapter 11
If driven by an electric motor, this should be supplied by the emergency source of power.
Chapter 12
The emergency air reservoir should be permanently maintained at the required pressure.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 for the operation, inspection and testing of the emergency air compressor and emergency air
reservoir, and was the equipment in satisfactory condition?
Chapter 3
Chapter 5
• Procedures for the operation, inspection and testing of the emergency air compressor and emergency air
Chapter 6 reservoir.
• Procedures for use of the emergency air compressor and emergency air reservoir for bringing machinery
Chapter 7 into operation from the dead ship condition.
Chapter 8 • Records of regular inspection and testing of the emergency air compressor and emergency air reservoir.
Chapter 10
• The accompanying officer was not familiar with:
Chapter 11 • The company procedures for the operation, inspection and testing of the emergency air compressor
Chapter 12
and emergency air reservoir.
• The actions necessary to use the emergency air compressor and/or emergency air reservoir to start a
main generator engine.
314
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
10.3.1. Was suitable deck insulation provided to the front and rear of electrical switchboards,
Chapter 2 and was it in good order?
Chapter 4
Insulating matting is only required at the front and rear of switchboards.
Chapter 5
Insulation matting should be suitable for the specific switchboard voltage but should be rated not less than IEC
Chapter 6
61111:2009 Class O or equivalent which has a safe working voltage of up to 1000 volts. Switchboards with
Chapter 7 voltages higher than 1000 volts should be protected with matting of a higher rating as appropriate, for example
Class 1 with a safe working voltage up to 7500 volts.
Chapter 8
Chapter 10
• Switchboards were not provided with deck insulation to the front and/or rear.
Chapter 11 • The deck insulation matting or composite insulating deck covering was incomplete or damaged.
• There was no certification, marking or other documentary evidence of the rating of the deck insulation
Chapter 12
provided.
Chapter 1
10.3.2. Were the engineer officers familiar with the purpose and setting of the insulation
Chapter 2 monitoring devices provided on the primary and secondary distribution systems, and were the
distribution switchboards free of significant earth faults?
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 6
The Company should have a procedure which:
Chapter 7 • Provided guidance for the setting values for the IMDs for 110v, 220v, 440v and any
Chapter 8 other voltages used for the primary or secondary distribution systems.
Chapter 9 • Where a vessel was only provided with earth insulation lamps as the IMD, provided
guidance on interpreting the indications for low insulation faults.
Chapter 10
• Required that the causes of earth faults are investigated and corrected with the aim
Chapter 11 to maintain the insulation values as close to infinity as possible.
Chapter 12
315
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
10.3.2. Were the engineer officers familiar with the purpose and setting of the insulation
Chapter 2 monitoring devices provided on the primary and secondary distribution systems, and were the
distribution switchboards free of significant earth faults?
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
• The accompanying officer was not familiar with the company procedure which
Chapter 7 provided guidance for the setting values for the IMDs for 110v, 220v, 440v and any
Chapter 8 other voltages used for the primary or secondary distribution systems.
Chapter 9 • The Insulation Monitoring Device for a 440‐volt system showed an insulation
resistance of less than 5 megohms.
Chapter 10
• The Insulation Monitoring Device for a 220‐volt system showed an insulation
Chapter 11 resistance of less than 2 megohms.
Chapter 12
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 for safe entry into the machinery space(s) during UMS operation, including the operation and
testing of the dead man alarm, if fitted?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
Chapter 5 The Company should have procedures for entry into the machinery space during periods of unmanned operation
which included but were not necessarily limited, to the following requirements:
Chapter 6
• During unattended periods, no‐one enters the machinery spaces alone, for example to carry out final
Chapter 7 evening checks, without first informing the bridge.
• During unattended periods, contact should be maintained with the bridge at frequent predetermined
Chapter 8 periods during any entry, unless a dead man alarm is fitted.
Chapter 9 • A rating should not be assigned any duty which involved them attending the engine room alone during
unattended periods.
Chapter 10 • Where a single engineer maintains a watch, contact is maintained with the bridge or cargo control room at
Chapter 11
frequent predetermined periods, unless a dead man alarm system is fitted.
• The dead man alarm, if fitted, is regularly tested and the results recorded.
Chapter 12 Safe entry requirements should be clearly posted at the normally accessible entrance to the machinery space
including the requirements to use the dead man alarm (where fitted) during rounds in the machinery space.
316
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 for safe entry into the machinery space(s) during UMS operation, including the operation and
testing of the dead man alarm, if fitted?
Chapter 3
Chapter 5
• An engineer officer and a navigation officer were not familiar with the company procedures
Chapter 6
for safe entry into the machinery space(s) during UMS operation.
Chapter 7 • Safe entry requirements were not clearly posted at the normally accessible entrance to the
Chapter 8
machinery space including the requirements to use the dead man alarm (where fitted) during
rounds in the machinery space.
Chapter 9 • The dead man alarm activation period was observed to be greater than that specified by the
Chapter 10 company procedures and/or greater than 30 minutes.
Chapter 11
ICS: Engine Room Procedures Guide. First Edition.
Chapter 12
On ships without a deadman alarm, the bridge should be contacted at least once every 15 minutes.
Chapter 1
10.3.4. Were the Chief Engineer and engineer officers familiar with the operation of the
Chapter 2 engineers’ alarm, and was the alarm in good order, tested regularly and the results recorded?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
The Company should have procedures for the operation and testing of the engineers’ alarm that included:
• A description of its operation.
Chapter 6 • Requirements for regularly testing the alarm and recording the results.
The engineers’ alarm must be capable of manual operation from the engine control room or at the manoeuvring
Chapter 7
platform as appropriate to indicate that assistance is needed.
Chapter 8 In UMS ships, the engineers’ alarm should act as a back‐up in the event the machinery alarm is not
acknowledged within a specified time, but not exceeding 5 minutes.
Chapter 9
Chapter 11
• Company procedures for the operation and testing of the engineers’ alarm.
Chapter 12
• Records of regular testing of the engineers’ alarm.
317
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
10.3.5. Were the Chief Engineer and engineer officers familiar with the operation of the
Chapter 2 machinery alarm, and was the alarm in good order, tested regularly and the results recorded?
Chapter 4 The Company should have procedures for the operation and testing of the machinery alarm that included:
• A description of its operation.
Chapter 5
• Requirements for regularly testing the alarm and recording the results.
Chapter 6
Expected Evidence
Chapter 7
• Company procedures for the operation and testing of the machinery alarm.
Chapter 8 • Records of regular testing of the machinery alarm.
Chapter 9
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
• The accompanying officer was not familiar with the company procedures for the operation and testing of
the machinery alarm.
Chapter 12 • A navigation officer was not familiar with the separate functions of the machinery alarm panel on the
bridge.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 inspection and regular testing of watertight doors, and were the watertight doors in satisfactory
condition?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
Chapter 5 • The Company should have procedures for the operation, inspection and regular testing of watertight
doors.
Chapter 6
• Doors and hatch covers normally closed at sea must be marked to indicate they must not be left open.
Chapter 7 • Watertight sliding doors should not be left in the emergency “doors closed” mode on the bridge. This
should be used for emergency and testing use only. The doors should be tested regularly, at least at every
Chapter 8
fire drill.
Chapter 9
Expected Evidence
Chapter 10
Chapter 11 • Company procedures for the operation, inspection and regular testing of watertight
Chapter 12
doors.
• Records of the inspection and testing of watertight doors.
318
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 inspection and regular testing of watertight doors, and were the watertight doors in satisfactory
condition?
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6 • The accompanying officer was not familiar with the company procedures for the operation,
Chapter 7 inspection and regular testing of watertight doors.
• An interviewed rating was unable to describe or demonstrate the local operation of a watertight
Chapter 8
door.
Chapter 9 • There were no instructions for use, local control, remote control and emergency operation, clearly
posted adjacent to a sliding watertight door.
Chapter 10
• A door or hatch cover that was required to be normally closed at sea was not clearly marked to that
Chapter 11 effect.
• A door or hatch cover that was required to be normally closed at sea was indicated as closed on the
Chapter 12
bridge but was in fact open, or vice‐versa.
• Watertight doors had not been tested at least at every fire drill.
Chapter 1
10.3.7. Was gas welding and cutting equipment in good order, and spare oxygen and
Chapter 2 acetylene cylinders stored apart in a well-ventilated location outside of the accommodation and
engine room?
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
Chapter 6 Fixed piping for the distribution of oxygen and acetylene carried in cylinders should be of welded
construction and bolted flanges are prohibited. Acetylene piping must be steel, oxygen piping
Chapter 7
should be steel or copper. Rubber or braided lines should not be used.
Chapter 8
Chapter 9 • Acetylene cylinders are normally coloured maroon.

• The colour of oxygen cylinders, although commonly blue, may vary.
Chapter 10
• Acetylene hoses are normally red, oxygen hoses are normally blue.
Chapter 11 • The use of propane in gas cutting and welding systems is prohibited.
Chapter 12
• The contents of a gas cylinder should always be confirmed from the label.
319
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
engine room?
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 6
Oxygen and acetylene should be stored:
Chapter 7 • In separate compartments except in the case of the cylinders that are in use, which
Chapter 8 may be stored in the same compartment.
Chapter 9 • Away from heat sources and should not be in heavy traffic areas to prevent accidental
knocking over or damage from passing or falling objects.
Chapter 10
• With the valve end up.
Chapter 11 • In areas free of combustible material and not exposed to salt or other corrosive
Chapter 12 chemicals.
Chapter 1
engine room?
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
• Gas cylinders were not properly secured in their location.
• Cylinders were stored with the valve end down.
Chapter 7
• There was no evidence that flashback arrestors and regulators had been
Chapter 8 • Inspected and checked annually.
Chapter 9
• Replaced with a new or refurbished unit 5 years from the date of manufacture or as per
manufacturer’s recommendations.
Chapter 10 • Oxygen and/or acetylene hoses were in visibly poor condition or damaged.
Chapter 11 • Propane was in use in the gas welding and cutting system.
• The appropriate PPE was not available for gas cutting and welding operations or was
Chapter 12
contaminated with oil, grease or other flammable substances.
320
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
10.3.8. Were engineer officers and ratings familiar with the safety precautions for the use of
Chapter 2 electric welding equipment, were these safety precautions posted, and was the equipment in
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 • Comprehensive safety precautions for electric welding should be posted in the engine room
Chapter 6 workshop or other appropriate location.
Chapter 7
• Electric cables should not be worn damaged or spliced. Electrode holders should be fully
insulated.
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
• The accompanying officer was not familiar with the safety precautions for electric welding.
Chapter 10 • An interviewed rating was not familiar with the safety precautions for electric welding.
• Safety precautions for electric welding were not posted in the engine room workshop or other appropriate location.
Chapter 11
• Equipment, such as welding curtains or screens, required by the safety precautions for electric welding were missing
Chapter 12 or in unsatisfactory condition.
10.4. Planned Maintenance System
Chapter 1
10.4.1. Were the responsible vessel staff familiar with the company procedure for managing
Chapter 2 and using the planned maintenance system, and was the system updated with an accurate
record of onboard maintenance and spare parts in accordance with the procedure?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
Chapter 5 The Company should have PMS along with procedures which must define:
• Which structure, machinery, equipment and components are managed through the PMS.
Chapter 6 • The identities and responsibilities of vessel staff for management and use of the PMS.
• The responsibility for completing planned and unplanned tasks within the due date, but where this is not
Chapter 7
possible, any grace periods allowable before escalating the matter to shore‐based management.
Chapter 8 • The process for gaining shore‐based approval for deferring a planned or unplanned task beyond the due date and
any grace period permitted elsewhere in the procedure.
Chapter 9 • The process for maintaining an accurate inventory of spare parts, including minimum stock inventory.
Chapter 10
• The management and reporting of defective equipment.
Chapter 11 The PMS should establish:
• The inspection, maintenance and test schedules for the structure, machinery, equipment, components and
Chapter 12 associated alarms.
• The identification of critical systems, their alarms and components.
321
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
10.4.1. Were the responsible vessel staff familiar with the company procedure for managing
Chapter 2 and using the planned maintenance system, and was the system updated with an accurate
record of onboard maintenance and spare parts in accordance with the procedure?
Chapter 3
Expected Evidence
Chapter 4
Chapter 5 • The company procedure for managing the planned maintenance system provided onboard.
• The PMS.
Chapter 6 • The manufacturer’s instructions for operating the electronic PMS provided onboard (if applicable).
• The spare parts inventory with critical equipment and spare parts identified.
Chapter 7
• The defect reporting system.
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
Chapter 10 • An interviewed deck officer or junior engineer was unfamiliar with the process of completing and recording
tasks assigned to them within the planned maintenance system.
Chapter 11 • Planned or unplanned maintenance tasks within the planned maintenance system were overdue, either by the
original due date or by more than the permitted grace period allowed by the company procedure, where defined,
Chapter 12
without documented shore‐based approval on a case by case basis.
Chapter 1
10.4.2. Did the vessel operator subscribe to a lube oil and hydraulic oil analysis program and
Chapter 2 was a procedure in place to act on the results and trends identified by the analysis?
Chapter 4
Chapter 5 The Company should have an oil analysis programme to monitor the

Chapter 6 quality of lubrication and hydraulic oils used in key items of machinery. The
Chapter 7 programme should be aligned with manufacturer’s recommendations and
Chapter 8 Classification Society requirements.
Chapter 9
Chapter 10 The Company should have a procedure setting out the actions to be taken
Chapter 11 when a deficiency in a sampled oil is identified in an oil analysis report.
Chapter 12 This procedure may form part of the vessel’s maintenance plan.
322
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
10.4.2. Did the vessel operator subscribe to a lube oil and hydraulic oil analysis program and
Chapter 2 was a procedure in place to act on the results and trends identified by the analysis?
Chapter 4 Where the results of oil analysis had resulted in either a “critical” (red) or “warning” (amber) alert:
• The testing company or shore‐based management had provided recommendations or instructions to rectify the
Chapter 5
condition.
Chapter 6 • There was evidence available that the recommendations or instructions to rectify the situation provided by the testing
company or shore based management had been complied with.
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
Expected Evidence
Chapter 9 • The lubricating and hydraulic oil analysis programme information documenting the oils subject to analysis.

• The lubricating and hydraulic oil analysis records for the previous two cycles of analysis.
Chapter 10
• Where analysis had resulted in a “critical” (red) or “warning” (amber) status, any follow up communications
Chapter 11 from shore‐based management.
• Maintenance records to demonstrate that the recommended or instructed actions had been taken to
Chapter 12
correct any “critical” or “warning” status.
10.5. Conventional Bunkering Management
Chapter 1
10.5.1. Were the Master, Chief Engineer, officers, and ratings involved in bunkering
Chapter 2 operations, familiar with the company bunkering procedures, and were records available to
demonstrate that bunker operations had been planned and conducted in accordance with the
Chapter 3
company procedure?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
Chapter 6 The procedure and supporting checklists should consider the following:
• Determining that there is adequate space for the volume of bunkers to be loaded.
Chapter 7
• Establishing maximum loading volume for all tanks.
Chapter 8 • Controls for the setting of bunker system valves.
• Determining loading rates for the start of loading, bulk loading and topping‐off.
Chapter 9 • Special precautions when loading into double bottom tanks.
Chapter 10 • Arrangements of bunker tank ventilation.
• Internal tank overflow arrangements.
Chapter 11 • Verification of gauging system operation and accuracy.
Chapter 12
• Alarm settings on overfill alarm units.
• Communication with the terminal to establish when bunkering can be undertaken.
323
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
company procedure?
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5
Chapter 6 • Communications with the bunker supplier prior to commencement.
• Methods of managing the handling of bunkers which have or may have H2S content.
Chapter 7
• Testing procedures for determining the presence of hydrocarbon or H2S vapours.
Chapter 8 • Method of determining the temperature of the bunkers during loading.
• Communications procedure for the operation, including emergency stop.
Chapter 9
• Manning requirements to execute the operation safely.
Chapter 10 • Monitoring of the bunkering operation and checking it conforms to the agreed procedure.
• Changing over tanks during loading.
Chapter 11 • Containment arrangements and clean‐up equipment to be available.
Chapter 12 • Draining manifolds upon completion of bunkering.
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
company procedure?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
Review a recent bunker transfer plan and verify that it:
Chapter 6
• Identified the personnel involved in the bunkering operation and their designated duties.
Chapter 7 • Ensured that personnel involved in the bunkering operation were not assigned conflicting tasks.
• Contained all information required by the company procedures.
Chapter 8
• Identified checks for flammable and toxic gas vapours within bunker tank ullage spaces that were required
Chapter 9 to be taken before, during and after bunkering.
• Was signed for understanding by all officers involved in the bunkering operation.
Chapter 10 • Was signed by both the Master and Chief Engineer for approval.
Chapter 11
Where the vessel was involved in a bunkering operation during the inspection or had been involved in a
Chapter 12 bunkering operation during the previous two months, interview one engine room rating to gauge their
familiarity with the bunkering plan and their role in the bunkering operation.
324
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 for bunker fuel oil sampling and analysis, and were records available to demonstrate that
samples had been taken and retained or analysed in accordance with the procedure?
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 5 The Company should have procedures which required bunker samples to be taken or obtained
Chapter 6 during each bunkering operation.
Chapter 7
The procedures should provide guidance as to the actions to be taken in the circumstance that:
Chapter 8 • Fuel oil analysis determine that the required specification was not met.
Chapter 9 • The vessel suffered any problems relating to fuel oil quality.
• Fuel quality was found to contravene MARPOL Annex VI.
Chapter 10
• The use of new bunkers before receipt of analysis results was unavoidable.
Chapter 11 • The vessel operator should have provided details of the marine distillate and marine residual
Chapter 12
fuel analysis program through the pre‐inspection questionnaire.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 for bunker fuel oil sampling and analysis, and were records available to demonstrate that
samples had been taken and retained or analysed in accordance with the procedure?
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Expected Evidence
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
• The company procedures for managing fuel oil samples, arranging fuel
Chapter 7
oil analysis and remedial actions to be taken where fuel oil quality
Chapter 8
raises a concern.
Chapter 9
• Bunker delivery notes for the previous 12 months.
Chapter 10
• Bunker analysis reports for the previous 12 months.
Chapter 11
• ORB Part I covering all FO bunkering operations for the previous 6
Chapter 12
months and the last bunkering if more than 6 months previously.
325
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
10.5.3. Were the Chief Engineer and senior engineer officers familiar with the company and
Chapter 2 vessel specific fuel changeover procedures, and were records available to demonstrate that
fuel grade changeovers had been completed in compliance with the procedures and MARPOL
Chapter 3
regulations?
Chapter 4
Chapter 6
The Company should have procedures, based on risk assessment, describing the changeover of fuel grades used
Chapter 7 onboard.
Due to the complexity of vessel types, available fuels, regulation and means to maintain compliance, there will
Chapter 8 be a variety of changeovers required. Procedures should be developed for the applicable‐to‐vessel fuel
Chapter 9 changeover processes.
Chapter 10 The fuel changeover procedures, supplemented by checklists where applicable, should be vessel specific and
Chapter 11
describe in detail the process to change from one grade of fuel to another.
Chapter 12 Where the fuel change process could potentially lead to blackout or loss of propulsion, the company should
define the circumstances or location where the fuel grade changeover may take place.
10.7. Fire Protection Measures
Chapter 1
10.7.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with the location, purpose, testing and operation
Chapter 2 of the vessel’s remote controls for fuel and lube oil valves, emergency fuel and lube oil pump
Chapter 3
shut-offs and oil tank quick closing valves, and were the systems in good working order?
Chapter 4
Chapter 6
Chapter 7 The Company should have procedures which defined the frequency and
Chapter 8 method of inspection, testing and maintenance of:
Chapter 9 • The remote controls for fuel and lube oil quick closing valves.
Chapter 10 • The emergency fuel and lube oil pump shut‐offs.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
326
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
10.7.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with the location, purpose, testing and operation
Chapter 2 of the vessel’s remote controls for fuel and lube oil valves, emergency fuel and lube oil pump
Chapter 3
shut-offs and oil tank quick closing valves, and were the systems in good working order?
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5 Inspect the remote controls for fuel and lube oil valves and emergency fuel and lube oil pump shut‐offs as
Chapter 6 shown on the vessel’s fire control plan and ensure they are in good order, not obstructed and clearly
marked/identified with the equipment they control.
Chapter 7 Inspect the oil tank quick closing valves and ensure they are in good order, properly armed and not secured open
Chapter 8
by external means.
Chapter 9 Where necessary review the inspection, testing and maintenance records for:
• The fuel and lube oil quick closing valves including their remote‐control systems.
Chapter 10
• The emergency fuel and lube oil pump shut‐off.
Chapter 11
Interview the accompanying officer to verify their familiarity with the location, purpose and operation of the
Chapter 12
remote controls for fuel and lube oil valves and emergency fuel and lube oil pump shut‐offs, and oil tank quick
closing valves.
Chapter 1
10.7.2. Were the Master and officers familiar with the measures to prevent fire in the
Chapter 2 machinery spaces caused by flammable liquid spraying onto a hot surface and, were the
Chapter 3
protective measures provided regularly inspected and properly maintained?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
Chapter 5 The Company should have procedures that set out the actions to be taken to ensure the integrity of measures in
Chapter 6
place to prevent fires in the machinery spaces caused by a flammable liquid spraying onto a hot surface.
Chapter 7 The procedures should require that periodic inspections of the machinery space take place to verify fire
prevention measures remain properly fitted or applied. The inspections should be included in the planned
Chapter 8
maintenance system as a distinct task or tasks.
Chapter 9
An appropriate ship‐specific checklist should have been developed to facilitate the inspection of the fire
Chapter 10
prevention measures in all machinery spaces.
Chapter 11
The procedure may also include the identification of risk areas and the detection of “hot‐spots” using laser‐
Chapter 12 based infrared heat tracers or thermographic imaging.
327
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
10.7.2. Were the Master and officers familiar with the measures to prevent fire in the
Chapter 2 machinery spaces caused by flammable liquid spraying onto a hot surface and, were the
Chapter 3
protective measures provided regularly inspected and properly maintained?
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6 • The records of periodic inspections verifying that fire prevention measures in the
Chapter 7 machinery spaces relating to hot surfaces and flammable liquids were missing or
Chapter 8 incomplete.
Chapter 9
• The accompanying officer was unfamiliar with the company procedures that set out
the actions to take to ensure the integrity of the measures in place to prevent fires
Chapter 10
in the machinery spaces caused by a flammable liquid spraying onto a hot surface.
Chapter 11 • The accompanying officer was unfamiliar with the fire prevention measures required
Chapter 12 to be fitted in the machinery spaces.
Chapter 1
10.7.3. Were the main engine crankcase oil mist detectors, engine bearing temperature
Chapter 2 monitors or equivalent devices and associated alarms in good order?
Chapter 4 The Company should have procedures for the operation, testing and maintenance of the crankcase oil mist detectors, engine
Chapter 5 bearing temperature monitors or equivalent devices which described:
• Alarm set points.
Chapter 6 • Actions to be taken in the event of an alarm.
• Testing procedures and frequency.
Chapter 7
Inspector Actions
Chapter 8
• Sight, and where necessary, review the company procedures for the operation and maintenance of the crankcase oil
Chapter 9
mist detectors, engine bearing temperature monitors or equivalent devices.
Chapter 10 • Review the records for the testing and servicing of the crankcase oil mist detectors, engine bearing temperature
monitors or equivalent devices.
Chapter 11 • Verify that the alarm for oil mist concentration in air is set at a maximum level corresponding to not more than 5% of
the LEL or approximately 2.5mg/l.
Chapter 12 • If safe to do so, request that the accompanying officer tests the alarm for the oil mist detector or equivalent device in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
328
5/27/2022
Chapter 1
10.7.4. Where hydraulic power packs were located within the main engine compartment, were
Chapter 2 fire protection measures provided, and if so, where they in satisfactory condition?
Chapter 4 In vessels fitted with deep‐well pumps driven by hydraulic power packs, pressure in the transmission pipes can be very high
Chapter 5 with the attendant risk of a flammable oil mist developing in the event of a leak.
Chapter 6 Where the power packs are located within the main machinery space, but not in a specially dedicated space, it is
advisable that an oil mist detector be fitted. The oil mist detector should be regularly tested in accordance with
Chapter 7 manufacturers’ recommendations.
Chapter 8
Where the power packs are fitted in the main machinery space, and in a specially dedicated space, this is intended to
Chapter 9 prevent hydraulic oil mist or vapours from reaching an ignition source in an adjacent compartment, and therefore:
• The space should have a separate ventilation system.
Chapter 10 • Doors should be self‐closing and kept closed when the power packs are in operation.
• Any wire runs, kick‐pipes, or other passes through a bulkhead to the space should be sealed with a fire‐ retardant
Chapter 11
putty or similar material.
Chapter 12 • However, doors, hatches, wire runs etc. do not need to be watertight.
Chapter 1
10.7.4. Where hydraulic power packs were located within the main engine compartment, were
Chapter 2 fire protection measures provided, and if so, where they in satisfactory condition?
Chapter 3
Expected Evidence
Chapter 4
Chapter 5 • If fitted, records of regular testing of the oil mist detector.
• If fitted, records of regular testing of the level alarm or other means of leak detection.
Chapter 6
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
• The accompanying officer was not familiar with the fire protection measures
associated with the hydraulic power packs.
Chapter 10
• A door to the specially dedicated space was left/tied open while the hydraulic power
Chapter 11 packs were in operation.
Chapter 12
329
5/27/2022
Chapter 11
General Appearance and Condition –Photograph Comparison
11. General Appearance and Condition –Photograph Comparison
11.1.1. to 11.1.36. All Vessels
Chapter 1
11.1.1. Was photograph no.1, bow area from dead ahead, representative of the condition as
Chapter 2 seen onboard at the time of inspection and, if so, was it free of any areas for concern?
THE GUIDANCE BELOW APPLIES TO ALL CHAPTER 11 PHOTOGRAPH COMPARISON QUESTIONS
Chapter 4
Chapter 5 • The Company should have an inspection program which provides shore management with an accurate
understanding of a managed vessel’s cosmetic and physical condition at least twice a year.
Chapter 6 • The Company should have uploaded a standard set of photos, as specified by the SIRE 2.0 for the ship type, at the
time of requesting an inspection.
Chapter 7
• Photos will remain in the OCIMF SIRE 2.0 database for 12 months or until they are superseded by a more recent
Chapter 8 photograph.
• Photos must be refreshed at approximately 6 months intervals, but Companies may leave older photos on the
Chapter 9 database for continued use in further inspections.
Chapter 10
• By uploading photos to the OCIMF SIRE 2.0 database, the Company is warranting that the images were
representative of the true condition of the ship at the date the photos were taken.
Chapter 11 • By leaving a photograph older than 6 months on the SIRE 2.0 database for review during an inspection, the Company
is warranting that the photo remained representative of the true condition of ship at the time of requesting an
Chapter 12 inspection.
330
5/27/2022
11.1.1. to 11.1.36. All Vessels
Chapter 1
11.1.1. Was photograph no.1, bow area from dead ahead, representative of the condition as
Chapter 2 seen onboard at the time of the inspection and, if so, was it free of any areas for concern?
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
Chapter 6 • During the inspection, review the photograph provided by the Company for the location
Chapter 7
specified and verify that it represented the condition as seen.
• In case of more general views of the ship, the inspector should not restrict the review of the
Chapter 8 ship's condition to exactly what is shown in the photograph but consider the photo to represent
Chapter 9 the average condition for all similar areas.
• Photographs that selectively show recently upgraded areas are not to be considered as
Chapter 10
representative.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
11.1.1. to 11.1.36. All Vessels
Chapter 1
11.1.2. Photo no.2: hull forward end starboard side
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
11.1.3. Photo no.3: hull forward end port side
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
11.1.4. Photo no.4: hull aft end starboard side
Chapter 6
Chapter 7 11.1.5. Photo no.5: hull aft end port side

Chapter 8
Chapter 9 11.1.6. Photo no.6: transom from right astern

Chapter 10
Chapter 11 11.1.7. Photo no.7: forecastle port side looking towards fairleads
Chapter 12
331
5/27/2022
11.1.1. to 11.1.36. All Vessels
Chapter 1
11.1.8. Photo no.8: forecastle starboard side looking towards fairleads
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
11.1.9. Photo no.9: port or starboard windlass
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6 11.1.10. Photo no.10: forward main deck showing condition of deck (and external framing)
Chapter 7
Chapter 8 11.1.11. Photo no.11: Forward main deck showing condition of piperack
Chapter 9
Chapter 10
11.1.12. Photo no.12: one mooring winch including the brake setting arrangement
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
11.1.1. to 11.1.36. All Vessels
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
11.1.13. Photo no.13: one hose crane with an overall view
Chapter 3
11.1.14. Photo no.14: one hose crane hoisting winch, stowed wire and limit switches
Chapter 4
Chapter 5 11.1.15. Photo no.15: starboard manifold looking from aft to forward
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
11.1.16. Photo no.16: starboard manifold looking forward to aft
Chapter 8
11.1.17. Photo no.17: aft main deck showing condition of deck (and external framing)
Chapter 9
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
332
5/27/2022
11.1.1. to 11.1.36. All Vessels
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 11.1.18. Photo no.18: aft main deck showing condition of Piperack
Chapter 3
Chapter 4 11.1.19. Photo no.19: poop deck looking from midships to starboard including fairleads
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
11.1.20. Photo no.20: aft emergency towing equipment storage arrangement
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
Chapter 9 11.1.21. Photo no.21: aft emergency towing equipment deployment system
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
11.1.22. Photo no.22: lifeboat and davit
Chapter 12
11.1.1. to 11.1.36. All Vessels
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
11.1.23. Photo no.23: the emergency generator or accumulator batteries
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
11.1.24. Photo no.24: engine room general view showing top of main engine
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
11.1.25. Photo no.25: one generator engine
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
11.1.26. Photo no.26: the oil filtering equipment
Chapter 9
Chapter 10
11.1.27. Photo no.27: the incinerator
Chapter 11
Chapter 12 11.1.28. Photo no.28: one boiler from the front
333
5/27/2022
11.1.1. to 11.1.36. All Vessels
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
11.1.29. Photo no.29: one boiler from the top showing control equipment
Chapter 3
Chapter 4 11.1.30. Photo no.30: purifier room general view

Chapter 5
Chapter 6
11.1.31. Photo no.31: main engine side showing local control station
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
11.1.32. Photo no.32: steering gear room general view showing access
Chapter 9
Chapter 10
11.1.33. Photo no.33: main steering gear
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
11.1.40. to 11.1.42. Addition for Crude / Product / Chemical / Shuttle / OBO
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
11.1.40. Photo no.40: IG system pressure/vacuum-breaking (P/V) device
Chapter 3
Chapter 4 11.1.41. Photo no.41: IGS first non-return device (deck seal or double block and bleed
arrangement)
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
11.1.42. Photo no.42: one main cargo pump and, if in pump room, including bilges
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
334
5/27/2022
Chapter 12
Ice Operations
12. Ice Operations
12.1.:Ice operations training
Chapter 1
12.1.1. Where the vessel traded in polar waters, had the Master, Chief Mate and officers in
Chapter 2 charge of a navigational watch undertaken the additional training required by the Polar Code?
Chapter 4 The Company should have procedures to identify the necessary mandatory and non‐mandatory
training required to be completed by each individual onboard before being assigned to a vessel or
Chapter 5
prior to promotion. The training for navigation officers assigned to a vessel issued with a Polar Code
Chapter 6 certificate and operating within waters governed by the Polar Code will include;
Chapter 7 • Basic training for officers in charge of a navigational watch.
• Advanced training for Master and Chief Mate.
Chapter 8
Where the Company uses a person(s) other than the Master or Chief Mate to fulfil the role of Ice
Chapter 9 Navigator, then the Master and Chief Mate will only be required to have obtained the basic
Chapter 10 training. Such arrangements should be described in the procedures.
Chapter 11
This question will only be generated if the vessel has been issued with a Certificate for Ships
Chapter 12 Operating in Polar Waters as declared through the PIQ.
335
5/27/2022
12. Ice Operations
12.1.:Ice operations training
Chapter 1
12.1.1. Where the vessel traded in polar waters, had the Master, Chief Mate and officers in
Chapter 2 charge of a navigational watch undertaken the additional training required by the Polar Code?
Chapter 3
Inspector Actions
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
• Review the vessel’s Polar Water Operational Manual (IMO Structure) section 2.1.4, Human
Resources Management, and identify the bridge manning requirements for ice operations,
Chapter 6
noting particularly where the Master or C/O may be substituted as Ice Navigator by a person
Chapter 7 other than the Master or C/O.
Chapter 8
• Review the certificates for training for Ships Operating in Polar Waters for the Master, C/O and
officers in charge of the nav. watch and verify that each had the appropriate training certificate.
Chapter 9 • Where the Master and/or C/O had been substituted by a person(s) other than the Master
Chapter 10 and/or C/O for the role of ice navigator review a copy of the Certificate of Competency and
Chapter 11
certificate of advanced training for ships operating in polar waters for the persons engaged as
Ice Navigator.
Chapter 12
12. Ice Operations
12.2.:Sub‐zero LSA & FFA procedures
Chapter 1
12.2.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures to ensure the
Chapter 2 operability of the life-saving and fire-fighting systems and equipment in sub-zero temperatures,
Chapter 3 and had these procedures been complied with?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have procedures to ensure that LSA and FFE remain operable in sub‐zero temperatures. The procedures
Chapter 5 should list all safety systems susceptible to damage or loss of functionality by exposure to low temperatures, and the measures
to be adopted to avoid malfunction.
Chapter 6 Winterisation checklists should be used to facilitate preparations prior to entering an area of sub‐zero temperatures. Periodic
inspections of all safety‐related systems should be undertaken during the exposure to sub‐zero temperatures to ensure the
Chapter 7 effectiveness of the precautions being taken, which may include:
• Draining fire and foam lines from the lowest point and then closing the drain valve in order to keep the system ready for
Chapter 8
operation. The drained condition of the line should be regularly checked by operating the drain valve.
Chapter 9 • Removal of snow and ice accretions from equipment and escape and access routes.
• Protection of lifeboat cooling/water spray systems and drinking water from freezing.
Chapter 10 • Ensuring lifeboat engines are supplied with suitable fuel.
• Checking the capacity of lifeboat batteries at low temperatures.
Chapter 11 • The use of space heaters as necessary.
Chapter 12
• Relocating fire‐extinguishers to avoid freezing.
• Outlining measures to be taken to ensure the operability of eye wash stations and de‐contamination showers.
• Maintaining air intakes and fire flaps operable.
336
5/27/2022
12. Ice Operations
12.2.:Sub‐zero LSA & FFA procedures
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 operability of the life-saving and fire-fighting systems and equipment in sub-zero temperatures,
Chapter 3 and had these procedures been complied with?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
These procedures may form part of a Polar Water Operational Manual (PWOM).
Chapter 5 This question will only be assigned where the Company had declared through the PIQ that the vessel met one or more of
the following criteria:
Chapter 6 • Was assigned an ice class notation.
• Was assigned a winterisation class notation.
Chapter 7
• Had been issued with a Polar Ship Certificate.
Chapter 8 • The vessel traded in areas where sub‐zero temperatures may be routinely expected.
• Review the company procedures to ensure that life‐saving and fire‐fighting systems and equipment remain operable in
Chapter 10
sub‐zero temperatures.
Chapter 11 • Review winterisation checklists and records of periodic inspections of safety‐related systems during exposure to sub‐
zero temperatures.
Chapter 12 • Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with the company procedures.
• If applicable, during the inspection, confirm the precautions being taken to ensure that life‐saving and fire‐fighting
systems and equipment remain operable in sub‐zero temperatures.
12. Ice Operations
12.3.:Sub‐zero machinery operation procedures
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 operability of the engine room machinery and systems in sub-zero temperatures, and had these
Chapter 3 procedures been complied with?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have procedures to ensure that E/R machinery and systems remain operable in sub‐zero temperatures. The procedures
should list all E/R machinery and systems susceptible to damage or loss of functionality by exposure to low temperatures and the measures
Chapter 5
to be adopted to avoid malfunction.
Chapter 6 Winterisation checklists should be used to facilitate preparations prior to entering an area of sub‐zero temperatures. Precautions to be taken
may include:
Chapter 7 • Prior to entering an area of low temperatures, checking, where applicable:
o Fore and aft draughts are within the limits required by the ice class notation.
Chapter 8 o Sea‐chest strainers.
o Steam heating and/or other arrangements to keep sea‐chests clear of ice.
Chapter 9 o Heating systems in fuel, bilge and lubricating oil tanks.
o Heating systems for the emergency generator.
Chapter 10 o Anti‐freeze in the emergency generator cooling system.
o Water levels in recirculating cooling systems.
Chapter 11 o Water content of stern tube oil.
o Suitability of oils and greases.
Chapter 12 o Arrangements to ensure control air is dry.
o Arrangements to prevent the icing up of air pipes to settling and service tanks required for the operation of the main propulsion
plant and essential auxiliaries.
337
5/27/2022
12. Ice Operations
Chapter 1 12.3.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures to ensure the
procedures been complied with?
Chapter 3
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4 • While operating in an area of low temperatures:
o Operating with the E/R manned when appropriate.
Chapter 5 o Applying steam heating on sea‐chests continuously.
o Using space heaters in engine, steering gear, emergency battery rooms and emergency fire pump space.
Chapter 6
o Keeping emergency generator room external vent flaps and supply fan damper closed.
Chapter 7 o Changing over from heavy fuel oil to diesel oil prior to closing down the main engine.
o Keeping hydraulic motors, including steering motors, running continuously.
Chapter 8 o Operating pneumatic and manual vent flaps to keep them free.
o Adjusting E/R ventilation to maintain suitable temperatures and avoid local cooling of fuel systems.
Chapter 9 o Monitoring freshwater tanks and piping for freezing.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11 This question will only be assigned where the Company had declared in the PIQ that the vessel met one or more of following :
• Was assigned an ice class notation.
Chapter 12 • Was assigned a winterisation class notation.
• The vessel traded in areas where sub‐zero temperatures may be routinely expected.
12. Ice Operations
Chapter 1
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5
• Review the company procedures to ensure that E/R machinery and systems remain operable in
Chapter 6
sub‐zero temperatures.
Chapter 7 • Review completed winterisation checklists.
Chapter 8 • Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with the company procedures.
• If applicable, during the physical inspection of the vessel confirm the precautions being taken to
Chapter 9
ensure that E/R machinery and systems remain operable in sub‐zero temperatures.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
338
5/27/2022
12. Ice Operations
12.4.:Sub‐zero cargo and ballast operation procedures
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 operability of the cargo and ballast systems in sub-zero temperatures, and had these
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have procedures to ensure that cargo and ballast systems remain operable in sub‐zero temperatures. The
Chapter 5 procedures should list all cargo & ballast systems susceptible to damage or loss of functionality by exposure to low
temperatures, and the measures to be adopted to avoid malfunction. Winterisation checklists should be used to facilitate
Chapter 6 preparations.
Chapter 7 Precautions to be taken may include, where applicable:
• Testing the integrity of deck lines prior to use to ensure they are tight.
Chapter 8
• Checking ballast water salinity and exchanging if necessary.
Chapter 9 • Where fitted, operating ballast tank heating or bubbling systems in good time.
• Protecting equipment on deck with canvas covers, including:
Chapter 10 o Hydraulic cargo and COW valves.
o COW machines.
Chapter 11 o P/V valves.
o Mast riser vent valve.
Chapter 12
o IG main and inlet valves.
o Deepwell pump motors and shafts.
o Ballast tank vents.
12. Ice Operations
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
procedures been complied with?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
• Checking that:
Chapter 5 o Valves on deck are well greased and their gearboxes free of water.
o Deck seal heating arrangements are operational.
Chapter 6
o Anti‐freeze levels in P/V breaker and stripping system vacuum pumps are correct.
Chapter 7 o Cargo compressors that require antifreeze and/or a heating system are identified and prepared for
cold weather.
Chapter 8
• Draining equipment, including:
Chapter 9 o Cargo, COW, and tank cleaning lines and valves, after testing or use.
o Tank cleaning heater.
Chapter 10
o Heating coils.
Chapter 11 o Manifold drip‐trays.
o Deck air‐line.
Chapter 12 o Ballast system, including ballast monitor.
o Oil discharge monitoring system.
o Pumproom steam lines, if not to be used.
339
5/27/2022
12. Ice Operations
Chapter 1
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
• Activating hydraulic cargo, COW and ballast valves frequently while in sub‐freezing temperatures to avoid
Chapter 5 freezing/blockage.
• Checking P/V breaker, P/V valves and flame screens immediately before commencing and during cargo operations.
Chapter 6 • Starting cargo pump and valve hydraulic systems in good time before they are needed.
Chapter 7 • Ensuring deck seal heating is functioning and checked regularly during cargo operations.
• Checking canvas covers are removed from ballast tank vents before ballasting/deballasting.
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
Chapter 10 This question will only be assigned where the Company had declared in the PIQ that the vessel met one or more of the
following :
Chapter 11 • Was assigned an ice class notation
Chapter 12
• Was assigned a winterisation class notation
• Had been issued with a Polar Ship Certificate
• The vessel traded in areas where sub‐zero temperatures may be routinely expected.
12. Ice Operations
Chapter 1
Chapter 5
• Review the company procedures to ensure that cargo and ballast systems remain operable in
Chapter 6 sub‐zero temperatures.
Chapter 7 • Review completed winterisation checklists and records of equipment tests and checks prior to,
during and on completion of cargo operations.
Chapter 8
• Interview the accompanying officer to verify familiarity with the company procedures.
Chapter 9 • If applicable, during the physical inspection of the vessel confirm the precautions being taken to
Chapter 10
ensure that cargo and ballast systems remain operable in sub‐zero temperatures.
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
340
5/27/2022
12. Ice Operations
12.5.:Sub‐zero deck machinery operation procedures
Chapter 1
Chapter 2 operability of the deck machinery, including mooring systems, in sub-zero temperatures, and
Chapter 3 had these procedures been complied with?
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
The Company should have procedures to ensure that deck machinery, including mooring systems, remains operable in
Chapter 5 sub‐zero temperatures. The procedures should list all deck machinery susceptible to damage or loss of functionality by
exposure to low temperatures, and the measures to be adopted to avoid malfunction.
Chapter 6
Chapter 7 Winterisation checklists should be used to facilitate preparations prior to entering an area of sub‐zero temperatures.

Periodic inspections of all deck machinery should be undertaken during the exposure to sub‐zero temperatures to
Chapter 8 ensure the effectiveness of the precautions being taken, which may include:
• Ensuring hydraulic systems contain a suitable grade of hydraulic oil.
Chapter 9
• Circulating hydraulic system oil continuously when the external temperature was below 0°C to ensure that the fluid
Chapter 10 systems are maintained at working temperatures.
• When leaving machinery (e.g., winches) running, paying attention to regular lubrication of the equipment.
Chapter 11 • Operating and testing cargo handling cranes prior to the vessel entering sub‐zero temperatures.
Chapter 12
• Checking heating arrangements in cranes are operational.
• Adequately covering the pneumatic or electrical motors used for raising or lowering accommodation ladders to
prevent ice accretion.
12. Ice Operations
Chapter 1
Inspection Guidance
Chapter 4
• Closing the main air valve to deck and draining the airline down.
Chapter 5 • Protecting control boxes and motion levers for deck machinery with canvas covers.
• Protecting mooring wires and synthetic ropes with canvas covers to stop ice accretion until they are required for use.
Chapter 6 • Prior to arrival in port, proving winches, windlasses and anchors to be operational.
• Ensuring the continued operability of pneumatic oil spill pumps, where provided.
Chapter 7
Chapter 8 These procedures may form part of a Polar Water Operational Manual (PWOM).
Chapter 9 This question will only be assigned where the Company had declared in the PIQ that the vessel met one or more of the
following criteria:
Chapter 10
• Was assigned an ice class notation
Chapter 11 • Was assigned a winterisation class notation
• Had been issued with a Polar Ship Certificate
341
5/27/2022
12. Ice Operations
Chapter 1
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Inspector Actions
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
• Review the company procedures to ensure that deck machinery, including mooring systems,
remains operable in sub‐zero temperatures.
Chapter 8
• Review winterisation checklists and records of periodic inspections of all deck machinery during
Chapter 9 exposure to sub‐zero temperatures.
Chapter 10
• Interview the accompanying officer to verify their familiarity with the company procedures.
• If applicable, during the inspection of the vessel confirm the precautions being taken to ensure
Chapter 11 that deck machinery, including mooring systems remains operable in sub‐zero temperatures.
Chapter 12
12. Ice Operations
12.6.:Ice navigation procedures
Chapter 1
12.6.1. Were the Master and officers familiar with the company procedures for navigating in
Chapter 2 areas affected by ice, and had they received suitable training?
The Company should have procedures for navigating in areas affected by ice, including checklists where appropriate. The
Chapter 4 procedures should include as appropriate, guidance on:
Chapter 5 • Passage planning in areas affected by ice.
• Watchkeeping requirements in areas affected by ice.
Chapter 6 • Pilotage in ice.
• Actions to take when ice is detected.
Chapter 7
• Freezing spray.
Chapter 8 • Navigation in pack ice.
• Position fixing in ice conditions.
Chapter 9 • Charts and positions in remote locations.
• Radar use in ice conditions.
Chapter 10 • Limitations of compasses in high latitudes.
Chapter 11 • Shiphandling in ice.
• Anchoring in ice.
Chapter 12 • Avoiding hull and propeller/propulsion system damage in ice.
• Berthing/unberthing in ports with ice.
• Working with icebreakers.
342
5/27/2022
12. Ice Operations
Chapter 1
Chapter 4 • The procedures may reference or incorporate industry publications such as The Ice Navigation and
Seamanship Handbook or equivalent best practice guidance. The procedures may form part of the
Chapter 5 Polar Waters Operational Manual, where carried.
Chapter 6 • Masters, officers in charge of a navigational watch and officers in charge of an engineering watch
should have relevant training with regard to operating ships in ice and severe sub‐zero conditions.
Chapter 7
• This may take the form of in‐service training, simulator training and/or CBT.
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
This question will only be assigned where the Company had declared in the PIQ that the vessel met one
or more of the following criteria:
Chapter 10 • Was assigned an ice class notation.
Chapter 11 • Was assigned a winterisation class notation.
12. Ice Operations
Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Inspector Actions
Chapter 5 • Review the company procedures for navigating in areas affected by ice.
Chapter 6 • Review completed checklists for the last voyage affected by ice.
• Review the passage plan for the last voyage affected by ice.
Chapter 7
• Review the Bridge Log Book for the last period navigating in an area affected by ice.
Chapter 8 • Review records of crew training with regard to operating ships in ice.
Chapter 9 • Interview the accompanying officer to verify their familiarity with the company procedures.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
343
5/27/2022
SECTION 3
Section 1
Section 2
Section 3
344

Ocimf - Sire 2.0 Webinar: Information About SIRE 2.0 SIRE 2.0 Question Library

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ocimf - Sire 2.0 Webinar: Information About SIRE 2.0 SIRE 2.0 Question Library

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

5/27/2022

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF – SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Information about SIRE 2.0

SIRE 2.0 Question Library

Conclusion and Discussion

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Aligning the inspection program to TMSA

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Accuracy Capability Reliability Adaptability

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

The Report Element requires that the inspector:

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

 The Inspection Data‐set consists of:

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Section 3 ** Where a Submitting Company has provided the inspector with instructions not to leave a copy of Observation

SIRE 2.0 / Compiled Vessel Inspection Questionnaire (CVIQ)

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

SIRE 2.0 / Compiled Vessel Inspection Questionnaire (CVIQ)

SIRE 2.0 / Compiled Vessel Inspection Questionnaire (CVIQ)

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Bow-Tie Diagram (example)

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

• Inspection regime will assess human factors issues during an

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

QUESTIONS SIRE VIQ7 SIRE 2.0

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF – SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Chapter 5 1.1.2. Vessel IMO number

Chapter 9 • Inspection Record > Inspection Completed Date

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Chapter 5 1.1.6. Flag

Chapter 9 • HVPQ (Summer Deadweight)

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Chapter 9 • Inspection Record > Inspection Completed Date/Time

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Chapter 5 1.1.14. Date the HVPQ was last updated

Chapter 9 • Inspection Record > Operation

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Chapter 5 1.1.18. Hull Type

Chapter 9 • SIRE 2.0 Inspection Booking

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Chapter 2 1.1.21. Date of the last PSC inspection

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF – SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Chapter 5 Inspection Guidance

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Chapter 7 o The circumstances in which a remote inspection may be a substitute of physical

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Alpha Marine Consulting P.C. – OCIMF ‐ SIRE 2.0 Training Seminar

Chapter 7  Standard formats and/or checklists for the performance of audits.